i 



1 



SHI 






Wm 



Mm 




«- v 







^ 







Steiger's Latin Series. 



AHN'S 

/I 

LATIN GRAMMAR. 

WITH 

REFERENCES to the EXERCISES 

IN THE 

FIRST, SECOND and THIRD LATIN BOOKS. 

BY 

Dr. P. HENN. 



NEW YORK: 

E. STEIGER&CO. 

1881. 



. 



21 



t, 






REQUEST. 



The undersigned, in their efforts to secure the greatest 
possible correctness in their educational publications, will feel 
obliged for the suggestion of improvements. 

M Steiger & Co. 9 Publishers. 



Copyright, 1881, by E. Steiger & Co. 



Press of 
M. Steiger & Co., N. Y. 



PREFACE. 



AHN'S Latin Grammar forms part of a series which has been 
undertaken with the design to facilitate the study of Latin for begin- 
ners. The author desires to state at the outset that this volume is 
in no respect a condensation of the First, Second, and Third Latin 
Books. It is constructed on a plan of its own, and with a twofold 
object in view: first, to provide a complete grammatical course for 
those teachers who prefer the synthetic method to the exclusion of 
the analytic, and secondly, to suppiy for reference in study a really 
compendious grammar, which may answer the needs of young scho- 
lars, while it is sufficiently comprehensive and full for more advanced 
students — in a word, the first and also the last grammar in the 
student's hands. 

In pursuance of this plan, the Grammar retains from the First, 
Second, and Third Latin Books the general statement of gram^ 
matical facts in the exact form and language of those books, but, of 
course, in the traditional presentation of synthetic grammar. In the 
treatment of Etymology the following have been the leading fea- 
tures. While scientific accuracy has been aimed at, the convenience 
of teacher or learner has in no case been sacrificed to theoretical 
completeness. Of the stem theory especially the author has meant 
to place before the learner just so much as may be used to explain 
difficulties — not to multiply them. The pupil's attention should be 
directed first to what most needs to be learned, viz.: the etymolo- 
gical forms themselves. With this in view, the Grammar embraces 
all the important features of the series which are of practical 
assistance to the learner, particularly during the first year. The 
sharp distinction, for instance, of inflectional endings by bold-faced 
type is a matter of no small importance if we wish to make the pupil 
from the very outset so familiar with all the inflections that he will 
recognize them with promptness and certainty wherever they occur. 
Ill 



— rv — 

Of course, a real understanding he will obtain only by learning how 
those inflections arose, and here again the brief, clear and practical 
rules on the subject will be found to simplify a very complex matter, 
and to remove perhaps the greatest difficulty in the study of Latin 
grammar. As complementary to the etymological part the careful 
classification and definition of derivative endings cannot fail to be 
valuable for constant reference, if not for class study. 

In the treatment of Syntax the points which have received par- 
ticular attention are: to set forth the facts of classical Latin (repre- 
sented by Caesar and Cicero) just as they are in themselves; to 
describe as fairly and briefly as possible the actual uses of syntac- 
tical forms, to illustrate them by carefully selected examples, and, 
withal, to bear constantly in mind that this Course is meant to lead 
at the earliest possible moment to the reading of the classical 
authors. It will be for professional teachers to say whether the 
endeavor to reach this practical end has been successful. 

To furnish to teachers who may so desire, the opportunity of 
drilling their pupils in the more important rules and principles while 
they are learning them, references to the corresponding exercises 
in the First, Second, and Third Latin Books are inserted through- 
out this Grammar. The detailed Index of Subjects will be found 
to contain every topic in the text. 

To summarize: the design of this Latin Series is to enable pupils 
to gain a thorough knowledge of Latin — not without honest exer- 
tions, yet with the greatest possible ease, 



TABLE of CONTENTS. 



General Division of the Subject Page I 

PART I. —PHONOLOGY. 

Alphabet; Classification 1 

Pronunciation 3 

Roman Method 3 

Continental Method . . 4 

English Method 5 

Syllables 6 

Quantity 6 

Accent T 7 

PART II. — ETYMOLOGY. 

The Parts of Speech 7 

Substantives 8-48 

Gender . . . . 8 

Number and Case . . . . . 10 

Declensions 10 

General Rules 11 

First Declension 12 

Second Declension 13 

Adjectives 16 

Third Declension — 20 

Formation of the Genitive 20 

Adjectives . . . . 33 

Remarks on Certain Cases /.......... 35 

Greek Nouns — 38 

Gender in Third Declension , . 38 

Fourth Declension . . . . 42 

Fifth Declension 43 

Irregular Nouns 44 

Proper Names 47 

Adjectives 48-53 

Declension 48 

Comparison 50 

Numerals 54-59 

Numeral Adjectives 54 

Numeral Adverbs . 58 



— VI — 

Pronouns p age 59-65 

Personal Pronouns 59 

Pronouns of the Third Person 61 

Demonstrative 61 

Determinative 62 

Relative 63 

Interrogative 64 

Indefinite 64 

Pronominal Adjectives 65 

Verbs 66-145 

Voices 66 

Tenses 67 

Moods 67 

Verbal Nouns and Adjectives 68 

Numbers and Persons 69 

The Four Conjugations 69 

Simple Forms 70 

Compound Forms 72 

Periphrastic Conjugation 75 

First Conjugation (Paradigm) 77 

Second Conjugation (Paradigm) 80 

Third Conjugation (Paradigm) 84 

Fourth Conjugation (Paradigm) 88 

Deponent Verbs (Paradigms) 92 

Appendix to Third Conjugation (Verbs in id) 100 

Special Forms in Conjugation 103 

Formation of the Principal Parts 105 

in the First Conjugation 106 

in the Second Conjugation 108 

in the TJiird Conjugation 112 

Stems in u, v 113 

Verbs into 114 

Stems in d, t 115 

Stems inh,j> 118 

Stems in c, g", q, h, ct 119 

Stems in 1, m, n, r 121 

Stems ins, x 124 

Stems in sc (Iuceptives) 124 

in the Fourth Conjugation 129 

Irregular Verbs 130 

Defective Verbs 141 

Impersonal Verbs 144 



— VTI — 

Adverbs Page 145-151 

Primitive and Derivative 145 

Comparison 150 

Prepositions 151 

Conjunctions 152-154 

Co-ordinating 152 

Subordinating 153 

Interjections 155 

Word-formation 155 -168 

Derivation of Verbs 155 

of Substantives -. 158 

of Adjectives 161 

Composition of Verbs 164 

of Substantives 168 

of Adjectives 168 

PART III. — SYNTAX. 

The Sentence 169 

Subject and Predicate 169 

Attribute and Apposition 172 

Agreement of Pronouns 173 

The Order of Words 175 

Construction of Cases 176-208 

Genitive with Substantives 176 

with Adjectives 178 

with Verbs 179 

Accusative, Direct Object 182 

two Accusatives 183 

with Impersonal Verbs 184 

Idiomatic Uses 185 

Dative with Verbs 185 

with Adjectives , 189 

Ethical Dative 190 

Ablative of Cause 190 

of Means and Instrument 191 

of Limitation „ . 191 

of Comparison 191 

of Manner 192 

of Quality 193 

of Price 193 

of Separation, Plenty and Want 194 

in Special Constructions 196 



— Yin -_ 

Time, Space, Place ••.... Page 197-207 

Use of Prepositions 197 

Time , 204 

Space 206 

Place 207 

Special Uses of Substantives 209 

of Adjectives , . . 210 

of Pronouns 211 

Syntax of the Verb 214-246 

Use of Tenses. 214 

Sequence of Tenses 217 

Use of the Indicative 219 

Independent Uses of the Subjunctive 220 

Dependent Uses of the Subjunctive 221 

Consecutive and Final Conjunctions 221 

Concessive and Comparative Conjunctions. . 225 

Temporal Conjunctions 226 

Causal Conjunctions 227 

Conditional Conjunctions 228 

Relative Clauses with Subjunctive 230 

Direct Questions 231 

Indirect Questions 233 

The Imperative 234 

The Infinitive 235 

Accusative with the Infinitive . . . 236 

Tenses of the Infinitive 238 

Nominative with the Infinitive 239 

Direct Discourse. 239 

Indirect Discourse 239 

Participles 241 

Ablative Absolute . . . e 242 

Gerund „ 243 

Gerundive 243 

Supine and its Equivalents , 245 

Co-ordinating Conjunctions 246-259 

Copulative 246 

Disjunctive 247 

Adversative , - 248 

Causal 249 

Illative 249 

Corresponsive ..-.., 249 



— IX — 

POETICAL FORMS. 

Prosody , Page 250-256 

Quantity. General Rules 250 

Middle Syllables 251 

Final Syllables 253 

Monosyllables 254 

Compounds 255 

Figures of Prosody 255 

Essentials of Versification ' 257-268 

Feet. Rhythm 257 

Dactylic Hexameter . 260 

Elegiac Pentameter 261 

Iambic Trimeter 261 

Compound Verses 261 

Metres of Horace 263 

Index of the Metres of Horace 267 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

The Roman Calendar 269 

Roman Money, Weights, and Measures 272 

Abbreviations 273 

Principal Latin Authors 274 

Index of Verbs 277 

Index of Subjects 288 



LATIN GEAMMAR. 



General Division of the Subject. 

1. Latin Grammar is a description of the usages of 
the Latin language according to the different ways 
in which words (vocabula) are put together to form 
speech (oratio). It is divided into three parts: 

I. Phonology which deals with the elementary sounds in the 
Latin language. 

H. Etymology which treats of the forms of single words — 
Inflection — and of derivation and composition — Word-formation. 

HI. Syntax which treats of the arrangement and combination 
of words in sentences. 



Part Fiest 

phonology. 

2. Nearly all words are composed of articulate 
sounds. These are represented to the eye by the 
letters of the Alphabet which is the same as the Eng- 
lish, except that it has no w. 

The Latin Alphabet consists, strictly, of but twenty-three 
letters, i and j being anciently but one character, as likewise u 
and v. During the classical age, y and z were recognized as 
Greek letters, and x was the twenty-first and last letter of the 
Latin alphabet (see 4. below). 



■ — 2 — 

3. The Alphabetical Names still most generally used in English 
schools, are the English. Yet, it is more probable that in the ancient 
spelling of Latin the letters were named in the following manner: 

a A ah m M em 

b B bay n N en 



c 


C 


kay 


o 








d 


D 


day 


P 


p 


pay 


e 


E 


ay 


q 


Q 


koo 


f 


F 


eff 


r 


R 


er 


S 


G 


gay 


s 


S 


ess 


h 


H 


hah 


t 


T 


tay 


i 


I 


ee (vowel) 


u 


U 


oo (vowel) 


J 


J 


ee (consonant) 


V 


V 


oo (consonant) 


k 


K 


kah 


X 


X 


ix 


1 


li 


el 


y 


Y 


ipseelon 



z Z tsaytah 

The Latin uses capital initial letters at the beginning of sen- 
tences; also for all proper names, and for substantives and adjectives 
derived from proper names. 

4. The Vowels are: a, e, i, o, u, y. All other letters, except the 
aspirate h, are consonants. Originally, i and u were used both as 
vowels and as consonants, and supplied the place of j and v. y and 
z occur in Greek words only. 

5. The Diphthongs are: ae, oe, au, eu. 

6. Consonants are classified according to the principal organs 
by which they are produced, as: 

Labials (lip-sounds) : b, p, f, v, m; 
Dentals (tooth- sounds) : d, t, n, s; 
Linguals (tongue-sounds): 1, r; 
Gutturals (throat-sounds): c, g*, k, q; 

and according to the mode of utterance, as: 

Liquids which can be uttered without a vowel: 
1, m, n, r, s; 

Mutes which cannot be perfectly sounded without a vowel: 
b, c, d, f, g, k, p, q, t. 

7. Double Consonants are: 

z = dz in adze; x = cs (gs). 



— 3 — 

Pronunciation. 

8. The Pronunciation of Latin is different in differ- 
ent countries. In the United States, general usage 
is now strongly in favor of either the Roman or the 
Continental Method, the difference between these two 
not being very considerable. Many persons, however, 
prefer to retain the English Method, which has been 
the prevailing system of pronunciation among English- 
speaking scholars for the last two or three centuries.* 

Roman Method. 

9. By the Roman, or Phonetic Method, every letter has 
always the same sound. 

Sounds of the Vowels. 

10. As a general rule, each simple vowel is either long or short. 
Vowels marked thus: a e l o u y are long; marked thus: a e i 
o u f are short. 

a = a in father a = a in idea 

e == e in prey e = e in met 

i — i in machine l = i in holiest 

o = o in bone o = o in obey 

u = oo in boot u = u in full 

f = l in machine f = £ in holiest 

Sounds of the Diphthongs. 
^^ # Diphthongs are pronounced by the rapid successive utter- 
ance of the elements forming them. 

ae = ay in aye au == on in Ziowse 

oe = o in world eu == 02/ in &o?/ (nearly) 

The sound of eu is much disputed; many scholars contend for eu 
as English ew y mfew. 

12. All diphthongs are long, as': foedus, a treaty. 

13. To denote that two successive vowels which might otherwise 
be taken for a diphthong, are to be pronounced separately, the 
Diaeresis (") is placed over the second vowel, as: poeta, a poet. 

* For class-instruction in Latin pronunciation and current reading 
Ahn-Henn's Latin Beading Charts will be found valuable. 



_ 4 — 

Sounds of the Consonants. 
14. The Consonants are sounded as in English, with the fol- 
lowing exceptions: 

c is hard and sounds in all situations like k, as: Cicero =4 
Kikero. 

ch in Latin words is a k; in Greek words a k with the subaddi- 
tion of h, commonly pronounced as d) in German. The latter sound 
can only be acquired through means of oral instruction. 

g is hard throughout, as in get, give. 

j has the sound of y in you. 

qu = kw (nearly), gu and su before another vowel when both 
vowels belong to the same syllable = gw, sw, as: lingua, lingwa; 
suet us, swetus. 

rh is pronounced like r simply. 

s and x are always hard, as in hiss, axe. 

t has the same sound as t in English, but is never aspirated; 
th is pronounced like t simply. 

v == w in we. 

Continental Method. 
15. In xhe pronunciation of the vowels, the Con- 
tinental Method is identical with the Roman. As to 
the pronunciation of the consonants, in which it 
more nearly coincides with the English Method, the 
following letters deserve special notice. 

t before i (short i) with another vowel, has the sharp sound of 
th in thin; when preceded by another t, s, or x, or when i is 
long (i), and in Greek words, t retains its original sound, as: 
mix' ti o, a mixture, 

c before e, i, y, ae, oe, eu, is pronounced like ts in nets; in 
every other position it is hard like the English k. ei before a vowel 
has nearly the same sound as ti in the same position, and they are 
sometimes interchangeable. 

ch = k with the subaddition of h, has a hard guttural sound 
like the German d). sch is pronounced by the successive utter- 
ance of s and ch. Neither of these sounds (ch and sch) has an 
equivalent in English, and they must be learned from the lips of a 
teacher. 



— 5 — 

English Method. 

16. As a general rule, those who prefer to retain 
the English Method, should read a Latin sentence 
just as if the words were English, carefully observing 
the directions which follow, especially the Rules of 
Accent {29-31.), and bearing in mind that there are 
no silent letters. 

Sounds of the Vowels and Diphthongs. 

17. Vowels have their long English sounds, as in fate, me, 
pine, no, tube, type, in the following situations : 

at the end of a word, as: dom' 1 ni, masters; cor' nu, a horn; 
le' 6, a lion; 

before another vowel or diphthong, as: De' us, God; vi' a, a 
way; ja' mi a, a door; 

when ending an accented syllable; as: pa' ter, a father; de' clit, 
he gave; vi'viis, living; so'lus, alone; ly' ra, a lyre. 

Exceptions: a unaccented has the sound of final a in America; 
as: men' sa, a table. In tibi, to thee, and sibi, to one's self final 
i has its short sound. 

IS. Vowels have their short English sounds, as in fat, met, 
pin, not, tub, symbol, when followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable, as: mag'nfis, great; fin' go, I fashion; cor' pus, a body; 
mens, the mind. 

Exceptions: post, after, is pronounced as the same word in 
English; the termination es like the English word ease, and the 
termination os like ose in morose, as: a' ves, birds; pu' e ros, boys. 

19. The Diphthongs ae and oe are pronounced as e would be 
in the same place; au like aw, and eu like ew, as: poe'na, 
punishment; au'ruin, gold; Euro 'pa, Europe; Cae'sar, Ccesar. 

Sounds of the Consonants. 

20. The Consonants are pronounced, in general, as in English. 
The following, however, require special notice: 

c and g are soft (like s and j) before e, i, y, ae, and oe, and 

hard in other situations, as: cen'tum, a hundred; cl'vis, a citizen; 
ca'do, 1 fall; ge'nu, theJcnee; gra'num, a grain. 



ch is hard like 7c, as: cho'rus, a choir. 

The consonants c, s, t, immediately preceded by the accent, and 
standing before i, followed by another vowel, are aspirated, c, s, 
and t taking the sound of sh, x that of ksh 7 as: so'cius (so'- 
she us), a companion; Hel ve'ti a (Hel ve' shi a), Switzerland. 
— c following an accented syllable has also the same sound before 
eu and yo, as: ca dii' ce us (ca du' she us), a herald's stajf. — 
t .preceded by another t, s, or x, has its hard sound, as: o' sti um ; 
a door; mix'ti 6, a mixture. 

Syllables. 

21. A Syllable is one or more sounds pronounced 
by a single impulse of the voice; it consists of a 
vowel, or a vowel and one or more consonants. 

22. A single consonant between two vowels belongs to the lat- 
ter, as: si'tis, thirst. 

23. Of several consonants coming together between two vowels, 
those which can be used to begin a Latin word, belong to the next 
syllable, as: men'sa, a table; tern' plum, a temple; ca'stra, a 
military camp. 

21. Compound words must be divided into the words which 
compose them, as: post' ea, afterward. But if the former part has 
dropped its termination, the compound word is to be divided like a 
simple word, as: ta met' si (contracted from ta/men et'si), although. 

25. The last syllable of the word is called the ultima; the next 
to the last the penult; the one before the penult, the antepenult. 

Quantity. 

The following are general Rules of Quantity: 

26. A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel 
or diphthong, as: sol the sun; aurum, gold; by position when a 
short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or by j, x, z; 
as: aptus, jit; collis, hill; saxum, rock. 

27. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mute with 
1 or r is common (anceps), that is, it may be long or short in verse, 
as in tenebrae, darkness; in prose it is invariably short. 

28. A vowel before another vowel is short, no account being 
taken of h, as: BeCis, God; traho, I draw. 



— 1 — 

Accent. 
The following are Rules of Accent: 

29. Words of two syllables are always accented on the first, as: 
la'na, wool 

30. Words of more than two syllables are accented on the 
penult, if that is long, as: man da' ta, orders; if it is short, then 
on the antepenult, as: a' da mas, the diamond. 

31. When -que, -ne, -ve are joined to a word, the accent falls 
on the syllable next before these words, whether it be short or long, 
as: terra 'que, and the earth. 



Part Second. 
etymology. 

The Parts of Speech. 

32. The classes into which words are divided, accord- 
ing to their uses, are called Parts of Speech; namely, 

the Substantive, which is the name of a person, thing, or idea; 
as: vir, a man; domus, a house; dies irae, the day of wrath; 

the Adjective, which is used to qualify a noun, as: rar& avis, 
a rare bird; 

the Pronoun, which points out some person or thing, as: tu, 
thou; hoc, that; 

the Verb, which is used to assert or declare something, as: dum 
spiro, spero, while I breathe, I hope; 

the Adverb, which is used to qualify a verb or an adjective, as: 
nota bene, mark well; 

the Preposition, which joins a word to some other word to show 
the relation between them, as: lupus in fabula, the wolf in the fable; 

the Conjunction, which connects sentences together, or words 
used in the same sentence, as: ora et labora, pray and work; 

the Interjection, which is an exclamation, expressive of feeling; 
as: O curas homlnum! the cares of men! 

33. The word Noun is used as a name for both Nouns and Adjectives, 
the former being distinguished as nouns substantive, or Substantives, 
and the latter as nouns adjective, or Adjectives. 



34. Inflection is a change made chiefly in the end 
of a word, to show its grammatical relation. 

35. Nouns } Adjectives , and Pronouns have inflections of 
Declension, to denote number, gender, and case. Verbs have 
inflections of Conjugation, to denote voice, mood, tense, number, 
and person. 

36. Those parts of speech which are not inflected are called 
Particles; these are Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and 
Interjections. 

Substantives. 
S 37. The Substantive is the name of a Person or 
Thing (Concrete), or of a Quality (Abstract). 

38. Concrete Substantives are either: 

Proper, i. e. peculiar to certain persons or things, as: HomSrus, 
Homer; Tiberls, Tiber; or 

Common to a whole class, as: arb5r, a tree; or 

Collective, denoting in the singular more than one, as: exercitus, 
an army. To this class belong also the names of Materials, as: 
lignum, wood. 

Gender. 

39. There are, as in English, three Genders: Mas- 
culine, Feminine, and Neuter. The gender of Latin 
nouns, in many instances, is to be determined by 
their signification, according to the following 

General Rules. 

40. Masculine are the names of males, rivers, winds, and 
months, as: na.uta, a sailor; RhSnus, the Rhine; notus, the south- 
wind; Aprllls, April 

41. Exceptions: In the following words, Gender is determined 
by the termination, and not by the distinction of sex: 

copiae, troops vigiliae, watchmen 

custodlae, guards excubiae, sentinels 

operae, laborers mancipmm, a slave 

auxilia, auxiliary troops. 



— 9 — 

42. Feminine are: the names of females, countries, towns, 
islands, and trees, as: virgo, a maid; Aegyptus, Egypt; Neapolls, 
Naples; Rhodus, Rhodes; pirus, a pear-tree. 

43. The numerous Exceptions are chiefly names of towns, 
which, as to gender, follow the termination, instead of the signifi- 
cation, as: 

Masculine: Argi, Argos; Neuter: Saguntum, Sagunium. 

44. Neuter are : all Indeclinable Nouns, terms or phrases used 
as nouns, and words quoted merely as such, without reference to 
their meaning, as: nihil, nothing; scire tuum, thy knowledge; hoc 
did, this (word) diu. 

45. Nouns which have but one form for masculine and feminine 
are said to be of Common Gender : 

artifex, an artist dux, a leader testis, a witness 

clvis, a citizen heres, an heir judex, a judge 

comes, a companion parens, a parent patruelis, a cousin 
custos, a keeper jxivemsayouth vatgs, a prophet. 

46. Names of Persons with different terminations to distinguish 
masculines and feminines, are called substantiva mobilia; as: 



patron us 


patrona 


a protector 


dominus 


domina 


a master, mistress 


victor 


victrix 


a conqueror 


magister 


magistra 


a teacher 


rex 


regina 


a king, queen. 



47. Names of Animals deserve special notice. With some of 
them gender is expressed by difference of termination, as: 

leo, a lion leaena, a lioness 

cervus, a stag cerva, a hind; 

others are of the common gender, as: 

hie bos, this ox haec bos, this cow; 

others have for both sexes one grammatical gender; these are called 
epicoena. Thus lepiis, a hare, is always masculine, and vulpes, 
fox, always feminine. If necessary, the sexes are distinguished by 
mas, male, and femina, female, as: 

vulpes mas, a male fox lepiis femina, a female hare. 

48. The gender of Substantives not determined by their sig- 
nification, is to be ascertained by their termination, according to 
the Special Rules of Gender under the several declensions. Adjec- 
tives distinguish gender by different forms in the same words, 
and agree in gender with their Substantives, 



— 10 — 

Number and Case. 

49. The Latin, like the English, has two Numbers; 
the Singular Number denotes one, the Plural, more 
than one. There are six Cases in Latin: the Nomina- 
tive, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, and Ablative. 

The Nominative is the ease of the subject of the sentence, and 
answers the question Wlio? or What? 

The Genitive may be translated by the English Possessive or 
with the preposition of; it answers the question Whose? or Whereof? 

The Dative may usually be translated by the preposition to or 
for , answering the question To whom? or For whom? Sometimes 
it corresponds to the English Objective. 

The Accusative nearly corresponds to the English Objective; 
it answers the question Whom? or Wliat? 

The Vocative is the case of direct address. 

The Ablative may usually be translated by the prepositions 
from, by, with; it answers the questions Where? Whence? or 
Wherewith? 

50. According to their relations, the cases are divided into 
casus recti, Independent Cases, and casus obliqui, Dependent 
Cases. Nominative and Vocative are casus recti; Genitive, 
Dative, Accusative, and Ablative, casus obllqul. 

Declensions. 

51. The formation of the several cases is called 
Declension* There are five Declensions in Latin, dis- 
tinguished by the endings of the Genitive Singular. 

First Declension. Genitive Singular ae 
Second Declension. " u l 

Third Declension. " " is 

Fourth Declension. " " us 

Fifth Declension. " " el 

52. The Stem is that part of the word which remains after tak- 
ing away the Inflections; its last letter is called the Characteristic. 

53. The stem may be found from the Genitive Plural, in the 
First, Second and Fifth Declensions by cutting off rum; in the 
Third and Fourth by cutting off to, 



11 — 



54. Case-endings of the Five Declensions.* 





First Declension. 




Second Declension. 






Singular. 


Plural. 




Singular. 


Plural. 




Norn 


a (e, as, es) ae 


us, 


er, ir, ur, iim I, Neut. 


a 


Gen. 


ae (es) 


arum 


l 




orum 




Dat. 


ae 


is (abus) 


o 




Is 




Ace. 


am (en) 


as 


um 




os, Neut. 


a 


Voc. 


a (a, e) 


ae 


e, er, Ir, ur, um 


I, Neut. 


a 


Abl. 


a(e) 


is (abus) 


o 




Is 








Thied Declension. 










Singular. 




Plural. 






Nom 


a, e, 1, o, 


y, c, 1, n, r, s, t, 


X 


es, Neut. a 


(i&) 




Gen. 


is 






um (ltim) 






Dat. 


l 






ibus 






Ace. 


em (im) 


Neut. like Nom. 




es, Neut. S* 


Ota) 




Voc. 


like Nom. 






es, Neut. a 


(ia) 




Abi. 


e(i) 




• 


ibus 








Foubth Declension. 




Fifth Declension. 






Singular. 


Plural. 




Singular. 


JPlural. 




Nom 


us, u 


us, Neut. ua 




es 


es 




Gen. 


us 


uiini 




ei, Si 


erum 




Dat. 


uT, u 


ibus (ubus) 




ei, ei 


ebiis 




Ace. 


urn, u. 


us, Neut. ua 




em 


es 




Voc. 


us, u 


us, Neut. u& 




es 


es 




Abl. 


u 


ibus (ubus) 




e 


ebus 





55. The following are General Rules applying to all 
Declensions: 

1. In both numbers the Vocative is the same as the Nominative, 
except in the singular of nouns in us of the Second Declension. 

2. Neuters have the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative alike 
in both numbers, and these cases, in the plural, always end in a, 

3. The Dative and Ablative plural are always alike. 



* This Synopsis of Case-endings is embodied in Ahn-Henn's Latin 
Paradigm Charts, printed in large type and intended for permanent display 
on the wall. 



— 12 — 

First Declension. 

56. Latin nouns which have ae in the Genitive 
Singular, are of the First Declension. They have the 
Nominative like the stem, ending in a. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. men' sa, a table men' sae, tables 

Gen. men' sae, of a table men sa' rum, of tables » 

Dat. men' sae, to a table men' sis, to tables 

Ace. men' sam, a table men' sas, tables 

Voc. men' sa, table men' sae, tables 

Abl. men' sa, with a table men' sis, with tables 

57. The Latiu has no Article; therefore mensa may be ren- 
dered a table, or the table, or table, according to the connection. 

Examples for Practice: 
lima, -ae, the moon rana, -ae, a frog 

Stella, -ae, a star terra, -ae, the earth, land 

via, -ae, a way, road alauda, -ae, a lark 

insula, -ae, an island r5sa, -ae, a rose 

nauta, -ae, a sailor viola, "-ae, a violet [is—is]* 

5*8. In composition with pater, mater, films, fllia, the word 
f am ilia has in the Genitive Singular familias, e. g., paterfamilias, the 
father of a family, 

59. The Dative and Ablative Plural of de&, a goddess, and fllia, 
a daughter, end in abus, viz.: deabus, filiabus, to distinguish them 
from the same cases of deus, a god, and films, a son. 

Greek Nouns. 
60'. To the First Declension belong also some Greek Nouns, 
ending in e, as, es. The declension of these nouns in the plural 
differs in no respect from that of Latin nouns of the First Declension. 

Singular, 
bo' re as, north-wind py ri' tes, flint 

bo' re ae py ri' tae 

bo' re ae py n' tae 

bo' re am (an) py ri' ten 

bo' re a py n' te 

bo' re a py ri' te 

* These figures refer to the Exercises, for translation in the First % 
Second and Third, Zatin Books, 



Nom. 


e pi' to me, epitome 


Gen. 


e pi' to mes 


Dat. 


e pi' to mae 


Ace. 


e pi' to men 


Voc. 


e pi' to me 


Abl. 


6 pi' to me 



— 13 — 

Examples for Practice: 
grammatice, -es, grammar Messias, -ae, the Messiah 
aloe, -es, the aloe Lucas, -ae, Luke 

miisice, -es, music cometes, -ae, a comet 

Many of them have also regular Latin forms, as: planetes and 
planeta, a planet [ioi. 102.] 

Rule of Gender. 

61. Nouns of the First Declension ending in a and 
e are feminine; those in as and es are masculine. 

Exceptions. 

62. Nearly all the exceptions are such as are masculine from 
their signification, according to the General Rule above mentioned 
(55. 1.), as: nauta, a sailor; also Hadria, the Adriatic. 

Second Declension. 

63. Latin nouns whose genitive is 1, are of the 
Second Declension. In the nominative they end in us, 
er, Ir, ur, um. Those ending in urn are neuter, the 
rest are masculine. 

Singular. 



Nom. 


flu' vi Gs, a river 


tec' turn, a roof 


Gen. 


flu' vi T, of a river 


tec' ti, of a roof 


Dat. 


flu' vi 0, to a river 


tec' to, to a roof 


Ace. 


flu' vi um, a river 


tec' turn, a roof 


Voc. 


flu' vi e, river 


tec' turn, roof 


Abl. 


flu' vi 0, with a river 


tec' to, with a roof 




Plural. 


Nom. 


flu' vi T, rivers 


tec' ta, roofs 


Gen. 


flu vi 0' rum, of rivers 


tec to' rum, of roofs 


Dat. 


flu' vi is, to rivers 


tec' tis, to roofs 


Ace. 


flu' vi os, rivers 


tec' ta, roofs 


Voc. 


flu' vi 1, rivers 


tec' ta, roofs 


Abl. 


flu' vi is, with rivers 


tec' tis, with roofs 



In Nouns of the Second Declension the stem ends in 6-, as: 
fluvio- tecto-, puero-, agro-. 

In the Genitive Singular IT, from Substantives in lus, lum, is often 
contracted into T, the accent remaining unchanged, as: 

Appius, Gen. AppT consilium, Gen. consi'lT. 



— 14 — 

Examples for Practice: 

dominus, -I, a master \ lord caelum, -I, the heaven, sky 

mundus, ~i, the world aurum, -i, gold 

anntis, -i, a year ferrum, -i, iron 

morbus, -i, a disease metallum, -i, a metal 

animus, -I, the mind, soul mitium, -i, a beginning 

discipiilus, -1, a scholar, pupil signum, -i, a sign 

ventus, -I, the wind insectum, -i, an insect 

equus, -I, a horse pratiim, -I, a meadow 

ociilus, -I, an eye mendacium, -i, a lie 

hortus, -l, a garden aedificiiim, -i, a building 

[19. 30] 

64. Words of the Second Declension, ending in the nominative 
in er (Ir, iir) have dropped the original ending us of the nomi- 
native. In most of them the e is only inserted in the Nominative 
and Vocative, and disappears in the other cases. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn. 


a' ger, a field 


a' gri, fields 


Gen. 


a' gri, of a field 


a gro' runi, of fields 


Dat. 


a' gro, to a field 


a' gris, to fields 


Ace. 


a/ griini, a field 


a' gros, fields 


Voc. 


a/ ger, field 


a/ gri, fields 


Abl. 


a/ gro, with a field 


a' gris, with fields 



Examples for Practice: 
magister, -ri, a teacher, master culter, ~ri, a knife 
liber, -ri, a book aper, -ri, a wild boar 

arbiter, -ri, a judge faber, -ri, a smith 

auster, -ri T the south wind minister, -ri, a servant 
cancer, -ri, a crab caper, -ri, a goat 

65. In other words ending in er, the e of the Nominative 
belongs to the stem and is retained through all the cases, as: 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. 


pii' er, a boy 


pii' e ri, boys 


Gen. 


pii' e ri, of a boy 


pu e ro' rum, of boys 


Dat. 


pii' e ro, to a boy 


pii' e ris, to boys 


Ace. 


pu' e rum, a boy 


pu' e ros, boys 


Voc. 


pu' er, boy 


pu' e ri, boys 


A& 


pii' e r5, with a boy 


pii' e ris, with boys 



— 15 — 

To this class belong: 

Substantives: adulter,-!, an adulterer gener, -1, a son-in-law 

piier, -I, a boy socer, -I, a father-in-law 

vesper, -I, evening Liber, -1, Bacchus 

liberi, -orum, children 

Adjectives: asper, aspera, asperfim, rough 
lacer, lacera, lacerum, torn 
miser, misera, nnserum, to retched 
prosper, prospera, prosperum, prosperous 
tener, tenera, tenerum, tender 
dexter, dext(e)ra, dext(e)rum, right 

Words ending in tfer and ger from fero, / bear, and gero, I carry: 

Lucifer, -I, UghUbringer 

armiger, -I, an armor-bearer 

frugifer, frfigifera, friigiferum, fruit-bearing 

laniger, lanigera, lanigerum, wool-bearing. 

[23. 24.] 

66. The only words in lr and ur are: vir, -I, a man, with its 
compounds, as: levir, -I, a brother-in-law, and the masculine of 
the adjective satiir, -a, -urn, sated. 

67. Proper Nouns in ltis omit e in the Vooative, as: Anto- 
niiis, Anthony, Antoni; likewise filiiis, a son, and genius, a 
guardian angel, make fill and geni. The possessive metis, my, 
(but not mea, meum) has mi, and Deus, God, has Deiis. In 
the plural Nominative and Vocative, deus has dii or di; Genitive: 
deoruin; Dative and Ablative: diis, dis. 

68. In the Genitive plural of the Second Declension urn is 
often found for orum, especially in certain words denoting money, 
measure, or weight, as: nummum for nummorum, of moneys; 
also in a few other words, as: deurn for deorum, Hberum for 
Hberorum. 

69. A few Greek Nouns of the Second Declension end in 
5s, fin, instead of us, um. Greek Nouns ending in eus (like 
Orpheus) are thus declined: 

Nom. Or'pheus Dat Or' phe o Voc. Or' pheu 

Gen. Or' phe I Ace. Or' phe um Abl. Or' phe o 

[101. 102.] 



— 16 — 



Rule of Gender, 

70. Nouns in us, er, ir are masculine; in urn 

neuter. 

Exceptions. 

71. Of nouns ending in lis the names of towns, islands, and 
trees are Feminine, as: Corinthus, Corinth; Sanius, Samos; popiiliis, 
a poplar, etc. (42)) also: 

alvus, -I, the belly Minus, -T, soil 

colus, -l, a distaff vannils, I, a van 

and many Greek words of frequent occurrence, as: 

diphthongus, -I, a diphthong methodus, -I, a method 
paragraphus, -I, a paragraph dialectus, -I, a dialect 

The following in us are Neuter: 
pelagus, -T, the sea; vulgus, -I, the rabble; virus, -I, poison; 

their accusative, as of ail neuters, is the same as the nominative, 
but they have no plural. [27. 2<s.] 

Adjectives in us, a, um. 

72. Adjectives in us, a, um are declined in the 
masculine and neuter like substantives of the Second 
Declension, and in the feminine like substantives of 
the First. 

bonus, bona, boniim, good 
Singular. 





m. 


/• 


n. 


Norn. 


bo' nus 


bo' na 


bo' num 


Gen. 


bo' ni 


bo' nae 


bo' ni 


Dat. 


bo' no 


bo' nae 


bo' no 


Ace. 


bo' num 


bo' nam 


bo' num 


Voc. 


bo' ne 


bo' na 


bo' num 


Abl. 


bo' no 


bo' na 
Plural. 


bo' no 


Nom. 


b5'ni 


bo' nae 


bo' na 


Gen. 


bo no' rum 


b5 na' rum 


bo no' rum 


Dat. 


bo' nis 


b5' nis 


bo' nis 


Ace. 


bo' nos 


bo' nas 


bo' na 


Voc. 


bo' ni 


bo' nae 


bo' na 


Abl. 


bo' nis 


bo' nis 


bo' nis 



— 17 — 

Examples for Practice: 

sedulus, -a, -urn, busy modestus, -a, -urn, modest 

timidus, -a, -um, timid beatus, - a, -urn, happy, blessed 

rotundus, -a, -um, round albus, -a, -um, white 

odorus, -a, -um, fragrant fuivus, -a, -um, yellow 

clarus, -a, -urn, bright, clear multus, -a, -um, much, many 

lucidus, -a, -um, shining magnus, -a,-um, great, large 

arduus,-a,-um, arduous, steep parvus, -a, -um, little, small 

umbrosus, -a, -um, shady htimanus, -a, - um, human 

garriilus, -a. -um, garrulous veriis, -a, -um, true 

[21. 22.] 

73. Substantives and Adjectives of the First and Second 
Declensions are combined in the following manner: 

Singular. 

Norn, nau'ta lae'tus, a merry sailor 

Gen. nau'tae lae'ti, of a merry sailor 

Dat. nau'tae lae'to, to a merry sailor 

Ace. nan 'tarn lae'tum, a merry sailor 

Voc. nau'ta lae'te, merry sailor 

Abl. nau'ta lae'to, with a merry sailor 

Plural. 

Nom. nau'tae lae'ti, merry sailors 

Gen. nauta'rum laeto'riim, of merry sailors 

Dat. nau'tis lae'tls, to merry sailors 

Ace. nau'tas lae'tos, merry sailors 

Voc. nau'tae lae'ti, merry sailors 

Abl. nau'tis lae'tis, with merry sailors 

Singular. 

Nom. coe'na mo'dica, a moderate dinner 

Gen. coe'nae mo'dicae, of a moderate dinner 

Dat. coe'nae mo'dicae, to a moderate dinner 

Ace. coe'nam mo'dicam, a moderate dinner 

Voc. coe'na mo'dica, moderate dinner 

Abl. coe'na mo'dica, with a moderate dinner 

Plural. 

Nom. coe'nae mo'dicae, moderate dinners 

Gen. coena'riim modlca'rum, of moderate dinners 

Dat. coe'nis mo'dicis, to moderate dinners 

Ace. coe'nas mo'dicas, moderate dinners 

Voc. coe'nae mS'dicae, moderate dinners 

Abl. coe'nis mo'dicis, with moderate dinners 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Nom. 

Gen, 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 



— 18 — 

Singular, 
tec 'turn al'tum, a high roof 
tec'ti al'ti, of a high roof 
tec 'to al'to, to a high roof 
tec 'turn al'tum, a high roof 
tec 'turn al'tum, high roof 
tec 'to al'to, with a high roof 

Plural. 
tee't& al'ta, high roofs 
tecto'rum alto'rum, of high roofs 
tec 'tis al'tis, to high roofs 
tec'ta al'ta, high roofs 
tec'ta al'ta, high roofs 
tec 'tis al'tis, with high roofs 



Examples for Practice. 
poSta clariis, a famous poet Mvius latus, a broad river 
formica sedula, the busy ant collum longum, a long neck. 





Adjectives 


in fir, ; 


a, urn. 




74. Adjectives in er, 


a, urn, 


are declined in the 


masculine and neuter 


like substantives of the Second 


Declension 


, and in the 


feminine, 


like substantives of 


the First. 














niger, nigra 


,, nigrum, 


black 










Singular. 








m. 




/ 




n. 


Nom. 


ni' ger 




ni' gra 




ni' grum 


Gen. 


ni' gri 




ni' grae 




ni' gri 


Dat. 


ni' gro 




ni' grae 




ni' gro 


Ace. 


ni' grum 




ni' grana 




ni' grum 


Voc. 


ni' ger 




ni' gra 




ni' grum 


Abl. 


ni' gro 




ni' gra 
Plural. 




ni' gro 


Nom. 


ni' gri 




ni' grae 




ni' gra 


Gen. 


ni gro' rum 




ni gra' rum 


ni gro' rum 


Dat. 


ni' gris 




ni' gris 




ni' gris 


Ace. 


ni' gros 




ni' gras 




ni' gra 


Voc. 


ni' gri 




ni' grae 




ni' gra 


Abl. 


ni' gris 




ni' gris 




ni' gris 



19 — 





liber, 


libera, liberum, 
Singular. 


free 




m. 


/ 


n. 


Nom. 


IF ber 


IF be ra 


li' be riim 


Gen. 


IT be ri 


li' be rae 


li' be ri 


Dat. 


IF be ro 


IF be rae 


li' be ro 


Ace. 


IP be ruin 


li' be ram 


li' be rum 


Voc. 


IV ber 


IF be ra 


li' be rum 


Abl. 


IF be ro 


IF be ra 
Plural. 


li' be ro 


Nom. 


IF be ri 


IF be rae 


li' be ra 


Gen. 


li be ro' rum 


li be ra' rum 


li be ro' rum 


Dat. 


IF be ris 


li' be ris 


li' be ris 


Ace. 


IF be ros 


li' be ras 


li' be ra 


Voc. 


IF be ri 


li' be rae 


li' be ra 


Abl. 


IF be ris 


li' be ris 


li' be ris 


75. 


Most adjectives 


in er, a, urn 


drop the e before the r 



76. A 

like liber. 



like niger. Examples are: 

aeger, aegra, aegrum, sick 
creber, crebra, crebrum, frequent 
ruber, rubra, riibrum, red 
pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum, beautiful, fine 
sinister, sinistra, smistrum, left 
piger, pigra, pigrum, lazy 
integer, integra, integrum, whole, entire 
few adjectives in er, a, urn retain the e throughout, 
(See 65.) [*& 26.] 

77. These nine adjectives have the genitive sin- 
gular in lus, and the dative in 1 in all the genders: 
Nominative, 
alius, -a, -ud, another 
nullus, -a, -um, no, not any, no one 
solus, -a, -um, alone 
totus, -a, -um, whole 
ullus, -a, -um, any 
untis, -a, -um, one 
alter, -a, -um, the other (of two) 
iiter, -ra, -rum, which (of two) 
neuter, -ra, -rum, neither 
The plural is regular like that of bonus. 



Genitive. 


Dative. 


alius 


alii 


nullius 


nulli 


solius 


soli 


totius 


toti 


ullius 


Ulll 


unius 


uni 


alterius 


alter! 


utrius 


utri 


neutrius 


neutri 




[71. 72.} 



20 



Third Declension 

78. Nouns whose genitive ends in is, are of the 
Third Declension. Their nominative ends in 

a, e, I, 6, y, c, I, n, r, s, t, and x. 

79. In the Third Declension, the stem ends either in l (Vowel- 
stem) or in a consonant (Consonant-stem). There are only two 
u-stems, sCi-s, a swine, and grti-s, a crane. The stem can be found 
by cutting off urn from the Genitive Plural: 



avis, a bird 
lapis, a stone 



Gen. Blur, avium 

1 l lapidum 



Stem avi- 
" lapid- 



80. All nouns having the same number of syllables in the 
Nominative and Genitive (Parisyllabic) have Vowel-stems in l. 
They end in the Nominative in is, es, e, al, ar, those in al and 
ar having lost a final e. 

Nom. 



navis Gen. navi-s 
ntibes i ' nubi-s 
mare l i mari-s 



Nom. animal (e) Gen. animali-s 
u calcar(e) " calcari-s 



81. All nouns increasing in the Genitive (Imparisyllabic) 
have Consonant-stems: 



Nom. lapis Gen. lapid-is 



Nom. homo 



Gen. homin-is 



Formation of the Genitive. 

82. The Entire Declension of any Substantive of the 
Third Declension may be readily formed by sub- 
stituting for the Genitive-ending Is, the proper end- 
ings of the other cases. Hence to decline a word 
correctly, in this Declension, we need to know how 
its Genitive is formed. 

But we must bear in mind that Neuters always form the Accusa- 
tive and Vocative cases in both numbers like the Nominative, and the 
Nominative Plural in a. This is a rule of highest importance. 

83. Nouns in a are Neuters of Greek origin and change a into 
atis to form the genitive, as: poema, poSmatis. 



— 21 — 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 



Singular, 
po e' ma, a poem 
po e' ma tis, of a poem 
po 6' ma ti, to a poem 
po e' ma, a poem 
po e' ma, poem 



Plural. 
po e' ma ta, poems 
po e'ma turn, of poems 
po e" ma' ti bus, to poems 
po e' ma ta, poems 
po e' ma ta, poems 
po e ma' ti bus, with poems 



po e' ma te, with a poem 

Examples for Practice: 
aroma, -tis, a spice aenigma, -tis, a riddle 

[65. 66.2 

84. Nouns in e change e into is to form the genitive, ass 
rete, retis. They are Neuter. 





Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 


re' te, a net 


re' 


ti a, nets 


Gen. 


re' tis, of a net 


re' 


ti urn, of nets 


Dat. 


re' ti, to a net 


re' 


ti bus, to nets 


Ace. 


re' te, a net 


re' 


ti a, nets 


Voc. 


re' te, net 


re' 


ti a; nets 


Abl. 


re' ti, with a net 


r6' 


ti bus, with ?iets 



Examples for Practice: 
;, the sea, ocean ciibile, -is, a lair 



-? 



altare, -is, an altar 



conclave, -is, a room 



[53. 54.} 

85. Certain nouns ending in 5 form their genitive by changing 
6 into Inis, as: hom6, hominis. 







Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. 


ho' 


mo, man 


ho' mi nes, men, people 


Gen. 


ho' 


mi nis, of man 


ho' mi num, of men 


Dat. 


ho' 


mi ni, to man 


ho mi' ni bus, to men 


Ace. 


ho' 


mi nem, man 


ho' mi nes, men 


Voc. 


ho' 


mo, man 


ho' mi nes, men 


Abl. 


ho' 


mine, with man 


ho mi' ni bus, with men 



Thus we have: 
homO, -mis, man 
nSm5, -inis, nobody 



turhS; -mis, a whirlwind 
Apollo, -inis, Apollo 



and nearly all the words in do and go, as: 
ord5, -mis, order imagO, -mis, an image 

consuetude, -inis, habit pulchritudO, -inis, beauty. 

86. Mark: carO, flesh; carnis, gen. plur.: carnium. 



— 22 



87 c All other words ending in 6 change o into onis to form 
the genitive, as: leo, leonis. 



Singular. 
Nom. le' o, a lion 
Gen. le o' nis, of a lion 
Dat. le o' ni, to a lion 
Ace. le 0' nem, a lion 
Voc. le' 6, lion 
Abl. le 0' ne, with a lion 

Such are: 
pavG, -onis, a peacock 
pulm6, -onis, a lung 
also a few in do and g-5, namely: 
harpagO, -onis, a grapple-hook praedo, 



Plural, 
le o' nes, lions 
le o' num, of lions 
le o'ni bus, to lions 
le o' nes, lions 
le o f nes, lions 
le o' nl "bus, with lions 



aquilo, -onis, the north wind 
potiO, -onis, a drink(ing) 



-onis, a robber 



comedo, -onis, a glutton 



ligo, -onis, a mattock 



[29—32.] 

Peculiar: Anio, -ems, the river Anio. 

88. Nouds in I and y (Neuters of Greek origin) take is, yis 
in the genitive, as: sinapi, -is, mustard; misy, -yis, copperas. 

89. Neuters in c: only alec, alecis, pickle; lac, lactis, milk. 

90. Nouns in 1 add is to the nominative to form the genitive: 

Singular. Plural, 

con' sul, a consul con' su les, the consuls 

con' sii lis, of a consul con' su lum, of the consuls 



Nom 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 



con su' li bus, to the consuls 
con' sfiles, the consuls 
con' su les, consuls 
con su' 11 bus, with the consuls 



con' su li, to a consul 
con' sii lem, a consul 
con' sul, consul 
con' x su le, with aconsul 

Examples for Practice: 

sol, soils, the sun exsul, exsulis, an exile 

sal, sails, salt pugil, pugilis, a pugilist 

91. Nouns in al change al to alls to form the genitive, as: 
animal, animalis. They are Neuter. 



Singular. 

Nom. a' ni mal, an animal 

Gen. am ma' lis, of an animal 

Dat. am ma' li, to an animal 

Ace. a' ni mal, an animal 

Voc. a' ni mal, animal 

Abl. a ni ma' li, with an animal 



Plural, 
a ni ma' li a, animals 
a ni ma' li um, of animals 
a ni ma' li bus, to animals 
a ni ma' li a, animals 
a ni ma' li a, animals 
a ni ma' li bus, with animals 



— 23 — 

Examples for Practice: 
vectigal, -alis, a tax tribunal, -alls, a tribunal 

92. mel, honey, has mellis, and the plural mella; fel, gall, has 
fellis, but is without a plural; both are Neuter. [53, 54^ 

93. Xouns in en form their genitive by changing en into 
inis, as: carmen, carminis; Nouns in en, by adding is, as: ren, 
renis. All in men are Neuter. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. car' men, a poem car' mi na, poems 

Gen. car' nil nis, of a poem car' mi num, of poems 

Dat. car' mi ni, to a poem car mi' ni bus, to poems 

Ace. car' men, a poem car' mi na, poems 

Voc. car' men, poem car' mi na, ptoems 

Abl. car' mi ne, with a poem car mi' ni btis, with poems 

Examples for Practice: 
nomen, -inis, a name (ren, renis) usually pi.: renes, 

lumen, -inis, light renuni, the kidneys 

omen, -inis, an omen lien, lienis, spleen 

lulmen, -inis, a thunder-bolt splen, splenis, spleen 
gramen, -inis, grass pecten, -inis, a comb [59. 60.] 

94. As a rule, nouns in r, yiz. ar, er, or, ur, add is to form 
the genitive, subject, however, to the following variations: 

Those in ar form the Genitive by changing ar into aris, as: 
calcar, calcaris. They are Neuter. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. cal' car, a spur cal ca' ri a, spurs 

Gen. cal ca' ris, of a spur cal ca' ri uni, of spurs 

Dat cal ca' ri, to a spur cal ca' ri bus, to sjntrs 

Ace. cal' car, a spur cal ca' ri a, spurs 

Voc. cal' car, spur cal ca' ri a, spurs 

Abl. cal ca' ri, with a spur cal ca' ri bus, with spurs 

Examples for Practice: 
exemplar, -aris, a model cochlear, -aris, a spoon 

95. Exceptions: 

Neuter. Masculine. 

nectar, -is, nectar Caesar, -is, Caesar 

hepar, -atis, the liver lar, laris, a household deity 

far, farris, corn par, paris, a pair [53. 54.] 



24 — 



96. Nouns in er and er add is to form the genitive, as: 
anser, anseris, a goose; ver, veris, spring; but imber, a shower, 
the names of months in ber, and nouns inter, except later, abrick, 
change er into ris, dropping the e before the r, as: pater, patris. 



Norn. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 



an' ser, a goose 

an' se ris, of a goose 

an' se ri, to a goose 

an' se rem, a goose 

an' ser, goose 

an' se re, with a goose 

Plural, 



Singular. 

pa' ter, a father 
pa' tris, of a father 
pa' tri, to a father 
pa' trem, a father 
pa' ter, father 
pa' tre, with a father 



an' se res, geese 

an' se rum, of geese 

an se' ri "bus, to geese 

an' se res, geese 

an' se res, geese 

an se' ri bus, with geese 



pa' tres, fathers 

pa' trum, of fathers 

pa' tri bus, to fathers 

pa' tres, fathers 

pa' tres, fathers 

pa' tri bus, with fathers 

Examples for Practice: 



mater, -ris, a mother 
frater, -ris, a brother 
imber, -ris, a shower 
September, -ris, September 

Peculiar: 

aer, aeris, the air 

aethgr, aetheris, the upper air 

A few have ium, instead of urn, in the Genitive plural: 

imber, a shower, imbrium Titer, a leather sack, utriuin 

linter, a boat, lintrium venter, the belly, ventrium 

[37. 38.] 

99. Nouns in or change or into oris to form the genitive; as: 
color, -oris. 



passer, -is, a sparrow 
mulier, -is, a woman 
agger, -is, a rampart 
later, -is, a brick 

97. 

iter, Itineris, a ivay (Neuter) 
Juppiter, Jovis, Jove 

98. 



Singular. 

Nom. co' lor, a color 

Gen. c5 lo' ris, of a color 

Dat. co lo' ri, to a color 

Ace. co lo' rem, a color 

Voc. co' lor, color 

Abl. co lo' re, with a color 



Plural, 
co lo' res, colors 
co lo' rum, of colors 
co 16' ri bus, to colors 
co 10' res, colors 
co lo' res, colors 
co 16' ri bus, with colors 



— 25 — 

Examples for Practice: 
timor, -oris, fear amor, -oris, love 

praeceptor, -oris, a teacher sapor, -oris, taste 
auctor, -oris, an author odor, -oris, smell 

auditor, -oris, a hearer clamor, -oris, a shout, noise 

orator, -oris, a speaker venator, -oris, a hunter 

100. The following have o short in the genitive: 

arbor, arboris, a tree C marmor, marmoris, marhle 

memor, memoris, mindful Neut. -) aequor, aequoris, the sea 

immemor, immemoris, forgetful ( ador, adoris, spelt 

101. Mark the Neuter cor, cordis, heart, and its Compounds: 
concors, -dis, harmonious discors, -dis, discordant 

[33. 34.] 

102. Nouns in ur add is to the nominative to form the genitive; 
as: guttur, gutturis; they are Neuter. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. gut' tur, the throat gut' tu ra, the throats 

Gen. gut' tu ris, of the throat gut' tu rum, of the threats 

Dat. gut' tu i% to the throat gut tu' ri "bus, to the throats 

Ace. gut' tur, the throat gut' tu ra, the throats 

Voc. gut' tur, throat gut' tu ra, throats 

Abl. gut' tu re, with the throat gut tu' ri bus, with the throats 

103. These four change ur into oris, but are also Neuter: 
ebur, -oris, ivory femur, -oris, the thigh 
jecur, -oris (jeclnoris), the liver robur, -oris, strength 

[63. 64.] 

104. There are two Classes of nouns in s: 
s after a vowel: as, es, is, os, us, aus 

s after a consonant: Is, ns, rs; bs, ps, ms. 

105. Nouns in as change as into atis to form the genitive, 
as: aetas, aetatis; anas, a duck, has anatis; vas, a surety, vadis. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ae' tas, an age ae ta' tes, ages 

Gen. ae ta' tis, of an age ae ta' turn, of ages 

Dat. ae ta' ti, to an age ae ta' ti bus, to ages 

Ace. ae ta' tern, an age ae ta' tes, ages 

Voc. ae'tas, age ae ta' tes, ages 

Abl. ae ta' te, ivith an age ae ta' ti bus, with ages 



— 26 — 

Examples for Practice: 
aestas, -atis, summer paupertas, -atis, poverty 

voluptas, -atis, pleasure voluntas, -atis, the will 

societas, -atis, society liber tas, -atis, liberty 

difficultas, -atis, difficulty varietas, -atis, variety 

civitas, -atis, a state sanitas, -atis, health 

106. The following in as form their genitives differently: 

Norn, as, a copper Gen. assis Gen. PI. assiiim 

mas, a male maris marium 

adamas, a diamond adamantis 

elephas, an elephant elephantis 

vas, a vessel (Neuter) vasis, PL vasa, -Sriim (2d decl.) 

107. fas, right; nefas, wrong, are Indeclinable. 39 40] 

108. Nouns ending in es change es into is to form the geni- 
tive, as: nubes, niibis (Vowel-stems). They have the same num- 
ber of syllables in the nominative and genitive. Nouns in es in- 
crease in the genitive, changing es into ltis, as: miles, militis 
(Consonant-stems) . 

Singular. 

Nom. nil' bes, a cloud mi' les, a soldier 

Gen. mY bis, of a cloud ml' II tis, of a soldier 

Dat nu' bi, to a cloud mi' li ti, to a soldier 

Ace. nu' bem, a cloud mi' II tern, a soldier 

Voc. nu' bes, cloud mi' les, soldier 

Abl. nu' be, with a cloud ml' li te, with a soldier 

Plural. 

Nom. nfi' bes, clouds mi' li tes, soldiers 

Gen. nfi' bi iim, of clouds ml' If turn, of soldiers 

Dat. nfi' bi "bus, to clouds ml li' ti bus, to soldiers 

Ace. nfi' bes, clouds mi' li tes, soldiers 

Voc. nu' bes, clouds mi' li tes, soldiers 

Abl. nu'bitnis, with clouds ml li' ti "bus, with soldiers 

Examples for Practice: 
fames, -is, hunger comes, -ltis, a companion 

clades, -is, defeat merges, -ltis, a sheaf 

vulpes, -is, a fox pedes, -ltis, a foot-soldier 

sedes, -is, a seat eques, -itis, a horseman 



— 21 — 



109. Exceptions. The following in es and es increase in the 
genitive in different ways (et-is, et-is, ed-is, ed-is, id-is, er-is). 



abies, -etis, the silver fir 
aries, -etis, a ram 
paries, -etis, a wall 
interpres, -etis, an interpreter 
seges, -etis, a crop 
teges, -etis, a covering 
quies, -etis, rest 
locuples, -etis, wealthy 

110. Mark the solitary nouns: 



pes, pedis, a foot 
quadrupes, -edis, four-footed 
compes, -edis, a fetter 
heres, -edis, an heir 
merces, -edis, a reward 
obses, -ldis, a hostage 
praeses, -ldis, a president 
Ceres, -eris, Ceres 



{45. 46.] 



praes, praedis, surety 



aes, aeris, brass (Neuter) 

111. The majority of nouns ending in is have Vowel-stems, 
and form their genitive in is, with an equal number of syllables. 
They have the nominative and genitive singular alike. 





Singular. 








Plural. 


Norm. 


a/ vis, a bird 




a' ves, birds 


Gen. 


a/ vis, of a 


bird 


a' vi uin, 


of birds 


Dat. 


a' vi, to a 


bird 


a/ vi bus, 


to birds 


Ace. 


a' vem, a 


bird 


a f ves, birds 


Voc. 


a' vis, bird 




a' ves, birds 


Abl. 


a' ve, with 


a 


bird 
Examples 


a' vi bus, 

for Practice: 


with birds 


amnis 


, -, a river 




felis, -, 


a cat 


ovis, -, a sheep 


apis, - 


-, a bee 




finis, -, 


an end 


panis, -, bread 


auris, 


-, the ear 




hostis, • 


-, an enemy 


piscis, -, a fish 


canis, 


-, a dog 




ignis, -. 


, fire 


tigris, -, a tiger 


clvis, 


-, a citizen 




mensis, 


-, a month 


vallis, -, a valley 


classis 


;, -, a fleet 




natalis, 


-j a birthday 


vermis, -, a worm 


collis, 


-, a hill 




navis, - 


■ y a ship 


vestis, -, a dress 



112. Others in is and is have Consonant-stems increasing in 
the genitive in different ways (id-is, It-is, er-is, Ir-is, m-is). 



Singular. 

Nom. la' pis, a stone 

Gen. la' pi dis, of a stone 

Dat. la' pi di, to a stone 

Ace. la' pi dem, a stone 

Voc. la' pis, stone 

Abl. la' pi de, with a stone 



Plural, 
la' pi des, stones 
la' pi dum, of stones 
la pi' di "bus, to stones 
la' pi des, stones 
la' pi des, stones 
la pi' di bus, with stones 



— 28 — 



To this class belong: 
cassis, cassldis, a helmet 
lapis, lapidis, a stone 
cinis, cineris, ashes 
pulvis, pulveris, dust 
cuspis, cuspidis, a spear 



lis, litis, a quarrel 
sanguis, sanguinis, blood 
glls, gliris, a dormouse 
Samnls, Samnitis, a Samnite 
tyrannis, tyrannidis, tyranny 



vomis, vomeris, a plowshare 

113. exsanguis, -e, bloodless, though a compound of sanguis, 
has in the genitive exsanguis (parisyllabic). 



114. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 



Mark the special paradigm of vis, force: 

Singular. Plural. 

vis, force vi' res, forces 

— vi ' ri urn, of forces 

— vi ' ri bus, to forces 
vim, force vi' res, forces 

vis, force vi' res, forces 

vi, by force vi' ri "bus, with forces ^±.4^^ 



115. Some Nouns in os form their genitive by changing os 
into oris, others by changing os into otis. Thus, we have: 

OS, otis 



os, oris 
flos, -oris, a flower 
mos, -oris, custom 
ros, -oris, dew 
lepos, -oris, charm, wit 
os, oris, the mouth (Neuter) 



Nom. 


flos, a flower 


Gen. 


flo' ris, of a flower 


Dat. 


flo' ri, to a flower 


Ace. 


flo' rem, a flower 


Voc. 


flos, flovjer 


Abl. 


flo' re, with a flower 


Nom. 


PlU] 

flo' res, flowers 


Gen. 


flo' rum, of flowers 


Dat. 


flO' ri bus, to flowers 


Ace. 


flo' res, flowers 


Voc. 


flo' res, flowers 


Abl. 


flo' ri bus, with flowers 



dos, -otis, a dowry 
cos, -otis, a grindstone 
nepos, -otis, a grandchild 
rhinoceros, -otis, a rhinoceros 
sacerdos, -otis, a priest 

Singular. 

dos, a dowry 

do' tis, of a dowry 

do' ti, to a dowry 

do' tern, a dowry 

dos, dowry 

do' te, with a dowry 



do' tes, dowries 

do' turn, of dowries 

do' ti bus, to doivries 

do' tes, dowries 

do' tes, dowries 

do' ti bus, with dowries 





Singular. 


Norn. 


vir' tils, virtue 


Gen. 


vir tu f tis, of virtue 


Dat. 


vir tu' ti, to virtue 


Ace. 


vir tu' tern, virtue 


Voc. 


vir' ttis, virtue 


Abl. 


vir tu' te, with virtue 



— 29 — 

116. Peculiar: 

custGs, custodls, a keeper comp5s, compStls, capable 

6s, ossis, a bone (Neuter) ; bos, bo vis, an ox; Plur. N. boves; 

Gen. Plur. ossium G. bourn; D. bobiis or biibus 

117. A few masculine Greek nouns in os have ois, as: 
heros, -ois, a hero Tros, -ois, a Trojan [35. 36.] 

118. Of Feminine Nouns in us, some change us into litis, 
others into tidis to form the genitive; as: virtus, sdrtutis; palus f 
paludis. 

Plural, 
vir tu' tes, virtues 
vir til' turn, of virtues 
vir tu' ti bus, to virtues 
vir tu' tes, virtues 
vir tu' tes, virtues 
vir tu' ti bus, with virtues 

salus, -utis, safety, welfare senectus, -utis. old age 
servitus, -utis, slavery palus, -tidis, a marsh 

juventus, -utis, youth incus, -udis, an anvil 

119. tellus, earth, has telluris, peciis, a head of cattle, an 
animal, pecudis, and Yenus, the goddess Venus, Veneris. 

120. Notice the following names of animals in us: 

mus, miiris, a mouse; Gen. Plur. grus, gruis, a crane 

murium sus, suis, a swine; Dat. Plur. 

lepus, leporis, a hare subus (instead of suibus) 

[51. 52.] 

121. Of Neuter Nouns in us of two or more syllables, some 
change tis into oris to form the genitive, as: corpus, corporis; 
others change us into eris, as: opus, operis. All monosyllables, 
with long u, form their genitive in uris, as: jus, juris. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. cor' pus, a body cor' po ra, bodies 

Gen. cor' po ris, of a body cor' po rum, of bodies 

Dat. cor' po rl, to a body cor po' ri bus, to bodies 

Ace. cor' pus, a body cor' po ra, bodies 

Voc. cor' pus, body cor' pS r&, bodies 

Abl. cor' p6 re, with a body cor pS' ribtis, with bodies 



— 30 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn. 


6' pus, a work 


6' pe ra, works 


Gen. 


6' pe ris, of a work 


6' pe ruin, of works 


Dat. 


6' pe ri, to a work 


6 pe' ri bus, to works 


Ace. 


6' pus, a work 


6' pe ra, works 


Voc. 


6' pus, work 


6' pe ra, works 


Abl. 


6' pe re, with a work 


6 pe' ri "bus, with works 


Norn 


jus, rights law 


ju' ra, rights 


Gen. 


ju' ris, of right 


ju' ruin, of rights 


Dat. 


ju' ri, to right 


jti' ri bus, to rights 


Ace. 


jus, right 


ju' ra, rights 


Voc. 


jus, right 


ju' ra, rights 


Abl. 


jtl r re, with right 


ju' ri bus, witfi rights 



Example 
frlgus, -oris, cold 
tempiis, -oris, a time 
litus, -oris, a shoi^e 
decus, -oris, an ornament 
nemus, -oris, a grove 
pectus, -oris, the breast 
vulnus, -eris, a wound 



for Practice: 

raunus, -eris, an office, gift 
genus, -eris, a kind, race 
onus, -eris, a burden 
sldus, -eris, a star, constella- 
scelus, -eris, a crime [Hon 
eras, -uris, the leg 
rfis, -uris, the country 

[61. 62.) 



122. The following Greek nouns in us (Masculine and Fe- 
minine) deserve special notice: 

Trapezus, -untts, Trebizond Oedipus, -odis, Oedipus 
trlpiis, -odis, a tripod polypus, -i, a polyp (2d decl.) 

123. The only two nouns in aus are laus, laudis, praise, and 
fraus, frauclis, fraud; fraus has fraudum or fraudium in the 
genitive plural. [51.] 

124. Nouns ending in bs, ps, and ms change s final into is 
to form the genitive; as: urbs, urbis. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn. 


urbs, a city 


ur' bes, cities 


Gen. 


ur'bis, of a city 


ur' bi urn of cities 


Dat. 


ur' bl, to a city 


ur' bi bus, to cities* 


Ace. 


ur' bem, a city 


ur' bes, cities 


Voc. 


urbs, Ocity 


ur' bes, cities 


Abl, . 


ur' be, with a city 


ur' bi bus, with cities 



— 31 — 

Examples for Practice: 
plebs, plebis, the populace stirps, stirpis, a stem 

trabs, trabis, a beam hiems, hiemis, winter 

125. A few are subject to a variation of the radical vowel: 

adeps, adipis, lard auceps, auctipis, a fowler 

caelebs, caelibis, unmarried 

126. Compounds in ceps from capio have cipis, as: 
princeps, -cipis, a chief particeps, -cipis, sharing 

Compounds in ceps from caput have cipitis, as: 
anceps, -cipitis, double praeceps, -cipitis, steep 

127. All nouns ending in Is, rs, and ns change s final into 
tis to form the genitive; as: pars, partis. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. pars, a part, side par' tes, parts 

Gen. par' tis, of a part par' ti iim, of parts 

Dat. par' ti, to a part par' ti bus, to parts 

Ace. par' tern, a part par' tes, parts 

Voc. pars, Opart par' tes, parts 

Abl. par' te, with a part par' ti "bus, with parts 

Examples for Practice: 
mors, -tis, death gens, -tis, a tribe, people 

infans, -tis, a babe, child frons, -tis, the forehead, brow 

ars, -tis, art parens, -tis, a parent 

128. Only three have cits in the genitive, namely: 

frons, -dis, foliage; glans, -dis, an acorn; juglans, -dis, a walnut 

[47. 48.] 

129. There is only one noun in t (Neuter): 

caput, capitis, the head, and its Compounds. [63.] 

ISO. Nouns in x form their genitive by resolving x into cs or 
gs and changing final s into is, as: dux (= dues), duels; rex 
(=regs), regis. 





Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 


dux, a leader 


dii' 


ces, leaders 


Gen. 


du' cis, of a leader 


dii' 


cum, of leaders 


Dat. 


dii' ci, to a leader 


du' 


ci bus, to leaders 


Ace. 


dii' cem, a leader 


du' 


ces, leaders 


Voc. 


dux, leader 


du' 


ces, leaders 


Abl. 


du' ce, with a leader 


du' 


cibus, with leaders 



— 32 — 

ilar. Plural. 

Nom. rex, a king rg' ges, kings 

Gen. r6' gis, 0/ a fczrc^ re' guin, of kings 

Dat. re' gi, to a king rg' gi bus, to kings 

Ace. re' gem, a king re' ges, kings 

Voc. rex, king rS' ges, kings 

Abl. re' ge, with a king rg' gibus, with kings 

131. Nouns in x with preceding consonant change x into cis: 

falx, -cis, a sickle arx, -cis, a citadel 

merx, -cis, merchandise lanx, -cis, a dish 

132. Nouns in ax have acis, as: pax, pacis, peace. 
Exception: fax, facis, a torch. 

133. Nouns in ex have commonly icis, as: 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ju' dex, a judge jtl f di ces, judges 

Gen. ju' di cis, of a judge ju' di cum, of judges 

Dat. ju' di ci, to a judge ju di' ci bus, to judges 

Ace. ju' di cem, a judge ju' di ces, judges 

Voc. ju' dex, judge ju' di ces, judges 

Abl. ju' di ce, with a judge ju di' ci bus, with judges 

Exceptions: 
lex, legis, a law remex, remlgis, a rower 

rex, regis, a king senex, senis, an old man 

grex, gregis, a flock supellex,supellectilis,/^rmfa6re 

nex, necis, murder vervex, vervecis, a wether 

faex, faecis, lees 

134. Nouns in ix have ids, and less frequently icis, as: 
cicatrix, -icis, a wound pix, -icis, pitch 
cornix, -icis, a crow calix, -icis, a cup 
radix, -icis, a root fornix, -icis, an arch 
nutrix, -icis, a nurse appendix, -icis, an appendix 

But nix, snow, has nivis. 

135. Nouns in ox have ocis, as: vox, vocis, a voice. 

Exceptions: 
praecox, praecocis, premature nox, noctis, night 

and a few national names in ox, as: 

Cappadox, -ocis, a Cappadocian 
Allobrox, -og'is, one of the Allobroges. 



— 33 — 

136. Nouns in ux have ucis, as: dux, duels, a leader. 

Exceptions: 
lux, lucis, light conjux, conjiigis, a spouse 

Pollux, Pollucis, Pollux frux, frugis, fruit 

faux, faucis, the throat 

7 ' [49. 50.) 

Adjectives of the Third Declension. 

137. Certain adjectives of the Third Declension have 
in the nominative singular three different forms, one 
for each gender — others two, the masculine and 
feminine being the same — others but one, the same 
for all genders. 

138. Adjectives of three terminations end in er, is, e, and 

are declined like pater, avis, mare, respectively. All drop the e 
before r in declension, except celer, celeris, celere, swift, which 
retains it. 

acer, acris, acre, sharp, keen 

Singular. 





m. 


/ 


n. 


Norn. 


a' cer 


a' cris 


a' ere 


Gen. 


a' cris 


a' cris 


a' cris 


Dat 


a' cri 


a' cri 


a' cri 


Ace. 


a' crem 


a' crem 


a' ere 


Voc. 


a/ cer 


a' cris 


a/ ere 


Abl. 


a' cri 


a' cri 
Plural. 


a' cri 


Norn. 


a' cres 


a' cres 


a' cri a 


Gen. 


a' cri uni 


a f cri urn 


a' cri urn 


Dat. 


a' cri bus 


a' cri bus 


a/ cri bus 


Ace. 


a' cres 


a' cres 


a' cri a 


Voc. 


a' cres 


a' cres 


& f cri a 


Abl. 


a' cri bus 


a' cri bus 


a f cri bus 



Examples for Practice: 
terrester, -ris, -re, terrestrial Silvester, -ris, -re, woody 
paluster, -ris, -re, marshy campester, -ris, -re, level 

celeber, -ris, -re, famous equester, -ris, -re, equestrian 

alS,cer,-ris, -re, lively saliiber, -ris, -re, healthy 

puter, -ris, -re, putrid volucer, -ris, -re, winged 



34 



139> Adjectives of two terminations end in is, 5, and or, 

iis (Comparatives), and are thus declined: 



Norn. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 



Singular 
m. & f. 
tri' stis 
tri' stis 
tri' sti 
tri' stem 
tri' stis 
tri' sti 



tristis, tristS, sad 



Plural. 



n. 
tri' ste 
tri' stis 
tri' sti 
tri' ste 
tri' ste 
tri' sti 



ra. & f. 
tri' stes 
tri' sti iim 
tri' sti bus 
tri' stes 
tri' stes 
tri' sti bus 



n. 
tri' sti & 
tri' sti iim 
tri' sti bus 
tri' sti a 
tri' sti a 
tri' sti bus 



Examples for Practice: 

siiavis,-e, pleasant instabilis, -e, unsteady 
dulcis, -e, sweet humllis, -e, low 
brevis, -e, short mortalis, -e, mortal 



omnis, -e, all, every 
similis, -e, like 
facilis, -e, easy 

[55. 56.] 



durior, duriiis, harder 
Singular. 
m. & /. n. m. & /. 

Norn, du' ri or du' ri us dti ri o' res 

Gen. du ri 6' ris du ri o' ris du ri o' rum 

Dat du ri o' ri du ri o' ri du ri 0' ri bus 

Ace. du ri o' rem du' ri us du ri o' res 

Voc. du' ri or du' ri us du ri o' res 

Abl. du ri o' re du ri o' re du ri o' ri bus 



Plural. 

n. 
du ri o' ra 
du ri o' rum 
du ri o' ri bus 
du ri o' ra 
du ri o' r& 
dti ri o' ri btis 



excelsior, -us, higher 
llberior, -us, freer 
pulehrior, -us, finer 



Examples for Practice: 

acrior, -us, sharper melior, -iis, better 

levior, -iis, lighter carior, -iis, dearer 

felicior, -us, happier hebetior, -iis, duller 

[73. 74.] 

140. As a rule, adjectives in er, is, e, and is, e form their 
ablative singular in I, the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural 
neuter in la, and the genitive plural in iiim; celer, swifts has 
celeriim. 

141. Adjectives of one termination have the same forms in 
all genders, except that in the accusative singular, and in the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative plural, the neuter is distinguished 
from the masculine and feminine. They end in 1, r, s, x, and are 
declined like substantives of the Third Declension, 



— 35 — 





felix, happy, 


fortunate 


prudens, prudent, sensible 








Singular. 






m. & f. 


n. 


m. &f 


n. 


Nom 


. fe' lix 


fe'lix 


pru' dens 


pru' dens 


Gen. 


fe Ii' cis 




pru den' tis 




Dat. 


fe IP ci 




pru den' ti 




Ace. 


fe li'cem 


fe' lix 


pru den' tern 


pru' dens 


Voc. 


fe' lix 




pru' dens 




Abl. 


fe li' ci 




pru den' ti 
Plural. 




Nom 


. fe H' ces 


fe li' ci a 


pru den' tes 


pru den' ti & 


Gen. 


fe IV cl urn 




pru den' ti urn 




Dat. 


fe 11' ci Ibus 




pru den' ti bus 




Ace. 


fe" li' ces 


fe li' ci a 


pru den' tes 


pru den'ti & 


Voc. 


fe IV ces 


fe 11' ci a 


pru den' tes 


pru den' tia 


Abl. 


fe II' ci "bus 




pru den' ti "bus 





Examples for Practice: 
mendax, -acis, lying sapiens, -tis, wise 

loquax, -acis, loquacious patens, -tis, open 

rapax,-acis, rapacious diligens, -tis, diligent 

velox, -ocis, swift clemens, -tis, mild 58 

142. As a rule, adjectives of one termination have i in the 
ablative singular, but to this there are many exceptions. The neuter 
of the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural ends in i&, and 
the genitive in iuni (see 144—14=7)* 

Remarks on Certain Cases. 
Accusative Singular. 

143. The Accusative in im is found exclusively: 

1. in Greek nouns in is, as: basis, a base, basim; 

2. in names of rivers and towns in is, as: Tiberis, the Tiber, Ti- 
berim; Neapolis, Naples, Neapolini; 

3. in amussis, a mason's rule, amussim; ravis, "hoarseness, 
ravim; sitis, thirst, sitim; tussis, a coug h, tussim; vis, force, vim; 

and is regarded as preferable: 

4. in febris, a fever, febrim (febrem) ; pelvis, a basin, pelvim 
(pelvem); puppis, the stern, puppim (puppem); restis, a rope, 
restim (restem) ; turns, a tower, turrim (turrem) ; securls, an axe, 
seciirim (secfirem). 



— 36 — 

Ablative Singular, 
144. The Ablative in 1 is found exclusively: 

1. in all nouns which have or may have the accusative in im, 
and in elavis, a key, Abl. clavi; navls, a ship, Abl. navi; imbgr, a 
shower, Abl imbri; occiput, the back part of the head, Abl. occipiti; 

2. in neuter nouns in e, and those in al and ar which have a 
long in the genitive; also in par, parls, a pair, Abl. pari; 

3. in those Substantives in is and er which are originally Ad- 
jectives, as: famlliaris, a friend, Abl. famillari; also in the names of 
the months, as: September, September, Abl. Septembri; butjtivenis, 
a youth, aedllls, an aedile, have ablative in e, jiivene, aedile. 

4. In all Adjectives of the Third Declension, including Par- 
ticipial Adjectives in ans and ens; but to this, there are many 
exceptions: 

pauper, poor Abl. paupere caelebs, single 

deses, indolent " deslde dives, rich 

puber, adult " piibere vetus, old 

sospes, safe " sosplte princeps, first 

CQmp6s,possessedof " compote particeps, sharing 
superstes, surviving Abl. superstite 

All Comparatives, as: altior, higher, Abl. altiore; 

Participles, when used as such or as Substantives, as: sapiens, 
a wise man, Abl. sapient e; but vir sapiens has ablative viro 
sapienti; 

Adjectives used as proper names, as: Juvenalis, Juvenal, Abl. 
Juvenale. [59. 6o.j 

Nominative Plural. 

145. Such Neuters of Nouns, Adjectives and Par- 
ticiples as have 1 in the Ablative singular form their 
Nominative Plural in la instead of a. 

Of Adjectives having e in the ablative singular, only vetus has 
a neuter of the plural, veter&. Of Comparatives, complures, 
several, has complura and compluria. 

Genitive Plural. 

146. The Genitive Plural in ium is found: 

1. in all nouns having i in the ablative singular (see above 144.) \ 



AM 


. caelibe 


U 


divite 


a 


vetgre 


it 


principe 


a 


participS 



37 — 



2. in all nouns in er, Is, and es having the same number of syl- 
lables in the nominative and genitive (parisyllabic) , and in all pure 
Latin words in s and x preceded by a consonant, except the fol- 
lowing which retain urn in the genitive plural: 





Gen. Plural. 




Gen. Plural. 


vates, aprophet 


vatum 


pater, a father 


patrum 


striies, a heap 


struum 


mater, a mother 


matrum 


sedes, a seat 


sSdum 


frater, a brother 


fratrum 


cams, a dog 


canum 


accipiter, a hawk 


accipltrum 


panls, bread 


panum 


adeps, fat 


adipum 


j uven is, a youth 


j iivenum 


(ops), help 


opiim 


volucrls, a bird 


voliicrum 


hiems, winter 


hiemum 


3. in the following words : 






mas, a male 


marram 


nox, the night 


noctram 


mus, a mouse 


murium 


jus, right 


jurixim 


glls, a dormouse 


gllriuin 


nix, snow 


nivium 


lis, a quarrel 


litiiim 


6s, a bone 


ossram 


vis, force 


viritim 


as, an as [Roman coin) 


assiiim 


caro, flesh 


carnram 


(faux), the throat 


faucium 



4. in names of nations in as, -atis; is, -Ms, as: 



Gen. Plural. Arplnatram 
" " Samnitium 






Arpinas, an Arpinian 
Samnis, a Samnite 
and likewise in: 
penates, penates 
optimates, the aristocrats 
nostras, our countryman 
vestras, your countryman 

147. Of Adjectives having T in the ablative singular, the fol- 
lowing have tini in the Genitive plural: 



" penatram 

c L optimatmm 

" nostratiiim 

" vestratium 



fiber, -Is, fertile 


Abl. Sing. 


tiberi 


Gen. PI. uberiim 


memor, -is, mindful 


it 


mem5ri 


IC 


memorum 


immemor, -is, unmindful 


u 


immemori 


it 


immemoriim 


ciciir, -is, tame 


a 


cicuri 


a 


cicurum 


vigil, -is, watchful 


u 


vTgili 


it 


vigiltim 

[103. 104. 



Accusative Plural, 

148. The Accusative Plural in is occurs side by side with es in 
all nouns which have ram in the genitive plural, as: naves and 
navis; and seems preferable in nouns in er which have I in the 
ablative, as: imbrls and imbreg, 



— 38 — 

Dative and Ablative Plural. 

14:9. In the Dative and Ablative Plural, Neuters in ma have com- 
monly is instead of Ibus; thus: poematis, instead of poematlbtis. 
See 83. 

Greek Nouns. 

150. Most Greek Nouns of the Third Declension 
are entirely regular; a few, however, retain certain 
peculiarities of the Greek. 

151. Proper Names in rj$ of the first Greek Declension often 
follow the third in Latin, as: Xerxes, -is. 

152. Several feminine nouns in o have Genitive sing. Gs, all 
the other cases ending in o, as: echo, Gen. echus, Dat. echo, an echo. 

153. Many Greek nouns have Genitive os, as: lampas, lampados, 
a lamp — and Accusative a, as: Salamis, Ace. Salamina, Salamis; 
aer, Ace. aera, air; aether, Ace. aethera, ether. 

154. The Vocative sing, drops s in nouns in eus, Is, ys, and 

as (antis), as: Daphnis, Voc. Daphni, Daphnis; Orpheus, Voc. Or- 
pheu, Orpheus; Atlas, Voc. Atla, Atlas. 

155. A few Neuters in os, as: melos, a song; pelagos, the sea, 
have e in the plural: mele, pelage. 

1 56. The ending on occurs in the Genitive plur. of a few titles 
of books, as: Metamorphoses, -eon. 

157. Many Greek nouns have Plural Nom. es, as: lampas, 1am- 
pades — and Accus. as, as: Arabs, Arabas, Arabian; Cyclops, Cy- 
clopas, a Cyclops. 

Gender in Third Declension. 

Nouns whose gender is determined by their meaning (see 40-42) 
are not included in the following rules. 

I. Masculines. 

158. Nouns of the Third Declension in o, or, 6s, 

er, and es or es increasing in the Genitive: 

hie sermo, this speech hie mos, this custom 

Mc aggSr, this mound hie pes, this foot (gen. pedis) 

bio color, this color hie caespes^/H6' sod (gen. caespitis) 



— 39 — 

159. Exceptions in 6. 
Feminine: 

1. Nouns in do and g-G, as: hirundo, a swallow; origo, origin; 
<fcc. Only the following in d.6 and go are Masculine: 

ordo, -Inis, order lig5, -onis, a mattock 

cardG, -mis, the hinge harpagd, -onis, a grapple-hook 
(of a door) margO, -mis, a margin 

2. Abstract nouns in i5, as: opinio, -onis, an opinion; actio, 
-onis, a deed; oratio, -onis, speech; venatiO, -onis, hunting; &c. 
The following [concrete) nouns in 16 are Masculine: 

septentrld, -onis, the north papili5, -onis, a butterfly 

scorpI5, -onis, a scorpion pugiS, -onis, a dagger 

vespertiliS, -onis, a bat scipiS, -onis, a staff 

titiO, -onis, a firebrand unl8, -onis, a pearl 

3. caro, carnis, flesh echo, -us, an echo 

160. Exceptions in or. 
Neuter. 

marmor, marmSris, marble ad5r, adoris, spelt 
aequor, aequorls, the sea cor, cordis, the heart 

Feminine. 

arbor, arboris, a tree 

161. Exceptions in os, os. 
Feminine. 

cos, cotis, a whetstone dos, dotis, a dowry 

Neuter. 

os, oris, the mouth 6s, ossis, a bone 

162. Exceptions in er, er. 
Neuter. 

cadaver, -is, a corpse spinther, -is, a bracelet 

piper, -is, pepper tuber, -is, a hump 

cicer, -is, a chick-pea Tiber, -is, a teat 

iter, ltmeris, a journey ver, -is, spring 

papaver, -is, the poppy (verber, -is), a blow 

Common. 

linter, -ris, a boat 



— 40 



163. 

Neuter, 
aes, aeris, copper 

Feminine, 
merges, -itis, a sheaf 
seges, -etis, a crop 
teges, -etis, a covering 
merces, -edis, a reward 

Common. 
ales, -itis, a bird 



Exceptions in 6s, es imparisyllabic. 



quies, -etis > 
requies, -etis f 
inquies, -.etis, restlessness 
compes, -edis, a fetter 

quadrupes, -edis, a quadruped 



II. Feminines. 

164. Nouns of the Third Declension in as, is, 

aus, x, es not increasing in the Genitive, and in s 

preceded by a consonant: 

haec tempest-as, this storm haec radix, this root 

haec aurls, this ear haec nubes, this cloud 

haec laus, this praise haec hiems, this winter. 

Exceptions in as, as. 



elephas, -antis, an elephant 
adamas, -antis, a diamond 



165. 

Masculine. 

as, assis, an as (coin) 

vas, vadis, a surety 
Neuter. 

vas, vasis, a vessel; plur. vasa, -orum (2d decl.) 
Indeclinable. 

fas, right nefas, wrong 

166. Exceptions in is, Is. 

Masculine. 

1. All nouns in nis, as: ignis, fire; amnis, a river; &c. 

2. Also the following: 



axis, -, an axis 
collis, -, a hill 
orbis, -, a circle 
anguis, -, a serpent 
fascis, -, a bundle 
postis, -, a post 
torquis, -, a collar 
sanguis, -Inis, blood 



pulvis, -eris, dust 
lapis, -ldis, a stone 
vermis, -, a worm 
mensis, -, a month 
piscis, -, a fish 
unguis, -, a claw 
fustis, -, a club 
ensis, -, a sword 



— 41 — 

167. Exceptions in x. 
Masculine. 

1. Greek nouns in ax, as: thorax, a breast-plate; 

2. Most nouns in ex, -icis, as: cortex, -icis, baric; ciilex, 
-icis, a gnat; &c. Only the following in ex are Feminine: 

lex, legis, a law faex, faecis, lees 

nex, neeis, a murder sfipellex, -ectilis, furniture 

(prex), preces, prayers 

3. Two in ix: 

calix, -icis, a cup fornix, -icis, an arch 

168. Exceptions in s preceded by a consonant. 
Masculine. 

1. fons, -tis, a spring pons, -tls, a bridge 
mons, -tls, a mountain adeps, -ipis, fat 

dens, -tis, a tooth 

2. Some nouns in ns, originally Adjectives with a masculine noun 
understood, as: 

oriens, -tis (sol), east rudens, -tis (funis), a cable 

occldens, -tis (sol), west torrens,-tis (fluvius), a torrent 

III. Neuters. 

169. Nouns of the Third Declension in 

a, e, I, c, 1, n, t, y, ar, ur, us: 

hoc aenigma, this riddle hoc nomen, this name 

hoc mare, this sea hoc caput, this head 

hoc lac, this milk hoc calcar, this spur 

hoc animal, this animal hoc fulgur, this lightning 

hoc tempus, this time. 

170. Exceptions. 
Masculine. 

sal, salis, salt leptis, -oris, a hare 

sol, soils, the sun mus, muris, a mouse 

turtur, -is, a turtle-dove ren, renis, kidney 

furfur, -is, bran lien, lienis, I U(m 

vultur, -is, a vulture splen, splenis ) 

salar, -is, trout pecten, -Inis, a comb 



42 — 



Feminine, 
juventus, -utis, youth 
senecttis, -titis, old age 
virtus, -utis, virtue 
servittis, -utis, slavery 
salus, -utis, safety 

stis, suls, a swine 



incus, -fidis, an anvil 
palus, -tidis, a marsh 
pecus, -udls, a head of cattle 
telliis, -uris, the earth 



grus, gruis, 



a crane 



Fourth Declension. 

171. Latin nouns whose genitive ends in us, are 

of the Fourth Declension. 

The Stem of nouns of the Fourth Declension ends in ii. Mas- 
culine and Feminine nouns end in the Nominative in us; Neuters 
in u. 



Singular. 

Nom. fruc' tus, fruit 

Gen. fruc' tus, of fruit 

Dat. fruc' tu I, to fruit 

Ace. fruc' turn, fruit 

Voc. fruc' tus, fruit 

Abl. fruc' tu, with fruit 

Nom. cor' nu, a horn 

Gen. cor' nus, of a horn 

Dat. cor' nu (ffi), to a horn 

Ace. cor' nu, a horn 

Voc. cor' nu, horn 

Abl. cor' nu, with a horn 



Plural, 
fruc' ttis, fruits 
fruc' tu uin, of fruits 
fruc' ti bus, to fruits 
fruc' tus, fruits 
fruc' ttis, fruits 
fruc' ti bus, with fruits 

cor' nu a, horns 
cor' nu una, of horns 
cor' ni bus, to horns 
cor' nti a, horns 
cor' nu a, horns 
cor' ni bus, i^i^ horns 



senstis, -us, sense 
vlsus, -us, sight 
gusttis, -tis, taste 
tactus, -tis, touch 



Examples for Practice: 
olfactus, -tis, smell 
mottis, -tis, motion 
fluctus, -us, a flood 
canttis, -us, a song 



obitus, -us, death 
nuttis, -tis, a nod 
gelu, -tis, (icy) cold 
genii, -us, the knee 



172. The following have the Dative and Ablative plural in tibtis: 



acus, acubus, a needle 
arcus, arctibus, a bow 
lacus, lactibus, a lake 
pecti, pecubus, cattle 
quercus, querctibus, an oak 



artus, artubiis, a joint 
partus, partubus, birth 
portus, porttibtis, a harbor 
tribus, tribtibtis, a tribe 
verti, verubtis, a spit 



specuSj specubtis, a cave 



43 — 



173. domus, a house } is declined thus: 



Nom. 
Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 



Singular. 

d6' mus, a house 
I do' mus, of a house 
ido' mi, at home 

do' mu 1, to a house 

do' mum, a house, home 

do' miis, house 



Plural. 

do'rniis, houses 

do' mu iini, ) ^ -l 

do mo' rum, ) 

do' mi bus, to houses 

do' mus & do'mos, houses 

do' mus, houses 



Abl. do'mo, with a liouse, from home do' mi bus, with houses 

Rule of Gender, 
^74. Most nouns of the Fourth Declension in us 
are masculine. The few words in u are all neuter. 



175. Exceptions. 

Feminine, 
acus, -us, a needle 
domus, -us, a house 
Idiis, -iium (pi.), the Ides 



maniis, -us, the hand 
porticus, -iis, a gallery 
tribiis, -iis, a tribe 

[67. 68. 105. 106.] 

Fifth Declension. 

176. Nouns which have el or el in the genitive 
from es in the nominative are of the Fifth Declension. 

The Stem of nouns of the Fifth Declension ends in e, which 



ppear: 


3 in all the cases. 


Singular. 


Nom. 


di' es, a day 


res, a thing 


Gen. 


di e' I, of a day 


re' T, of a thing 


Dat. 


di e' I, to a day 


r<5' I, to a thing 


Ace. 


dV em, a day 


rem, a thing 


Voc. 


dV es, day 


res, thing 


Abl. 


dV e, with a day 


re, with a thing 
Plural. 


Nom. 


di' es, days 


res, things 


Gen. 


di e' riiiu, of days 


re' riini, of things 


Dat. 


di e' biis, to days 


re' biis, to things 


Ace. 


dV es, days 


res, things 


Voc. 


dV es, days 


res, things 


Abl. 


di e' biis, with days re' bus, with things 



— 44 — 

Examples for Practice : 
facies, -ei, the face series, -ei, a series 

effigies, -ei, a likeness superficies, -ei, a surface 

spes, -*ei, hope fides, -ei, faith 

glades, -ei, ice progenies, -ei, offspring 

177. Of all the nouns of the Fifth Declension only two are com- 
plete in the plural, viz.: dies and res. 

178. The e of ei in the genitive and dative is long when 
preceded by a vowel, as: di-e-i, and short when preceded by a con- 
sonant, as: fi-de-I. 

Rule of Gender. 

179. All Nouns of this declension are feminine, ex- 
cept meridies, mid-day, and the plural of dies, a day, 
which are always masculine. 

180. In the singular, dies is usually masculine, but sometimes 
feminine, especially in phrases indicating a fixed time, or time in 
general, as: constitute die, on the appointed day. 

[69. 70. 105. 106.] 

Irregular Nouns. 

181. The Latin has only a few Indeclinable Nouns ; 

viz.: 

fas, right mane, morning 

nefas, wrong nihil, nothing 

instar, an image, kind pondo, (lit. in weight), pounds 

necesse, necessary opus, need 

besides the names of the Latin and Greek letters, as: A, D, alpha, 
delta, and some foreign words, as: sinapl, mustai^d. 

182. Some nouns are Defective In Case, i. e., they 
want one or more cases. 

The commonest of them are: 
(dicio), sway, Nom. sing, wanting, 
fors, chance, only in Nom. & Abl. sing, forte, by chance. 
(frux), fruit, Nom. sing, wanting, 
grates, thanks, only in Nom. & Ace. phir. 

impetus, attack, only in Nom., Ace. & Abl. sing. & Nom. & Ace. plur. 
infitias, denial, only in Ace. with ire, as: infitias Ire, to deny. 



— 45 — 

nSmo, no one, only in Dat. & Ace. — Gen. & Abl. supplied by nullliis, 

nullo. 
(ops), aid, Norn. sing, wanting; plur. opes, wealth, entire, 
(prex), prayer, only in Dat. & Abl. sing, preci, prece; — plur. 

preces, prayers, entire, 
(sordes), filth, only Ace. & Abl. sing, sordem, sorde; plural entire, 
(spons), will, only in Abl. sing, sponte, as: mea sponte, of my own 

accord. 
venum, sale, only in Ace. sing, as: venum dare, to put up for sale. 
(verber), whip, only in Abl. sing, verbere; plur. verbera, whipping. 
(vix or vicis), change, only in Gen., Ace. & Abl. sing, (vicis, vice in, 

vice). In the plural, only the Genitive is wanting. 
vis, force, only in Norn., Ace. & Abl. sing. — Plural entire. 

183. Of many verbal nouns in sus or tus of the Fourth De- 
clension, only the Ablative singular is used; as: jussfi meo, by my 
command; concessu, iinpulsu, permissu, rogatu meo. 

184. The Genitive Plural of many monosyllabic words does not 
occur; such are: 

cos, cor, fax, lux, os, pax, ros, sal, sol, tus, ver. 

185. Monosyllabic neuters, such as: aes, jus, rus, are found 
only in the Nominative and Accusative Plural: aera, jura, rura. 

186. Defective in Number are those which want 
either the singular or the plural. 

187. Nouns used in the Singular only: Singularia tantum. 

Some nouns, from the nature of the things meant, have no plural, 
as: justitla, justice; fames, hunger; aurum, gold. There are also 
other nouns which lack the plural, without any obvious reason, as: 
specimen, a sample; vesper, evening; meridles, mid-day; ver, 
spring. 

188. Nouns used in the Plural only: Plur alia tantum. 

The commonest of them are: 

First Declension. 
delicTae, -arum, delight insidiae, -arum, an ambush 

dlvitiae, -arum, riches nundinae, -arum, market-day 

exsequiae, -arum, a funeral nuptiae, -arum, a wedding 
feriae, -arum, holidays tenebrae, -arum, darkness 

indutiae, -arum, a truce Athenae, -arum, Athens 



46 



Second Declension, 
arma, -orum, arms, weapons llberi, -orum, children 
fasti, -orum, an almanac poster!, -orum, descendants 

gemlni, -orum, twins Delphi, -orum, Delphi 

Third Declension. 
Alpes, -liini, the Alps fauces, -mm, the throat 

majores, -iim, ancestors manes, -ium,2/*e shades of the dead 

189. Some words have, besides the general mean- 
ing for both numbers, a special meaning for the 
Plural. 

Plural. 
aedes, -liim, a house 
aquae, -arum, medicinal springs 
auxilia, -ortim, auxiliary troops 
castra, -orum, a camp 
copiae, -arum, troops 
fines, -mm, borders; a territory 



Singular. 
aedes, -is, a temple 
aqua, -ae, water 
auxillum, -I, help 
castrum, -i, a fori 
copia, -ae, abundance 
finis, -, an end, limit 
fortuna, -ae, fortune 
gratia, -ae, favor 



forttinae, -arum, wealth 



(ops) opis, help; power 
pars, -tis, a part 

rostrum, -I, a beak 

sal, sails, salt 



gratiae, -ariim, favors; thanks 
littera, -ae, a letter (of the al- litterae,-arum,an epistle; learn- 

phabet) ing; literature 

impedimentum, -i, a hindrance impedimenta, -orum, baggage 
opera, -ae, a task; service operae, -arum, workmen 

opes, -urn, wealth 
partes, -mm, a part (on the 

stage); a party 
rostra, -ortim, a speaker's plat- 

form 
sales, -mm, witty sayings 



190. Some nouns have two or more forms of De- 
clension (Heteroclites). Such are: 

laurus, -i laurus, -us, a laurel-tree 



eventus, -us 
luxuria, -ae 
materia, -ae 
segnitia, -ae 
elephantus, -i 
plebs, -is 



eventum, -i, an event 
luxuries, -ei, luxury 
materies, -ei, matter 
segnities, -ei, slothfulness 
elephas, -antis, an elephant 
plebes, -ei, the common people 



vas, vasis, a vessel, etc. etc. 



[107, 108.] 



— 47 - 

191. The following have the plural in a gender 
different from that of the singular (Heterogeneous 
Nouns): 

Singular. Plural, 

jociis, -I, a joke, jest joei, -orum, & joca, -orum, jokes 

locus, -I, a mace \ !? ci J " 5 f **> *»W« (*" 600**; 

^ \ loca, -orum, places 

- * , ( margarltae, -arum) „,„„*„ 

margarlta, -ae, a pearl \ mar | arIt ^ '_ 5rum \ Pearls 

caelum, -1, heaven caeli, -orum, heavens 

epuliim, -1, a banquet epiilae, -arum, a meal 

balneum, -1, a bath balneae, -arum, baths, a bathhouse 

frenfim, -1, a bridle freni, -orum, & frena, -orum, a bit 

\107. 108.] 

192. Sometimes a Noun in combination with an adjective takes 
a special signification, both parts being regularly inflected, as: jiis- 
jurandum, an oath; respublica, a commonwealth. 

Singular. 





an oath 






a commonwealth 


Nom. 


jus ju ran' dum 






res pu' bli ca 


Gen. 


ju ris ju ran' di 






re 1 pu' bli cae 


Dat. 


ju rT ju ran' do 






re 1 pu' bli cae 


Ace. 


jus ju ran' dum 






rem pu' bli cam 


Voc. 


jus ju ran' dum 






res pu'bli c& 


Abl. 


ju reju ran' do 






re pu' bli ca 






Plural. 




Nom. 


ju raj 11 ran' da 






res pu' bli cae 


Gen. 









re rum pu bli ca' rum 


Dat. 








re bus pu' bli cis 


Ace. 


ju raju ran' d3» 






res pu' bli cas 


Voc. 








res pu' bli cae 


Abl. 









re bus pu' bli cis [109 110] 




Pro 


per 


N; 


ames. 



193. The Romans regularly had three names, as: 
Marcus Tullius Cicero. 

194. Marcus, the praenomen, corresponded to our Christian 
name; Tullius, the nomen, was the name of. the gens or clanship; 
the cognomen, or surname, as Cicero, indicated the particular family 
to which one belonged. Another species of surname, agnomen, 



— 48 — 

was some significant epithet, as: Publius Cornelius Scipio Africa- 
nus, from the conquest of Carthage in Africa. 

195. The three names, however, were not always used, com- 
monly two. The Romans, when addressing a person, generally used 
the praenomen. 

1 96. Women had no personal names, but were known only by 
that of their gens with a feminine termination, as: Julia, the daugh- 
ter of Gains Julius Caesar. 

197. The commonest praenomens are thus abbreviated: 

A. = Aulus L. == Lucius Q. (Qu.) = Quintus 

App. = Appius M. == Marcus S. (Sex.) == Sextus 

C. (G-.) = Gams M\ = Manius Serv. = Servius 
Cn. (Gn.) = Gnaeus Mam. = Mamercus Sp. = Spurius 

D. = Decimus N. (Num.)=Numerius T. = Titus 

K. = Kaeso P. = Publius Ti. (Tib.) = Tiberius. 

Adjectives. 

198. Adjectives and Participles are in general de- 
clined like substantives. They distinguish gender by 
different forms in the same word, corresponding with 
their substantives in Number, Gender, and Case. 

199. Some Adjectives denote each gender by a different termi- 
nation, and consequently have three terminations, viz.: 

Of the First and Second Declensions: 
us, a, lim, as: bonus, -a, -um, good (see 72.) 

gr, a, fim, as.-j 11 ? 6 :- ~ a > : «m L /^ (see 74.) 

I niger, -ra, -rum, black (see 76.) 
■Qr, a, um, only satur, -a, -um, sated (see 66.) 

[21. 22. 25. 26.] 

Of the Third Declension: 
er, is, e, as: acgr, -ris, -re, sharp (see 137.) l55 56 ^ 

200. Some Adjectives of the Third Declension have two termina- 
tions — one for the masculine and feminine, and the other for the 
neuter; they end in: 

is, e, as: tristis, -e, sad (see 139.) 

or, us, as: durior, -us, harder (see 139.) 

[55. 56. 73. 74.] 



— 49 — 

201. Some Adjectives of the Third Declension have only one 
termination which is common to all genders; they end in: 

1, as: vigil, wakeful (see 90.) 
r, as: paupSr, poor (see 95.) 
s, as: prudens, sensible (see 141.) 
x, as: felix, happy (see 141.) 

[57—60.] 

Irregular Adjectives. 

202. The following Adjectives with their Compounds have the 
Genitive singular in lus, and the Dative in I for all genders (see 77.). 

alius, -a, -iid, another ullus, -a, -um, any 

nullus, -a, -uni, no unus, -a, -um, one 

solus, -&, -um, alone alter, -a, -um, the other (of two) 

totus, -a, -um, whole uter, -ra, -rum, which (of two) 

neuter, -ra, -rum, neither 

Singular. 
m . f n. 

Nom. so' lus so' la so' lum, alone 

Gen. so li' us so li' us so II' us 

Dat so'll so'll so'll 

Like uter are declined its compounds, as iiterque, utraque, 
iitrumque, either. Of alteruter, the one or the other of the two, 
either both parts are declined; alter uter, altera utra, alteruru 
utrum; or only the latter: alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum. 

[71. 72.] 

203. Many Adjectives of one termination, especially such as 
end in er, 5s, or, os, fex, are not used in the Nominative, Accusative, 
and Vocative plural of the neuter gender, viz.: 

degener, -is, degenerate compos, -otis, capable 

pauper, -is, poor artlfex, -ids, artificial 

ales, -ltis, winged mops, InopTs, needy 

bipes, -edis, two-footed redox, -ucis, returning 

dives, -ltis, rich sons, -tis, guilty 

sospes, -ltis, safe supplex, -Icis, suppliant 
concolor ? -oris, of the same co- trux, -ucis, fierce 

menior, -is, mindful [lor vigil, -is, wakeful 

204. Of ceteri, -ae, -a, the rest, the Nominative singular mascu- 
line is not used, singuli, -ae, -a, one at a time; pauci, -ae, -a, 
few; and plerique, pleraeque, pleraque are not used in the singular. 



— 50 — 

205. The following Adjectives are Indeclinable: 

friigl, frugal tot, so many 

nequam, worthless quot, how many 

206. The Substantives: victor, victrix, conqueror, and ultor, 
ultrix, avenger, are also used as Adjectives — victorious, revenge- 
ful — and, in poetry, they admit even a neuter of the plural, as: 
arma victrlcia, victorious arms. 

Comparison. 

207. Adjectives have three degrees of Comparison: 
the Eositive, the Comparative, and the Superlative. 

208. The Positive Degree is expressed by the adjective in its 
simple form, as: durus, hard. 

209. The Comparative Degree ends in or for the masculine 
and feminine, and in us for the neuter, and is formed by changing 
the genitive ending i or is of the positive into lor, iris; thus: 



Positive. 


Genitive. 


Comparative. 


excelsiis, high 


excels! 


excelsior, excel sius 


liber, free 


Hberi 


liberior, Hberius 


pulcher, beautiful 


pulchrl 


pulchrior, pulchrms 


acer, sharp 


acris 


acrior, acrms 


levls, light 


levis 


levior, levius 


sagax, sagacious 


sagacis 


sagacior, sagaciils 


prudens, prudent 


prtidentis 


prudentior, prude ntius 



210. Comparatives are of the Third Declension; they are de- 
clined like durior, durius (see 139.) 

211. The Superlative is formed by changing the genitive end- 
ing I or is of the positive into issimiis, issima, issimum; thus: 

Positive. Genitive. Superlative, 

pretiosus, valuable pretiosi pretlosissimus 

dlligens, diligent dlligentis diligentissimtis 

212. Superlatives are declined like bonus, -a,-um of the First 
and Second Declensions. 

213. Adjectives in er add rimiis to the positive to form the 
Superlative, as: 

pulcher, beautiful, pulcherrlmus; acer, sharp, acerrlmus. 



— 51 — 

214. vetus, old, has Superlative veterrlmtis, and mattirus, 
ripe, maturissinius and sometimes maturrimus. 

215. Six adjectives in His form their Superlative by changing 
the ending is into limus, as: facilis, facillimus. These are: 

facilis, easy, facillimus difficilis, difficult, difficillimus 

similis, like, simillimus dissimilis, unlike, dissimillimus 

gracilis, slender, gracilllmus humilis, low, humillimus 

216. Compound adjectives in dicus, ficus, and volus form 
their Comparative and Superlative by changing us into entior, 
entissimus, as: 

benevolus, benevolent benevolentior benevolentissimus 
beneficus, beneficent beneficentior beneficentissimus 

magnificus, magnificent magnlficentior magnificentissimiis 

217. In like manner are compared: 

egeniis (egens), needy egentior egentissimus 

providus, provident providentior providentissiruus 

218. Adjectives in us, preceded by a vowel, are compared 
by means of magis and maxime, more and most: 

dubius, doubtful magis dubius maxime dubius 

219. But adjectives in quus are regular: 

antiquus, old antlquior antiquissimus 

[73—76.] 

Irregular and Defective Comparison. 

220. The following adjectives have different words for expres- 
sing the different degrees of comparison: 

bonus, good melior, better optimus, best 

malus, bad pejor, worse pessimus, worst 

magnus, great major, greater maximus, greatest 

parvus, little minor, less, lesser minimus, least 

multus, much plus, more plurimus, most 

221. plus, more, is thus declined: 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. &. Ace. plus plu' res plfi' ra (plu' ri a) 

Gen. plu' ris plu' ri um plti' ri urn 

Dat. &. Abl. — plu' ri bus plu' ri "bus 

complur§s, several, very many, is declined like plures. 



— 52 — 



222. Mark the degrees of the two Indeclinable adjectives: 

nequam, worthless ngquior ngquissimiis 

frugl, frugal frugalior frugalissimus 

223. The following adjectives have two Irregular Superlatives: 



exterus, outward 
infer lis, below 

posterus, next 

superus, above 



exterior, outer extremus, (extlmus), outmost 

inferior, lower infimus, Imus, lowest 

„ „ w {latter postremus, ) last 

^ ' (later postumus, J latest 

superior, upper supremiis, summus, highest 



224:. The following adjectives are Defective in their comparison: 
1. Positive wanting. 



Comparative, 
citerior, more on this side 
interior, inner 
prior, prior, former 
propior, nearer 
ulterior, ulterior, further 
ocior, swifter 
potior, preferable 
deterior, worse 



Superlative, 
eitimus, most on this side 
intimiis, innermost, intimate 
primus, foremost, first 
proximus, nearest 
ultimus, furthest, last 
ocissimus, swiftest 
potissimus, most important 
deternmus, worst 



II. Comparative wanting. 
Positive. Superlative. 

diversus, different diversissimus, most different 

falsiis, false falsissimus, falsest 

inclutus, renowned inclutissimus, most renowned 

invitus, unwilling invitissimus, most unwilling 

novus, new novissimus, latest, last 

?acer, sacred sacerrimus, most sacred 

vetus, old veterrimus, oldest 

III. Superlative wanting. 
Positive. Comparative. 

jiivenis, young junior, younger 

senex, old senior, older 

alacer, gay alacrior, gayer 

longinquus, far longinquior, farther 

propinquus, near propinquior, nearer 

popularis, popular popfilarior, more popular 

saltitaris, salutary salutarlor, more salutary 

[77. 78.} 



- 53 — 

225. Some Adjectives are, by their meaning, excluded from 
comparison. Among these are certain words implying matter, 
time, place, and person, as: ferreus, iron; hodiernus, of to-day; 
Romanus, Roman; paternus, paternal; also words denoting the 
lowest or highest degree of a quality, as: singularis, alone of its 
kind, and Compounds with per and prae; but praeclarus, re- 
nowned, and pertmax, very tenacious, are found in the Compara- 
tive and Superlative. 

226. Again, there are Adjectives which, from their form, or 
without any obvious reason, are incapable of comparison, viz.: 

1. Adjectives in us, after a vowel (see 218.). 

2. Compound Adjectives containing a verb or a substantive, as: 
particeps, sharing; inops, needy; except Compounds of dico, facio, 
volo (see 216.), and Compounds of ars, cor, mens, as: iners, un- 
skilled; concors, harmonious; aniens, senseless; which are regularly 
compared. 

3. Adjectives in icus, lmus, in us, Inus, orfis, ulus, as: 

modicus, moderate; legitimus, lawful; diutinus, lasting; matutinus, 
early; canorus, melodious; sedulus, busy. 

4. Many Adjectives which cannot be classed under distinct head- 
ings: 

caducus, drooping m6rus, mere 

cicur, tame mediocrls, middling 

curvus, curved mem5r, mindful 

ferus, wild mirus, wonderful 

gnarus, skilful par, equal 

impiger, active impar, unequal 

lacgr, torn rudis, rude 

lassus, wearied trux, fierce 

mutilus, maimed vagus, vagrant. 

227. Participles, when used as Adjectives, are regularly com- 
pared, as: docttis, learned, doctior, doctissimus; abstinens, abstinent, 
abstinentior, abstinentissimus. 

Adverbs formed from Adjectives are compared as follows 
(see 440): 

carus, dear: care, carius, carissime 

misSr, wretched: misers, miserms, miserrimg 

iSvis, light; ISvIter, levms, l£visslme 



54 — 



Numerals. 
Numeral Adjectives. 



228. ( 


3ardin2 


il Num 


erals express number m its 


simplest 


form, 


and answer the question quot? how 


many ? 








l 




I 


talis, una, iiniim 


2 




II 


duo, diiae, duo 


3 




III 


tres, tria 


4 




IV 


quattuor 


5 




Y 


quinque 


6 




VI 


sex 


7 




VII 


septem 


8 




VIII 


octo 


9 




IX 


novem 


10 




X 


decern 


11 




XI 


undecim 


12 




XII 


duodecim 


13 




XIII 


tredecim (decern et tres) 


14 




XIV 


quattuordeclm (decern et quattuor) 


15 




XV 


quindecim (decern et quinque) 


16 




XVI 


sedecim (decern et sex) 


17 




XVII 


septendecim (decern et septem) 


18 




XVIII 


duodeviginti (decern et octo) 


19 




XIX 


undeviginti (decern et novem) 


20 




XX 


viginti 


21 




XXI 


uniis et viginti or viginti unus 


22 




XXII 


duo et viginti or viginti duo 


23 




XXIII 


tres et viginti or viginti tres 


30 




XXX 


trlginta 


40 


XXXX or XL 


quadraginta 


50 




L 


quinquaginta 


60 




LX 


sexaginta 


70 




LXX 


septuaginta 


80 




LXXX 


octoginta 


90 


LXXXX or XC 


nonaginta 


100 




c 


centum 


101 




CI 


centum et iinus or centum unus 


200 




cc 


ducentl, -ae, -a 


300 




ceo 


trecentT, -ae, -a 


400 




cccc 


quadringenti, -ae, -a 



55 — 



500 D or ID quingenti, -ae, -& 

600 DC or 100 sescentT, -ae, -& 

700 DCC or 10 CO septingenti, -ae, -& 

800 DCCC octingenti, -ae, -a 

900 DCCCC nongenti, -ae, -& 

1000 M or CIO mille 

2000 MM or IIM duo milia 

5000 100 quinque milia 

6000 IOOM sex milia 

10 000 CCIOO decern milia 

50 000 1000 quinquaginta milia 

100 000 CCOIOOO centum milia [milia 

1 000 000 CCCCI0000 decies centena milia or decies centum 

229. The three first are declined; the rest, as far as one hun- 
dred, are indeclinable. Hundreds, as: ducenti, ae, a, trecenti, 
ae, a, etc., are declined like the plural of bonus. 

unus, una, tinuni, one 
Singular, 
m. /• n. 

N. u' niis u f na u f niim 
G. u ni' iis u ni' lis u ni' us 
fi' ni ti' ni u' ni 
xi' num u' nam ti' num 





Plural. 




m. 


/• 


n. 


u'nl 


xi' nae 


u' na 


u no f rum 


u na f ruin 


ti no' rum 


u' nis 


ti' nis 


ti' nis 


u' nos 


u' nas 


ti' na 



a'no 



u' na 



u' no 



u' nis 



u' nis 



u' nis 



The plural of unus occurs only with such nouns as have no sin- 
gular, as: tina castra, one camp; tinae nuptiae, one marriage. 



m. 
N. du'o 
G. du o' riim 
du 6' bus % 

du'os, du'o 



D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 



duo, duae, duo, two 

/■ 
du' ae 
du a' riini 
du a' bus 

du' as 



n. 
du' o 

du o' rum 
du o' biis 

du'o 



tres, tria, three 

m. &f. 
tres 



tri' um 
tri' biis 
tres 



n. 
tri' a 
tri' iim 
tri' bus 
tri' a 



du o' biis du a' biis du o' biis 



tri 'biis tri' biis 



ambo, ambae, ambo, both, is declined like duo. 



230. In the singular mille is an Indeclinable Adjective; in the 
plural it is a Substantive and takes the genitive, as: mille milltgs, 
a thousand soldiers; duo milia mllltum, two thousand soldiers. 



— 56 — 

231. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the 
same order as the English, as: viginti uniis, twenty-one, or uniis St 
viginti one and twenty. 

232. From 100 on, units follow tens, tens hundreds, etc., as in 
English; et, and, is either omitted, or used only between the two 
highest denominations, as: 

centum et quinquaginta or centum quinquaginta, 150 
centum et quinquaginta trSs or centum quinquaginta trSs, 153. 

233. sexcenti is used indefinitely for any large number, as one 
thousand in English. [79# 80t] 

234. Ordinal Numerals denote a series, and answer 
the question quotus ? which one in the series ? 



1st, 


primus, -&, -iim (prior, -i 


us) 23d, 


tertius et vlcesimiis 


-2d, 


secundus (altSr) 


30th, 


tricesimus or trlgesi- 


3d, 


tertius 




mus 


4th, 


quart us 


40th, 


quadraggslmus 


5th, 


quintus 


50th, 


quinquagSsImiis 


6th, 


sextus 


60th, 


sexagesimals 


7th, 


septimiis 


70th, 


septuagSsImus 


8th, 


octavus 


80th, 


octogeslmus 


9th, 


noniis 


90th, 


nonaggslmus 


10th, 


declmiis 


100th, 


centesimus 


11th, 


undecimus 


101st, 


centesimus (et) primus 


12th, 


duodecimos 


200th, 


ducenteslmus 


13th, 


tertius declmiis 


300th, 


trgcentgslmiis 


14th, 


quartus deelmus 


400th, 


quadringentgslmus 


15th, 


quintus deelmus 


500th, 


quingentgslmus 


16th, 


sextus declmiis 


600th, 


sescenteslmiis 


17th, 


septimiis declmiis 


700th, 


septingenteslmus 


18th, 


octavus dSdmiis or duo- 


800th, 


octingenteslmus 




deviceslmiis 


900th, 


nongente'slmus 


19th, 


noniis declmiis or unde- 


1000th, 


milleslmus 




vlceslmiis 


2000th, 


bis milleslmus 


20th, 


vicgslmiis or vigSsimiis 


3000th, 


ter milleslmiis 


21st, 


imiis et vicSsImiis or 


10 000th, 


deciSs milleslmus 




viceslmus primus 


100 000th, 


centlSs milleslmus 


22d, 


alter et vicSsmms or 


1 000 000th, 


decI6s centies mills- 




vlcSsimus s£cundiis 




slmus 



— 57 — 



235. All Ordinals are adjectives in lis, &, ttm; except pr!6r, 
prlus, first, which is used instead of primus in speaking of two; 
alter is often used for secundus. In compounding Ordinals, observe 
the same practice as with Cardinals (see 231). 

236. Ordinals with pars, part, expressed or understood, may 
as: 



tertia pars, a third; quarta pars, a 

[81. 82.] 

answer the question 



be used to denote fractions, 
fourth; duae quintae, two fifths. 

237. Distributive Numerals 

quoteni? how many at a time? and are declined like 
the plural of bonus. 

1. singuli, -ae, -a, one by one 

2. bini, -ae, -a, two by two, etc 

3. term (trim) 



4. quaterni 

5. quini 

6. senl 

7. septeni 

8. octonl 

9. novenl 

10. den! 

11. undeni 

12. diiodenl 

13. term deni 

14. quaterni deni 

15. quini deni 

16. sen! deni 



22. viceni bin! 

23. viceni ternl 
30. trlceni 

40. quadrageni 

50. quinquagenT 

60. sexageni 

70. septuagenl 

80. octogeni 

90. nonagem 
100. centeni 
200. ducenl 
300. treceni 
400. quadringeni 
500. qumgeni 
600. sexcSnl 
700. septingeni 
800. octingenl 
900. nongeni 
1000. singula milia 
2000. blna milia 
3000. terna milia, etc. 



17. septeni deni 

18. octonl deni or duodevlceni 

19. novenl deni or unde viceni 

20. viceni 

21. viceni singuli 
238. Distributives are used as follows: 

In the meaning of so many a piece or on each side, as: Scipio 
et Hannibal cum singulis interpretibus congressi sunt, Scipio and 
Hannibal met, with an interpreter on each side; 

In multiplication, as: bis bina, twice two; 

Instead of Cardinals, when a noun is plural in form, but singular 
in meaning, as: blna castra, two camps. But with these, uni, -ae, -a 
is used instead of singuli, and trim instead of ternl; as: tlnae litte- 
rae, one letter; trinae litterae, three letters. 



— 58 — 

239. Multiplicative Numerals answer the question 
quotuplex? how many fold? They are adjectives in 
ex, Icis. 

simplex, -icis, single quinctiplex, fivefold 

duplex, twofold, double septemplex, sevenfold 

triplex, threefold, triple decemplex, tenfold 

quadruplex, fourfold centuplex, a hundredfold 

240. Proportional Numerals answer the question 
quotuplus? how many times as great? and are adjec- 
tives in us, a, una. Only a few are commonly used. 

simplus, -a, -fim, simple quadruples, four times as great 

diiplus, twice as great septuples, seven times as great 

triplus., three imes as great octupliis, eight times as great 

Numeral Adverbs. 
24:1. Numeral Adverbs answer the question quoti- 
ens ? how often? Being adverbs, they are indeclinable. 

1. semel, once 21. semel et vlcles 

2. bis, twice 22. bis et vlcles 

3. ter, thrice . 23. ter et vlcles 

4. quater, four times, etc. 30. tricies 

5. quinquies 40. quadragies 

6. sexies 50. quinquagies 

7. septies 60. sexagies 

8. octiSs 70. septuagies 

9. novies 80. octogies 

10. decies 90. nonagies 

11. undecies 100. centles 

12. duodecigs 200. ducentiSs 

13. terdecies (tredgcies) 300. trecenties 

14. quaterdecies (quattiiordecies) 400. quadringenties 

15. quinquigsdecies (quindecies) 500. quingenties 

16. sexiesdeeies 600. seseentiSs 

17. septiesdecies 700. septingenties 

18. duodevicles (octigs decies) 800. oetingentigs 

19. undevlcies (novies decies) 900. nongenties 

20. vlcles 1000. miltes 



59 



2000. bis milies 
3000. ter milies 
10 000. decies mlli6s 



100 000. centies milies 

1 000 000. milies milies 

2 000 000. bis milies milies 



242. The Accusative and Ablative neuter of Ordinals are used 
as Adverbs of order, thus: 

prlmum, primo, first, at first; 

(secundum, secundo) commonly: iterum, secondly; 

tertlum, tertio, thirdly. 

[81. 82.] 

Pronouns. 

243. Pronouns distinguish the Person speaking, or 
the First Person, from the Person spoken to, or the 
Second Person, and the object spoken of, Third Person. 
Accordingly, we have pronouns of the First, Second, 
and Third persons which are used either substantively 
or adjectively, or both substantively and adjectively. 

244. Strictly speaking, the Pronouns of the First 
and Second Persons are the only Personal Pronouns, 
because they apply to Persons, and to these only. 

245. The Personal Pronouns of the First Person are: 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl, 



Substantive. 

e' go, / 
me' I, of me 
mi' hi, to me 
me, me 

mg, from me 



Singular. 



Possessive. 



meus, me&, meiim, my 



Plural. 



nos, we 
no' strum ) 
no' strl f 
no' bis, to us 
nos, us 



of us 



noster, nostra, nostrfim, our 



no' bis, from us 



60 



246. The Personal Pronouns of the Second Person are: 



Norn. 

G9n. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



Substantive. 

tu, thou 
W I, of thee 
tV bi, to tfiee 

tii, #iom 
ts, /rom 2ftee 



ar. 



tuiis, tu&, tuum, ^2/, t/our 



Plural. 



vos, ye or ?/ow. 

ve' strum) 

ve' stri [ J y 

vo' bis, to you 

vos, you 

vos, ye or you 

vo' bis, /rom ?/oit 



vester, vestrS, vestriSm, your 



The Genitives nostrum, vestrum are used partitively in reference 
to number. 

247. The Personal Pronouns of the Third Person 
(he, she, it, they J are wanting in Latin; they are re- 
presented by the Determinative is, ea, id, he, she, it. 



Singular, 
n. 

id he, she, it 

e' jus of him, etc. 

£' I to, for him 

id him, her, it 





* 


Substantive. 




m. 




/. 


M. 


is 




e'a 


G. 


e' jus 




& jus 


D. 


S'l 




e'i 


A. 


e' um 




e' am 


A. 


e'o 




S'a 


N. 


T'l, e'l 




e' ae 


G. 


e o' rum 


e a' riim 


D. 


V is, e' 


is 


V is, 6' Is 


A. 


e' os 




e' as 


A. 


I'ls, e' 


is 


V Is, g' is 



{supplied by the Gen.) 

ejus, Ms, hers, 
its 



e'o 



from, by him 



Plural. 
S' a tfie?/ 

e o' rum of them eorum, earum, 

V Is, e' Is to, for them eorum, their 
£' a them or theirs 

V Is, S'ls /rom, by them 

Pronouns of the Third Person, from their signification, cannot 
have a Vocative. 



— 61 — 
248. The Reflexive Pronoun of the Third Person is: 

Substantive. Possessive. 

Singular. 
Nom. 

Gen. su' I, of him(self). her(self), it(self) „_ „* 

n * -, J / t,. V jir ; ™ ■*; i^i suus, sua, suum, /ll5, 

Dat. si' bi, to him(self). her(self). it(self) , ' , ' ' ' 

a «- j • / i* t V w •#/**! her s). its own 

Ace. se, him(self), her (self), it(self) l " 

Abl. se, wiM him(self), her(self), it(self) 

Plural. 

Nom. 

Gen. su' I o/ them(selves) fi sM ifim ^ r 

Dat si' bi, to them(selves) 

Ace. se, them (selves) 

Abl. s£, uuM them(selves) 



own 



249. Possessives are declined like Adjectives of the first and 
second Declensions; but metis has the Voc. Sing. Masc. mi (see 67). 

250. From noster and vester come the Patrial Adjectives: 
nostras, -atis, of our country; vestras, -atis, of your country. 

251. The particle -met is joined for emphasis to all forms of 
ego, except nostrum; to all forms of tu, except tu and vestrumj 
to sibi, se and the forms of suds; as: egomet, / myself, -te is 
joined to tu: tute, yourself; -pte is joined to the Ablative Singular 
of the Possessive, as: suapte manu, by his own hand; se, the 
Accusative of sui, is often doubled, as: sese. [27. 28. 83. 84.] 

Pronouns of the Third Person. 

Demonstrative Pronouns. 

252. The proper Demonstratives are: 

hie, this; iste, that; ille, that (yonder). 

Singular. Plural, 

hie, haec, hoc, this (of mine) 



m. 


/• 


n. 


771. 


/• 


n. 


N. hie 


haec 


hoc 


hi 


hae 


haec 


G. hu'jus 


hu'jus 


hu'jus 


ho' rum 


ha' rum 


ho' rum 


D. hu'ic 


hu'ic 


hu'ic 


his 


his 


his 


A. hunc 


hanc 


h5c 


hos 


has 


haec 


A. hoc 


hac 


hoc 


his 


his 


his 



— 62 — 

iste, istfi, istud, that (of yours) 

Singular. Plural. 

m. f n. m. f, n. 

N. i' ste i' sta i' stud i' stl i' stae i' sta 

G. i sti' iis i sti' us i sti' us i sto' rum i sta' rum i sto' rum 

D. i' sti i' sti i' sti i' stis i' stis ' i' stis 

A. i' stum V st am i' stud i' stos i' stas i' sta 

A. i' sto i' sta i' sto i' stis i' stis i' stis 

ille, ilia, illud, that (yonder) 

N. il' 18 il' la il' lud II' li il' lae il' lft 

G, 11 li' us il li' us il li' us il lo' rum il la' rum il lo' rum 

D. IV li il' li il' li il' lis il' lis il' lis 

A. IV lum il' lam il' lud il' los il' las il' la 

A. il'lo il'la il'lo il' lis il' lis il' lis 

253. iste and ille have forms in c, but only in the Nominative, 
Accusative and Ablative singular, and in the Nominative and Accusative 
plural (neuter only), thus: 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. istic istaec istoc (commonly isttic) istaec 

Ace. istunc istanc istoc ( " isttic) istaec 

Abl. istoc istac istoc 

254. Forms of hie ending in s, and the neuter hoc are found 
with the intensive -ee, as: hujusc<§, hocce. There is also an inter- 
rogative form with ~ne, hicine, haecine, hocine ? this here? 

\85. 86.] 

Determinative Pronouns. 

255. Certain pronouns connected with the Demonstratives in 
meaning, are ordinarily called Determinatives. These are: 





is, he, that, 


idem, 


the 


same; ipse, he, 


self. 








is, 


ea, id, 


he, 


she, it; that. 










Singular. 








Plural 








m. 


/• 


n. 




m. 


/• 




n. 


Nom. 


is 


e' a 


id 




i'I, e'l 


e' ae 




e'a 


Gen. 


e' jus 


e' jus 


e' jus 




e o' rum 


e a' rum 


e 6' rum 


Dat. 


S'l 


e'l 


e'l 




i'is, e'ls 


Vis, 


e'ls 


i'is, e'is 


Ace. 


e' um 


e' am 


Id 




e' os 


e' as 




e' a 


Abl. 


6' o 


g'a 


S'o 




i'is, S'ls 


I'is, 


6' Is' 


i'is, e'ls 



-•63 — 



Idem, eadem, idgm, the same. 



Norn. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 



m. 
T dem 
ejus' dem 
e r dem 
e un' dem 
e 6' dem 



Nom. I V dem, e V dSm 

Gen. e o run' dem 

Dat. e Is' dem, I Is' dem 

Ace. e os' dem 

Abl. e Is' dem, 1 is' dem 



Singular. 

/ 

e' a dem 
ejus' dem 
e V dem 
e an' dem 
e a' dem 

Plural, 
e ae' dem 
e|i run' dem 
e is' dem, I Is' dem 

e as' dem 

e Is' dem, I Is' dem 



n. 
V dem 
6 jus' dem 
e i' dem 
i' dem 
e o' dem 



e' a dem 

e o run' dem 

e Is' dem, I Is' dem 

e' a dem 

e Is' dem, 1 Is' dem 



ipse, ipsa, ipsum, he, 



Singular. 
m. f. n. 

N. ip' se ip' s5» ip' sura 

G. ip si' us ip si' lis ip si' iis 

D. ip' si ip' si ip' si 

A. ip' sum ip' sam ip' siiin 

A. ip' so ip'sa ip' so 



she, it; self. 
Plural. 



m. j. 11. 

ip' si ip' sae ip'sa 

ip so' ruin ip sa' rum ip so' rum 

ip' sis ip' sis ip' sis 

ip' sos ip' sas ip' s& 

ip' sis ip' sis ip' sis 

[85 t 86.] 



Relative Pronouns. 

256. The Relative Pronoun is 

qui, quae, quod, who, which, that. 
Singular. 



VI. 

qui 



N. 

G. cii'jus 

D. cul 

A. quern 

A. quo 



/ 

quae 
cu' jus 

CUl 

quam 
qua 



n. 
quod 
cu' jus 
cul 
quod 
quo 



m. 
qui 

quo' rum 
qui' bus 
quos 
qui' bus 



Plural. 

quae 
qua' rum 
qui' bus 
quas 
qui' bus 



n. 

quae 
quo' rum 
qui' bus 
quae 
qui' bus 



257. Ancient and rare forms: quis (queis) for quibus; qui 
for quo, qua, chiefly with -cum; qulcum = quocum, with whom. 



— 64 ■ — 

258. The following are General Relatives: 

Adjective. quicunque quaecunque quodcunque, whichever 

Substantive, quisquls, whoever — quidquid, whatever 

259. They are declined in the same manner as the simple words; 
cunque is invariable; of quisquls both parts are declined, but it is 
generally used in these two forms only: quisquls, whoever; quid- 
quid, whatever. [87. 88.] 

Interr o gati ve Pronouns . 

260. The Interrogative (that is question-asking) pronouns are: 

m. f. n. 

Substantive. quis? who? quid? what? 

Adjective. qui? quae? quod? which? 

Subst and Adj. titer ? utra ? iltrum ? who? which of two? 

Singular. 
Norn, quis? who? quid? whatl 

Gen. cti'jus? whose? cu' jus? of what? 

Dat. cm? to or for whom? cul? to or for what? 

Ace. quern? whom? quid? what? 

Abl. quo? from or with whom? quo? from or with what? 

261. The Plural of quis, quid? who, what? and both numbers 
of qui, quae, quod? which? are the same as the forms of the Re- 
lative qui, quae, quod, who, which. 

262. For the Declension of liter see 77. 

263. To all cases of quis? quid? the particle nam (literally 
for) may be appended for the sake of emphasis, answering to our 
English pray, as: quidnam agis? pray, what are you doing? 

264. From cujus, whose? comes the Patrial Adjective 

ciijas, -atis, of whose country? [87. 88.] 

Indefinite Pronouns. 

265. The following are Indefinite Pronouns: 



Masculine. 




Feminine. 


Neuter. 




quis (subst. & 


adj.) 


quae or qua 


quid (subst.), any 


one 


qui (adj.) 




quae or qua 


quod (adj.), any one, any 


aliquis (subst. 


& adj.) 


aliqua 


aliquid (subst.), some, some one 


allqui (adj.) 




aliqua 


aliquod (adj.), some, some one 


quidam (subst, 


, & adj.) quaedam 


(quiddam (subst.) 
(quoddam (adj.) 


\ a certain 
[ one 



65 — 



quispiam (snbst. & adj.) quaepiam 
quisquam (snbst.) — 

quisqug (snbst. & adj.) quaeque 

qui vis (snbst. & adj.) quaevis 
quIlibSt (snbst. & adj.) quaelibet 



j quidpiam (subst.) 
[quodpiam (adj.) 
quidquani (subst.), 
j quidque (subst.) 
(quodque (adj.) 
j quidvis (subst.) 
\ quod vis (adj.) 
[ quidlibet (subst.) 
(quodllbet (adj.) 



i some one, 
) some 
any one (no pi.) 

> each one 

any one 
you please, 

any one 
you like 



266. They are all declined like the Interrogates, except ali- 
quis, which has in the feminine singular and the neuter plural ali- 
qua. They take quid in the neuter when used substantively, and 
quod when used adjectively; quisquam, any one, is almost always a 
substantive, and used in negative sentences. 

267. unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquidque, unurn quodque, 
each one, every one, each, is used only in the singular, and both 
tinus and quisque are declined: Gen. uniuscujusque, Dat. unicuique, 
and so on. 

268. Akin to Indefinite Pronouns are Indefinite Adjectives: 
ullus, -a, -urn, any alius, -a, -ud, another 
nullus, -&, -um, no alter, -a, -urn, the other (of two) 
nonnulliis, -a, -tini, some neuter, -ra, -rum, neither 

To ullus and nullus the corresponding nouns are: nemS (-Inis), 
nobody, and nihil (indeclinable), nothing. 

269. Mark the following Pronominal Adjectives: 

Demonstrative. Relative, 

talis, -e, such qualis, -e, such as 

tantus, -a, -um, so great quantus, -a, -urn, as great 

tot, so many quot, as many as 

Interrogative. Indefinite, 

qualis, -e ? what? of what sort? aliquantus, -a, -um, some, con- 
quantus, -a, -um ? how great? siderable 
quot? how many? aliquot, some 

Of these tot, quot, aliquSt are indeclinable, the rest are declined 
like adjectives. 

They are called Correlatives, when used in pairs, so that one 
refers or answers to the other, as: talis, .qualis, such., as; like., 
like; tantus. .quantus, so great, .as; tot. .quot, so many, .as; 

[89, 90,] 



— 66 — 

Verbs. 

270. The Essential Characteristic of a verb is that 
it ascribes some action, state, or quality to a subject. 
Verbs, like Nouns and Pronouns, havo their inflec- 
tion, or changes of form in order to express certain 
changes of meaning; this inflection is called their 
Conjugation. 

The forms of Conjugation are: 

Voices, genera; Tenses, tempora; Moods, modi; 
Numbers and Persons, numeri et personae. 

Voices. 

271. Some verbs are usually followed by an object 
signifying that at which the action of the verb is 
directed. They are said to be Transitive Verbs and 
express an assertion in two forms, called the Active 
Voice and the Passive Voice. 

272. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from 
the subject, as: canis puerum mordebat, the dog bit the boy. The 
Passive denotes that the subject receives the action of the verb, 
as: puer mordebatur a cane, the boy was bitten by the dog. 

273. Other verbs, again, express an action which is limited to 
the subject, as: puer currit, the boy runs. They are called In- 
transitive Verbs, and from their nature cannot be regularly used 
in the Passive Voice. 

274. Transitive verbs may be used without any expressed ob- 
ject (absolutely), as: puer scribit, the boy writes. 

275. A Reflexive Verb is one that represents the action as 
exerted by the subject upon itself. The Passive Voice often has a re- 
flexive meaning, as: occasio datur, the occasion offers, presents itself. 

276. The Active and Passive Voices in Latin are 
equivalent to the corresponding English forms. 
Many verbs are only used in the Passive form, but 
with an active or reflexive signification; they are 
called Deponents, 



— 6T — 

277. Some verbs which form their Perfect like Deponents, are 
called Semi-Deponents, as: 

audeo, -ere, to dare ausus sum, / dared 

gaudeo, -ere, to rejoice gavistis sum, / rejoiced 

soleo, -ere, to be wont solitus sum, I was wont 

fido, -ere, to trust flsus sum, / trusted 

278. Some Active Verbs have a Perfect Passive Participle 
with Active meaning, viz.: 

ceno, -are, to dine cenatus, having dined 

prandeo, -ere, to breakfast pransus, having breakfasted 

poto, -are, to drink pot us, having drunk 

j'iro, -are, to swear Jtiratus, having sworn 

279. Again, a few Active verbs have a Passive meaning: th or 
are sometimes called Neutral Passives, viz.: 

vapulare, to be flogged; venire (venum ire, to go to sale), to be sold. 

Tenses. 

280. There are Six Tenses in Latin, viz.: 

Of Continued Action 
the Present, as: scribo, / am writing; 

the Imperfect, used chielly for description or repeated action, 
as: scribebam, 1 was writing; 

the Future, as: scribam, I shall write. 

Of Completed Action 
the Perfect, either definite or Historical, as: scrips!, I have 
written (definite), or: I wrote (historical); 

the Pluperfect, as: scripserani, I had written; 

the Future Perfect, as: scripsero, I shall hare written. 

The Passive has the same tenses. (For Particulars see Syntax) 

Moods. 

281. The Moods are three, Indicative, Subjunctive, 
and Imperative. 

282. The Indicative is used for direct assertions or interro- 
gations, corresponding, without any auxiliary, to the three forms of 
an English verb, viz.: the Simple, Progressive, and Emphatic, as: 
scribo, I write, am writing, do write. 



— 68 — 

283. The Subjunctive represents the action of the verb as 

something merely entertained by the mind and dependent on other 
circumstances, as: amarem, / should love. 

284. The Imperative is used to express a command, wish, 
advice, or exhortation, as: este diligentes, pueri, be diligent, boys! 

285. These three moods which are limited by person, number, 
and time are called the Finite Verb. 

Verbal Nouns and Adjectives. 

286. Outside of the Finite Verb, and partaking of 
the nature of nouns, are certain Verbal Forms which 
are so important that they are always given with the 
inflectional forms, as part of the conjugation of the verb. 

287. The Infinitive is not limited to a particular number or 
person, as the ordinary verbal forms, but is really a Verbal Noun, 
as: amare, to love. 

288. The Gerund is a verbal noun of the Second Declension, 
used only in the singular, and wanting the nominative and vocative; 
it corresponds to the English Participial Infinitive in ing, as: amandi, 
of loving. 

289. The Gerundive differs from the Gerund only in having 
adjective terminations in us, a, urn, thus: Gerund, amandi, of lov- 
ing; Gerundive, amandus, -a, -uni, to be loved, deserving to be 
loved. 

290. The Participle gives, like the English Participle, the 
meaning of the verb in the form of an Adjective. 

291. A Latin verb may have four Participles: two in the 
Active, the Present and the Future — amans, loving; amaturus, 
about to love; and two in the Passive, the Perfect, amatus, loved, 
and the Future, commonly called Gerundive; amandus, deserving 
to be loved. 

292. The Supine is a verbal noun of the Fourth Declension, 
having only the accusative and ablative singular, as: amatum, 
amatu, .to love, 



— 69 — 

Numbers and Persons. 

293. There are two Numbers, Singular and Plural, 
and three Persons: First, Second, and Third. 

294. The Personal Endings for each of the three persons, 
both singular and plural, active and passive, are as follows: 

Active. Passive. 

am-o 
ama-s 
ania-t 
ama-nius 
ama-tis 
ama-nt 



Sing. 1. / 


-o, -n 


2. thou, you 


-s 


3. he, she, it 


-t 


Plur. 1. we 


-miis 


2. you 


-tis 


3. they 


-nt 



-r 


amo-r 


-ris 


ama-ris 


-tiir 


ama-tur 


-raur 


ama-mur 


-mini 


ama-mini 


-ntur 


ama-ntiir 


itions : 
-re 


ama-re 


-tor 


ama-tor 


-mini 


ama-mmi 


-ntor 


ama-ntor 



The Imperative has the following terminations: 
Sing. 2. - ama 

" 3. -to ama-to 

Plur. 2. -te, -tote ama-te 

" 3. -nto ama-nto 

The Perfect Indicative (active) has the special terminations: 
Sing. 2. -sti amavi-sti Plur. 2. -stis amavi-stis 

" 3. -erunt amav-erunt 

The Four Conjugations. 

295. Verbs are inflected in four regular Conjuga- 
tions, distinguished by the ending of the Present In- 
finitive Active, viz.: 

I. First Conjugation -are; stem ending in a; 
II. Second Conjugation -ere; " " in e; 
III. Third Conjugation -ere; " li in a consonant or u] 
IY. Fourth Conjugation -ire; " " in I. 

296. Besides the Present Infinitive we need to know 
the Present Indicative Active, First Person, 

the Perfect Indicative Active, First Person, 

the Former Supine, 
in order to understand the whole inflection of any 
verb. Hence these four are called the Principal Parts 



10 — 



or Stem-forms, and in describing any verb these are 
given. Their regular forms are seen in the following: 



Pres. Ind. 


Pres. Inf. 


Perf. Ind. 


Supine. 


I. amo 


amare, to love 


amavi 


amatum 


II. moneo 


monere, to advise 


montil 


monitum 


III. lego 


legere, to read 


leg! 


lectum 


IV. audio 


audire, to hear 


audi vi 


audituni 



297. The Principal Parts being known, the rest of 
the conjugation is found by the following rules. 

Simple Forms of the Verb. 

298. From the Present Indicative are formed: 



the Present Subjunctive by changing 

I. -o into -em am-o 

II. -e<5 " -earn mon-eo 

III. -6 " -am leg-o 

IY. -10 " -lam aud-io 

the Imperfect Indicative by changing 

I. -o into -abam am-o 

II. -eo l< -ebam mon-eo 

III. -o " -ebam leg-o 

IV. ~io u -lebam aud-io 

the Future Indicative by changing 

I. -o into -abo am-o 

II. -eo " -ebo mon-eo 

III. -o " am leg-o 

IV. -10 " -lam aud-io 

the Present Participle by changing 

I. -o into -ans am-o 

II. -eo u -ens mon-eo 

III. -o u -ens leg-o 

IV. -lo . u • -lens aud-io 

the Gerundive (and the Gerund) by changing 

I. -o into -andus am-o am-andQs 

II. -eo " -endiis mon-eo mon-endiis 

III. -o " -endus leg-o leg-endus 
IY. -10 " -lendus aud-I5 aud-Iendfis 



am-em 

mon-eam 

leg-am 

aud-iam 



am-abam 
mdn-ebam 
leg-ebam 
aud-iebam 

am-abo 
m5n-ebo 
leg-am 
aud-iam 

am-ans 
mon-ens 
leg-ens 
aud-iens 



— n — 

299. From the Present Infinitive are formed: 
the Imperfect Subjunctive Active by adding m: 

I. amare, amare-m III. legere, legere-m 

II. monere, monere-m IV. audire, audlre-m 

the Imperfect Subjunctive Passive by adding r: 

I. amare, amare-r III. legere, legere-r 

II. monere, rnonere-r IV. audire, audlre-r 

the Present Imperative Active by dropping r6: 

I. ama-re, ama III. lege-re, lege 

II. mone-re, mone" IV. audl-re, audi 

the Present Imperative Passive identically: 

I. amare II. monere III. legere IT. audire 

the Present Infinitive Passive by changing 

I. S into I amar-e amar-i 

II. g " I moner~e moner-i 



III. 


ere " 


I 


leg-ere 


leg-i 


IV. 


6 " 


i 


audlr-e 


audir-i 



300. From the Perfect Indicative are formed: 

the Pluperfect Indicative by changing 1 into eram: 

I. amav-i, amav-eram III. leg-i, leg -eram 

II. monu-i, mouu-eram IV. audlv-i, audlv-eram 

the Future Perfect by changing 1 into ero: 
I. amav-i, amav-ero III. leg-i, lgg-ero 

II. monu-i, monii-ero IV. audlv-I, audiv-ero 

the Perfect Subjunctive by changing i into erini: 

I. amav-I, amav-erim III. I6g-i, leg-erim 

II. monu-i, monu-erina IV. audlv-i, audiv-erlm 

the Pluperfect Subjunctive by changing 1 into issem: 

I. amav-i, amav-issem III. leg-i, leg-issSm 

II. monu-i, monu-issein IV. audlv-i, audlv-issem 

the Perfect Infinitive by changing I into isse: 

I. amav-i, amav-isse III. leg-i, lSg-isse 

II. monu-i, monu-issS IV. audiv-i, audlv-isse 



— 72 — 

301. From the Supine are formed: 

the Perfect Participle by changing urn into us: 
1. amat-iim, amat-iis III. lect-fim, lect-us 

II. monlt-iim, monlt-us IY. audlt-um, audit-us 

the Future Participle by changing nm into urus: 

I amat-iim, amat-urus III. lect-um, lect-tirus 

II. monit-iim, monit-urus IV audlt-um, audlt-urus 

302. Of the active tenses of continued action, viz.: 
Present, Imperfect, and Future, those ending in 6 be- 
come passive by changing 6 into or; those ending in 
in, by changing m into r, as: 

I. am-o, am-or III. leg-o, leg-or 

ame-m, ame-r lega-m, lega-r 

II. mone-o, mone-5r IY. audi-o, audi-6r 
monea-m, monea-r audia-m, audia-r 

To Teachers. As the theory of conjugation is beset, to the beginner, 
by some special difficulties, it seems best that the Paradigms themselves 
should be made very familiar, before the systematic study of the foregoing 
rules is taken up. At this stage, AHN-HENWS Paradigm Charts ex- 
hibiting the Essentials of Latin Conjugation, will greatly help in mastering 
one of the numerous difficulties of the language. 

Compound Forms. 

303. All the rest are compound forms, made by 
the aid of the Auxiliary verb esse, to be; 



Pre3. Ind. 


Pres. Inf. 


Perfect. Supine. 


sum 


essg, 


to be 


fm — 






Indicative. 


Present. 






Perfect. 


sum, / am 






fii r I, / have been (was) 


es, tJiou art 






fu i' sti, thou hast been 


est, he, she, it is 






fu' it, he has been 


su' mus, we are 






fu' I mus, we have been 


e' stis, you are 






fu i' stis, you have oeen 


sunt, they are 






fu e' runt, they have been 



— 73 — 



Imperfect, 
e' ram, / was 
e' ras, thou wast 
S' rat, he was 
e ra' mus, we were 
e ra' tis, you were 
e' rant, they were 

Future, 
e' ro, / shall be 
e' ris, thou wilt be 
e' rit, he will be 
e' ri mas, ive shall be 
e' ri tis, you will be 
e' runt, they will be 



Indicative. 

Pluperfect, 
fu' e ram, / had been 
fu' e ras, thou hadst been 
fu' e rat, he had been 
fu e ra' mus, we had been 
fu e ra' tis, you had been 
fu' e rant, they had been 

Future Perfect, 
fu' e ro, / shall have been 
fu' e ris, thou wilt have been 
fu' e rit, he will have been 
fu e ri mus, we shall have been 
fu e ri tis, you will have been 
fu' e rint, they will have been 



Subjunctive. 



Present, 
sim, may I be* 
sis, be thou, or may you be 
sit, let him be (may he be) 
si' mus, let us be 
si' tis, be ye, or may ye be 
sint, let them be (may they be) 

Imperfect, 
es' sem, / should be (were) 
es' ses, thou wouldst be 
es' set, he would be 
es s6' mus, we should be 
es se' tis, you would be 
es' sent, they would be 



Perfect, 
fu' e rim, I may have been 
fu' e ris, thou may est have been 
fu' e rit, he may have been 
fu e ri mus, we may have been 
f u e ri tis, you may have been 
fu' e rint, they may have been 



fu is' 
fu is' 



Pluperfect. 

/ should have been 
thou wouldst have been 
have been 
fu is se' mus, we should have been 
fu is se' tis, you would have been 
fu is' sent, they would have been 



sem 
ses, 
fu is' set, he would 



Future. 

isim, / may be about to be 
sis, thou mayest be about to be 
sit, he may be about to be 
isi' mus, we may be about to be 
si' tis, you may be about to be 
sint, they may be about to be 



* The rendering of the Subjunctive here given shows the most fre- 
quent meanings of its forms when used independently. 



74 



Singular. 
Present, es, be thou 
Future. e' sto, thou shalt be 
e' sto, he shall be 



Imperative, 

Plural, 
e' ste, be ye 
e sto' te, ye shall be 
sun' to, they shall be 
Infinitive. 



Present, es' se, to be 

Perfect, fu is' se, to have been 

Future, fu tu' rum, -am, -iim es'se, or fo'rS, to be about to be 

Future Participle, fu tu' rtis, -a, -um, about to be 

304. The Future Perfect is wanting in the Subjunctive which is 
represented, when necessary, by the Subjunctive of the Perfect or 
Pluperfect, according to the connection of the sentence. 

305. The verb esse has no Gerund or Supine, and no Participle 
but the Future. 

[111—114.] 

306. Compounds of esse. 

Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. 

absum abesse, to be absent, be away aim — 

adsum adesse, to be present adfiii 

desfun deesse, to be ivanting defui — 

insuni inesse, to be in infui 

intersum interesse, to be between interfuT 

obsum obesse, to be in the way obful 

praesum praeesse, to be over praefiu 

prosum prodesse, to be useful profui — 

subs urn subesse, to be under wanting 

supersum superesse, to remain over superful — 

307. All these Compounds are conjugated like sum; but prosum 



inserts a d when pro would be followed by e, thus: 



Present, 
prosum 
prodes 
prodest 
prosumus 
prodestis 
prosunt 



Imperf. Indie, 
proderam 
proderas 
proderat 
proderamus 
proderatis 
proderant 



Imperative. 



prodes 
prOdesto 



prodeste 
prodestote 



Imperf. Subj. 

prodessem 

prodesses 

prodesset 

prodessemus 

prodessetis 

prodessent 

Infinitive, 
prodesse 



Future, 
prodero 
proderis 
proderit 
proderlmus 
proderitls 
proderunt 



— 75 — 

SOS. Neither sum nor any of its compounds has a present 
participle, except: praesens, -tis, present; absens, -tls, absent; 
esse* is also compounded with potis, pote, able, in the verb possS. 
For its inflection see 401. [lis. H6.) 

309. The Perfect, Pluperfect and Future Perfect, and 

also the Perfect Infinitive in the Passive Voice are 

compound forms, made up of the Perfect Participle 

and the verb esse as an auxiliary, as: 

Perf. a ma' tiis, -a, -urn sum, / have been or was loved 
Perf. Inf. a ma' tus, -a, -urn es'se, to have been loved 
Pluperf. a ma' ttis, -a, -urn eram, / had been loved 
Fut. Perf. a ma' tus, -a, -urn ero, / shall have been loved 
Fut. Inf. a, ma' tiis, -a, -tim fore*, to be about to be loved 

310. In the compound tenses of the Passive, the Participle is 
treated as an adjective, agreeing in gender and number with the 
subject of the verb, as: 

bellum paratum est, war has been prepared. 

Periphrastic Conjugation. 

311. The Periphrastic Conjugation is formed by 
combining the tenses of esse with the Future Parti- 
ciple (Active), and with the Gerundive (Passive). 

312. Active Periphrastic' Conjugation. 

Indicative. 

Present, amaturiis, -a, -dm sum, / am about to love 

Imperf. amaturiis, -a, -urn eram, / was about to love 

Future. amaturiis, -a, -tim ero, / shall be about to love 

Perfect. amaturiis, -a, -iim fill, J have been, or was about to love 

Pluperf. amaturiis, -a, -tim fueram, I had been about to love 

Fut. Perf. amaturiis, -a, -tim fuero, / shall have been about to love 

Subjunctive. 

Present, amaturiis, -&, -iim sim, / may be about to love 

Imperf. amaturiis, -a, -iim essem, I should be about to love 

Future. (wanting) 

Perfect. amaturiis, -a, -iim fuerim, I may have been about to love 

Pluperf. amaturiis, -a, -iim fuissem, / should have been about to 

Fut. Perf. (wanting) [love 



_ 76 — 

Infinitive. 
Present, amatfirus, -a, -urn esse, to be about to love 
Perfect. amaturus, -a, -urn fuisse, to have been about to love 

313. Passive Periphrastic Conjugation. 

Indicative. 

Present, amandiis, -a, -urn sum, / have to be loved 

Imperf. amandiis, -a, -urn eram, I had to be loved 

Future. amandiis, -a, -urn ero, / shall have to be loved 

Perfect. amandiis, -a, -urn fill, I (have) had to be loved 

Pluperf. amandiis, -a, -urn fiieram, / had had to be loved 

Fut. Perf. amandiis, -a, -um fiiero, / shall have had to be loved, 

Subjunctive. 

Present, amandiis, -a, -urn sim, / may have to be loved 

Imperf. amandiis, -a, -iim essem, / should have to be loved, 

Future. (wanting) 

Perfect. amandiis, -a, -iim fiierim, / may have had to be loved 

Pluperf. amandiis, -a, -um fuissem, I should have had to be loved 

Fut. Perf. (wanting) 

Infinitive. 
Present, amandiis, -a, -iim esse, to have to be loved 
Perfect. amandiis, -a, -iim fuisse, to have had to be loved 

314:. Impersonal Periphrastic Conjugation. 

The Neuter of the Gerundive with est, erat, etc., is used imper- 
sonally, if what is said holds good of people in general, as: vlven- 
diim est, we or you must live; morlendum est, we or you must die. 
But the person by whom may also be added in the dative, thus: 

mihi scribendum est, I must or should write 
tibi scribendum est, thou must or shouldst tvrite 
ei scribendum est, he must or should write 
nobis scribendum est, ive must or should write 
vobis scribendum est, you must or should ivrite 
eis scribendum est, they must or should write 

[171. 172.) 

315. The Future Infinitive Passive is a compound form made 
up of the Supine and Iri (lit. to be gone), which is the Infinitive 
Passive of the verb Ire, to go. 

I. amatum In III. lectum Iri 

II. monltum Iri IV. audit um Iri 



— n — 



316. First Conjugation. 


— Active Voice. 


Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 


Perfect. Supine. 


amo, -are, to love 


amavi amatuin 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 



a' mo, / love 
a' mas, thou lovest 
a' mat, he loves 
a ma' raus, we love 
a ma' tis, you love 
a' mant, they love 



Present. 

a' mem, may I love 
a' mes, love thou 
a' met, let him love 
a me' mus, let us love 
a me' tis, love ye 
a' ment, let them love 



a ma' "bam, I ivas loving 
a ma' bas, thou wast loving 
a ma' bat, he was loving 
a ma ba' mus, we were loving 
a ma ba' tis, you were loving 
a ma' bant, they were loving 



Imperfect. 

a ma' 
a ma' 

a ma' 



rem, I should love 
res, thou wouldst love 
ret, he would love 



a ma re' mtis, we should love 
a ma re' tis, you would love 
a ma' rent, they would love 



ma' bo, I shall love 
ma' bis, thou wilt love 
ma' bit, he will love 
ma' bi mus, we shall love 
ma' bi tis, you will love- 
ma' bunt, they will love 



Future. 

a ma tii'rus, 
-a, -urn 

a ma tii' ri, 
-ae, -a 



sim 


\ 


sis 


J 


sit 


f be about 


si' mus , 


to love 


si' tis 


) 


sit 


i 



ma' vi, / have loved 

ma vi' sti, thou hast loved 

ma' vit, he has loved 

ma' vi mus, we have loved 

ma vi' stis, you have loved 

ma ve' runt, they have loved 



Perfect. 

a ma' ve rim, I may have loved 
a ma' ve ris, thou may est have I. 
a ma' ve rit, he may have loved 
a ma ve r! mus, we may have I. 
a ma ve ri tis, you may have I 
a ma' ve rint, they may have I. 



Pluperfect, 
a ma' ve ram, I had loved a ma vis' sem, / should have I. 
a ma' ve ras, thou hadst loved a ma vis' ses, thou wouldst h. I. 
a ma' ve rat, he had loved a ma vis' set, he would have I. 

a ma ve ra' mils, we had loved a ma vis se' mus, we should It. I. 
a ma ve ra' tis, you had loved a ma vis se' tis, you would h. I. 
a ma' ve rant, they had loved a ma vis' sent, they would h L 



— 78 — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Future Perfect. 

a ma' v6 ro, / shall have loved (wanting) 

a ma' ve ris, thou wilt have loved 

a ma' ve rit, he will have loved 

a ma ve ri mus, we shall have loved 

a ma ve ri tis, you will have loved 

a ma' ve rint, they will have loved 

Impebative. 
Singular. Plural. 

Present, a' ma, love thou a ma' te, love ye 

Future, a ma' to, thou shalt love a ma to' te, ye shall love 
a ma' to, he shall love a man' to, they shall love 



Present. 




Perfect. 




Fut. Sing. 


Norn. 


u 


Ace. 


Plur. 


Norn 


d 


Ace. 


Present. 


a' i 


Future. 


a n 



Infinitive. 
a ma' re, to love 
a ma vis' se, to have loved 
a ma tii' riis, -a, -urn es' se 
a ma tu' rum, -am, -um es' se 
a ma tu' ri, -ae, -a es' s£ 
a ma tu' ros, -as, -a es' se 



-to be about to love 



Pabticiples. 
a' mans, a man' tis, loving 
a ma tu' rfls, a ma tu' ra, a ma tu' rum, about to love 



Geeund. 
Gen. a man' di, of loving 
Dat. a man' do, for loving 
Ace. a man' dum, loving 
Abl. a man' do, by loving 

317. First Conjugation. 

Indicative. 



Supine. 



a ma' tiim ) 

a ma' tu 1 



to love 



[117—120.] 



Passive Voice. 

Subjunctive. 



a mor, / am loved 
a ma' ris, thou art loved, 
a ma' tiir, he is loved 
a ma' mur, we are loved 
a ma' mi ni, you are loved 
aman'tur, they are loved 



Present. 

a' mer, may I be loved 
a me' ris, be thou loved 
a me' tur, let him be loved 
a me' mtir, let us be loved 
a me' mi ni, be ye loved 
a men' tur, let them be loved 



19 — 



Indicative. 



Imperfect. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



a ma' bar. Twos loved a ma' rer, / should be loved 

a ma ba' ris, thou wast loved a ma re' ris, Z/iou wouldst be I. 
a ma ba' tur, he teas loved, a ma re' tur, he would be loved 

a ma ba' miir, we were loved a ma re' liiur, we should be loved 
a ma ba' mi ni, you were loved, a ma re' mi ni, you would be I. 
a ma ban' tur, they were loved a ma ren' tur, they would be I 

Future, 
a ma' bor, I shall be loved ( wanting j 

a ma' be ris, thou wilt be loved 
a ma' bi tur, he will be loved 
a ma' bi mur, we shall be loved 
a ma bi' mi ni, you will be loved 
a ma bun' tur, they will be loved 

Perfect. 
/ have been or was loved I may have been loved 

J sum ( sim 

es a ma' tus, -a, -urn -j sis 

est ( sit 

( su' mus ( si' mus 



(si': 

-J si' ' 



a ma' ti, -ae, -a -I e' stis a ma' ti, -ae, -a -s 7 si' tis 
( sunt ( sint 

Pluperfect. 
/ had been loved I might have been loved 

)e' ram ( es' sem 

e' ras a ma' tus, -a, -urn ) es' ses 
e' rat ( es' set 

C e ra' mus { es se' mus 

a ma' ti, -ae, -a 1 e ra' tis a ma' ti, -ae, -a -] es se' tis 
(e'rant (es'sent 



I shall have been loved 
(e'rd 

a ma' tus, -a, -urn -j e' ris 
( e' rit 
( e' ri mus 

a ma' ti, -ae, -a -] e' ri tis 
/ e' runt 



Future Perfect. 



(wanting) 



— 80 



Imperative. 
Singular. 

Pres. a ma' re, be thou loved 

Fut. a ma' tor, thou shalt be loved 

a ma' tor, he shall be loved a man' tor, they shall be loved 



Plural, 
a ma' mi ni, be ye loved 



Present. 
Perfect Sing. 



Plur. 

a 



Infinitive. 
a ma' ri, to be loved 
Nom. a ma' tus, -a, -um es' se 
Ace. a ma' turn, -sun, -iim es' 
Nom. a ma' ti, -ae, -a es' se 
Ace. a ma' tos, -as, -a es' se 



se 



• to have been loved 



Future. 



a ma' turn 1' ri, to be about to be loved 



Participles. 
Perfect. a ma' tiis, a ma' ta, a ma' turn, loved, beloved, or 

having been loved 
Gerundive, a man' dus, a man' dsl, a man' dum, to be loved y 

deserving to be loved 



Examples 
agito, -are, to agitate 
ecluco, -are, to bring up 
evito, -are, to avoid, shun 
admmistro, -are, to govern 
turbo, -are, to trouble 
conservo,-are, to preserve 
multo, -are, to punish 



for Practice: 

spero, -are, to hope for 
occo, -are, to harrow 
comparo, -are, to compare 
cavo, -;lre, to (make) hollow 
lacero, -are, to tear into pieces 
expugno, -are, to capture 
vasto, -are, to lay waste 

121. 122. } 



318. Second Conjugation. 

Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect, 

moneo, -ere, to advise raontii 



Active Voice. 

Supine. 

monitum 



Indicative. 

mo' ne o, I advise 
mo' nes, thou- advisest 
mo' net, he advises 
mo ne' mus, ice advise 
mo ne' tis, you advise 
mo' nent, they advise 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

mo' ne am, may I advise 
mo' ne as, advise thou 
mo' ne at, let him advise 
mo ne a' mxis, let us advise 
mo ne a' tis, advise ye 
mo' ne ant, let them advise 



— 81 — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Imperfect, 
mo ne' bam, I ic as advising mo ne' rem, I should advise 
mo ne' Ms, thou ivast advising mo ne' res, thou wouldst advise 
mo ne' bat, he teas advising mo ne' ret, he would advise 
mo ne ba' mus, we were advis'g mo ne re' mus, we should advise 
mo ne ba' tis, you were advis'g mo ne re' tis, you would advise 
mo ne' bant, they were adv is 1 g mo ne' rent, they would advise 

Future. 

mo ne' bo, I shall advise w w ,_, *„ ( sim \ 

- -,w ., ... j . „ monitu'rus, ) _-_, 

mo ne' bis, thou wilt advise w 7 -< sis 1 

mo ne' bit, he will advise ' ( sit ( be about 

mo ne' bi mus, we shall advise - n ~ ^, r - ( si' mus ( to advise 

mo ne' bi tis, you will advise ~ ' -< si' tis j 

mo ne' bunt, they will advise ( sint / 

Perfect. 

mo' nfi 1, / (have) advised mo nfi' e rim, / may have adv'd 

mo nu i' sti, thou hast advised mo nii' e ris, thou mayest have a. 
mo' nu it, he has advised mo nu' e rit, he may have adv'd 

mo nil' I mus, we have advised mo nu e ri mus, we may have a. 
mo nu i' stis, you have advised mo nu e ri tis, you may have a, 
mo nfi e' runt, they have advised mo nu' e rint, they may have a. 

Pluperfect. 

mo nu' e ram, / had advised mo nu is' seni, / should have a. 
mo nii' e ras, thou hadst advised mo nii is' ses, thou wouldst h. a. 
mo nfi' e rat, he had advised mo nu is' set, he would have a, 
mo nii e ra' mus, we had adv'd mo nii is se' mus, we should h. a, 
mo nii e ra' tis, you had adv'd mo nu is se' tis, you would h. a. 
mo nu' e rant, they had advised mo nii is' sent, they would h. a. 

Future Perfect. 

mo nu' e ro, I shall have advised (wanting) 

mo nfi' e ris, thou wilt have adv'd ■ 

mo nii' e rit, he will have advised 
mo nii e ri mus, we shall have a. 
mo nii e ri tis, you will have a. 
^ mo nfi' e rint, they will have a> 



— 82 — 

Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

Pres. m5'ne, advise thou mo nS' te, advise ye 

Put. mo ne' to, thou shalt advise mo ne to"' te, ye shall advise 
mo ne' to, he shall advise mo nen' to, they shall advise 

Infinitive. 

Pres. mo ne' re\ to advise 

Perf. mo nu is' se, to have advised 

Fut. Sing. Nom. mo ni tu' riis, -a, -urn es' se \ 

" Ace. mo ni til' rum, -am, -iim es'se [ in be about to 

Plur. Nom. monitti'ri, -ae, -& es'se f~ advise 

" Ace. mo ni til' ros, -as, -a es' se J 

Participles. 
Pres. mo' nens, mo nen' tis, advising 
Fut. mo ni tu' riis, mo ni tu' ra, mo ni tH' rum, about to advise 

Gerund. Supine. 

Gen. mo nen' dl, of advising 
Dat. mo nen' do, for advising 

Ace. mo nen' dum, advising mo' ni turn [ , , . . 

Abl. mo nen' do, by advising mo' ni tu S 

[125. 126) 

319. Second Conjugation. — Passive Voice. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present, 

mo' ne 5r, I am advised mo' ne ar, may I be advised 

mo ne' ris, thou art advised mo ne a' ris, be thou advised 

mo ne' tur, he is advised mo ne a' tur, let him be advised 

mo ne' mur, toe are advised mo ne a' mur, let us be advised 

mo ne' mi ni, you are advised mo ne a' mi ni, be ye advised 

mo nen' tur , they are advised mo ne an' tur, let them be adv'd 

Imperfect. 
mo ne' bar, I was advised mo ne' rer, I should be advised 

mo ne ba' ris, thou ivast advised mo ne re' ris, thou wouldst b. a. 
mo ne ba' ttir, he was advised mo ne re' ttir, he would b. a. 
mo ne ba' mur, we were advised mo ne re' mflr, we should b. a. 
mo ne ba' mi ni, you were adv'd mo ne re' mi ni, you toould b. a. 
m6 ne ban' tfir, they were adv'd mo ne ren' ttir, they would b. a. 



83 — 



Indicative. 

Future, 
mo ne' b5r, I shall be advised 
mo ne' be ris, thou wilt be adv'd 
mo ne' bi tur, he will be advised 
mo ne' bi miir, we shall be adv'd 
mo ne bi' mi ni, you will be adv'd 
mo ne bun' tur, they will be a. 



Subjunctive. 



(wanting) 



Perfect. 

/ have been or was advised I may have been advised 

!siim ( sim 

es mo' ni tus, -a, -iim -} sis 

est ( sit 

isu' miis ( si' miis 

e' stis mo' ni ti, -ae, -& < si' tis 

sunt f sint 



/ had been advised 



mo' ni tus, -a, -fan. 



mo' ni ti, -ae, -a 



Pluperfect. 




/ should have been advised 


e' ram 


( es' sem 


e' ras 


mo' ni tiis, -a, - um 1 es' ses 


e' rat 


( es' set 


e ra' mus 


C es se' miis 


e ra' tis 


mo' ni ti, -ae, -a -] es sS' tis 


e' rant 


( es' sent 



Future Perfect. 
/ shall have been advised 
( e' ro 



(wanting) 



mo' ni tus, -a, -um 



mo' ni ti, -ae, -a 



e' ris 
' e' rit 
e' ri mus 
e' ri tis 
e' runt 



Impekative. 
Singular. Plural 

Pres. mo ne' re, be thou advised mo n£' mi ni, be ye advised 
Fut. mo ne' tor, thou shalt be a. 

mo ne' t5r, he shall be adv. md nen' tor, they shall be adv. 



— 84 



Infinitive. 

Pres. m5 ne' ri, to be advised 

Perf. Sing. Nom. mo' ni tiis, ~a, -urn es' se 

4 ' Ace. mo ' ni turn, -am, -una es ' se 

Plur. Nom. mo' ni-ti, -ae, -a es'se 

44 Ace. mo' ni tos, -as, -a es' se 

Fui mo' nitum I' pi to be about to be advised 



to have been advised 



Perfect. 
Gerundive. 



Participles. 

mo'nita, mo'nittim, advised 



•j 



mo' ni tus, 

mo nen' diis, mo nen' da, mo nen' dura, to 

advised, deserving to be advised 



be 



Examples for Practice: 



habeo, -ere, to have, maintain 
adhibeo, -ere, to employ, apply 
pareo, -ere, to obey 
taceo, -ere, to be silent 
placeo, -ere, to please 
praebeo, -ere, to afford, give 



debeo, -ere, to owe 
exerceo, -ere, to exercise 
noceo, -ere, to hurt, do harm 
terreo, -ere, to frighten 
valeo, -ere, to avail, be well 
coerceo, -ere, to restrain 

[127. 128.] 



320. Third Conjugation. 

Pres. Ind. & Pres. Int 
lego, 



Active Voice. 



-ere, to read 



Perfect. 

legl 



Supine. 
lectum 



Indicative. 

le' go, / read 
le' gis, thou readest 
le' git, he reads 
le' gi mils, we read 
le f gi tis, you read 
le' gunt, they read 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

le' gam, may I read 
le' gas, read thou 
le' gat, let him read 
le ga' mtis, let us read 
le ga' tis, read ye 
le' gant, let them read 

Imperfect. 



IS ge' bam, I was reading 
le ge' bas, thou wast reading 
le ge' bat, he was reading 
le ge ba/ miis, we were reading 
le ge ba' tis, you were reading 
le ge' bant, they were reading 



le' ge rem, I should read 
le' ge res, thou wouldst read 
le' ge ret, he would read 
le ge re' miis, we should read 
le ge re' tis, you would read 
le' ge rent, they would read 



— 85 — 



Indicative. 

le' gam, I shall read 
le' ges, thou wilt read 
le' get, he will read 
le ge' miis, we shall read 
le ge' tis, you will read 
le'gent, they will read 

le' gi, I (have) read 

le gi' stT, thou hast read 

le* git, he has read 

le' gi miis, we have read 

le gi' stis, you have read 

le ge' runt, they have read 

le' ge ram, / 7*acZ rea$ 
le' ge ras, tfiou 7*a(M read 
le' ge rat, 7ie had read 
le ge ra' mus, w;e 7iac7 reatZ 
le ge ra' tis, ?/oit 7ta^Z read 
le' ge rant, ^7iei/ had read 



Future. 



Subjunctive. 



lee tu' rfis, 
-a, -tini 

lee tu' ri, 
-ae, -a 



sim 
sis 
( sit F &e about 

isi' mils ( to read 
si' tis 
smt 

Perfect. 

le' ge rim, I may have read 

le' ge ris, tfiou may est have read 

le' ge rit, 7*e m^ 7*are reacZ 

le ge ri miis, we may have read 

le ge ri tis, you may have read 

le' ge rint, Me?/ may have read 

Pluperfect. 

le gis' sem I should have read 
le gis' ses,thou wouldst have read 
le gis' set, he ivould have read 
le gis se'mus, we should have r. 
le gis se' tis, you would have r. 
le gis' sent, they would have read 



Future Perfect. 



(wanting) 



le' ge ro, I shall have read 
le' ge ris, Mou wift 7*are read 
16' ge rit, 7ie will have read 
le ge ri mus, we shall have read 
le ge ri tis, you ivill have read 
ie' ge* rint, ^^2/ wiW ftave read 

Imperative. 
Pres= Sing, le' ge, read Mow Plur. le' gi te, reac£ i/e 

Fut " le' gi t5, thou shalt read " le gi to' te, ye shall read 
" le' gi to, he shall read u le gun' to, they shall read 



Pres. 




Perf. 




Put. Sing. 


Nom 


u 


Ace. 


Plur. 


Nom, 


U 


Ace. 



Infinitive. 
le' g£ re, to read 
le gis' se, to have read 
lee tu' riis, -a, -urn es r se 
lee tu' rum, -am, -tim es 
lectu'ri, -ae, -a es'se 
lectu'ros, -as, -a es'se 



'se [ 

1 



to be about to read 



— 86 



Participles. 
Pres. 16' gens, le gen' tis, reading 
Fut. lee tu' rus, lee tu' r&, lee tu' rtim, about to read 



Gerund. 
Gen. le gen' di, of reading 
Dat. le gen' do, for reading 
Ace. le gen' dum, reading 
Abl. le gen' do, by reading 



Supine. 



lee' 
lee' 



turn 
tu 



321. 



Indicative. 



to read 

[133. 134.] 

Third Conjugation. — Passive Voice. 

Subjunctive. 
Present. 

le' g&r, may I be read 

IS ga' ris, be thou read 

le ga' tiir, let him be read 

le ga' miir, let us be read 

le ga' mi ni, be ye read 

le gan' tur, let them be read 

Imperfect. 

le' ge rer, I should be read 
le ge re' ris, thou wouldst be read 
le ge re' tur, he would be read 
le ge re' miir, we should be read 
le ge re' mi ni,you would be read 
le ge ren' tiir, they would be read 



le' gor, I am read 
IS' ge ris, thou art read 
le' gi tur, he is read 
le' gi miir, we are read 
le gi' mi ni, you are read 
le gun' tur, they are read 



le ge' bar, / was read 
16 ge ba' ris, thou wast read 
le ge ba' tiir, he was read 
le ge ba' mur, we were read 
le ge ba' mi ni, you were read 
le ge ban' tiir, they were read 



Future, 
le' gar, I shall be read (wanting) 

le ge' ris, ^/iow wift 6e read 
le ge' tiir, fte will be read 
le ge' miir, ive shall be read 
le ge' mi m, t/oit will be read 
le gen' tiir, they will be read 

Perfect. 

/ was or /mve been read I may have been read 

( sum ( sim 

lec'tus, -&, -um -j es lee' tiis, -a, -iim -j sis 

( est ( sit 

(sii'mus (si' mils 

lee' ti, ~ae, -a -< es' tis lee' ti, -ae, -a •< si' tis 

f sunt ( sint 



87 



Indicative. 
i* had been read, 


Subjunctive. 
Pluperfect. 

/ should have been read 


( e' ram 


C es' sem 


lee' tiis, -a, -um -j e' ras 


lee' tiis, -a, -urn J es' ses 


( e' rat 


( es' set 


( e ra' mus ( es se' mus 


lee' ti, -ae, -a -jera' tis 


lee' ti, -ae, -& < es se' tis 


( g' rant 


( es' sent 


Future Perfect. 
/ shall have been read 


(e f ro 
lee' tfis, -£, -nm -< e' ris 


(wanting j 


( e' rit 




( e' ri mus 




lee' ti, -ae, -a < e' ri tis 




( e' runt 




; 


Imperative. 



Singular. 
Pres. le' ge re, be thou read 
Fut. le' gi tor, thou shalt be read 
le' gi t5r, he shall be read 



Plural. 
le gi' mi ni, be ye read 

le gun' tor, they shall be read 



Infinitive. 

Pres. le' gi, to be read 

Perf. Sing. Nom. lee' tiis, -&, -um es' se 

" Ace. lee' turn, -am, -um es'se 

Plur. Nom. lec' ti, -ae, -a es' se 

" Ace. lec' tos, -as, -& es' se 

Fut. lec' turn i' ri, to be about to'be read 



to have been read. 



Participles. 
Perfect. lec' tus, lec' til, lee' turn, read 

Gerundive, le gen' dus, le gen' d&, le gen' dum, to be read, de- 
serving to be read 



Examples for Practice: 
Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect, 

emo, -ere, to buy emi 

serlbo, -ere, to write scrips! 

ago, -ere, to drive egi 

acilo, -erg, to whet £cui 



Supine, 
emptum 
scriptum 
actum 
acutiim 

[i3J. 136. 



322. Fourth Conjugation. — Active Voice. 

Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine, 

audio, -ire, to hear audivi auditum 



Indicative. 

au' di o, / hear 
aii' dis, thou hear est 
au' dit, he hears 
au di' mus, we hear 
au di' tis, you hear 
au' di unt, they hear 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

au' di am, may I hear 
au' di as, hear thou 
au' di at, let him hear 
au di a' miis, let us hear 
au di a' tis, hear ye 
au' di ant, let them hear 



Imperfect, 
au di e' bam, / was hearing au di' rem, I should hear 
au di e' bas, thou wast hearing au di' res, thou ivouldst hear 
au di e' bat, he was hearing au di' ret, he would hear 
au di e ba' miis, wewere hearing au di re' mus, we should hear 
au di e ba' tis, you were hearing au di re' tis, you would hear 
au di e' bant, they were hearing au di' rent, they would hear 



Future. 



au' di am, I shall hear 
au' di es, thou wilt hear 
au' di et, he will hear 
au di e' mils, we shall hear 
au di e' tis, you will hear 
au' di ent, they will hear 

au di' vi, / (have) heard 
au di vi' sti, thou hast heard 
au di' vit, he has heard 
au di' vi miis, ive have heard 
au di vi' stis, you have heard 



au ditu' rus, 
-a, -urn 

au di til' ri, 
-ae, -a 



SIS 

sit 
( si' mus 
-} si' tis 
( siut 



be about 
to hear 



Perfect. 

au di' ve rim, I may have heard 
au di' ve ris, thou may est have h. 
au di' ve rit, he may have heard 
au di ve ri mus, we may have h. 
au di ve ri tis, you may have J< . 
au di ve' runt, they have heard au di' ve rint, they may have h. 

Pluperfect. 



au di' ve ram, I had heard 
au di' ve ras, thou hadst heard 
au di' ve rat, he had heard 
au di ve ra' miis, we had heard 
au di ve ra' tis, you had heard 
au di' ve rant, they had heard 



au di vis' sem, I should have h. 
au di vis' ses, thouwouldst h. h. 
au di vis' set, he would have h. 
au di vis se'miis, we should h. h, 
au di vis se' tis, you would h. h. 
au di vis' sent, they would h. h, 



— 89 — 



Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Future Perfect. 
au di' ve ro, I shall have heard (wanting) 

au di' ve ris, thou wilt have heard 
au di' ve rit, he will have heard 
au di ve ri miis, we shall have h. 
au di ve ri tis, you will have h. 
au di' ve rint, they will have h. 

Impeeative. 
Singular. Plural. 

Pres. au' di, hear thou au di' te, hear ye 

Fut. au di' to, thou shatt hear au di to' te, ye shall hear 
au di' to, he shall hear au di un' to ; they shall hear 

Infinitive. 

Pres. au di' re, to hear 

Perf. au di vis' se, to have heard 

Fut. Sing. Norn, au di tu' rus, -a, -iim es' se 

" Ace. au di tu' rum, -am,-um es'se 

Plur. Nom. au di tti' ri, -ae, -a es'se 

11 Ace. au di tu'ros, -as, -a es'se 



to be about to lieai* 



Participles, 
Present, au' di ens, au di en' tis, hearing 
Future, au di tu' rus, au di tu' ra, au di*tfl' runi, about to hear 



Gerund. 
Gen. au di en' di, of hearing 
Dat. au di en' do, for hearing 
Ace. au di en' dum, hearing 
Abl. au di en' do, by hearing 

323. Fourth Conjugation. 

Indicative. 



Supine. 



au di' turn ) 
au di' tu j 



to hear 



[155. 156.] 



Passive Voice. 

Subjunctive. 



au' di or, lam heard 
au di' ris, thou art heard 
au di' tur, he is heard 
au di' miir, we are heard 
au di' mi ni, you are heard 
au di un' tur, they are heard 



Present. 

au' di ar, may I be heard 
au di a' ris, be thou heard 
au di a' tur, let him be heard 
au di a' mur, let us be heard 
au di a' nil ni, be ye heard 
au di an' tur, let them be heard 



— 90 — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Imperfect* 

au di e' bar, I was heard au di' rer, / should be heard 

au di e ba' ris, thou wast heard au di re' ris, thou wouldst be h. 
au di e ba' tur, he was heard au di re' tur, he would be heard 
au di e ba' mur, we were heard au di re' milr, ive should be h. 
au di e ba' mi ni, you were h. au di re' 1111 ni, you ivould be h, 
au di e ban' tur, they were h. au di ren' ttir, they would be h. 

Future, 
au' di ar, I shall be heard (wanting) 

au di e' ris, thou wilt be heard 
au di e' tur, he will be heard 
au di e' mur, we shall be heard 
au di e' mi ni, you will be heard 
au di en' tur, they will be heard 



Perfect, 

/ was or have been heard I may have been heard 

i sum r sim 

au di' ttls, -a, -uin -j es au di' tus, -a, -iim ) sis 

( est ( sit 

!su' mus } si' mils 

e' stis au di' ti, -ae, -a -] si' tis 

sunt ( sint 
* 

Pluperfect, 

I had been heard I should have been heard 

C e' ram r es' sem 

au di' tus, -a, -umj e' ras au di' tus, -a, -iim -J es' ses 

(e'rat (es'set 

( era' mus i esse' mils 

au di' ti, -ae, -a -j e ra' lis au dV ti, -ae, -a J es se' tis 

( »' rant ( es' sent 

Future Perfect. 
/ shall have been heard (wanting) 

Je' ro 
e' ris 
e' rit 
( e' ri mus 
au di' ti, -ae, -a je'vi tis 
( e/ runt 



— 91 — 

Imperative. 
Singular. Floral. 

Pres. au di' r£, be thou heard au di' mi m, be ye heard 
Fut. au di' tor, thou shalt be h. 

au di' tor, he shall be heard au di un' tor, they shall be heard 

Infinitive. 

Pres. au di' ri, to be heard 

Perf. Sing. Nom. au di' tus, -&, -um es' se 

" Ace. au di' turn, -am, -um es'se i 

,_, A _ ' ' , w y to have been heard 

Plur. Nom. au di' ti, -ae, -a es'se 

" Ace. au di' tos, -as, -a es'se 

Fut. au dr turn 1' ri, to be about to be heard 

Participles. 
Perfect, au di' tus, au di' ta, au di' turn, heard 
Gerundive, au di en' dus, au di en' da, au di en'dum, to be heard, 
deserving to be heard 

Examples for Practice: 
dornrio, -Ire, to sleep vestio, -ire, to clothe 

custodio, -ire, to guard lgnio, -ir£, to appease 

erudio, -ir£, to instruct nutrio, -Ire, to nourish 

impedio, -ire, to hinder punIS, -ire, to punish 

condio, -IrS, to season finio, -ire, to finish 

[157. 158.] 

Deponent Verbs. 

324. Deponent Verbs have the form of the Passive 
Voice with an active signification, as: hortdr, hortatus 
sum, hortari, to exhort, the Perfect hortatus sum 
representing at the same time the Supine hortatum. 

325. Deponent Verbs have Four Participles: 
the Present Participle, as: hortans, exhorting 

the Perfect Participle, as: hortatus, having exhorted 

the Fut. Part. Act., as: hortaturus, being about to exhort 

the Fut. Part. Pass., as: hortandiis, to be exhorted. 

326. The Future Infinitive is always to be given in the active 
form, thus: hortaturus esse, to be about to exhort (not hortatum Irl). 



92 — 



327. Deponent of the First Conjugation. 



Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 
hortor, -arl, to exhort 



Perfect. 

hortatus sum 



Indicative . 

/ exhort 
hor' tor 
hor ta' ris 
hor ta' tur 
hor ta' miir 
hor ta' mi 111 
hor tan' tur 



Present. 



Subjunctive, 

/ may exhort 
hor' ter 
hor te' ris 
hor te' tur 
hor te' mur 
hor te' mi ni 
hor ten' ttir 



/ was exhorting 
hor ta' bar 
hor ta ba' ris 
hor ta ba' tur 
hor ta ba' miir 
hor ta ba' nil ni 
hor ta ban' tur 



Imperfect, 



/ should exhort 
hor ta' rer 
hor ta re' ris 
hor ta re' tur 
hor ta re' mur 
hor tare' mi ni 
hor ta ren' tur 



/ shall exhort 
hor ta' bor 
hor ta' be ris 
hor ta' bi tur 
hor ta' bi miir 
hor ta bi' mi ni 
hor ta bun' tiir 



Future. 

/ may be about to exhort 
( sim 
hor ta tu' rfts, -a, -um < sis 
(sit 

isi' mils 
si' tis 
sint 



/ (have) exhorted 
hor ta' tus, -a, -um 

hor ta' ti, -ae, -a 



Perfect. 



/ may have exhorted 




C su' miis 

-< e' stis hor ta' ti, -ae, -a 

( sunt 



sim 



hor ta' tus, -a, -una < sis 

sit 



si' mus 
| si' tis 
sint 



— 93 — 



Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Pluperfect. 


7" had exhorted 


I should have exhorted 


( e' ram 




( es' sem 


hor ta' tus, -a, -iim ) e' ras 


hor ta' tus, -a, -um 


•| es' ses 


( e'rat 




( es' set 


(era' miis 




( es se' miis 


hor ta' ti, -ae, -a -j e ra' tis 


horta' ti, -ae, -a 


} es se'tls 


( e' rant 




(es' sent 


Futun Perfect. 
I shall have exhorted 




( e' ro 
hor ta' tus, -a, -um -j e' ris 


(wanting) 




( e' rit 






( e' ri miis 






hor ta' ti, -ae, -a -| e' ri tis 






( e' runt 






Impeeattve. 





Singular. TPlural. 

Pres. hor ta' re, exhort thou hor ta' mi ni, exhort ye 

Fut. hor ta' tor, thou shalt exhort 

hor ta' tor, he shall exhort hor tan' tor, they shall exhort 

Infinitive. 

Pres. hor ta' ri, to exhort 

Perf. Sing. Nom. hor ta' tus, -a, -um es' se 1 

" Ace. hor ta' turn, -am, -um es'se i . , , , _ 

™ M , x . , x _ ' w ' , w >- to /iave exhorted 

Plur. Nom. hor ta' ti, -ae, -a es' se 

" Ace. hor ta' tos, -as, -a es' se ) 

Fut. Sing. Nom. hor ta tfi'rus, -a, -um es'se 1 

" Ace. hortatu'rum, -am, -limes' se [t be about to 

Plur. Nom. hor ta tu'ri, -ae, -a es'se f exhort 

" Ace. hor ta tii'ros, -as, -a es'se J 

Paeticiples. 
Present. hor' tans, hor tan' tis, exhorting 
Perfect. hor ta' tus, hor ta' ta, hor ta' turn, having exJwrted 
Fut. Act. hor ta tii' riis, hor ta tu' ra, hor ta tu' rum, about to 

exhort 
Gerundive, hortan'dus, hor tan' da, hortan'dum, to be exhorted 



94 — 



Gebund. Supine. 

Gen. hor tan' di, of exhorting 
Dat. hor tan' do, for exhorting 
Ace. hor tan' dum, exhorting hor ta' turn 

Abl. hor tan' do, by exhorting hor ta' 

Examples for Practice: 



L' turn ) 
L' tu \ 



to exhort 



piseor, -ari, to fish 
lmitor, -ari, to imitate 
reeordor, -ari, to remember 
proellor, -ari, to fight 
laetor, -ari, to rejoice (at) 
venor, -ari, to hunt 



arbitror, -ari, to regard 
to try 
[, to ac 
to roam 
to admire 
to threaten 



couor, -ari, 
comitor, 
vagor, -ari, 
miror, -ari, 
minor, -ari, 



328. Deponent 

Pres. Ind. & Pres 
vereor, -eri, to 

Indicative, 

I fear 
vS' re or 
ve re' ris 
ve re' tiir 
ve re' mur 
ve re' mi 111 
ve ren' tiir 

• / was fearing 
ve r5' b^r 
ve re ba' ris 
v$ re ba' tur 
ve re ba' mur 
ve re ba' mi 111 
ve re ban' tur 

/ shall fear 
ve re' bor 
ve re' be ris 
Ve re' bi tiir 
ve re' bi miir 
vS re bi' mi ni 
ve re bun' tiir 



[161. 162.] 

of the Second Conjugation, 

Inf. 
fear 



Present, 



Imperfect 



Future. 



Perfect. 
veritus sum 

Subjunctive, 

/ may fear 
ve' re ar 
ve re a' ris 
ve re a' tiir 
ve re a' miir 
ve re a' mi ni 
ve re an' tiir 

I should fear 
ve re' rer 
ve re re' ris 
ve re re' ttir 
ve re re' miir 
ve re re' mi ni 
ve re ren' tiir 

I may be about to fear 

x sim 
ve n tu'rus, 

-a, -urn 



ve ri tu' ri, 
-ae, -& 



sis 

Sit 

i si' mus 
•< si' tis 
( sint 



— 95 — 



Perfect. 



Subjunctive. 




e' st is 
( sunt 



I may have feared 
ve' ri tils, -a, -iim 



ve'ri ti, -ae, -a 




Pluperfect. 

/ should have feared 
[ e' ram 

e' ras ve' ri tiis, -a, -iim 
[ e' rat 
e ra' mus 

| 8 ra' tis ve' ri ti, -ae, -a 
e' rant 



C es' i 

•< es' i 



sem 
~ s6s 
( es' sSt 
es sS'miis 
es se'tis 
es' sent 



Future Perfeot 




(ivanting) 



Indicative. 
I (have) feared 
ve'ri tiis, -a, iim 

ve' ri ti, -ae, -a 

7 7ia(Z feared 
ve' ri tiis, -a, -um 

ve'ri ti, -ae, -a 

I shall have feared 
ve' ri tus, -a, -am 

ve' ri ti, -ae, -a 



Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

Pres. ve re' re, fear thou ve re' mi ni, fear ye 

Fut. ve re' tor, thou shalt fear 

ve re' tor, he shall fear ve ren' tor, they shall fear 

Infinitive. 

Pres. ve re' ri, to fear 

Perf. Sing. Nom. ve' ri tiis, -a, -ilm es' se 

" Ace. ve' ri turn, -am, iim es' se 

Plur. Nom. ve' ri ti, -ae, -a es' se 

" Ace. ve' ri tos, -as, -a es' se j 

Fut. Sing. Nom. ve ri tu' rus, -a, -uiii es' se 

" Ace. ve ri tu' rum, -am, -iim es' se 

Plur. Nom. ve ri tu' ri, -ae, -a es' se 

Ace. v£ ri tu' ros, -as, -a es' se 



to hare feared 



to be about to 
fear 



96 — 



Participles. 
Present. ve' rens, ve ren' tis, fearing 
Perfect. ve' ri tiis, ve'ri ta, ve' ri tiiin, having feared 
Fut. Act. ve ri tu' rus, ve ri tu' ra, ve ri tu' rum, about to fear 
Gerundive, ve ren' diis, ve ren' da, ve ren' dum, to be feared 
Gerund. Supine. 

Gen. ve ren' dl, of fearing 

Dat. ve ren' do, for fearing 

Ace. ve ren' dam, fearing ve' ri turn ( . , , 

Abl. ve ren' do, by fearing ve' ri tfi i 

Examples for Practics: 
liceor, -eri, to bid tiieor, -eri, to look to 

polliceor, -eri, to promise intueor, -eri, to look at 



mereor, -eri, to deserve 



revereor, -eri, to respect 

[163. 164.) 



329. Deponent of the Third Conjugation. 



Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 
sequor, -I, to follow 

Indicative. 

se' quor, I follow 
se' que ris 
se' qui tiir 
s6' qui mur 
se qui' mi ni 
se quun' tur 



Present. 



se que' bar, / 
se que ba' ris 
se que ba' tiir 
se que ba' mur 
se que ba' mi ni 
se que ban' tur 

I shall follow 
se' quar 
se que' ris 
se que' tiir 
se que' mur 
s6 que' mi ni 
se quen'tur 



Imperfect. 

was following 



Future. 



Perfect. 

secutus sum 

Subjunctive. 

se' quar, / may follow 

se qua' ris 

se qua' tiir 

se qua' mur 

se qua' mi ni 

se quan' tiir 

s e ' q u e r er , / should fo llo w 

se que re' ris 

se que re' tiir 

se que re' mur 

se que re' mi ni 

se que ren' tiir 

/ may be about to follow 

i sim 
se cu tu' rus : 

-a, -urn 

se cu tu' ri, 
-ae, -a 




— 97 — 



Indicative. 
I (have) followed 
se cu' tus, -a, -urn 



Perfect. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 




I may have followed 



se cu' tus, -a, -rim 




s£ cu' ti, -ae, -a, 4 e' stis se cu' ti, -ae, -a 1 si' tis 

( sunt ( sint 

Pluperfect. 

/ had followed I should have followed 

ie- ram ( es' sem 

e' ras se cu' tus, -a, -urn -j es' ses 
e' rat ( es' set 

(e ra' mus ( es se*'mus 

s$ cu' ti, -ae, -a J e ra'tfs se cu f ti, -ae, -a -< es se'tis 
( e' rant ( es' sent 

Future Perfect. 
/ shall have followed 

( e' ro (wanting) 

s$ cu' tus, -a, -um -] e' ris 
( e' rit 
( e' ri mus 
se cti' ti, -ae, -a -] e' ri tis 
( e' runt 

Impekativk 
Singular. Plural. 

Pres. s&' que re, follow thou se qui' mi ni, follow ye 

Put. se' qui tor, thou shalt follow 

se' qui tor, he shall follow se quun' tor, they shall follow 

Infinitive. 
Pres. se' qui, to follow 

Perf. Sing. Norn se cu' tus, -a, -urn es' se 
" Ace. se cti' turn, -am, -urn es' se 
Plur. Nom. se cu' ti, -ae, -a es' se 
" Ace. se cu' tos, -as, -a es' se 

Fut. Sing. Nom. se cu tu'rus -a, -urn es' se 
u Ace. se cu tu' rum,-am,-um es'se 
Plur. Nom. s6 cu tu' ri, -ae, -a es' se 
" Ace. secutu'ros, -as, -a es'se 



■to have followed 



- to be about to follow 



— 98 



Paeticiples. 
Preient. se' quens, se quen' tis, following 
Perfect, se cu' tus, se cu' ta, se cu' turn, having followed 
Fut Act. se cu tu' rus, s£ cu tu' r&, se cu tu' rum, about to follow 
Gerundiy*. se quen' diis, se quen' da, se quen' dum, to be followed 
Geeund. Supine. 

Gen. se quen' di, of following 

Dat. se quen' do, for following 

Ace. se quen' dum, following se cu' turn ) 

Abl. se quen' do, by following se cu' tu \ to f ollow 

Examples for Practice: 
Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 
loqudr, -I, to speak 
frutfr, -I, to enjoy 
fungtfr, -I, to discharge 



Perfect. 
IScutiis sum 
fructGs sum 
functiis sum 

[165. 166.] 

330. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation. 



Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 
blandlor, -Iri 
Indicative, 

blan' di 5r, I flatter 
blan di' ris 
blan di' tur 
blan di' mur 
blan di' mi ni 
blan di un' tur 



Perfect. 

blanditus sum 

_ , {Subjunctive. 

Present. 

blan' di ar, / may flatter 

blan di a' ris 

blan di a' tur 

blan di a' mur 

blan di a' mi ni 

blan di an' tur 



Imperfect, 
blan di e'bar, I was flattering blan di' rer, / should flatter 
blan di e ba' ris blan di re' ris 

blan di e ba' tur blan di re' tur 

blan di e ba' mur blan di re' mur 

blan di e ba' mi ni blan di re' mi ni 

blan di e ban' tur blan di ren' tur 



blan' di &r, / shall flatter 

blan di e' ris 

blan di e' tur 

blan di e' mur 

blan di e' mi ni 

blan di en' tur 



Future, 
blan di tti'rfis, 
-a, -fim 

blan di ttl' ri, 
-ae, -a 




be about 
to flatter 



99 — 



Indicative. 
/ (have) flattered 
blan di' tus, -a, -iim 

blan dl' ti, -ae, -a 

/ had flattered 
blan dr tfis, -a, -urn 

blan dr ti, -ae, -a 




Subjunctive. 
Perfect. 

/ may have flattered 



blan dr tus, -a, -um 



blan dr ti, -ae, -a 



Pluperfect. 

/ should have -flattered 




blan dr tus, -a, -urn 



{ e' ram 

4 e' ras 

(e' rat 

( e ra' mus 

-] e ra' tis blan dr ti, -ae, -a 

f e' rant 



es' sem 
' es' ses 
es' set 
es se'miis 
es se'tls 
es' sent 



Future Perfect. 




(wanting) 



I shall have flattered 



blan dl' tus, -a, -urn 



blan dT ti, -ae, -a 



Imperative 
Singular. Plural. 

Pres. blan di' re, flatter thou blan di' mi ni, flatter ye 

Put. blan di'tor, thou shall flatter 

blan di' tor, he shall flatter blan di an' tor, they shall flatter 

Infinitive. 
Pres. blan di' ri, to flatter 

Perf. Sing. Nom. blan di' ttis, -a, -urn es' se ~\ 

11 Ace. blan di' turn, -am, -urn es' se f 

Plur. Nom. blan di' ti, -ae, -a es' se f to have flattered 

" Ace. blandi'tos, -as, -a es' se j 

Fut. Sing. Nom. blan di tu' riis, -a, -urn es'se ^) 

" Ace. blan di tu' ruin, -am, -xim es' se [to be about to 
Plur. Nom. blan di tu' ri, -ae, -a es'se [ flatter 

" Ace. blan di tu' ros, -as, -a es'se J 



— 100 — 



Supine. 



blan di' turn ) 



-,-,^- r to flatter 
blandi'tu J J 



Participles. 
Present, blan' di ens, blan di en' tis, flattering 
Perfect, blan di' tus, blan di' ta, blan di' turn, having flattered 
Fut. Act. blan di tu' rus, blan di tu' ra, blan di tu' rum, about 

to flatter 
Gerundive, blan di en' dus, blan di en' d&, blan di en' dum, to be 
flattered 

Gebund. 
Gen. blan di en' di, of flattering 
Dat. blan di en' do, for flattering 
Ace. blan di en' dum, flattering 
Abl. blan di en' do, by flattering 

Examples for Practice: 
largior, -iri, to bestow partior, -iri, to share, divide 

raentior, -iri, to lie potior, -iri, to possess one 1 s self 

molior, -iri, to strive sortior, -iri, to draw lots 

[167. 168.) 

Appendix to the Third Conjugation, 
Yerbs in io. 
331. Some verbs of the Third Conjugation insert 
1 before the ending of the Present, as: capere, to 
take; capio, I take. This 1 appears likewise in all 
the other forms derived from the Present and In- 
finitive, but not before another 1 or e, except in the 
third person of the future active: capiet, lie will take. 

Active Voice. 



Pres. Ind. k Pres. 


Inf. 


Perfect. Supine. 


capiS, -ere, to 


take 


cepi captQm 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 






Present. 


/ take 




/ may take 


ca' pi 




ca' pi am 


ca' pis 




ca' pi as 


ca' pit 




ca' pi at 


ca' pi mus 




ca pi a' mus 


ca' pi tis 




ca pi a' tis 


ca' pi unt 




ca' pi ant 



— 101 — 



Indicative. 

/ was taking 
ca pi 6' bam 
ca pi e'bas 
ca pi 6' bat 
ca pi 6 ba' mus 
ca pi e ba' tis 
ca pi e' bant 

/ shall take 
ca' pi am 
ca' pi es 
ca/ pi et 
cap! e' mus 
ca, pi e' tis 
ca' pi ent 



Imperfect. 



Subjunctive. 

/ might take 
ca/ pe rem 
ca' pe re's 
ca' pe ret 
ca pe re' miis 
ca pe r6' tis 
ca/ pe rent 



Future. 



cap tu 
-ae, 



/ may be about to take 

' sim 

SIS 

Sit 

si' mus 
si' tis 
sint 



cap tu'rus, 
-a, -urn 






/ have taken or / took 
ce' pi (like leg!) 



Perfect. 

/ may have taken 
c§' pe rim {like legerim) 

Pluperfect. 
/ had taken I might have taken 

ce' pe ram {like lggeram) ce pis' sem {like legissem) 

Future Perfect. 
/ shall have taken 



c6' pe ro {like lSgero) 
Singular. 



(wanting) 



Pres. 
Perf. 

Fut. Sing. Nom 
" Ace. 

Plur. 

u 



Imperative. 

Plural, 
ca' pi te, take ye 
ca pi to' te, ye shall take 
ca pi un' to, they shall take 
Infinitive. 
ca' pe re, to take 
ce pis' se, to have taken 
cap tu' rus, 



Pres. ca' pe, take thou 
Fut. ca' pi to, thou shalt take 
ca' pi to, he shall take 



Nom. 
Ace. 



a, -urn es' se 
cap tu' rum, -am, -um es'se 
cap tii' ri, -ae, -a es'se 
cap tu' ros, -as, -& es' se 

Paeticiples. 
Present, ca' piens, -tis, taking 
Future, cap tu' rus, -a, -um, about to 



to be about to take 



take 



— 102 — 



Gebund. 
Gen. ca pi en' di, of taking 
Dat. ca pi en' do, for taking 
Ace. ca pi en r dum, taking 
Abl. ca pi en' do, by taking 



Supine. 



™£,f™\totake 



cap' tu 



Passive Voice. 



Present. 



Subjunctive. 



Imperfect. 



Indicative. 

2" am taken 
ca' pi or 
ca f p£ ris 
ca' pi tur 
ca' pi mur 
ca pi' mi nl 
ca pi un' tur 

J was taken 
ca pi e' bar 
ca pi e ba' ris 
ca pi e ba' tur 
ca pi e ba' mur 
ca pi e ba' mi nl 
ca pi e ban' ttir 

/ shall be taken 
ca' pi ar 
ca pi 6' ris 
ca pi e' tur 
ca pi e' mur 
ca pi e' mi nl 
ca pi en' tur 

Perfect. 
/ was or have been taken 
cap' tiis, -&, -um sum, &c. 

Pluperfect. 
/ had been taken I might have been taken 

cap' tus, -a, -iim e' ram, &c. cap' tiis, -a, -iini es' sem, &c. 

Future Perfect. 
I shall have been taken 
cap' tiis, -&, -iim e' ro, &c. (wanting) 



Future. 



I may be taken 
ca' pi ar 
ca pi a' ris 
ca pi a' tur 
ca pi a' mur 
ca pi a' mi nl 
cap! an' tur 

/ might be taken 
ca' pe rer 
ca p£ re' ris 
ca pe re' tur 
ca pe re' mur 
ca pe re' mi ni 
ca pe ren' tur 



(wanting) 



I may have been taken 
cap' tiis, -a, -iim sim, &c. 



— 103 — 

Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

Pres. ca' pe re, be thou taken ca pi' mi ni, be ye taken 

Fut. ca' pi tor, thou shalt be taken 

ca' pi tor, he shall be taken ca pi un' tor, they shall be taken 

Infinitive. 
Pres. ca' pi, to be taken 

Perf. Sing. Nom. cap' tiis, -a, -iim es' se 

11 Ace. cap' turn, -am, -uin es' se . 

■ni m i +? ™ « ,w*x y to have been taken 

Plur. Nom. cap' ti, ~ae, -a es' se 

" Ace. cap' tos, -as, -a es' se 

Fut. cap' turn I' ri, to be about to be taken. 

Participles. 
Perfect. cap' tus, -a, -urn, taken 
Gerundive, ca pi en' dus, ca pi en' da, ca pi en' diim, to be taken 

332. Verbs of the Third Conjugation ending in 

16, lor, are the following: 

Active Verbs, 
capio, -ere, to take jacio, -ere, to throw 

ciipio, -ere, to desire pario, -ere, to bring forth 

facio, -ere, to make quatio, -ere, to shake 

fodio, -ere, to dig rapid, -ere, to seize 

fugio, -ere, to flee sapio, -ere, to be wise 

and Compounds of the obsolete 

[-lacio, / entice] [-specio, 7 see] 

Deponent Verbs, 
gradior, -i, to go patior, -I, to suffer 

morior, -I, to die 1^7. 138.] 

For their Principal Parts see 368. 

Special Forms in Conjugation. 

333. The following Special Forms are found in 

many verbs: 

Perfects in avi, evi, IvT, and the tenses derived from them, 
drop the v before s or r, and contract the vowels throughout, ex- 
cept those in Ivi, which do not admit the contraction of i-e before 
r. In like manner novi, I know, and its compounds are contracted. 



104 — 



Ind. 



avi 



amavisti amasti 



Perfect. 



evi 



delevisti delesti 



amavistis amastis 
amaverunt amarunt 



Subj. amaverim 
Inf. amavisse 



amarim, &c. 

amasse 



delevistis delestis 

deleverunt delerunt 

deleverim delerim, &c. 

delevisse delesse 



Pluperfect. 
Ind. amaveram amaram, &c. deleveram deleram, &c. 

Subj. amavissem amassem, &c. delevissem delessem, &c. 



Ind. amavero 



Future Perfect. 
amaro, &c. delevero delero, &c. 



ivi 



OVI 



Ind. 



audivistl 



Perfect, 
audistl novisti 



nosti 



audivistis 
audiverunt 
Subj. audiverim 
Inf. audivisse 



Ind. audiveram 
Subj. audivissem 



audistis 
audierunt 
audierim, <fcc. 
audisse 



novistis 

noverunt 

noverim 

novisse 



Pluperfect. 
audieram, &c. noveram 
audissem, &c. novissem 



nostis 
norunt 
norim, &c. 

nosse 



noram, &c. 

nossem, &c. 



Future Perfect. 

Ind. audivero audiero, &c. novero 

Mark that the Future Perfect of novi is novero uncontracted. 

334. In the Perfect Ind. Act. (3rd pers. plur.) ere for erunt is 
often found, thus: 

amavere for amaverunt, they (have) loved 
monuere " monuerunt, they (have) advised 
legere " legerunt, they (have) read 
audivere " audiverunt, they (have) heard 



— 105 — 

335. In the second person of the Passive we often find rS for 
ris, thus: 

amere for ameris, thou may est be loved, 
amabare " amabaris, thou wast loved 
aniarere " amareris, thou mightest be loved 
amabere " ainaberis, thou wilt be loved, 
This ending, however, is rarely used in the Present Indicative, 
but almost exclusively in the Future. 

336. The Imperatives of dlcere, to say; ducere, to lead; facere, 
to make, and ferre, to bear, are: die, due, fac, fer, respectively. 
Compounds follow the simple verbs, except those of facio which 
change a into l, as: perfice, achieve thou (see 368.). 

337. The Gerund and Gerundive of the 3d and 4th Conjugations, 
instead of endi, endiis, may end in undi and undus, especially 
after i, as: 

capiundus, to be taken; repetundiis, to be reclaimed. 

338. For the Imperative of scio, / know, the future form scito 
is alwavs used in the singular, and scitote in the plural. 

[169. 170.] 

Formation of the Principal Parts. 

339. In forming the principal parts of any verb, 
we take for a starting point its stem, which is either 
a Vowel-stem or a Consonant-stem, according as it ends 
either in a vowel or a consonant. 

340. The First Conjugation includes all verbs whose stem 
ends in a, as: ama-re, Stem: am a 

341. The Second Conjugation includes all verbs whose stern 
ends in e, as: moiie-re, Stem: mone. 

342. The Fourth Conjugation includes all verbs whose stem 
ends in I, as: audi-re, Stem: audi. 

343. The Third Conjugation includes all verbs whose stem 
ends in a consonant., as: leg-ere, Stem: leg'; or in u (v), as: sta- 
tu-ere, Stem: statu. Stems in u follow the Consonant-conjugation. 

344. As a rule, Vowel-stems undergo no change 
except in some cases the contracting of the final 



— 106 



vowel with the termination, as: amo contracted from 

ama-o; they form the Perfect and Supine by adding 

respectively vl, turn, to the stem, thus: 

Stem. Perfect. Supine. 

I. ama-re, to love ama-vl ama-tmn 

II. dele-re, to destroy dele-vi dele-turn 

IV. audi-re, to hear audl-vi audi-tum 

345. Consonant-stems are liable to various changes 
which will be considered below under Third Con- 
jugation. 

VERBS of the FIEST CONJUGATION. 

346. As already explained, the First Conjugation contains all 
the vowel-stems in a, and forms the Perfect and Supine by adding 
respectively vi, turn, to the stem. Or, in other words, in the First 
Conjugation the Regular Forms of the Principal Parts are these: 

Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. 

-o -are -avi -atiim 

amo amare, to love amavi amatum 

Those Verbs of the First Conjugation which form their 
Perfect and Supine differently are the following: 



34 7. Perfect in ui, 

crepo, -are, to creak 



Supine in Itum (turn). 
crepiii crepitum 



increpo, -are, to scold 


increpiii 


increpituiu 


discrepo, -are, to disagree 


discrepui 


iv anting 


cubo, -are, to lie down 


cubtii 


cubitum 


incubo, -are, to lie upon 


inciibul 


incubitttm 


acciibo, -are, to lie near 


accubtii 


accubitum 


Some Compounds insert m, 


and are of the Third Conjugation. 


domo, -are, to tame 


domtil 


domitum 


sono, -are, to sound 


sonui 


sonitum, sonaturus 


resono, -are, to resound 


resonavi 


wanting 


tono, -are, to thunder 


tonui 


tonitum 


veto, -are, to forbid 


vetui 


vetitum 


frico, -are, to rub 


friciii 


frlcatiim, frictum 


mico, -are, to shine 


mictiT 


wanting 


emico, -are, to shine forth 


emictiT 


^micatum 


dlmico, -are, to fight 


dimicavi 


dimicatum 



— 107 — 



[plico, I fold] * 
appllco, -are, to apply 

explico, -are, to unfold 

impllco, -are, to involve 



i applicavi applicattim 

( applicui applicittim 

j explicavi explicatum 

"I explicui explicitum 

j implicavi implicatum 

( implicit! implicltum 

Compounds in -plico from nouns in -pi ex are regular, as: 
multiplico, -are, to multiply, from multiplex. 



poto, -are, to drink 
seco, -are, to cut 
deseco, -are, to cut down 

eneco, -are, to slay 



potavi 
seciii 
desecui 
( enecavi 
( enectii 



pGtum 

sectiim, secaturus 

desecttim 

enecattim 

enecttini 



348. 



Perfect in 1, Supine in turn 
with lengthened stem-vowel. 



juvo, -are ) tQ asgist jiivi _ jfttflm 

adjuvo, -are) adjuvi adjutum 

Fut. Participles: jiivatiirus, but adjuturus or adjiivaturus 
lavo, -are, to wash lavi lavattim (lautum, 

lotum) 

349. With Reduplicated Perfect. 

Some Verbs of the First, Second and Third Conjugations repeat 
in the Perfect the initial consonant of the stem with the vowel fol- 
lowing it, or with e. Compound Verbs omit the reduplication, but 
Compounds of do, I give; sto, I stand; disco, / learn; posco, / 
demand, and some of those of curro, I run, retain it. 

do, -are, to give dedi datum 

circumdo, -are, to surround circumdedi circumd&ttim 

pessumdo, -are, to ruin pessumdedl pessumdatum 

satisdo, -are, to give bail satisdedi satisdatum 

venumdo, -are, to sell venumdedi venumdatum 



a is ever 



— tt/AC, LU dt,&fr VCUU111UCU1 V CllUlllUcliLllIlJ 

ywhere short, except in das, thou givest; da, give thou. 

Like do, are conjugated the Compounds with words of two syl- 
lables, as: circumdo, I surround. The Compounds with words of 
one syllable pass over into the 3d Conjugation. 



* Obsolete forms are inclosed within brackets [ ]. 



— 108 — 

sto, stare, to stand steti statiim 

antisto, -are, to excel anti steti wanting 

circumsto, -are, to stand around cireumsteti ivanting 
consto, -are, to consist constiti wanting 

praesto, -are, to afford praestiti wanting 

disto, -are, to be distant wanting wanting 

exsto, -are, to exist wanting wanting 

Like antisto. all Compounds of stare with prepositions of 
two syllables have steti in the Perfect, but no Supine. Those com- 
pounded with prepositions of one syllable have stiti in the Perfect, 
and likewise no Supine, disto and exsto have neither Perfect nor 
Supine. [*** 124 1 

350. More than half of all Deponents in the language are of 
the First Conjugation, and all of these are regular (see 327). 

VERBS of the SECOND CONJUGATION. 

351. The Second Conjugation, as we have seen, includes all 
verbs whose stem ends in e. In these the Perfect and Supine 
regularly add vi, turn to the stem, thus: 

Stem. Perfect. Supine. 

dele-re, to destroy dele-vi dele-tiim 

352. However, most verbs of the 2d Conjugation drop the 
stem-vowel e in the Perfect, vi becomes ui, and in the Supine I 
is inserted before turn; thus: 



Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 


Perfect. 


Supine. 


-eo -ere 


-iii 


-ltuni 


moneo monere, to advise 


mSniii 


monitum 



This is considered the Regular formation, as it is the one which 
most commonly occurs. 

353. Many verbs with a regular Perfect in m want the Supine. 

Such are: 

arceo, -ere, to keep off horreo, -ere, to shudder 

areo, -ere, to be dry langueo, -ere, to be weary 

calleo, -ere, to be versed lateo, -ere, to be hid 

candeo, -ere, to shine liqueo, -ere, to be fluid 

egeo, -ere \ , , . , madeo, -ere, to be wet 

. & ,„ ' w - - -> to be in want w ., '_ w ' ,. Jjt 

mdigeo, -ere ) niteo, -ere, to glitter 

Smineo, -ere, to be prominent oleo, -ere, to smell 

floreo, -ere, to blossom palleo, -ere, to look pale 



— 109 — 



pateo, -ere, to stand open 
rigeo, -ere, to be stiff 
rubeo, -ere, to be red 
sileo, -ere, to be silent 
sorbeo, -ere, to sip 
sordeo, -ere, to be dirty 
splendeo, -ere, to gleam 

vireo, -ere, 



studeo, -ere, to busy one's self 
stiipeo, -ere, to be amazed 
succenseo, -ere, to be angry 
timeo, -ere, to fear 
torpeo, -ere, to be numb 
tiimeo, -ere, to swell 
vigeo, -ere, to be vigorous 
to be green 



354. Some verbs, derived mostly from Adjectives, want both 
Perfect and Supine: 



flaveo, -ere, to be golden yellow 
hebeo, -ere, to be blunt 
polleo, -ere, to be powerful 
maereo, -ere, to grieve 
renldeo, -ere, to shine 
scateo, -ere, to gush 
squaleo, -ere, to be filthy 

[125. 126.] 

355. A great many Verbs of the Second Conjugation deviate 
from the regular formation mentioned in 352. 



albeo, -ere, to be white 
aveo, -ere, to long for 
caiveo, -ere, to be bald 
humeo, -ere, to be moist 
immineo, -ere, to threaten 
liveo, -ere, to be pale 
caneo, -ere, to be gray 



356. Perfect in evT, Supine 

deleo, -ere, to destroy 

fleo, -ere, to weep 

neo, -ere, to spin 

[vm,Ifill] 
compleo, -ere ^ 
impleo, -ere >- to fill (up) 
repleo, -ere ) 

[oleo, I grovj] 
obsoleo, -ere, to go out of use 
aboleo, -ere, to abolish 
adoleo, -ere, to grow up 



35: 



Perfect in l, 



caveo, -ere, to be on one's guard 

faveo, -ere, to favor 

foveo, -ere, to cherish 

moveo, -ere, to move, trouble 

voveo, -ere ) . , 

> to vow, devote 



devoveo, -ere 



n etiim (itiim 


, tiim): 


delevi 


del etiim 


flevi 


fl etiim 


nevT 


netum 


complevi 


completiim 


implevi 


impletiim 


replevi 


repletimi 


obsolevi 


obsoletum 


abolevi 


abolitiim 


adolevi 


adultiim 


)ine in turn: 




cavT 


cautum 


favi 


fautiim 


fovi 


fottim 


movi 


mo tiim 


vovi 


votiim 


devovi 


devotuna 



— 110 — 



paveo, -ere, to quake for fear 
ferveo, -ere, to glow 



pavi 
j fervi j 
( ferbm ) 



wanting 
wanting 



coniveo, -ere, to shut the eyes < . . . I wanting 



358. Dropping the I 

doceo, -ere, to teach 

teneo, -ere, to hold 
obtineo, -ere, to occupy 
attineo, -ere, to belong 
pertlneo, -ere, to pertain 
abstlneo, -ere, to abstain 
contmeo, -ere, to hold together 

miseeo, -ere, to mix, mingle 

torreo, -ere, to roast 
censeo, -ere, to value, think 

recenseo, -ere, to review 

percenseo, -ere, to survey 



of the Supine: 

docui 

tenui 

obtinui 

attmui 

pertinui 

abstinm 

contmui 

miscui 

torrui 
censtii 

recensxii 

percensiii 



359. 



Perfect in si, Supine in turn: 



augeo, -ere, to increase 
indulgeo, -ere, to indulge 
torqueo, -ere, to torture 
lCiceo, -ere, to shine 
lugeo, -ere, to mourn 
frlgeo, -ere, to be cold 

360. Perfect in si, 

ardeo, -ere, to burn 

haereo, -ere, to hang 

adhaereo, -ere ) . ■ v, 

wl ' - « >to slick 

conaereo, -ere j 

jubeo, -ere, to order 

maneo, -ere, to stay, remain 

rernaneo, -ere, to remain 
mulceo, -ere, to soothe 

permulceo, -ere, to appease 
mulgeo, -ere, to milk 



auxi 

indulsi 

torsi 

luxi 

luxi 

frixi 

Supine in sum: 
arsi 
liaesT 
aclhaesi 
cohaesi 
jussi 
man si 
remans! 
mulsi 
permulsi 
mulsi 



doctiim 

(tentum) 

obtentum 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 
\ mixtum 
[ mistum 

tostum 

censum 
( recensum 
( recensitum 

wanting 



auctum 

indultum 
tortum 

wanting 
wanting 
to anting 



[129. ISO.] 



arsum 

haesiim 
adhaesum 
cohaesiim 
jussum 

man sum 
rem an sum 
mulsuni 
permulsum 
mulsum 



— Ill — 



rldeo, -ere, to laugh risi 

arrideo, -ere, to smile upon arris! 

derideo, -ere, to laugh at deris! 

suadeo, -ere, to advise suas! 

dissuadeo, -ere, to dissuade dissuas! 

persuadeo, -ere, to persuade persuas! 

tergeo, -ere j fo tersI 
tergo, -ere ) 

abstergeo, -ere, to wipe off absters! 

Compounds only take the Second Conjugation. 

algeo, -ere, to be cold alsi 

fulgeo, -ere, to shine Ms! 

turgeo, -ere, to swell tursi 

urgeo, -ere, to urge ursi 



rlsum 
arrlsum 

clerisuin 
suasiini 
dissuasuni 
persuasum 

tersuni 

abstersuni 

wanting 
wanting 
wanting 

wanting 



361. Perfect in 1, Supine in sum: 

prandeo, -ere, to breakfast prandT pransum 

Participle pransus, in an active sense, having breakfasted 

sedeo, -ere, to sit 

circumsedeo, -ere, to sit around 

supersedeo, -ere, to forbear 

assideo, -ere, to sit by 

insideo, -ere, to sit upon 

obsldeo, -ere, to besiege 

possldeo, -ere, to possess 

dissideo, -ere, to disagree 

praesideo^ -ere, to preside 

resideo, -ere, to remain behind 
video, -ere, to see 

invldeo, -ere, to envy 

provideo, -ere, to provide 
strldeo, -ere, to whiz, creak 

With Redup 
mordeo, -ere, to bite 
psndeo, -ere, to hang 

dependeo, -ere, to hang down 

impendeo, -ere, to hang over 
spondeo, -ere, to pledge 

respondeo, -ere, to answer 

despondeo, -ere, to promise 
tondeo, -ere, to shear 



sedi 


sessuin 


circumsedi 


ciroumsessiim 


supersedi 


siipersessum 


assedi 


assessmn 


insedi 


ins es sum 


obsSdi 


obsessum 


possedi 


possessum 


dissedi 


wanting 


praesedi 


wanting 


resedi 


wanting 


vidi 


visum 


invidi 


invisum 


providi 


provisuin 


strldi 


wanting 


Lication: 
momordi 


morsum 


pep end! 


penstim 


ic anting 


w anting 


wanting 


wanting 


spopondi 


sponsfim 


respond! 


re sp on sum 


despond! 


desponsfim 


totond! 


tonsum 



— 112 — 

Reduplication, or the repetition of the initial consonant with the 
following vowel, is generally dropped in Compounds, as: re-spondi. 

362. Mark the solitary verb: 



eieo, -ere , civi citum 

w_ _ w >to rouse _ „ _^ w 

cio, -ire J civi citum 



4th Con- 



accio, -ire, to call in accivi accitum 

concio, -ire, to call together concivi concitiim ) J u g atlon - 

363. A few verbs of the Second Conjugation form the tenses of 
completed action like the Passive; they are called Semi-Deponents 
(see 277): 

audeo, -ere, to dare ausils sum, I dared 

gaudeo, -ere, to rejoice gavlsiis sum, I rejoiced 

soleo, -ere, to be wont solitus sum, I was wont 

[131. 132.] 

364. Deponent Verbs. 

Pres. Ind. & Inf. Perfect, 

fateor, -eri, to ^confess fassus sum 

confiteor, -eri, to confess confessiis sum 

diffiteor, -eri, to disavow diffessus sum 

medeor, -eri, to cure wanting 

misereor, -eri, to have pity miseritfis, misertus sum 

reor, -eri, to think ratus sum 

[163. 164.1 

YEEBS or the THIKD CONJUGATION. 

365. The Third Conjugation includes all verbs with stems 
ending in u (v), or one of the consonants. The Regular Forms of 
the Third Conjugation are seen in the following: 

Stem. Perfect. Supine. 

acu-ere, to sharpen acu-i acu-tum 

ed-ere, to eat ed-i e-smia 

carp-ere, to pluck carp-si carp-turn 

Stems in u take l in the Perfect, and turn in the Supine. 
Consonant-stems take in the Perfect partly i, partly si; and in 
the Supine partly turn, partly sum. 

A few verbs in tio belong to the First Conjugation, as: fluctu-o ? 
-are, to wave. 



— 113 — 
Stems in u (v). 



366. 



Perfect in l, Supine in turn: 



aciio, -erg, to sharpen 

Perf. Part, wanting; acutiis, sharp 
arguo, -ere, to accuse 

coarguo, -ere, to convict 

redargiio, -ere, to refute 
imbuo, -ere, to dip, dye 
induo, -ere, to put on 
exuo, -ere, to put off 
liio, -ere, to atone for 
liia, -ere, to wash 

abliio, -ere, to wash (off) 
mmuo, -ere ) to lessen, 

imminuo, -ere ) weaken 
[nuo, / nod] 

abnuo, -ere, to dissent 

adniio, -ere, to nod assent 
ruo, -ere, to rush forth 

corruo, -ere, to fall to the ground 

diriio, -ere, to destroy 

erfio, -ere, to dig out 

obruo, -ere, to cover 
spiio, -ere, to spit 
statuo, -ere, to set, place 

restituo, -ere, to restore 
siio, -ere, to sew 
tribfio, -ere, to give, confer on 

contribuo, -ere, to contribute 

distribuo, -ere, to distribute 
solvo, -ere, to loose 

absolvo, -ere, to acquit 
volvo, -ere, to roll, turn 
[gruo or ruo ?] 

ingriio, -ere, to rush 

congrCio, -ere, to agree 
metiio, -ere, to fear 
pluo, -ere, to rain 
sternuo, -ere, to sneeze 



acui 


acutiim 


3, sharp, is 


adjective only. 


argiii 


(argutiim) 


coargui 


wanting 


redargui 


wanting 


imbiii 


imbutiiiii 


indui 


iiidutiim 


exui 


exutxini 


lui 


(luitam) 


lui 


iiitum 


ablui 


ablutum 


mm ui 


mmutum 


imrnmui 


immmiituiii 


abnui 


wanting 


adnui 


wanting 


rui 


rutum 


corrui 


wanting 


dirui 


dlrutum 


eriii 


eriituni 


obriri 


obrutiiiii 


spill 


sputum 


statu! 


statu turn 


restitui 


restitutum 


Sill 


sutiim 


tribui 


tributiim 


contribui 


contributliin 


distribui 


distributum 


solvi 


solutum 


absoM 


absolutiim 


volvi 


volutum 


ingrui 


wanting 


congrui 


wanting 


metiii 


wanting 


pliii 


wanting 


sternul 


wanting 




1133. 134,1 



— 114 



367. The following stems in u, v form their Perfect and Supine 



differently: 






vivo, -ere, to live 


vixi 


victum 


struo, -ere, to build 


struxi 


structiim 


construo, -ere, to construct 


construxi 


constructuni 


instruo, -ere, to instruct 


instruxl 


instructum 


fluo, -ere, to flow 


fluxi 


fluxum 


refluo, -ere, to flow back 


reflux! 


refluxfim 

[135. 136.) 


Verbs 


in 16. 





368. Some verbs of the Third Conjugation insert I before the 
ending of the Present, as: capere; to take; capio, / take. This l 
appears likewise in all the other forms derived from the Present 
and Infinitive, but not before another l or e, except in the third 
person of the future active: capiet, lie will take (see 331). 

capio, -ere, to take 

accipio, -ere, to receive 

decipio, -ere, to deceive 

incipio, -ere, to begin 
facio, -ere, to do, make 

patefacio, -er£, to open 

conficio, -ere, to make 

interficio, -ere, to kill 

perficio, -ere, to finish 

The verb facer e, to do, make, deserves special notice: 
It has for its Passive flo, factus sum, fieri, to be made, become 
(see 411). Its Imperative is fac, do. 

The same rule applies to those Compounds of facio, which retain 
&, as : patefacio, I open; Pass, patef lo, / am opened; Imperat. patef ac, 
open. The Compounds of facio with Prepositions change a to I, and 
are inflected regularly, as: interficio, / kill; Pass, interflcior; 
Imperat. interface. 



cepi 


captum 


accepi 


acceptum 


decepi 


decepturu 


incepi % 


inceptum 


feci 


factiiiii 


patefeci 


patefactum 


confeci 


confectiiiii 


interfeci 


interfectum 


perfeci 


perfectum 



jacio, -ere, to throw, cast 


jeci 


j actum 


objicio, -ere, to throw to 


objeei 


objectuni 


subjicio, -ere, to subject 


subject 


subjectum 


[lacio, I entice] 






allicio, -ere ) to allure, 
pellicto, -ere j entice 


allexi 


(allectum) 


pellexi 


pellectum 


elicio, -ere, to entice out 


elicui 


elicitiim 



— 115 — 



[spgcio, / see] 



aspicio, -ere, to look 


aspexi 


aspectum 


despicio, -ere, to despise 


despexi, 


despecttiiii 


respicio, -ere, to consider 


respexi 


respectum 


cupio, -ere, to wish, desire 


cupivi 


cupitum 


fodio, -ere, to dig 


fodi 


fossum 


confodio, -ere, to pick out 


confodi 


confossiim 


effodio, -ere, to dig out 


effodi • 


effossum 


fugio, -ere, to flee or fly 


ftigi 


fugltum 


pario, -ere, to bring forth 


peperl 


partum 




Fut. Part. 


paiiturus 


quatio, -ere, to shake 


wanting 


quassum 


conciitio, -ere, to shake 


concuss! 


concussum 


r&pio, -ere, to snatch away 


rapui 


raptum 


arrlpio, -ere, to seize 


arripui 


arreptum 


saplo, -ere, to be wise 


sapivi, sapui 


wanting 


deslpio, -ere, to be foolish 


wanting 


wanting 

[137. 138.] 


Stems 


in d, t. 





369. As a rule, stems in d, t have si in the Perfect, sum in 
the Supine. Before the s of the Perfect and Supine, d and t are 
dropped or become by assimilation ss. 

370. The repetition of the initial consonant with the vowel 
following it or with e (Reduplication) is especially common in the 
formation of the Perfect of the 3d Conjugation; ass 

pendo, / weigh, pependi; cado, I fall, cecidi. 

These reduplicated Perfects are always formed in l. 

Compound verbs omit the reduplication, but the Compounds of 



dO, i" give; sto, / stand; disco, / learn; 
some of those of curro, / run, retain it. 



posco, / demand, and 



371. 



Perfect in si, Supine in suiu. 



claudo, -ere, to shut, close 

concludo, -ere, to shut up 
divido, -ere, to divide, separate 
laedo, -ere, to violate, hurt 
allido, -ere, to dash against 
collido, -ere, to dash together 
elldo, -ere, to strike out 



clausi 


clausum 


conclusi 


conclusiim 


divisT 


divlsiini 


laesi 


laesiim 


allisi 


allisiim 


colllsi 


colllsum 


elisi 


ellsum 



— 116 — 



ludo, -ere, to play 


lusi 


lusum 


illiido, -ere, to mock 


illusi 


illusum 


plaudo, -ere, to applaud 


plausi 


plausiim 


applaudo, -ere, to applaud 


applausi 


applausum 


explodo, -ere, to hiss off 


explosi 


explosum 


rado, -ere, to scrape 


rasi 


rasum 


rodo, -ere, to gnaw 


rosi 


rosum 


triido, -ere, to thrwst 


trusi 


trusum 


vado, -ere, to go 


wanting 


wanting 


evado, -ere, to turn out 


evasi 


evasum 


With. Reduplication: 




cado, -ere, to fall 


eecidi 


casum 


occido, -ere, to set 


occidi 


occasum 


incido, -ere, to fall into 


incidi 


wanting 


Other Compounds of cado want the Supine. 




caedo, -ere, to fell 


eecidi 


caesum 


decido, -ere, to cut down 


decidi 


decisum 


excido, -ere, to hew out 


excidT 


excisum 


incido, -ere, to engrave 


incidi 


incisum 


occido, -ere, to kill 


occidi 


occisum 


pendo, -ere, to weigh 


pep end! 


pensum 


suspendo, -ere, to hang 


suspend! 


suspensum 


tendo, -ere, to spread 


tetendi 


tensum & 
tentum 


attend5, -ere, to attend to 


attend! 


attenttim 


contendo, -ere, to exert 


contend! 


contentum 


extendo, -ere, to stretch out 


extend! 


extensum & 
extentum 


ostendo, -ere, to show 


ostend! 


ostensum 


tundo, -ere, to thump 


tutiid! 


lusum & 

tun sum 


contundo, -ere, to break down 


contud! 


contusum 


obtundo, -ere, to stun 


obtudi 


obtusum 


372. Compounds of dare with monosyllabic 


words pass oye 


into the Third Conjugation: 






credo, -ere, to believe 


ere did! 


creditum 


vendo, -ere, to sell 


vendidi 


venditum 


condo, -ere, to build 


condidi 


conditum 



— lit 



abscondo, -erg, to hide 


abscond! 


abscondittim 


6do, -ere, to give out 


edidi 


editum 


perdo, -ere, to ruin 


perdidi 


perditiim 


reddo, -ere, to give back 


reddidi 


redditiim 


trado, --ere, to deliver 


tradidi 


traditum 

[139. 140.] 



373. 



Perfect in l, Supine in sum. 



The Stem of many verbs of this class appears in the Present 
strengthened by n, as: fundo, Stem fud. Stems in nd take I in 
the Perfect. 



[cando, I burn] 
accendo, -ere, 



to kindle 



cudo, -ere, to forge 
edo, -ere, to eat 
[fendo, I fend] 

defendo, -ere, to defend 

offendo, -ere, to offend 
mando, -ere, to chew 
prehendo, -ere, to seize 
scando, -ere, to climb 

ascendo, -ere, to ascend 
fundo, -ere, to pour 

circumfundo, -ere, to surround 

diffundo, -ere, to pour forth 

effundo, -ere, to pour out 
verto, -ere, to turn 

everto, -ere, to overthrow 
sterto, -gre, to snore 



accendl 


accensiiin 


Clldl 


ctlsiim 


edi 


esum 


defend! 


defenstim 


offend! 


offensiim 


mandi 


mansum 


prehendi 


prehensiim 


scandi 


scan stim 


ascend! 


ascensum 


ftidi 


fusum 


circumfudl 


circumfusum 


diffudi 


diffusum 


effudi 


effusiim 


vert! 


versiim 


evert! 


eversum 


stertui 


wanting 



The only Semi-Deponent Verb of the Third Conjugation belongs 
to this class: 



fldo, -ere 
confido, -ere 



> to trust, confide 



fisus sum 
confisus sum 



374. Various Irregularities: 

c6do, -ere, to yield cess! cessiim 

accedo, -ere, to approach access! accessum 

findo, -ere, to splits cleave fid! fissum 



118 — 



scindo, -ere, to cut 
discindo, -ere, to split 
excindo, -ere, to destroy 
abscindo, -ere, to tear off 
excindo takes Perfect and Supii 

meto, -ere, to reap 

initto, -ere, to send 
amitto, -ere, to lose 
admitto, -ere, to admit 
committo, -ere, to commit 
permitto, -ere, to permit 
promitto, -ere, to promise 

pando, -ere, to spread, 

peto, -ere, to seek 
repeto, -ere, to repeat 

sido, -ere, to sit down 
assldo, -ere, to sit down 
consido, -ere, to settle 

eisto, -ere, to stop 
obsisto, -ere, to oppose 

Other Compounds want Supine: 
absisto, -ere, to cease 
adsisto, -ere, to stand by 
exsisto, -ere, to come forth 



scidi 


scissiim 


discidi 


discissum 


excldi 


exclsum 


abscidi 


abscisum 


'om caedo, abscindo the Supine. 


messui 


messflm 


misl 


missum 


amis! 


amissum 


admisi 


admisstim 


commisi 


commissum 


permisi 


permissum 


promisi 


promissum 


pandi 


passum 


petivi, petil 


petitum 


repetivi 


repStitum 


sedi 


wanting 


assedi 


assesstim 


consedi 


consessflm 


Stltl 


statum 


obstiti 


obstittim 


abstltl 


wanting 


adstiti 


wanting 


exstiti 


wanting 




[141. 142.] 



Stems in b, p. 

375. Stems in b, p take si in the Perfect, and turn in the 

Supine) at the same time b before s and t becomes p, as: nubo, 
nupsi, nuptiim. The stem of many verbs appears in the Present 
strenghtened by m, as: rumpo, rupi. 

gltibo, -ere, to peel 

deglubo, -ere, to skin 
nubo, -er£, to marry 
scribo, -ere, to write 

conscribo, -ere, to frame 

describe, -ere, to describe 

praescribo, -ere, to prescribe 
carpo, -ere, to pluck 

decerpo, -ere, to pluck 

discerpo, -ere, to tear asunder 



(glupsi) 


gluptiim 


(deglupsi) 


degluptum 


nupsi 


nuptiim 


scrips! 


scriptum 


conscripsi 


conscriptiim 


descripsi 


descriptum 


praescripsi 


praescripttiiii 


carpsi 


carpttim 


decerpsT 


decerptiim 


discerpsi 


discerptQm 



119 — 



repo, -ere, to creep, crawl 


repsi 


reptiim 


irrepo, -ere, to creep into 


irrepsi 


irreptiim 


scalp o, -ere, to carve 


scalpsi 


scalptum 


sculpo, -ere, to chisel 


sculpsi 


sculptum 


serpo, -ere, to creep 


serpsi 


(serptum) 


376. Irregul 


ar: 




accumbo, -ere, to recline at table 


accubm 


accubitum 


bibo, -ere, to drink 


bibi 


bibitum 


rumpo, -ere, to break 


rupi 


ruptiim 


corrumpo, -ere, to corrupt 


corriipi 


corruptum 


erumpo, -ere, to break out 


erupi 


eruptum 


perrumpo, -ere, to break through 


; perrupi 


perruptum 


strep o, -ere, to make a noise 


strepui 


strepitum 


lambo, -ere, to lick 


Iambi 


(lambitiim) 


scabo, -ere, to scratch 


scabi 


wanting 

[143. 144.] 


Stems in c, g, q, h, ct. 




377. c, g", q, and h with 


s become x 




g, h, and q before t become c. 




duc-o — duxi = dues! 


rego — rectum = regtiim 


reg-o — rexi = regsi 


traho ■ — tractum === trahtilm 


coqu-o — coxi = coqsi 


coquo — coctum = coqtum 


trah-o — traxl = trahsl 






378. Perfect in si, Supine in turn: 




cingo, -ere, to gird 


cinxi 


cinctum 


[fligo, -ere, to strike 


flixi 


flictum] 


affligo, -ere, to dash 


afflixi 


afflictiim 


confllgo, -ere, to fight 


conflixi 


conflictum 


profligo, -are, to strike down 


profligavi 


profligatum 


jungo, -ere, to join 


junxi 


junctum 


adjungo, -ere, to join (to) 


adjunxi 


adjunctuui 


plango, -ere, to beat, lament 


planxi 


plancttiiii 


rego, -ere, to rule, govern 


rexi 


rectuni 


corrigo, -ere, to correct 


correxi 


correctuin 


dirigo, -ere, to direct 


direxi 


directum 


(surrigo) surgo, -ere, to rise 


surrexT 


surrectum 


(perrlgo) pergo, -ere, to go on 


perrexi 


perrecttim 


sugo, -ere, to suck 


SUXl 


suctum 


tego, -ere, to cover 


texi 


tectiiiii 


detego, -ere, to discover 


detexi 


detectiim 


protego, -ere, to protect 


protexi 


protectum 



— 120 



tingS (tinguo), -Sre, to stain tinxi 

ungS (ungiio), -ere, to anoint unxi 

[sting do, I put out] 

exstingdS, -ere, to put out exstinxi 

distinguS, -ere, to distinguish distinxi 

trahS, -ere, to draw traxi 

contrahS, -ere, to contract contraxl 

vehS, -ere, to carry vexi 

dicS, -ere, to say, tell dixi 

praedicS, -ere, to predict praedixl 

indlcS, -ere, to declare indixi 

diieS, -ere, to lead duxi 

ediicS, -ere, to lead forth eduxi 

The Imperatives of dicere, to say, ducere, to lead, 

compounds follow the simple verbs: Sdtic, praedle. 

coquo, -ere, to cook, bake coxi 



379. 



The Supine is irregular: 



finxi 
pinxi 
strinxl 
fixi 



fingS, -ere, to fashion 
pingS, -ere, to paint 
stringo, -ere, to bind 
figS, -ere, to fix 

380. Present strengthened by t: 

flecto, -ere, to bend flexi 

necto, -ere, to tie nexi-nexui 

pectS, -ere, to comb pexi 

plectS, -ere, to beat (only Passive) wanting 



tinctfim 
unctum 

exstinctum 

distinctiiin 

tractum 

contractual 

vectum 

dictum 

praedicttim 

indictum 

ductum 

Sductum 

are: die, due; 
eocttim 



fictum 
pictum 
strictum 
fixum 



flexiim 
nexiim 
pexum 

wanting 



381. The Supine is wanting: 

angS, -ere, to torment, vex 
ningS, -ere, to snow 
clangS, -ere, to clang 

382. 

parcS, -ere, to spare 
pungS, -ere, to pierce, sting 
tango, -ere, to touch 

attingS, -ere, to touch 
pangS, -ere, to strike, drive 
pangS, -ere, to bargain 

compingS, -ere, to drive tight 



anxi 

ninxi 

wanting 

With Reduplication: 

peperci 

pttpugi 

tetigi 

attigi 

panxi 

pepigi 

compegi 



parsum 

punetum 
tactum 

attactum 
panctum 
pactum 
compactum 



— 121 



383. With lengthened Stem-vowel. 

Many Consonant-stems with short stem-syllable take I in the Per- 
fect, before which the stem-vowel is lengthened, and a becomes e. 

ago, -ere, to drive, do 

perago, -ere, to accomplish 

abigo, -ere, to drive away 

sublgo, -ere, to subdue 

cogo, -ere, to force (co-ago) 

dego, -ere, to spend (de-ago) 

ambigo, -ere, to contend 
frango, -ere, to break 

confringo, -ere, to break in two 

effringo, -ere, to break open 
lego, -ere, to read 

allego, -ere, to choose 

perlego, -ere, to read through 

relego, -ere, to read over 

colligo, -ere, to collect 

deligo, -ere, to choose 

eligo, -ere, to elect 

dillgo, -ere, to love 

intellego, -ere, to understand 

neglego, -ere, to neglect 
Ico, -ere, to strike 
vinco, -ere, to conquer 
linquo, -ere, to leave 

relinquo, -ere, to leave (behind) 

384. Perfect in si, £ 

mergo, -ere, to dip in, plunge 
epargo, -erS, to scatter 

conspergo, -ere, to sprinkle 
tergo, -ere, to wipe 
vergo, -ere, to verge 

Stems in 1, m, n, r. 

385. Perfect in si, Supine in turn, 
m is sometimes strengthened with p, as : sumo, sumps!. 

cOmo, -ere, to adorn compsi comptttm 



egi 


actum 


peregi 


peractiim 


abegi 


abactum 


siibegi 


subactuni 


coegi 


coactum 


degi 


wanting 


wanting 


wanting 


fregi 


fractum 


confregi 


confractuni 


effregi 


effracttim 


tegi 


lectiim 


allegi 


allectum 


perlegi 


perlectum 


relegi 


relectiim 


collegi 


collectum 


delegi 


delectum 


elegi 


electura 


dliexi 


dllectiim 


intellexi 


intellectiim 


neglexi 


neglectum 


1C1 


ictiini 


V1C1 


victum 


Hqui 


wanting 


reliqui 


relictum 


ipine in sum: 




mersi 


merstim 


sparsi 


sparsum 


conspersi 


conspersiini 


tersi 


tersum 


wanting 


wanting 




[145. 146.] 



d6mo, -ere, to take away 



deuipsi 



demptum 



— 122 — 

promo, -ere, to take out prompsi promptiim 

sumo, -ere, to take sumpsi sumptum 

absumo, -ere, to use up absumpsi absumptiini 

consumo, -ere, to consume consumpsi consumptfei 
[temno, I despise] 

contemno, -ere, to despise contempsi contempttim 

386, According to the Analogy of the 2d Conjugation: 



alo, -ere, to nourish 


aliii 


S altum 
( alitum 






colo, -ere, to cultivate 


coliil 


cultum 


incolo, -ere, to inhabit 


incolui 


* incultiim 


consiilo, -ere, to counsel 


consult!! 


consultum 


molo, -ere, to grind 


moliil 


molitum 


occulo, -ere, to conceal 


occului 


occultum 


fremo, -ere, to growl 


fremm 


fremitum 


gerao, -ere, to groan 


gemm 


gemitum 


tremo, -ere, to tremble 


tremui 


wanting 


v5mo, -ere, to vomit 


vomiil 


vomitiiiii 


Svomo, -ere, to vomit up 


evomiii 


evomitiim 


gigno, -ere, to beget 


genii! 


genitiim 


p5no, -ere, to place 


posul 


positum 


aniepOno, -ere, to prefer 


anteposiii 


antepositiim 


oppono, -ere, to oppose 


opposui 


opposltum 


[cello, I impel] 






percello, -ere, to beat down 


perculi 


perculsiim 


antecello, -ere, \ 


wanting 


wanting 


praecellS, -ere, >- to excel 


wanting 


ivanting 


excello, -ere, ) 


wanting 


wanting 


387. With Reduplication : 




cano, -ere, to sing 


cecini 


cantum 


concino, -ere, to sound together 


conclnui 


wanting 


praecino, -ere, to sing to one 


praecmui 


wanting 


curro, -ere, to run 


cucurri 


cursiini 


accurro, -ere, to run to 


\ accucurrl ) 
( accurri ( 


accursum 






concurro, -ere, to run together 


( concucurri ) 
I concurri 1 


concursiini 


occurro, -ere, to meet 


occurrl 


occursum 



— 123 



recurro, -ere, to run back recurri 

succurro, -ere, to succor succurri 

fallo, -ere, to cheat fei'ell! 

refello, -ere, to refute refelli 

pello, -ere, to drive (away) pepull 

depello, -ere, to dispel depuli 

repello, -ere, to repel repdli 



388. 



Perfect in vi: 



cerno, -ere, to see, discern (crevi) 

decerno, -ere, to determine decrevi 

discerno, -ere, to distinguish discrevi 

lino, -ere, to smear -lev! (livi) 

alllno, -ere, to besmear allevi 

illino, -ere, to bedaub illevi 

si no, -ere, to let sivi 

desino, -ere, to leave off desivi, dSsi! 

Bperno, -ere, to despise sprevl 

sterno, -ere, to strew stravi 

prosterno, -ere, to overthrow prostravi 

sero, -ere, to sow sevi 

consero, -ere, to plant consevi 

insero, -ere, to plant in insevi 

sero, -ere, to join serui 

desero, -ere, to forsake deserm 

dissero, -ere, to discourse disserui 

insero, -ere, to insert inseru! 

tero, -ere, to rub, wear out trivi 

contero, -ere, to rub off contiiv! 

dStero, -ere, to wear away detnvi 



recursum 

succursum 

falsum 

wanting 

paisum 

depulsum 

repulsum 

[147. 148.] 



(cretiim) 

decretum 

discretum 

Htum 

allitum 

illittim 

sitimi 

desifr&m 

spretum 

stratum 

prostratum 

satuin 

consituin 

insituni 

sertiini 

desertum 

dissertum 

insertum 

tritum 

contritum 

detrltum 



389. Various Irregularities: 

vello, -ere, to pluck, pull veil! (vulsi) vulsum 

avello, -ere, to pull down avelli avulsiim 

premo, -ere, to press press! pressum 

comprimo, -ere, to press together compress! compressum 

exprimo, -ere, to press out express! expressum 

supprimo, -ere, to keep back suppress! suppressum 

psallo, -ere. to play on the cithern psall! wanting 

£mo, -ere, to buy gin! empttim 

eoemo, -ere, to buy together coemi eoemptilm 



— 124 - 



rSdimo, -ere, to buy back redemT 

adimo, -ere, to take away ademi 

perimo, -ere, to slay peremi 

gero, -ere, to carry on gessi 

congero, -ere, to bring together congessi 

Tiro, -ere, to burn ussi 

combtiro, -ere, to burn (wholly) combussi 

verro, -ere, to sweep verri 

quaero, -ere, to seek, desire quaesivi 

acquire, -ere, to acquire acquisivi 

anquiro, -ere, to search after anqulsivl 

inquiro, -ere, to inquire inquisivi 

fero, ferre, to bear (403) tulT 

ftiro, -ere, to rage wanting 

tollo, -ere, to lift, take away sustuli 

Stems in s, x (cs). 
390. There is only one stem in s preceded by a Vowel, viz. vlso; 
all the rest are in s preceded by a Consonant 



redemptfen 

ademptum 

peremptum 

gestum 

congestiim 

ustum 

combustiim 

versiim 

quaesitiim 

acqulsitum 

anquTsitiim 

inquisitiim 

latum 

wanting 

sublatiim 

[149. 150.] 



viso, -ere, to visit 



vlsi 
depsui 



j pinsui 
1 pinsi 
texm 



wanting 

depstum 

pinsitum 

pistiim 

textum 



depso, -ere, to knead 
pinso, -ere, to pound 

texo, -ere, to weave 

According to the Analogy of the 4th Conjugation: 

arcesso, -ere, to summon arcessivi arcessitimi 

capesso, -ere, to lay hold of capessivi capessitum 

facesso, -ere, to accomplish facessivi facessitum 

lacesso, -ere, to excite lacessivi lacessitum 

incesso, -ere, to fall upon incessivi (-1) ivanting 

Stems in sc. 

391. Stems strengthened by sc have generally an inchoative 
meaning, i. e , they denote the beginning of an action — Inchoative 
or Inceptive Verbs. When formed from verbs (by adding sc to "Vowel- 
stems, and isc to Consonant-stems) they are called Verbal In- 
ceptives; when from substantives and adjectives, Denominative 
Tnceptives. 

Verbal Inceptives. 

392. Verbal Inceptives take the Perfect and Supine of their 
Primitives, if such Perfect and Supine actually exist. 



— 125 



393. Many Verbs in sco are no longer used as Inchoatives, 
but in the sense of their Primitives which have been disused: 



cresco, -ere, to grow 

nosco, -ere, to (learn to) know 
agnosco, -ere, to acknowledge 
cognosco, -ere, to know 

pasco, -ere, to graze 

quiesco, -ere 



requiesco, -ere 



.} 



to rest 



suesco, -ere, to become used 
assuesco, -Sre ) to be accus- 
consuesco, -ere ) tomed 

compesco, -ere, to restrain 

disco, -ere, to learn 
dSdisco, -ere, to unlearn 
ediseo, -ere, to learn by heart 

poseo, -ere, to demand 



deposco, 
exposco, 



-ere, to request earnestly expoposci 



reposco, -ere, to demand back 
glisco, -ere, to grow up 



crevi cretum 

novi notfim 

agnovi agnitum 

cognovi cognitum 

pavi pastiim 

quievi qufetum 

requievi requietum 

suevi suetum 

assuevi assuetiim 

cons ue vi consuetum 

compescui wanting 

didici wanting 

dedidici wanting 

edidici wanting 

poposci wanting 

-ere, to request depoposci wanting 

wanting 

wanting wanting 

wanting wanting 

[151. 152] 

394. But the great majority of Verbal Ineeptives are from 
Primitives which actually exist. 

With the Perfect and Supine of their Primitives: 

abolesco, -ere, to disappear abolevi abolittim 

aboleo 

adolesco, -ere, to grow up adolevi adultum 

adoleo 

obsolesco, -ere, to become obsolete obsolevi obsoletum 
obsoleo 

coalesco, -ere, to grow together coalui coalitum 
alo 

concupiscO, -ere, to covet concupivi concupitfim 

cupio 

convalesco, -ere, to recover convalGi convalitfim 

valeo 

exardesco, -ere, to take fire exarsi exarsum 

ardeo 

obdormisco, -ere, to fall asleep obdormivl obdormitQm 
dormlo 



— 126 


— 




revivisco, -ere, to revive 


revixi 


rgvictiim 


vivo 


• 




scisco, -ere, to decree 


SC1V1 


scitiim 


conscisco, -ere, to bring upon 


conscivi 


conscltum 


scio 






condolesco -ere, 1 iofeel in 
mdolesco, -ere, ) 


condoliii 


condoKtum 


indolui 


indolitiim 


doleo 






inveterasco, -ere, to grow old 


inveteravl 


inveteratum 


invetero 







With the Perfect of their Primitives: 

acesco, -ere, to turn sour aciii 

aeeo 

aresco, -ere, to become dry ariii 

areo 

calesco, -ere, to become warm calm 

caleO 

conticesco, -ere, to become still contlcui 

taceo 

delltesco, -ere, to hide away delitiii 

lateo 

efferveseo, -ere, to boil up effervm & efferbiii 

ferveo 

effloresco, -ere, to begin to bloom effloriii 

floreo 

extimesco, -ere, to fear extimtii 

timeo 

erubeseo, -ere, to turn red erubm 

rubeo 

horreseo, -ere, to stand on end horrm 

horreo 

illucesco, -ere, to grow light illuxi 

luceo 

intumeseo, -ere, to swell intdmui 

turneo 

pallesco, -ere, to turn pale pallui 

palleo 

putresco, -ere, to rot putrui 

putreo 

senesco, -ere, to grow old senui 

seneo 



— 127 — 



resipisco, -ere, to come to one's rSsipuT 

sapio [senses 

ingemisco, -ere, to groan ingemiii 

gemo 

contremisco, -ere, to tremble contremtii ' 

tremo 

Wanting Perfect and Supine. 

hisco, -ere, to yawn flavesc5, -ere, to become yellow 

hio flaveo 

augesco, -ere, to augment hebesco, -ere, to grow dull 

augeo hebeo 

Denominative Inceptives. 
395. Most Denominative Inceptives want both Perfect and 
Supine; some have the Perfect in uL 

Wanting Perfect and Supine. 



aegreseo, -ere, to fall sick 

aeger, sick 

ditesco, -ere, to groiv rich 

dives, rich 

dulcesco, -ere, to become sweet 

dulcis, -sweet 

grandesco, -ere, to grow large 

grandis, large 

miteseo, -ere, to become mild 

mitis, mild 

pinguesco, -ere, to grow fat 

pinguis, fat 



plumesco, -ere, to get feathers 

plfima, a feather 

pueraseo, -ere, to become a 

piier, a child [child 

juvenesco, -erS, to grow young 

jtivenis, young 

gravesco, -ere, to grow heavy 

gravis, heavy 

integrasco, -ere, to begin anew 

integer, fresh 

teneresco, -ere, to grow tender 

tener, tender 



With the Perfect in in. 

crebresco,-ere, to become frequent (creber, frequent) crgbriii 

duresco, -ere, to grow hard, (durfis, hard) durtii 

gvanesco, -ere, to vanish (vanus, empty) evantif 

innotesco, -ere, to become known (notus, known) innottii 

macresco, -ere, to grow meager (macer, meager) macrtii 

maturesco, -ere, to ripen (maturiis, ripe) maturul 

nigresco, -ere, to become black (niger, black) nigrfii 

obmutesco, -ere, to become dumb (mutus, dumb) obmuttii 

recrudesco,-ere, to break open afresh (crudus, fresh) recrudGi 

vllesco, -ere, to become vile (vllis, vile) vlliii 

[153. 154.] 



128 — 



396. 



Deponent Verbs. 



friiSr, -I, to enjoy 

perfruor, -i, to enjoy fully 
fungor, -i, to discharge 

defungor, -T, to discharge 
gradior, -I, to step 

aggredior, -I, to attack 
labor, -I, to glide, roll on 

dllabor, -I, to fall asunder 
loquor, -T, to speak 

alloquor, -I, to address 
morior, -I, to die 
nitor, -i, to stay one's self on 
patior, -5, to suffer 

perpetior, -I, to endure 
[plector] 

amplector, -I, to embrace 
queror, -I, to complain 
sequor, -I, to follow 

assequor, -I, to pursue 
utor, -T, to use 

abutor, -I, to use, abuse 
revertor, -I, to turn back 



fruitus & fructus sum 

perfructtis sum 

functus sum 

defunctus sum 

gressus sum 

aggressus sum 

lapsus sum 

dilapsus sum 

loctitus sum 

allocutus sum 

mortuiis sum— F. Part, moriturus 

nisus & nixus sum 

passtis sum 

perpessus sum 

amplexus sum 

questus sum 

secutiis sum 

assecutus sum 

tisus sum 

abustis sum 

reverti, active — Part, reversus 



With stems in sc 



[apiscor, -I, to reach after 
adipiscor, -i, to obtain 

defetiseor, -I, to be worn out 

expergiscor, -I, to awake 

irascor, -T, to grow angry 

[mmiscor, / recollect] 
commmiscor, -I, to devise 
reminiscor, -i, to remember 

nanciscor, -1, to get 

nascor, -I, to be born 

obllviscor, -l, to forget 

paciscor, -I, to strike a bargain 

pascor, -I, to feed 

proficiscor, -i, to set out, start 

ulciscor, -I, to avenge 

veseSr, -i, to feed upon, eat 



aptus sum] 

adeptus sum 

defessus sum 

experrectus sum 

(iratus sum) — Iratus, angry 

commentus sum 

wanting 

nactus & nanctus sum 

natus sum — Fut. Part, nascitiirus 

oblltus sum 

pactus sum 

pastus sum 

profectus sum 

ulttis sum 

wanting [165. 166.} 



— 129 



VERBS of the FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

397. The Fourth Conjugation includes all verbs with vowel- 
stems in l. Their Perfect arid Supine are formed by adding respec- 
tively vi, turn, according to the rule already given (344). Or, in 
other words, in the Fourth Conjugation the Regular Forms of the 
Principal Parts are these: 

Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. 

-15 -ire -ivi -ltum 

audio audire, to hear audivi auditum 

398. The following Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation vary 
from the usual mode of formation: 

farcio, -ire, to stuff 

refercio, -ire, to cram 
fulcio, -ire, to support 
haurio, -ire, to draio 

exhaurio, -ire, to exhaust 
saepio, -ire, to hedge in 
salio, -ire, to leap 

dissilio, -ire, to burst asunder 
sancio, -ire, to sanction 
sarcio, -ire, to mend 
sentio, -ire, to feel, perceive 
sepelio, -ire, to bury 
venio, -ire, to come 

invenio, -ire, to find out 



to bind 



vincio, -ire ) 

devincio, -ire J 
amicio, -ire, to clothe 
pario, -ere, to bring forth (3d Conjugation' 

aperio, -ire, to open 

repeiio, -ire, to find 

Wanting Perfect and Supine: 
ferio, -Ire, to strike, beat and Desideratives 

ferocio, -ire, to be unruly in urio, as: 



farsi 


fartiim 


refers! 


refertuni 


fulsi 


fultuni 


hausi 


haustuin 


exhausi 


exhaustum 


saepsl 


saeptum 


salili 


saltuni 


dissiltii 


wanting 


sanxi 


sanctuin, sancituni 


sarsi 


sartuin 


sen si 


sensuni 


sepelivi 


sepultuin 


veni 


ventiim 


inveni 


inventum 


vinxi 


vinctum 


devinxi 


devinctum 


wanting 


amictum 


ugation) 




apertii 


apertiim 


reperoi 


repertum 



siiperbio, -ire, to be proud esiirio, -ire, 

399. Deponent Verbs. 

assentior, -Iri, to assent assensiis sum 

metidr, -iri, to measure mensus sum 



to want to eat 

[159. 160.] 



130 — 



ordior, -Irl, to begin 
experior, -Iri, to try, exercise 
opperior, -iri, to await 
orior, -Iri, to rise, appear 

j orior oreris 

\ orimiir orimmi 
Imperf. Subj. orirer or orerer 
Fut. Part. oritiiriis, -a, -mil 
adorior, -iri, to attack 



Pres. Ind. 



orsus sum 
experttis sum 
oppertus sum 
ortus sum 

oritur l8dO«njngation. 

Gerundive, ormnclus, -a, -uin 
adortus sum 



The Compounds of orior follow the conjugation of the simple verb, 
except adoriri, to rise up at, attack, which follows the Fourth Conju- 
gation throughout. I 167 - 168 ^ 

Irregular Conjugation. 

400. A few verbs are irregular in the Conjugation 

of the Present and the forms derived from it. These 

are: 

sum, / am, and its Compounds. 
The conjugation of sum has already been given (303)] its Com- 
pounds are conjugated in the same way except posse, to be able. 



401. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine, 

possum posse, to be able potui 



Indicative. 

pos' sum, lean 
po' tes, thou canst 
po' test, he can 
pos' su mus, we can 
po te' stis, you can 
pos' sunt, they can 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

pos' sim, I may be able 
pos' sis, thou may est be able 
pos' sit, he may be able 
pos si' mus, we may be able 
pos si' tis, you may be able 
pos' sint, they may be able 



Imperfect, 
po' te ram, / could, was able pos' sem, i" might be able 



po' te ras, thou couldst 
po' te rat, he could 
po te ra' mils, we could 
po te ra' tis, you could 
po' te rant, they could 



pos' sgs, thou mighlest be able 
pos' set, he might be able 
pos se' mus, we might be able 
pos se' tis, you might be able 
pos' sent, they might be able 



— 131 — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Future, 
po' te ro, / shall be able (wanting) 

po' te ris, tlwu wilt be able 
po' te lit, he ivill be able 
po te' ri miis, we shall be able 
po te' ri tis, you ivill be able 
po' t6 runt, they will be able 

Perfect. 

po' tu I, I have been able po tii' e rim, I may have been able 

po tu i' stl po tu' e ris 

po' tii it po tu' e rit 

po tu' 1 mus po tii e ri mus 

po tu i' stis po tu e ri tis 

po tu e' runt po tii' e rint 

Pluperfect, 

po tu' e ram, I had been able po tu is' sem, I might have been able 

po tu' e ras po tii is' ses 

po tu ; e rat po tii is' set 

po tu e ra' mus po tii is se' mus 

po tii e ra' tis po tii is se' tis 

po tu' e rant po tii is' sent 

Future Perfect, 
po tii' e ro, / shall have been able (wanting) 

po tu' e ris 
po tu' e rit 
po tii e ri miis 
po tii e ri tis 
po tii' e rint 

Infinitive. 
Present, pos' se, to be able Perfect, po tu is' se 3 to have been able 

402. The verb siim is joined with the adjective potis, able, 
making the compound (pot-sum) possum, i* can, am able. This is 
conjugated like sum, but observe: 

that the t of pot is assimilated before s, thus: possum instead of 
potsiim ; 

that the f is dropped in fill, fueram, etc., thus: potiii for potfiii; 

that potesse and potessem are contracted into posse, possem. 

Participle, Imperative, and Gerund are wanting; potens, mighty, is 
simply an adjective. £***• 11€ *1 



132 



103. Pres. 


Ind 


. & Pres. Inf. 


Perfect. Supine. 


fero 




ferre, 


to bear 
Active. 


tuli latum 


Indicative. 






Subjunctive. 








Present. 




fe'ro, I bear 






fe' 


ram, / may bear 


fers 






fe' 


ras 


fert 






fe' 


rat 


fe' rl mus 






fe 


ra' nius 


fer' tis 






fe 


ra' tis 


fe' runt 






fe' 


rant 



Imperfect. 

fere' bam, I was bearing fer' rem, I should bear 

fe re' bas fer' res 

fe re' bat fer' ret 

fe re ba' mus fer re' mus 

fe re ba' tis fer re' tis 

fe re' bant fer' rent 

Future. 
fe' ram, I shall bear 
fe' res 
fe' ret 
fe re' mus 

fere' tis ttWrt 
fe' rent ~ ae ' " a 

Perfect, 

tu' li, I bore or have borne tii' le rim, I may have borne 

tu li' sti tu' le ris 

tii' lit tu' le rit 

tu' li mus tii le ri mtis 

tu li' stis tu le ri tis 

tu le' runt tu' le rint 



la tu'rfis, 
-a, -um 

latu' 



sim 
sis 
sit 

si' mus 
si' tis 
sint 



may be 

about 

to bear 



tu' le ram, I had borne 

tu' le ras 

tu' le rat 

tii le ra' mtis 

tu le ra' tis 

tu' le rant 



Pluperfect. 



tu lis' sem, I should have borne 

tii lis' ses 

tii lis' set 

tii lis se' mtis 

tu lis se' tis 

tu lis' sent . 



— 133 — 

Indicative. Subjective. 

Future Perfect, 
tu' le ro, / shall have borne (wanting) 

tu' le ris 
tu' le rit 
tu le r! niiis 
tu le ri tis 
tu' le rint 

Imperative. 
bear thou Plur. fer' te, bear ye 

' to, thou shalt bear " fer to' te, ye shall bear 
' to, he shall bear " fe run' to, they shall bear 

Infinitive. 
' re, to bear 
Lis' se, to have borne 

tii' rus, -a, -urn es' se^ &o, to be about to bear 
Participles. 
Pres. fe' reus, fe ren' tis, bearing 
Fut. la tu' rus, la tu' ra, la tu' rum, about to bear 

Gerund. Supine, 



Pres. 


Sing. 


fer, 


Fut. 


u 


fer 




(1 


fer 


Pres. 




fer 


Perf. 




tu 


Fut. 




la 



Gen. fe ren' di, of bearing 




Dat. fe reu' do, for bearing 


Ace. fe ren' dum, bearing 


f,^] to bear 
la' tu J 


Abl. fe ren' do, by bearing 




Passive. 


Indicative. 


Subjective. 




Present. 


fe' ror, lam borne 


fe' rar, I may be borne 


fer' ris 


fe ra' ris 


fer' ttir 


fe ra' tur 


fe' ri niur 


fe ra' niur 


fe ri' nil ni 


fe ra' mini 


fe run' tur 


fe ran' tur 




Imperfect. 


fS re' b&r, I was borne 


fer' rer, / might be borne 


fg re ba' ris 


fer re' ris 


fe re ba' tur 


fer re' tur 


fe re ba' niur 


fer re' mur 


fe re ba' mi ni 


fer re' mi ni 


fe re ban' tur 


fer ren' ttir 



134 — 



Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Future, 
fe' r&r, I shall be borne (wanting) 

fe re' ris 
fe re' tur 
fe re' mur 
fe re' mi nf 
fe ren' tur 

Perfect, 
la' tus, -a, -tim sum, / was or have been borne 
la' tus, -a, -um sim, I may have been borne 

Pluperfect, 
la' tus, -a, -urn eram, I had been borne 
la' tus, -a, -urn esseni, I might have been borne 

Future Perfect, 
la' tus, -a, -urn ero, / shall have been borne 

Impebative. 
Singular. Plural, 

fer' re, be thou borne fe ri' mi m, be ye borne 

fer' tor, thou shalt be borne 
fer' tor, he shall be borne fe run' tor, they shall be borne 

Infinitive. 
fer' ri, to be borne 

la' tus, -a, -um es' se, &c, to have been borne 
la' turn i' ri, to be about to be borne 

Pabticiples. 
Perfect. la' tus, la' ta, la' turn, borne 
Gerundive, fe ren' dus, fe ren' da, fe ren' dum, to be borne 

Care should be taken not to confound the two verbs: 
ferre, to bear, and ferire, to beat. 



Indic. 
Subj. 

Indio. 
Subj. 

Indic. 



Pres 
Put 



Pres. 
Perf. 
Fut. 



404. 

adfero 

aufero 

confero 

differo 

effero 

infero 

praefero 

rSfero 



Compounds of fero are conjugated like the 

adferre, to afford attuli 

auferre, to carry away abstiili 
conferre, to bring together contiili 



differrS, to defer 
efferre, to carry out 
inferre, to carry into 
praeferre, to prefer 
rSferre, to bring back 



distuli 
extuli 
intuli 
praetuli 
retuli, rettuli 



simple verb: 

adlatum 

ablatum 

collatum 

dilatum 

elatum 

illatum 

praelatum 

relatum 

[173. 174.) 



— 186 — 

405. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect, 

volo velle, to be willing voiui 

nolo nolle, to be unwilling noluT 

malo nialle, to be more willing malui 



Indicative. 

Present. 

I am willing, unwilling, more willing 

v6' lo no' lo malo 

vis non vis ma' vis 

vult non vult ma' vult 

vo' In miis no' lu mils ma' litmus 

vol' tis non vol' tis ma vul' tis 

vo' lunt no' lunt ma' lunt 

Imperfect. 

I was willing, unwilling, more willing 



vo le' bam 
vo le' bas 
vo le' b^t 
vo le ba' miis 
vo le ba' tis 
vo le' bant 



no le' bam 
no le f bas 
no le' bat 
no le ba' miis 
no le ba' tis 
no le' bant 



ma le' bam 
ma le' bas 
ma le' bftt 
ma le ba' mils 
ma le ba' tis 
ma le' bant 



Future. 
I shall be willing, unwilling, more willing 

vo' lam no' lain ma' lam 

vo' les no' les ma' les 

vo' let no' let ma' let 

vo le' miis no le' miis ma le' miis 

vo le' tis no le' tis ma le' tis 

vo'lent no' lent ma' lent 

Perfect. 
Twos or have been willing, unwilling, more willing 

vo' lii 1 no' lii I ma' lu I 

vo lii i' sti no lii i' sti ma lu i' sti 

vo'liiit no' lii it nia'luit 

vo lu' i mus no lii' i miis ma lii' i miis 

vo lu i' stis no lii i' stis ma lii i' stis 

vo lii e' runt no lu e' runt ma lii S' runt 



— 136 — 



Indicative. 
Pluperfect. 
/ had been willing, unwilling, more willing 



no lu' e ram 
no lii' e ras 
no lu' e rat 
no lii e ra' mils 
no lu e ra' tis 
no lii' e rant 
Future Perfect. 
/ shall have been willing, unwilling, more willing 



v5 lii' e ram 
vo lu' e ras 
vo lii' e rat 
v5 lii e ra' miis 
vo lii e ra' tis 
vo lii' e rant 



ma lii' e ram 
ma lu' e ras 
ma lu' e rat 
ma lii e ra' miis 
ma lii e ra' tis 
ma lii' e rant 



vo lu' e ro 
vo lu' e ris 
vo lii' e rit 
vo lu e ri miis 
vo lii e ri tis 
vo lii' e rint 



ma lii' e ro 
ma lii' e ris 
ma lu' e rit 
ma lii e ri miis 
ma lii e ri tis 
ma lii' e rint 



no lii' e ro 
no lu' e ris 
no lii' e rit 
no lii e ri mus 
no lii e ri tis 
no lu' e rint 
Subjunctive. 
Present. 
/ may be willing, unwilling, more willing 
ve'lim no' lim ma' lim 

ve' lis no' lis ma' lis 

ve' lit no' lit ma' lit 

ve II' miis no li' mtis ma II' mus 

ve IT' tis no li' tis ma li' tis 

ve' lint no' lint ma' lint 

Imperfect. 
I should be willing, unwilling, more willing 
vel' lem nol' lem mal' lem 

vel' les nol' les mal' les 

vel' let nol' let mal' let 

vel le' mus nol le'mus mal le' mus 

vel le' tis nol le' tis mal le' tis 

vel' lent nol' lent mal' lent 

Perfect. 
I may have been willing, unwilling, more willing 



vo lii' E rim 
v5 lii' e ris 
vo lii' e rit 
vo lii e ri miis 
vo lii e ri tis 
yo lii' e rint 



no lii' e rim 

no lu' e ris 
no lii' e rit 
no lu e ri miis 
no lii e ri tis 
no lu' e rint 



ma lii' e rim 
ma lii' e ris 
ma lii' e rit 
ma lii e ri miis 
ma lii e ri tis 
ma lii' e rint 



— 137 — 

Subjunctive. 

Pluperfect. 

I should have been willing, unwilling, more willing 



vo lu is' sem 


no lu is' sem 


ma lu is' sem 


vo lii is' ses 


no lu is' ses 


ma lii is' ses 


vo lti is' set 


no lu is' set 


ma lu is' set 


vo lu is se' mus 


no lu is se' mus 


ma lii is se' mus 


vo lu is se' tis 


no lu is se' tis 


ma lu is se' tis 


vo lti is' sent 


no lii is' sent 

Impebative. 
be unwilling, &c 


ma lii is' sent 


wanting Pres. S. 


no'li PI. no 


11' te wanting 


Put. " 


no li' to " no 


li to' tS 




no 11' to no 


lun' to 



iNFINITrVE. 

Pres. vel' le, nol' le, mal' le, to be willing, &e. 

Perf. voluis'se, no lii is' se, ma lii is' se, to have been willing, &c. 





Paeticiples. 


Pres. vo' lens, willing 


no' lens, unwilling wanting 




Gebuhd. 


3en. vo len' di 


no len' di wanting 


Dat. vo len' do 


[175. 176.] 


406. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. 


eo, Ire, to go 


ivi itum 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 




Present. 


e' o, I go 


e' am, I may go 


IS 


e' as 


it 


e' at 


I'mus 


e a' mus 


1'tlS 


e a f tis 


e' unt 


e' ant 




Imperfect. 


i f bam, 7 was going 


I' rem, I should go 


i'bas 


V res 


Tbat 


I' ret 


I ba' mus 


I' re' mus 


I ba' tis 


i re' tis 


V bant 


I' rent 



138 



Indicative. 

I shall go 
1'bo 
I! bis 
i'bit 

V bi mus 

V bi tis 
I' bunt 

/ went or have gone 

V vl (i' I) 
I vi' stl (I i' sti) 

V vit (i' it) 

V vi mils (I' I mus) 
I vi' stis (I i' stis) 
I ve' runt (I e' runt) 

I had gone 

V ve ram (V e ram) 

V ve ras, (I' e ras) . 
I' ve rat, (P e rat) 
I ve ra' mus (I e ra' mils) 
I ve ra' tis (I e ra' tis) 

V ve rant (I e rant) 

I shad have gone 

V ve ro (V £ ro) 
T v§ ris (V e ris) 

V ve rit, (!' e rit) 

I ve ri mus (1 e ri mus) 
I ve ri tis (i e ri tis) 

V ve rint (V e rint) 



Future* 



Subjunctive. 



/ may be about to go 



Itu' 
-a, 



rus, 

-urn 



I tti' ri, 
-ae, -a 



sun 
sis 
sit 

si' mus 
si' tis 
sint 



Perfect. 



I may have gone 

V ve rim (i' e rim) 
P ve ris (V g ris) 
i' ve rit (V e rit) 
I ve ri mus (i e ri mus) 
I ve ri tis (I e ri tis) 

V ve rint (V erint) 

Pluperfect. 

I should have gone 
I vis' sem (is' sem) 
I vis' ses (is' ses) 
I vis' set (is' set) 
I vis se' mus (Is se' mus) 
I vis se' tis (is se' tis) 
I vis' sent (Is' sent) 

Future Perfect. 

(wanting) 







Imperative. 




Singular. 




Plural. 


Pres. 


h go 




r tS, go ye 


Fut. 


V to, thou shalt go 




I to' te, ye shall go 




V to, he shall go 




e un' to, they shall go 






Infinitive. 


Pres. 


V re, to go 






Perf. 


I vis' se (Is' se), to have gone 




Fut. 


l tu' rfis, -a, -tim es 


' se, &c 


. , to be about to go 



139 — 



Gen. 


e 


Dat. 


e 


Ace. 


e 


Abl. 


e 



Participles. 
Pres. 1' ens, Gen. e un' tts, going 
Put. I tu' vus, -a, -urn, being about to go 
Gerund. Supine. 

un' dl, of going 
un' do, for going 

un' dum, going V turn ) (Q 

un' do, by going V tu J [17 ^ im 

4:07. The Compounds of eo are conjugated in the same way. 
But usually they drop the v of the Perfect as: redii for redlvi, <fcc, 
and contract the i i of the Perfect Infinitive and of the Pluperfect 
Subjunctive into I, as: redisse for redl(v)isse, <fcc, e. g.: 
abeo, -ire, to go away praetereo, -ire, to pass by 

Ineo, -ire, to go into, begin redeO, -ire, to return 
intereo, -ire, to perish sfibeo, -ire, to come or go under 

obeo, -ire, to meet transeo, -ire, to pass over 

408. The Compounds veneo, / am for sale, and pereo, Ixoerish y 
serve as Passives to vendo, I sell and perdo, I ruin. The Compound 
ambio, I go about, seek, is regular of the Fourth Conjugation. 

409. queo quire, to be able quivi quituni 
nequeo nequire, not to be able nequivi nequitum 

are conjugated like Ire, to go (406); they are, however, usual only 
in the Present Indicative and Subjunctive. 

410. Pres. Ind.& Pres. Inf. Perfect, 
edo, -ere, to eat edi 

(regular of the 3d conjugation, 373) has 
forms, similar to those of the correspondin 
but always with e long before s, viz.: 



esum 

also some contracted 
; tenses of esse, to be, 



Present Indicative. 



Impertect Subjunctive. 
ederem esseni, I should eat 



edls 


es, thou eatest 


ederes 


esses, tltou wouldst eat 


edit 


est, he eats 


ederet 


esset, he would eal 






ederemus 


essemus, we should eat 


editis 


estis, you eat 


ederetis 


essetis, you would eat 






ederent 


essent, they would eat 






Imperative. 






Singular. 




Plural. 


Prei. ede 


es, ealthou 


edite 


este, eat ye 


Fut. edito esto, thou shall eat editote estote, ye shall eat 


edito esto, he shall eat 





— 140 — 

Infinitive. 

edere esse, to eat 

Passive, editur esttir, is eaten — ederetur essetur, should be eaten 



ill. Pres. Ind & Pres. 


Inf. 


Perfect. 


fio, fieri, to become 


factus sum 


Indicative. 




Subjunctive. 




Present. 


fl' 6, I become 




fi' am, I may become 


fis 




fi' as 


fit 




fi'at 


fi' mus 




fi a' mus 


fi'tis 




fi a' tis 


fi' unt 




fi' ant 




Imperfect. 


fl e' bam, I became 




fi' e rem, I should become 


fi e' bas 




fi' e res 


fi e' bat 




fl' e ret 


fi e ba' mus 




fi e re' mus 


fl e ba' tis 




fl e re' tis 


fi e' bant 




fi' e rent 




Future. 


fi' am, I shall become 




(wanting) 


fi' es 






fi' et 






fi e' mus 






fi e' tis 






fi' ent 







Perfect. 
7 became or have become * I may have become 

factus, -a, -urn sum, &c. factus, -a, -urn sim, to- 

Pluperfect. 
I had become I should have become 

factus, -a, -urn eram, &c. factus, -a, -urn essem, &c. 

Future Perfect. 
I shall have become 
facttis, -&, -urn ero, &c. (wanting) 

Imperative. 
Pres. Sing, fi, become thou Plur. fi' te, become ye 



Pres. 
Perf. Sing. 


Norn. 

Ace. 


Plur. 
ii 


Nom. 
Ace. 



— 141 — 

Infinitive. 
fi' e ri, to become 
factus, ~a, -urn esse 

ZT&2Z"" ► «..-•-- 

fac' tos, -as, -a es f se 
Fut. factum In, to be about to become 

Paetictples. 
Pres. factiis,-a,-um, become; Gerundive. faciendus r a,-"UHi, to bemade 

412. The verb fio is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and 
Future according to the Fourth Conjugation, but takes an e in the 
Infinitive and Subjunctive Imperfect, viz.: fieri, fierem. In these 
forms the 1 is short, but elsewhere it is long, even before another 
vowel. It is originally an intransitive verb meaning to become, to 
happen, but is also treated as Passive to facio, I make. Examples 
are : 

nihil fit, nothing happens 
consul fit, he is made consul 
dives factus est, he has become rich 
nihil factum est, nothing has happened 

413. The Compounds of facio with Prepositions change a into 
x, and form the Passive regularly, as: 

interficio, I kill interficior, / am killed 

But when compounded with words other than prepositions, facio 
retains its a, and uses fio as its Passive, as: 

mansuefacio, / tame mansuef To, / become lame 

liquefacio, I make liquid liquefio, I melt 

The accent remains the same as in the simple verbs, thus: 
mansuef a 'cis, thou tamest, [*?9. iso\ 

Defective Verbs. 

414. Defective Verbs want certain parts. 

415. coepi, I have begun memini, I remember Odi, I hate 
are in use only in the Perfect and the tenses derived from it. To 
coepi, I have begun, incipio, I begin, serves as a Present, memini, 
I remember, and odi, I hate, are present in sense; hence in the Plu- 
perfect and Future Perfect they have the sense of the Imperfect and 
Future, novl, / know (Perf. of nosco, / learn to know), and con- 
suevi, / am wont (Perf. of consuesco, / accustom myself), are also 
present in sense. 



— 142 



Perf. I have begun 

coe' pi 
coe pi' sti 
coe' pit 
coe' pi mils 
coe pi' stis 
coe pe' runt 

Pluperf. coe' pe ram, &c. 
Fut. Perf. coe' pe ro, &c. 



Perf. coe' pe rim, &c. 
Pluperf. coe pis' sem, &c. 



(wanting) 



Indicative. 
I remember 
me' mi in 
me mi ni' sti 
me' mi nit 
me mi' ni mus 
me mi ni' stis 
me mi ne' runt 



I hate 
o'di 
o di' sti 
o'dit 
o' di mus 
o di' stis 
o de' runt 



me mi' ne ram, &c. <V de ram, &c. 
me ml' ne ro, &c. o' de ro, &c. 



Subjunctive. 
me mi' ne rim, &c. 
me mi nis' sem, &c. 



Impeeattve. 
me men 'to 
me men to' te 



o'derim, &c, 

odis'sem,&c. 



(wanting) 



Perf. 
Fut. 



Perf. 
Fut. 

Passive. 



coe pis' se 



Infinitive. 
me mi nis' se 



coep tu' rus es' se (wanting) 

Participles. 
coep' tiis, -a, -iim (wanting) 
coep tu' His, -a, -urn (wanting) 



f) dis' se 

o su' rus es' se 

(o' siis, -a, -iim) 
o sti' riis, -a, -um 



coep' tiis, -a, -um sum, I have begun (used with the 

Pass. Infinit.) 
o' siis, -a, -um sum, I hate 



416. ajo, / say, say yes, affirm — inquam, I say, quoth 7- 
fari, to speak 



Pees. Ind. 


a' jo 
a' is 
a' it 

a' junt 


Pees. 


Subj. 


a' jas 
a' jat 

a' jant 


Imp. 


Ind. 


aj6' bam 
a je' bas 
a je' bat 
a je ba' mus 
a je ba' tis 
aje' bant 


Pere. Ind. 


., 




a' it 


_ 






— 



Participle, a'jens^ affirmative 



143 — 



Pees. Ind. 


in' quam 
in' quis 
in' quit 
in' qui mus 
in' qui tis 
in' qui unt 


Pees. 


Subj. 


in' qui as 
in' qui at 

in qui a' tis 
in' qui ant 


Imp. Ind. 


in qui e' bam 
in qui e' bas 
in qui e' bat 
in qui e ba' miis 
in qui e ba' tis 
in qui e' bant 


Fut. 


Ind. 


m' quies 
in' qui et 


Pebf. Ind. 




Impebat. 


in' que 




in qui' sti 






in' qui te 




in' quit 






in' qui to 



in qui' stis 
inquam, say, is used only in direct quotations, as the English quoth. 



Besides the Infinitive fart, to speak, mark 

Pres. fatur, he speaks Imperat. 

Put. labor, J shall speak Gerund, 

fabitur, he will speak 

Perf. fatus sum, I have spoken, &c. Supine. 

Partioiple. (fantis, fanti) infans, speechless 
Gerundive, fandus, -a, -urn, to be spoken of 



fare, speak thou 
fandi, of speaking 
fando, for speaking 
fata, to speak 



417. a've 

a vS' te 
a'ge 
ce' do 



sal' vS 
sal ve' te 
a' gi t6 
cet' te 



sal ve' bis, hail thou ! va' lg ) fare- 
va le' te ) 



hail ye! 

come 

give 



well 
a'pagS, begone 



418. To these may be added: 

quae' so, I beseech 
quae' su mus, we beseech 



fo' rem, I should be 
fo' res, thou shouldst be 
fo' ret, he should be 
fo' rent, they should be 
fo' re, to be about to be 

[181. 182] 



— 144 — 



Impersonal Verbs. 
419. Many Verbs ajopear only in the third per- 
son singular and in the Infinitive to express an action 
or condition without reference to any actor. These 
are called Impersonal Verbs. 



signifying personal conditions are 



420. The following Verbs 
absolutely impersonal: 

Present. 
decet, it becomes 
dedecet, it is unbecoming 
libet, it pleases 
licet, it is lawful, alloived 
liquet, it is clear 

miseret, it excites pity 

oportet, it is needful 
piget, it grieves 
paenitet, it causes sorrow 
piidet, it shames 
taedet, it wearies 

421. The Impersonals decet, dedecet, libet, licet can have a 
subject, but only a neuter pronoun or adjective. 

Hbet, licet and liquet govern the Dative, as mihi licet, it is lawful 
for me; mini libet, it pleases me. All the other verbs mentioned in 
420 govern the Accusative, the persons being expressed as follows: 



Infinitive. 


Perfect. 


decere 


decuit 


dedecere 


dedecmt 


libere 


libtiit or libitum est 


licere 


llcuit or licitum est 


liquere 


licuit 


miserere' 


(miseritum ) . 
1 misertum J 




oportere 


oportmt 


pigere 


pigult or pigitum est 


paenitere paenituit 


pudere 


piiduit or puditfim est 


taedere 


pertaesiim est 



Indicative. 

paenitet me, I repent 
paenitet te 
paenitet eum 
paenitet nos 
paenitet vos 
paenitet eos 

/ was repenting 
paenitebat me, &c. 

/ shall repent 
paenTtebit me, &c. 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

paeniteat me, / may repent 

paeniteat te 

paeniteat eum 

paeniteat nos 

paeniteat vos 

paeniteat eos 

Imperfect. 

I should repent 
paeniteret me, &c. 

Future. 

(wanting) 



— 145 — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 
/ (have) repented I may have repented 

paenitiiit me, &c. paenltuerit me, &c. 

Pluperfect. 
/ had repented I should have repented 

paenltuerat me, &c paenitiiisset me, &c. 

Future Perfect. 
/ shall have repented 
paenltuerit me, &c. (wanting) 

422. Yerbs describing phenomena of nature are almost in- 
variably impersonal in virtue of their meaning: 
pluit, it rains fulgurat ) u l hfm8 

ninglt, it snows fulmmat ) 

grandinat, it hails lucescit, it becomes light 

tonat, it thunders vesperascit, evening comes on 

£23. Verbs impersonally used: 
accidit \ interest, it concerns, it matters 

m I it havvens ^ vUj U flights 

evenit f patet, it is plain 

continglt ) placet, it pleases 

constat, it is evident, agreed praestat, it is better 

expedlt, it is useful refert, it concerns, it matters 

convenit, it is fit restat, it remains 

delectat, it delights vacat, there is leisure 
The Passive of intransitive Yerbs is often used impersonally, thus: 

vivitur, people live pugtiatur, there is fighting 

sic vivitur, such is life itur, some one goes 

[183. 184.] 

Adverbs. 

424. Adverbs are words qualif} T ing verbs and ad- 
jectives, as also other adverbs. In respect to form, 
they are Primitive, i. e. such as cannot be traced to 
simpler forms, or Derivative. 

425. The majority of Derivative Adverbs are formed from 
adjectives in the following manner: Adjectives of the First and 
Second Declensions (ending in lis, and er) form the adverb by- 
changing the genitive ending i into e. Examples are: 



146 



Nominative. 


Genitive. 


Adverb. 


lentfis, slow 


lenti 


lente, slowly, leisurely 


rectus, right 


recti 


recte, rightly, correctly 


liber, free 


Hberi 


Hbere, freely 


pulcher, fine 


pulchri 


pulchre, finely 



Nominative. 


Genitive. 


celer, fast 


celeris 


felix, happy 


felicis 


fortis, brave 


fortis 


libens, willing 


libentis 


patiens, patient 


patientis 


diligens, careful 


dlligentis 


elegans, elegant 


elegantis 


sollers, skillful 


sollertis 



bonus, good, makes bene, well; maliis, bad, makes male, badly. 

426. Adjectives of the Third Declension form their adverbs 
in ter, changing the genitive ending is into iter; but those in ns 
and rs change the genitive ending is into er: 

Adverb. 
celeriter, fast 
feliclter, happily 
fortiter, bravely 
libenter, willingly 
patienter, patiently 
dlllgenter, carefully 
eleganter, elegantly 
sollerter, skillfully 

[97. 98.] 

427. Some Adverbs from Adjectives of the First and Second 
Declensions have both forms, as: 

firmus, strong firme, firmiter, strongly 

humanus, human humane, humaniter, humanly 

largus, large large, largiter, largely 

opulentus, rich opulent er only, richly 

violentus, violent violent er u , violently 

428. A few Adverbs differ in meaning from their adjectives, as: 
sane, certainly from sanus, sound 

valde, very from validus, strong 

429. The Neuter Accusative of some Adjectives of the 3d 
declension is used as an adverb, as: 

facile, easily impune, ivith impunity 

difficile, with difficulty recens, recently 

430. Certain Cases of Adjectives, Nouns and Pronouns are 
often used as Adverbs: 

raro, rarely continue, forthwith 

tuto, safely falso, falsely 

eito, quickly, soon fortuito, by chance 

consulto, purposely gratulto, gratuitously 



— 14T — 

s6cretd\ secretly manifests, clearly 

sero, late merito, deservedly 

vero, in truth immerito, undeservedly 

vere, truly necessario, necessarily 

hac, this way perpetiio, perpetually 

sponte, of one's own accord sfibito, suddenly 

gratis, gratis certo, in fact 

ceterum, for the rest certe, assuredly 

nimis, nimium, too much erebro, frequently 

prmmin, first quo, whither 

tantum, only forte, by chance 

noctti, by night 

431. Some Phrases or Clauses have grown into Adverbs, as: 
antea, before quodanimodo, in a certain man- 
interea, meanwhile quotannis, every year [ner 
propterea, therefore * videlicet = videre licet ) . 
hodie (= hoc die), to-day . scilicet = scire licet ) 
raagnopere, particularly nudius tertius = nunc dies ter- 
obvlam, toivards tius, the day before yesterday 

432. Adverbs in im are formed from Supines, as: 

certatim, emulously sensim, little by little 

nominating expressly carptim, by pieces 

prlvatim, in private cursim, speedily 

statim, steadily passim, here and, there 

raptlm, hastily 

433. Similar Adverbs (in atim, ltim) are formed from 
Nouns, as : 

gradatim, step by step vicissim, by turns 

tributim, by tribes viritim, man by man 

434. A number of Adverbs come from Nouns by changing 
the Genitive-ending into ltus: 

antlquitus, of old radlcitus, by the roots 

divinitus, divinely funditiis, from the foundation 

caelitus, from heaven penitiis, thoroughly 

435. In respect to Meaning. Adverbs may he divi- 
ded into several classes: 

Adverbs of Place and Motion, 
Adverbs of Time and Succession, 
Adverbs of Manner and duality. 



148 — 



436. Adverbs of Place are those which answer to the question 
wliere? ubi? whither? quo? whence? unde? 



ubi where? 
Ibi, there 
hie, here 
illlc, there 

quo, whither? 
SO, thither 

unde, whence 
indS, thence 
hinc, /tence 



alicubi, somewhere 
ubiquS, everywhere 
qua? &?/ wAatf wat/.? 
nusquam, nowhere 

hue, Mi/ier 
illuc, thither 

istinc, thence 
illinc, tfien 



obviam, toward 
alibi, elsewhere 
foris, outside 
procul, /ar 

retro, backward 
foras, ou2 

undiquS, /ro?n aZZ 
desupSr, /rom above 



The following are also used as Prepositions: 
circa, around, about intra, inside pone, post, behind 

contra, opposite supra, above prop 6, near 

extra, outside infra, frefow coram, personally 

437. Adverbs of Time are those which answer to the question 
when? quando ? how long? quamdm ? how often? quotiens ? 



quando ? when? 
aiiquando, once 
interdum, sometimes 
interim, meanwhile 
interea, in the meantime 
illlco, on the spot 
simul, at the same time 
jam, already 
tandSm, at last 
demum, not until 
alias, at other times 
nunc, now 
hodiS, to-day 
modo, just now 
ntipSr, lately 
pridem, long since 
quondam, once 
antSa, before 
tunc, at that time 
turn, then 

prldle, the day before 
praetgr&a, besides 



hgri, yesterday 

nudius tertius, the day before 

yesterday 
postndie, the day after 
eras, to-morrow 
perendle, the day after to-mor- 
unquam, ever [row 

nunquam, never 
semper, always 
plerumque, commonly 
propediem, one of these days 
posthac, hereafter 
postea, afterwards 
mox, soon 

manS, early in the morning 
interdm, by day 
vesperi, in the evening 
noctu, by night 
deinde, afterwards 
subinde, presently 
deinceps, in turn 
abhinc, hereafter 



antS, before, also used as a Preposition. 



— 149 — 



quamdiu? how long? 
tamdiii, so long 
aliquamdiu, some time 
diidiim, a short time ago 
quotiens? how often? 
totiens, so often 
aliquotiens, some times 
iterum, a second time 
rursus, again 
denuo, anew 



usque, right on 

v ~ \ f° r a short time 
pauhsper j J 

tantisper, so long 

saepg, often 

quotidiS, every day 

quotannis, every year 

seniel, once 

bis, twice, and all the other 

Numeral Adverbs, 241. 



438. Adverbs of manner are those which answer to the 
question how? quomddo? To this class belong all Adverbs 
derived from Adjectives, 425. Besides these regular Adverbs of 
manner mark the following: 



how 



quomddo 
quemadmodum 
lit, uti, as 

si- 

adeo, so, to that degree 
quam, how, how much 
tarn, so, so much 

a i !t ? r i otherwise 
secus ) 

satis, enough 

satius, rather 

valde" ) 

admrtdum \ very 

quantopere, how greatly 

tantopere, so greatly 

nimis, nimiiim, too much 

praecipes, especially 

frustra, in vain 

t£niere, at random 

vix, hardly 

modo, only 

ideo \ 

proptgrea i therefore 

idcirco J 

ItSm, just so, also 

porro, moreover, then 



fere, ferme, almost 

saltern, at least 

paenS, nearly 

fortasse, perhaps 

palam, publicly 

repente, suddenly 

nempe ) . 
-iw w, > to wit 

scilicSt ( 

paulatim, by degrees 
penitfis, wholly 
plane, quite 
omnlno, at all 



at any rate 



nae 

iitique' 

san6, certainly 

nlmirum, to be sure 

f n Jno 

haud ) 

haudquaquam j , 

- - >by no means 

nSquaquam S 

nS-quidem, not even 

neutiquam, not at all 

immo, on the contrary 

cQ f J why 

quare 1 

propS, near ) , 

clam, secretly [ also * Te ^ 



— 150 — 

439. The following Adverbs are called Correlatives, because 
they answer to each other. 



Interrogative. 

ubi? where? 
qua? which way? 
unde? whence? 



quo? whither? 



quando? when? 
quotiens? how often? 

quomodo? how? 
quam? how much? 



Demonstrative. 

I. Of Place: 
Ibi, there 
hac, this way 
inde, thence 
hinc, hence 
illinc, thence 
istinc, thence 
eo, thither 
hue, hither 
illuc, thither 
istuc, thither 

II. 0/ Time: 
turn, ^e?i 
tunc, a£ tfia£ £i?ne 
totiens, ^o o/teri 

III. 0/ Manner: 
ita, sic, 50, #ms 
tarn, so much 



Kelative. 

ubi, where 
qua, which way 
unde, whence 



quo, whither 

cuni, lofted 
quotiens, as o/ten a5 



ut, uti, as 
quam, as 



[IS5. 156.] 



Comparison of Adverbs. 



440. Adverbs derived from adjectives are gener- 
ally compared like their primitives. Their com- 
parative is like the neuter comparative of the ad- 
jective; the superlative is formed from the super- 
lative of the adjective b} 7 changing us into e. 



Positive. 

clar§, brightly 

facile, easily 
diligenter, carefully 

patlenter, patiently 



Comparative. 

clarius, more brightly 



Superlative, 
clarissime, most 
brightly 

facilms, more easily facillime, most easily 
diligentius, more care- diligentissime, most 

fully carefully 

patientms, more pa patientissimS, most 
tiently patiently 



151 — 



4:4:1. The following are Irregular: 



bene, well melius, better 

male, badly pejus, worse 

multuin, much plus, more 
non multum, little minus, less 
magnopere, greatly magis, more 
dm, for a long time diutms, longer 
saepe, often saeplus, oftener 

prope, near propius, nearer 



optimS, best 
pessime, worst 
pliirimiim, most 
minims, least 
maxime, most 
diutissime, very long 
saepissimS, oftenest 
proxime, nearest 



442. The following are Defective: 



detenus, worse deterrimg, worst 

Ocius, more quicTcly ocissime, most quickly 



potiiis, rather 
prius, sooner 



nierito, deservedly 

nuper, lately 

satis, enough satms, better 

secus, otherwise sequius, less 



potissimum, most of all 
primum, primo, first 
mentissimo, most deservedly 
nuperrime, very lately 



[97. 98.} 



Prepositions. 

443. The Latin Prepositions are regularly used 
with some special case of a noun or pronoun, either 
the Accusative or Ablative. 

444. The following are used with the Accusative: 
ad, to, at, toward 6b, for, on account of 
adversus, adversum, against, penes, in the 'power of 



toward 
ante, before 
apud, at, with, near 
circa, circum, around 
circiter, about, near 
cis, citra, on this side of 
contra, against, opposite to 
erga, toward, unto 
extra, without, beyond, 
infra, under, beneath 
inter, between, among 
intra, within 
juxta, near, beside 



per, through, by, during 

pone, behind 

post, after, behind 

praeter, past, beside, except 

prope, near 

propter, on account of, close by 

secundum, after, next to, accord- 
ing to, along 

supra, above 

trans, across, over, beyond 

ultra, beyond, on the further 
side of, past 

versus, toward {91 92 237 238t} 



— 152 — 

445. The following are used with the Ablative: 

a \ de, from, down from, of =about 

ab I from, away from e, ex, from, out of 

abs) prae, for, before, in compari- 

absque, without, but for son with 

clam, without the knowledge of pro, for, instead of 

coram, in presence of sine, without 

cum, with tends, as far as, up to 

446. Prepositions with the Accusative and Ablative, 

but strictly with a difference of meaning: 
in, into, in; sub, under; subter, beneath; super, above. 
in and sub, when, followed by the Accusative, indicate motion 
to, when by the Ablative rest in, a place. 

[93. 94, 95. 96. 187. 188. 239. 240.] 

Conjunctions. 

447. Conjunctions connect words and sentences. 
According to their use, they are divided into Co- 
ordinating and Subordinating Conjunctions. 

Co-ordinating Conjunctions. 

448. Co-ordinating Conjunctions are those that 
join together sentences of equal order or rank. 



and 



449. Copulative. 

et 

-que 

atque 

ac 

et . . et, both . . and 

cum. .turn, both, .and especially 

mod6..modo ) 

> now . . now 
nunc, nunc j 

turn, .turn, then, .then 

tarn . . quam, both . . and 

non solilm. .sed etiam 
non modo . . seel etiam 
nun tantiim . . sed etiam 



and not 



neither, .nor 



6t! ! m l also 

quoque ) 

nee ) 

nSque ) 

neque. .nSque 

nee . . nee 

neque.. -que, on the one hand 

not . . and on the other 
et.. neque, on the one hand.. 

and on the other hand not 

> not only . . but also 



153 — 




Disjnnctiye. 

aut . . aut 

vel . . v€i 

sive . . sivS, whether . . or 



lei 



either . . or 



451. 

aut era 

sed 

v&riini V £ 

vSro 

at 

attamen, but yet 

452. 

nam, namque, for 

453. 

jtaquo i 

Igitur - therefore 

ergo ) 

eo 



Adyersative. 

at qui, but for all that 
tamen, nevertheless 
ceterum, for the rest 
at vgro, but in truth 
veriim enim v6ro, but in truth 
vSrumtamen, but yet 

Causal. 

enim, 6tSnim, for 

Illative. 

proinde, accordingly 
propterea, therefore 
quare 
quam 6b rem 



Irleo \ on that account quapropter f where f ore 

idcirco ) quoeirca 

[99. 100. 189. 190. 295-300.] 

Subordinating Conjunctions. 

454. Subordinating Conjunctions are those which 
join a subordinate sentence to that on which it de- 
pends. 



455. Temporal, 

postquam, after that, after cum, when 

fit, as dum | 

ubi, when 

sim ulac ) , 

■ as soon a* 



while, until 



donee 1 
quoad, up to 
quamdiu, as long as 



simulatque 1 

fit primfim ) the first moment antequam ) 

cum primum \ that priusquam ) 



before that, before 

[257. 258.} 



— 154 — 



456. 

qum , i because 
quod 1 

cum, as, since 



457. 



Causal. 



quoniam 
quando 

quandoquidem 
siquidem 



since, in as 
much as 

[259. 260.] 



Conditional. 



si, if 

nisi, unless 

si non, if not 

dummodo \ 

dum y if only, provided 

modo ) 



si modo, if only 



sin, if not, but if 
quodsl, but if 
dummodo ne ) 
dum ne 
modo ne 



- provided only not 

) [201. 262.] 



458. 

etsi 

tametsi 
etiamsl 
quamquam 



• although 



Concessive. 

licet 
quanivis 
cum 
fit 



though, suppose, 
whereas 



459. 

fit, that, in order that 

ne, that not, lest 

neve (neu), and, (that) not 

460. 

fit, so thai 



Final. 



quo (= ut eo), in order that 
quominus, that not 



Consecutive. 

fit non 
quln 



so that not 



[253-256.] 



461. 

fit 

sicfit 

velfit 

quam 

fit. .it a 

quemadmodum 



Comparative. 



as, like as 



. Ita 



as . . so 



tanquam 
quasi 
fit si 
ac si 
proinde ac si 



as if 




whether 



Interrogative. 

nonne, whether not 

annon * 

necne 



■ or not 



[109. 110.] 



— 155 — 

Interjections. 

463. An Interjection is not in the proper sense a 
part of speech, since it is not in grammatical con- 
struction with a sentence, but is thrown in as a direct 
intimation of feeling or of will. 

464. The Interjections most commonly used are: 
Of painful feeling or suffering: 

Tiei, hen, ah, alas! o, oh! vae, alas, woe! 
Of surprise or astonishment: 

ecce, en, behold! hem, oho! o, oh! 
Of calling attention: 

heus, ho! o, lo! ohe, holloa! pro, hollo! 

WORD-FORMATION. 

465. There are two modes of forming words, viz.: 
Derivation, or the formation of words by deriva- 
tive endings (suffixes), and Composition, or the com- 
bination of two words expressing distinct ideas so 
as to form one word expressing one idea. 

466. With reference to derivation, words are distinguished as 
primitive or stem- words, and derivative; with reference to com- 
position, as simple and compound. The derived and compounded 
words greatly outnumber the so-called stem-words. 

Derivation. 

467. All words which may be grouped into one 

family so as to associate their meaning are said to 

have a common ground-form or Root. Thus: 

actio, -ere, to whet acus, -us, a needle 

acutus, -a, -una, sharp acer, -ris, -re, sharp 

acumen, -Inis, acuteness aeerbus, -a, -urn, sharp 

acies, -el, an edge acidus, -a, -urn, sour 

may all be retraced to the ROOT AC. 



— 156 — 

468. The Stem must be distinguished from the Root. The 

stem is that part of the word which remains after taking away the 
Inflections j as: acu-ere, to whet, stemacu.. Again, the root is that 
part of the word which remains after taking away the Suffix; thus 
the verb-stem acii belongs to the root AC. 

469. As a rule, Derivatives are formed by means of Suffixes, 

or significant endings which are added to the stem-word to define 
or modify its meaning. 

Derivation of Verbs. 

470. Primitive Verbs. Most verbs of the Third Conjugation, 
the Irregular Verbs and a few vowel-stems, namely: dare, star£, 
flere, nare, nere, rerl, are to be regarded as Primitives. 

Verbs derived from Verbs. 

471. Frequentatives end in are or itare, and denote a for- 
cible or repeated action; they are derived either from Supines in 
stim or turn, as: 

dico, / say dictum dictare, to dictate 

habeo, I have habitum habitare, to have frequently 

curro, / run cursum cursare, to run about 

or from the Present of the 1st, 2d, and 3d Conjugations, as: 
clamo, / cry clamare clamitare, to cry out aloud 

lateo, / am hid latere latitare, to lie hid 

ago, / do agere agitare, to drive 

472. Inceptives (Inchoatives) denote the beginning of an 
action. They are formed from vowel-stems (1st, 2d, and 4th Conju- 
gations) by adding sc, and from consonant-stems (3d Conjugation) by 
adding isc The great majority of Inchoatives in asco and esco 
come from Substantives and Adjectives, as: 

puerasco, -erg, from puer, to attain the age of boyhood 
silvescS, -ere, from silva, to grow wild 
mitesco, -er€, from mitis, to become mild 

473. Desideratives denote desire or tendency. They are 
formed by changing urus of the Future Participle into tirio, and 
are of the 4th Conjugation. Only a few are in common use: 

esurio, -IrS, to be hungry, from edo, esuriis 
morlturio, -ire, to wish to die, from morlor, morlturus. 



— 157 — 

±74:. Diminutives denoting a feeble or petty action end in 
illare, and are of the First Conjugation, as: 

cantillare, to chirp scrlbillare, to scribble. 

r 

Verbs derived from Substantives and Adjectives. 

475. Verbs from Substantives and Adjectives are commonly 
called Denominatives. They belong to the First, Second, and 
Fourth Conjugations. Verbs from Substantives signify either to 
supply with that which the Substantive denotes, or to use or apply 
it. Verbs from Adjectives usually signify, either as intransitives, 
to be in or to pass into the condition denoted by the Adjective,ov 
else, as transitives, to reduce something to that slate; for examples 
see below. 

476. Active Verbs of the First Conjugation (transitive) : 

signum - signare, to mark vulnus - vulnerare, to wound 

curviis - curvare, to bend nudus - nudare, to strip 

macula - maculare, to spot sanus - sanare, to heal 

nomen - nominare, to name apt lis - apt are, to Jit 

vox - vocare, to call liber - liberare, to free 

477. Active Verbs of the Second Conjugation (intransitive) : 

fios - florerg, to bloom albus - albere, to be wfi ite 

frons - frondere, to be in leaf calvus - calvere, to be bald 
lux - lucere, to shine flavus - navere, to be yellow 

478. Active Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation (either intransitive 

or transitive): 

finis - finire, to finish mollis - moliire, to soften 

poena - punire, to punish stabilis - stabilire, to establish 

vestis - vestire, to clothe lenis - lenire, to assuage 

sitis - sitire, to be thirsty saeviis - saevire, to rage 

tussis - tussire, to cough superbus-superbire, to be proud 

servus - servire, to serve ferox - ferocire, to be furious 

479. Deponent Verbs of the First Conjugation, signifying con- 

dilionj employment: 

dominus - dommari, to be master auceps - aucupari, to catch birds 

famulus - famulari, to serve conviva - convivarT, to banquet 

aemulus - aemulari, to emulate comes- comitari, to accompany/ 

fur - furari, to steal aqua - aquari, to fetch water 



— 158 — 
Derivation of Substantives. 

Substantives derived from Substantives. 

480. Diminutives generally end in: 

ulus, ula, Glum; cuius, eula, culuni, 

and regularly take the gender-ending of their Primitives: 

nidus, a nest nidiilus, a little nest 

rlviis, a brook rivulus, a streamlet 

mensa, a table mensula, a little table 

saxum, a rock saxiilum, a little rock 

frater, a brother fraterculiis, a little brother 

passer, a sparrow passerculus, a little sparroiv 

arbor, a tree arbuscula, a small tree 

mtiniis, a gift munusculum, a little gift 

481. After a vowel, olus, 61a, olum are used. Some nouns 
form Diminutives in elltis, ella, ellum; rarely illus, ilia, ilium. 

films, a son filiolus, a little son 

gladiiis, a sword gladiolus, a small sword 

filia, a daughter ffliola, a little daughter 

atrium, a hall atriolum, a small hall 

liber, a book libellus, a little book 

tabula, a table tabella, a tablet 

lapis, a stone lapillus, a little stone 

signum, a mark slgillum, a seal 

482. The Suffix armm designates the place where any thing 
is kept, as: 

columbarium, dove-cot from columba 
herbarium, herbarium u herba 

granarium, a granary " granum 

pomarmm, an orchard, u pomiim 

semmarium, a seed-plot " semen 

483. The Suffix etum used with names of trees and plants, 
designates the place where they grow in abundance: 

fruticetum, a copse from frutex 

myrtetum, a myrtle grove " myrtus 

quercetum, a forest of oaks " quercus 

vine turn, a vineyard u vlnum 



— 159 — 

484. The Suffix fie annexed to names of animals designates 
their stall or fold: 

bovile, stall for cattle from bos 
equile, a stable for horses l i equus 

ovile, a sheepfold " ovls 

cap rile, a stall for goats " caper 

485. The Suffix Ina indicates especially the state, condition, 
or occupation of a person; sometimes also the place where an 
occupation is carried on: 

medicina, the medical art from medicus 

sutrina, a shoemaker's shop " siitor 

tonstrlna, a barber's shop u tonsor 

486. The Suffix luiii added to names of persons forms Ab- 
stracts signifying character, rank, &c, and Collectives, as: 

servitium, servitude from servus 
sacerdotmm, priesthood " sacerdos 

ministerliim, ministry ^ minister 

exsilium, banishment u exsul 

487. Patronymics, denoting parentage, generally end in: 
ides, ides, lades, ades (Masculine); is, eis, las (Feminine): 

Prianrides, son of Priam from Priamus 

Atrides, son of Atreus " Atreus 

Thestiades, son of Thestius " Thestius 

Aeneades, son of Aeneas " Aeneas 

Tantalis, daughter of Tantalus " Tantalus 

Nereis, daughter of Nereus " Nereus 

Thestias, daughter of Thestius " Thestius 

Substantives derived from Adjectives. 

488. From Adjectives are formed various Abstract 3STouns 
with the Suffixes: 

la, (i)tia, lties, (i)tas, (i)tud5, monia. 

gratia, favor from gratiis 



malitia, badness 


u 


malus 


segnitia, segnities, sloth 


u 


segnis 


cSleritas, swiftness 


a 


celer 


Hbertas, liberty 


CL 


liber 


solitudo, solitude 


t< 


solus 


acrimonia, sharpness 


U 


acer 



160 — 



Substantives derived from Verbs. 

489. Derivatives in or, urn and ela from verb-stems signify, 
in general, the act or state expressed by the verb: 



amor, love from amare 


timor, fear i 


' timere 


furor, rage i 


1 furerg 


gaudmm, joy i 


i gaudere 


odium, hatred l 


' tfdisse 


querela, a complaint i 


1 querl 


cauteia, a caution i 


i cavere" 


tiitela, protection l 


' tutarl 



490. Derivatives in tor and sor from Supines denote the 



personal agent: 
monitor, a monitor 
lector, a reader 
auditor, a hearer 
messor, a reaper 
cursor, a runner 



from moneo, -Itum 
" lego, lectiim 
" audio, -itum 
" meto, messum 
" curro, cursfini 



491. A few Derivatives in tor are formed in imitation of 
these, from Substantives, as: 

viator, a traveler ', from via; janitor, a doorkeeper, fromjanua. 

492. The corresponding feminine ending is trix, but is less 
common than the masculine: 

adjfitor, adjutrix, an assistant from adjuvarS 

fautor, fautrix, a promoter " favere" 

praeceptor, praeceptrix, a teacher " praecipere 

victor, victrix, a conqueror u vincere 

493. The Suffixes ti§, tiis and siis (gen. us), tur& and sura 

form abstract nouns from Supines and denote the act itself: 

actio, an action from ago - actum 

inventlo, an invention 
motiis, a motion 
curs us, a running 
consensus, consenslo, agreement 
arm at ura, equipment 
conjectura, a conjecture 
pictura, a painting 
censura, a judging 



invenio - inventtini 
mov€5 - motum 
curro - cursum 
consentio - consensum 
arrao - armatum 
conjicio - conjectum 
pingo - pictiim 
censeo - censum 



— 161 — 

Of these only a few become Concrete nouns: 
accftsatio, a bill of indictment from accuso - accusattiin 
commentatio, a treatise " commentor, - atuin 

oratio, a speech " oro - oratum 

possessionem, an estate " possideo - possessiini 

vgnatio, game " venor - venatum 

494. Derivatives in men, mentuni, uliim, bulum, culiim 

denote an instrument for performing the act expressed by the verb 
or a place for its performance: 



levamen, alleviation from 


i levare 


agmen, a train " 


agere 


flftmen, a river " 


Mere 


volumen, a roll " 


volvere 


alimentum, nourishment " 


alere 


jaculum, a javelin u 


jaculari 


pabulum, fodder " 


paseere 


venabulum, a hunting spear u 


venarl 


stabulum, a stable " 


stare 


ciibleulum, a bedroom 


cubare 


495. Derivatives in crum and trGm denote instrument or 


locality: 




fulcrum, a prop from 


fulcire 


sepulcrum, a grave " 


sepellre" 


aratrum, a plow " 


arare 


claustrum, a bar " 


claudere 


rostrum, a beak u 


rodere 


lavacrum, a bath '" 


lavare" 



Derivation of Adjectives. 

Adjectives derived from Verbs. 

496. The Suffixes bundtis and cuiidus have the general 
meaning of the Present Participle; in many the meaning is some- 
what strengthened. 

mirabundus, wondering from mirarl 
verecundus, bashful " vererl 

venerabundus, revering " venerarl 

furlbundus, raging ll furere' 

jucundus, pleasing " juvarg 

vagabundtis, vagrant " vagarl 



— 162 — ■ 

497. The Suffix Mus denotes the quality or state expressed 
by the verb: 

turbidiis, troubled from turbare validus, strong from valere 
calidus, warm " calere rapidus, rapid " rapere 

49&. The Suffixes ills and Mlis denote capability, generally 
in a passive sense: 

docilis, docile from docere amabilis, amiable from amare 
facilis, easy to do u facere mobilis, moveable tl mdvere 

' 499. The Suffixes ax and ulus denote inclination, generally 
a faulty one: 

audax, daring from auderg crediilus, credulous from credere 
fallax, fallacious u fallere garrulus, chattering u garrirS 

Adjectives derived from Substantives. 
From Common Nouns. 

500. The Suffix eus expresses the material of which any thing 
is made: 

aureus, golden from aurum ferreus, iron from ferriim 

argenteus, silver " argentiim ligneus, ivooden " liguum 

501. The Suffixes: Ms, iciis, icms, ills, alls, aris, litis, 
Ivus, ensis, ariiis denote belonging to: 

oratoriiis, of an orator from orator 

bellicus, warlike u bellum 

laterlcius, of brick " later 

vlrllis, manly " vir 

navalis, naval u navts 

militaris, military " miles 

paternus, paternal " pater 

aestivus, belonging to summer " aestas 

for ensis, belonging to the forum " forum 

gregarlus, belonging to a flock " grex 

50£. The Suffixes osiis and entus denote fulness: 
pgriculosus, /k?Z of danger from pericuium 

fructuosus, abounding in fruit " fructus 
turbulentus, /t/7? of trouble u turba 

somniilentus, sleepy " somnus 

505. The Suffixes atus, ltus, Citus denote provided with: 
alatus, winged from ala barbatus, bearded from barba 

pellltus, clad in skins " pellis cornutus, horned il corntl 



- — 163 — 

504. The Suffixes anus and Inus denote belonging to or 
coming from: 

urbanus, belonging to the city from urbs 

montanus, belonging to the mountain " mons 
asinmus, produced by the ass ' ' asmus 

equinus, belonging to horses " equus 

From Proper Names: 

505. Adjectives with the Suffixes lanus, and more rarely 
anus and mus are formed from names of persons: 

Caesarianus, belonging to Caesar from Caesar 
Snliani, Sulla's veterans " Sulla 

Verrinus, belonging to Verres " Yerres 

506. The Suffixes eus and icus are used with Greek names: 
Pythagoreus, Pythagorean from Pythagoras 
Socratlcus, Socratic " Socrates 

507 o Patrial or Gentile Adjectives (derived from the names 
of places or peoples) generally end in anus, inus, ensis, as 
(Gen. atis), and are also used substantively: 
Romanus, a Roman from Roma 

Amerinus, of Ameria " Ameria 

Cannensis, of Cannae " Cannae 

Arplnas (-atis), of Arpinum " Arpmum 

508. Greek names of places form Patriate in ius and aeus; as: 

Corinthius, of Corinth, from Corinthus; Smyrnaeus, of Smyrna, 
from Smyrna. 

509. From many names of peoples, Adjectives are formed in 
icus and sometimes ius: 

Gallicus, Gallic from Gallus Thracms, Thracian from Thrax 
Persicus, Persian l J Persa Syrius, Syrian " Syria 

Adjectives derived from Adjectives. 

510. From Adjectives are formed Diminutives in ulus, olfis, 
ellus and cuius in the same manner as from nouns, cuius is 
sometimes added to Comparatives: 

parvtilus, very small from parvus 
aureolus, gilded " aureus 

pulchellus, beautiful little " pulcher 

pauperculus, poorly " pauper 

majusculus, somewhat larger " major 



— 164 — ' 

Adjectives derived from Adverbs. 
511. A few Adjectives are formed from Adverbs: 
crastinus, of to-morrow from eras 

dmtinus, lasting " dm 

pristmus, former " prms 

matutm us, belonging to the morning " mane 
repentinus, sudden " repente 

hesterniis, of yesterday " herl 

hodiernus, of to-day kw hodie" 

diurnus, daily " dm 

nocturnus, belonging to night " noctu 

Composition. 

512. Every Compound may be regarded as con- 
sisting of two parts. The second part of the com- 
position expresses the principal idea (Principal term) 
and the first a Modification thereof. The principal 
term may be a Verb, an Adjective, or a Substantive. 

Compound Verbs. 

513. The second part of a compound verb is always a Verb; 
also the first part may be a Verb, but this only takes place when 
the second part is facio or flo: 

assuefacere, to accustom from assuescere & facere" 
calefacere, to warm il calgre " " 

commonefacere, to remind " commonere" " 

patefacere, to open u patSre* " " 

514. The first part of a compound verb may be a Noun, as: 
animadvertere, to notice from animus & vertere 
manumittere, to set free " manus a mittere 
usucapere, to acquire by use " usus u capere 

515. The first part of a compound verb may be an Adverb: 

benefacere, to do good from bene & facere 

maledicere, to curse " male " dicere 

benedlcere, to bless " bene " " 

satisfacere, to satisfy " satis " facere" 

satagere, to have one's hands full " satis u ager$ 



165 — 



516. The majority of Compound Verbs are made with separ- 
able or inseparable Prepositions having the value of an adverb, as: 

avolare, to fly away 
adjlcere, to throw to 
anteponere, to set before 
circumdare, to surround 
colllgere, to bring together 
decedere, to go down 
exponere, to set out 
mire, to go into 
interesse, to be between 
obstare, to stand opposed 
perleger£, to read through 
postponere, to put below 
praevldere, to foresee 
praeterire, to pass by 
proponere, to place before 
stibire, to come under 
subterf ugere, to flee secretly 
amfoire, to go around 
discedere, to depart 
reficere, to make again 
secernere, to separate 



a, ab 


away 


ad 


to, towards 


ants 


before 


circum 


around 


com, con 


together 


de 


down 


e, ex 


out 


In 


in, into 


int6r 


between 


6b 


toward , against 


pgr 


through 


post 


after, inferior 


prae 


before 


praeter 


past, beyond 


pro 


before 


sub 


under 


subter 


underneath, secretly 


amb 


around 


dis 


asunder, apart 


rg 


bach, again 


66 


apart 



517. In composition with Prepositions, the vowels a and e of 
the simple verb are changed into I, and the diphthong ae into I; au 
generally becomes o or u; before two consonants a becomes e, but 
e is retained: 



facSre, to 
emere, to 
quaerere, 
plaudere, 
claudere, 
facere, to 
pellere, to 



make 
buy 
to seek 
to clap 
to shut 
make 
drive 



conficere, to accomplish 
rgdimere, to redeem 
conquirere, to search out 
explodere, to hiss off 
concludere, to close up 
confectus, accomplished 
compellere, to force 



For Irregularities compare the Index of Verbs (pag. 277) with 
reference from each to the paragraph where its conjugation is described. 

518. Prepositions in Composition often undergo a change of 
their final consonant which is called Assimilation. The Rules of 
this assimilation may be seen in the following: 



— 166 — 

519. a, ab ? abs. 

a before m and v, and in aim: amittere, avellere, afui, aTueram; 
ab before vowels and j, b, b, d 7 1, n, r, s: 

ablre, abundare, abbreviate, abnuere, abhorrere, abjtirare; 
as before p: asportare, aspernarl; 
au before f: aufiigere, auferre; 
abs before c, t: abscedere, abstinerS, abstrakere. 

520. ad. 

ad before vowels, j, h; b, d, f, m, n, q, v: 

adamare, adferre, adqulrere, advolare, adjuvare, adnuntiare; 
ac before c (not so good before q) : accire, adquirere (acquirers) ; 
ag" & ad before g: aggerere & adgerere, aggredi & adgredl; 
a & ad before gn, sp, sc, st: 

agnoscere, adgnoscere; aspicere, adspicere; aspirare; 
ad & al before 1: adlevare, allevare; adloqui, alloqui; 
ap before p: appargre, appellare, apponere, applicare; 
ad & ar before r: adnpere & arripere; adrldere & arridere; 
ad & as before s: adsignare k assignare; adserere & asserere; 
at before t: attendere, attribuere, attingere, attrahere. 

521. ante becomes anti in: antistare, anticipare. 

522. circnm may drop its final m before eo, ire: 
circiimeo, circiieo, commonly circiiitus, eircultio. 

523. com (= com). 

com before b, p, m: combibere, comparare, committer e; 
con before c, d, f, g, j, n, q, s, t, v: 

concludere, condere, congredi, conjungere, continere; 
con & col before 1: conlabl & collabl: conldcare & collocare; 
cor before r: corngere, corripere, corrodere, corrumpere; 
co before vowels and h (except comedo): 

colre, cohaerere, cogere (= coagere), coemere; 
co before gn, and in a few words before n: 

cognosce, conecto, coniveo, conltor, conubium. 

524. e, ex. 

ex before vowels and h, c, p, q, s, t: 

exire, excipere, exhibere, exsistere; Exception epotarS; 
e before b, d, g, j, 1, m, n, r, v: 

eligere, ejicere, evadere, erumpere, eblbere, edicere; 
ef before f: efferre, efficere, efTugere, effodere; 



— 16? — 

525. in. 

in before vowels and h, c, d, f, g (but not before gn), j, n, q, s, t, v : 
inire, inhlbere, ingerere, inqulrere, inficere, invehere; 

in, sometimes il before 1; in k ir before r: 

inlldere k illidere; inrumpere k irrurnpere, irruere; 

im before m, b, p: inimittere, imbuere, imponere, imperare; 

i before gn: ignorare, ignoscere. 

526. 6b. 

ob before vowels, j, b, b, d, 1, m, n, r, s, t, v: 

oboedire, objicere, oblivisci, obrepere, obstare, obtingere; 
oc before c; of before f; og before g; op before p: 

occurrere, offerre, oggerere, opponere, opprimere; 
b is dropped in omittere, operlre, ostendere (= obs-tendere). 

527. per. 

per unchanged, except before 1, as: 

pellegere = perlegere; pellicere = perlicere. 
In derivatives of jurare, the r is dropped, as: pejerare = perjurare. 

528. sub 

sub before vowels, li, j, b, d, 1, n, s, t, v: 

stibigere, subjungere, subtrahere, subvertere, subhastare; 
sue before c; suf before f; sug before g: 

succedSre, succumbere, suffocare, sufificere, suggerere; 
sum & sub before m; sup before p; sur k sub before r: 

summittere k submittere; supponere; surripere k subripere; 
sus (= subs) occurs in: 

suscipere, suscitare, suspendere, sustmere, sustentare,sust ull; 
su before sp: susplcere, suspirare, suspectare. 

529. trans. 

trans before vowels and b, c, f, g, p, r, t, v: 

tr ansagere, tr ansfugere, tr ansponere, tr ansgredi, tr ansvehere ; 
tran before s, and always before sc: 

transilire, transcriber^, transcendere, transerere,transuere; 
trans and often tra before j, d, 1, m, n: 

tradere, trajicere, transmitter^ k tramittere, tradiicere; 



— 168 — 

Compound Substantives. 

530. Compound Substantives are made up: 

1. Of a substantive and a following verbal stem; the vowel 
connecting the two parts is 1 as: 

agricola, a farmer from aggr & colerg 

arrnlger, an armor-bearer " arma " gerSrg 

artlfex, an artist " ars " facere 

parricida, a parricide " pater " caedere 

2. Of two substantives or a substantive and an adjective: 
solstitmm, solstice from sol & statio 
riiplcapra, a mZ<i goat " rupgs " capra 
legislator, a law-giver " lex " lator 
jusjiirandum, an oatfi " jus " jurandum 
aequmoctitim, equinox " aequus u nox 

3. Of a substantive and a preceding particle, as: 
inciiria, wan^ of care from in & cura 
proverbmm, a proverb " pro " verbiim 
superficies, a surface " super " facies 
nemo, ?zo one " nS " homo 

Compound Adjectives. 

531. Compound Adjectives are made up: 

1. Of two nouns (including under this term adjective and sub- 
stantive), as: 

ignicolor, fire-colored from ignis & color 

miserieors, tender-hearted " miser " cor 

magnanimus, great-hearted " magnus u animus 

alipSs, wing footed " ala " pgs 

2. Of a preposition with a substantive. In this combination 
the prepositions a, de, ex, in, se have negative power: 

concors, harmonious from con & cor 

ji mens [ senseless " * " mens 

demens ) u d6 " mens 

iners, unskilled " in " ars 

securiis, free from care " se " ctira 

3. Of a preposition with an adjective. The prepositions used 
in this way are: per, prae, very; sub, somewhat-, m, ?io£: 

perdifficilis, ven/ difficult from per & difficilis 
praepotens, very powerful " prae " potens 

subrusticus, somewhat clownish " sub u rusticus 
indignus, unworthy " in " dignus 



— 169 — 



Paet Thied. 

SYNTAX. 

The Sentence. 

532. Syntax treats of the Agreement, Government, 
and Disposition of words in sentences. Sentences are 
of three kinds: 

Assertions, or Statements, as: consuetudo est altera na- 
ttira; custom is second nature. 

Questions, as: quid est levius pluma? what is lighter 
than a feather? 

Commands (demands, wishes), as: divide et impera; di- 
vide and rule. 

533. The Assertive Sentence, as it is called, is the main 
type of all sentences, and the other two will be treated as varia- 
tions of it. 

Subject and Predicate. 

534. Every simple sentence is composed of two 
parts: Subject and Predicate. 

The Subject signifies that about which the assertion is made: the 
Predicate signifies that which is asserted of the Subject In the 
sentence: 

aurum splendet gold glitters 
aurum is the subject; splendet the predicate. 

535. The Subject of the sentence is in the Nominative 
Case, or so considered. 



— 170 — 

The Subject must be either a Noun, or some word or phrase stand- 
ing for a noun, but it may be contained in the termination of the 
verb itself: 
arbor floret the tree is blossoming 

hie laetatur, ille maeret this one rejoices, that one is sad 

errare humanum est to err is human 

veni, vidi, vici / came, I saw, I conquered. 

536. The Predicate must be either a Verb (Verbal 
Predicate), or an Adjective or what stands for an ad- 
jective with the verb esse (Adjective Predicate), or a 
Substantive with the verb esse (Substantive Predicate). 

The Verbal Predicate agrees in Person and Number with its subject. 

The Adjective Predicate (Adjective, Adjective Pronoun, Participle) 
agrees in Gender, Number, and Case with its subject. 

The Substantive Predicate agrees in Case with its subject. 
ego valSo, si vos valstis lam well if you are well 

arbor est procGra the tree is tall 

usus est tyrannus custom is a tyrant. 

537. When the predicate is a substantive with different termi- 
nations for the gender, such as: 

patronus patrona a protector 

dominus domina a master, mistress 

victor victrix a conqueror 

magister magistra a teacher 

rex reglna a king, queen 

it agrees with its subject also in number and gender. 
usus est optlmus magister experience is the best teacher 

vita rustica parsimonlae magi- a country life is the teacher of 
stra est frugality. 

538. When referring to a subject of the neuter gender, a pre- 
dicate substantive with different terminations for the gender is 
always in the masculine gender. 

tempus est vitae magister time is the teacher of life. 

539. When the predicate substantive is of the common gender, 
the adjective qualifying it takes the gender of the subject. 

bona conscientia est tutisslma a good conscience is the safest 
comes hominum companion of men. 



— 1Y1 — 

54:0. Like esse, to he, several other verbs take two 

Nominatives, one of the Subject and the other of the 

Predicate. These are: 

fieri, to become, be made creari, to be created. 

evader e, to turn out coronari, to be crowned 

exsistere, to become dici, to be said, called 



manere, to remain vocan 

videri, to seem appell 



- . i to be called 
an I 



apparere, to appear putari tQ u ih h considered 

nasci, to be bom haberi ) 

moii, to die eredi. to be believed 

judicari, to be considered existimari, to be regarded 

rosa pulcherrlmus flos habstur the rose is considered the most 

beautiful flower. 

541. The Predicate of two or more Subjects is put 
in the Plural Number. 

Romulus et Remus urbem Ro- Romulus and Remus founded 
mam condiderunt the city of Rome. 

542. Two or more singular nouns taken conjointly as a single 
idea may have a singular verb. Sometimes the verb agrees with the 
nearest nominative, and is understood to the rest. 

ratio et oratlo societatis huma- reason and speech are the bond 

nae vinculum est of human society 

naves et praesidlum excessit the fleet and garrison departed. 

543. A collective noun may take a plural verb, as: pars urbes 
petierunt finitlmas, a part made for the neigboring towns. 

544. In regard to the Gender of an Adjective Pre- 
dicate referring to two or more Subjects mark the 

following:: 

"When the subjects are of the same gender, the adjective predi- 
cate is of that gender; as: 
mater et soror mortuae sunt mother and sister are dead. 
When the genders are different, the adjective predicate takes 
the masculine gender if the subjects are things with life, and the 
neuter if they are things without life; as: 
pater et mater mortiii sunt father and mother are dead 

divitiae et honOres incerta sunt riches and honors are uncertain. 



— 172 — 

When things with life and things without life are combined, the 
predicate adjective takes either the gender of the things with life, 
or is neuter, as: 
rex regiaque classis profecti the king and the king's fleet 

sunt set out 

natura inimica sunt libera civitas a free state and a king are 
et rex natural enemies. 

545. When the Subjects are of Different Persons, 
the verb will be in the first person rather than the 
second, and in the second rather than the third. 

In Latin the speaker generally mentions himself first, 
ego et tu vicissitudinem forttinae you and I have experienced the 
experti sumus vicissitude of fortune. 

[201. 202.] 

Attribute and Apposition. 

546. The most usual Attribute of a Substantive is 
an Adjective (including under this term the Adjective 
Pronouns and Participles); it agrees with its Sub- 
stantive in Number, Gender, and Case. 

Gender. Number. 

a white flower flos albus flores albi 

a dark cloud nubes 6pac& nubes opacae 

a golden vessel vas aureum vas& aure& 

Case. 
Gen. floris albi of a white flower 

li nubis opacae of a dark cloud 

11 vasls aurei of a golden vessel 

547. The Common Attribute of two or more Substantives of 
different gender is either repeated or agrees with the nearest. 

agri omnes et maria 1 

omnes agri omniaque maria [ ^ n) 

agri et maria omnia I { 

omnes (et) agri et maria I 

548. One Substantive placed after another to ex- 
plain it, is by Apposition put in the same Case, and, 
when practicable, in the same Gender and Number. 



— m — 

Socrates, sapientissimus vir Socrates, the wisest of men 

philosophia, vitae magistra philosophy, the teacher of life 

AthSnae, omnium doctrinarum Athens, the inventor of all 
inventrlcea learning. 

549. Nouns in Apposition are sometimes used to express the 
time, condition, etc. of the action. 

Hercules juvenis leonem inter- Hercules, when a young man, 
fecit slew a lion. 

550. In like manner the Latin Adjective is used appositively where 
the English idiom employs an adverb. Adjectives thus used are 
those expressive of joy, knowledge and their opposites, of order and 
position, of time and season, etc., as: 

libens, with pleasure solus, alone ultimus, last 

volens, willing(ly) totus, wholly mediiis, in the middle 

nolens, unwillingly) primus ) ~ . frequens, frequently) 

invltus, against one's will prior 1 ' eciens, knowing (ly) 

nemo saltat sobrius, no one dances when sober; 

Socrates primus hoc docuit, Socrates was the first who taught this. 

[203. 204.} 

Agreement of Pronouns. 

551. A Relative or Demonstrative Pronoun agrees 

with its antecedent in Gender, Number and Person, 

but the Case depends on the clause in which it stands. 

animal, quod sangumem habet, an animal which has blood can- 
sine corde esse non potest not be without a heart 

When the Relative refers to a sentence, id qu5d is commonly used. 

gloria invidiam vicisti, id quod you have overcome envy with 

est difficillimum glory, which is most difficult. 

With antecedents of different gender the pronoun conforms in 
gender to the rule for adjectives. (See 544.) 
puSri et mulieres, qui capti the boys and women who had 

erant. . . been taken prisoners. . . 

With antecedents of different persons, the pronoun prefers the first 
person to the second, and the second to the third. (See 545.) 
ego et tu, qui eodem anno nati you and I who were born in 
sumus ... the same year .. . . 



_ iu ~ 

552. Sometimes a Relative or Demonstrative Pronoun 
agrees with a word in apposition or with a predicate 
rather than with its antecedent: 

ama justam gloriam, qui est love real glory which is the 

fructus verae virtutis fruit of true virtue 

rerum caput hoc erat, hie fons this was the head of things, this 

the source. 

553. Is, he, and idem, the same, are the Antecedents of Re- 
latives: 

c he who ( the same wJw 

(is) qui j such as idem qui i ^ ^ as 

{ such that { 

but Is, when Antecedent, is often suppressed, especially when it 
would stand in the same case as the Relative: 

quern dii diligunt adulescens (he) whom the gods love dies 

moritur young. 

554:. An Adjective or Apposition belonging in sense to the Ante- 
cedent, sometimes appears in the relative clause in agreement with 
the relative. 

Themistocles de servis suis Themistocles sent the most 

v quem habuit fidelissimum ad faithful of the slaves which 

Xerxem misit he had to Xerxes 

omnes gentes regibus parugrunt, all nations obeyed kings, a kind 

quod genus imperii. . . of government which. . . 

555. qui dicitur, qui vocatur, or quern dicunt, quern vocant are 
used in the sense of so-called. 

vestra, quae dicitur vita, mors est, your so-called life is death. 

556. The Relative often stands at the beginning of a sentence 
where in English a demonstrative is generally used. 

quae cum ita sint and since these things are so. 

557. The Relative is never omitted in Latin, as it often is in 
English. 

is sum, qui semper fui lam the same man I always was. 

[205. 206.] 



- 175 — 
The Order of Words. 

558. The Latin language allows greater freedom 

in the order of words than the English. The following 

practical rules will be found of value: 

In general, put the Subject first, and the Verb last. 
The Subjeot is followed by the words which modify it. 
The Verb is preceded by the words which depend upon it. 

Subject. Dionysius, 

Adjuncts of the Subject, tyrannus, Syracusis expulsus 

Adjuncts of the Predicate. Corinthi pueros 

Predicate. doeebat. 

Dionysius, the tyrant, after he had been driven from Syracuse, 
taught boys at Corinth. 

559. An Adjective or dependent genitive follows the word to 
which it belongs : 

W>men bonum instar unguenti a good name is like sweet-smel- 

fragrantis ling ointment 

metus mortis musica depellitur fear of death is dispelled by 

music. 

560. When a Substantive is modified by an adjective and a 
genitive, the usual order is: Adjective — Genitive — Substantive. 

magna frumenti vis plenty of corn. 

561. A Numeral adjective or one Essential to the meaning of 
the phrase, goes before its noun: 

omnes homines decet it becomes all men 

malum vas non frangitur a useless pitcher does not get 

broken. 

562. A Demonstrative pronoun precedes the noun; Relatives 
or Interrogatives stand first in their sentence or clause; Adverbs 
are commonly put next to the word they qualify. 

haec te victoria perdet this victory will ruin you 

qui sitiunt, silentio bibunt they who are thirsty drink in 

silence 
quis custodiet ipsos custodes? who is to look after the keepers? 
male parta male dilabuntur evil gotten, evil spent 



563. Prepositions regularly precede their nouns except tenus 
and versus; but monosyllabic prepositions are often placed between 
the adjective and substantive; as: magna cum cura, with great care. 

564. Conjunctions generally stand at the beginning of their 
sentence or clause. 

The Conjunctions autem, but; enim, for; vero, bat; lgitur, then, 
follow one or more words in their clause, quidem, indeed; quoque, 
also, come after the emphatic word. ne.. quidem include the em- 
phatic word or words. 

565. Words of kindred or opposite meaning are generally 
placed near each other for the sake of emphasis or contrast: 
manus manum lavat one hand washes the other. 

[202.] 

Construction of Cases. 

GENITIVE CASE. 
With Substantives. 
566. The Genitive is especially the Case of a Sub- 
stantive that is added to another Substantive in order 
to limit or define the meaning. 

1. If the qualified noun signifies some action or condition of 
which, if it were expressed by a verb, the noun in the Genitive would 
be the Subject, the case is called the Subjective Genitive, as: 

amor Dei, the love of God (= God loves). 

2. If the Genitive would be the Object of the action expressed by 
the other noun in verb-form, we call it an Objective Genitive, as: 

amor Dei, love of (toward) God (= we love God). 

3. The Genitive of the Personal Pronouns is commonly Objective; 
exceptions are nostrum and vestrum which are used as partitive 
Genitives (see below 6). Mark the following examples: 

studium nostri sympathy for us 

multi nostrum many of us 

melior pars nostri the better part of us 

major pars nostrum the greater part of us. 

4. The Possessive Pronoun is generally used as the Subjective Geni- 
tive, as: amicus meus, a friend of mine. Additional Attributes are 
put in the Genitive: tua ipsius soror, your own sister. 



— m — 

5. The Genitive is used to denote Quality, but only when the 
quality is modified by an Adjective; it is joined to a Substantive 
either attributively or predicatively, as: 

vir maximi consilii a man of very great prudence 

Terentius magni ingenii est Terence isaman of great talent 

The Genitive of Quality, though less common than the Ablative, is 
always used when Number, Measure, Time or Space are denoted. Paits 
of the body are in the Ablative only (see 616). 

exsilium decern annorum an exile of ten years 

Caesar fuit excelsa statura Caesar was of tall stature. 

6. The Partitive Genitive expressing the relation of a Whole to 
its Parts is used: 

With Substantives of Quantity, Number, Weight, as: 
medimnum tritici a bushel of wheat; 

With Pronouns, Numerals, Comparatives and Superlatives, as: 
quis vestrum? which of you? regum ultimus, the last of the 
prior horum, the former of these kings 

With Neuter Adjectives and Pronouns used as Nouns, but only 
in the Nominative or Accusative. Such are: 

tantiim, so much quantum, as much aliquantum, somewhat 

multum, much plus, more plurimum, most 

paulCim, little minus, less minimum, least 

hoc, this id, illiid, istud, that nihil, nothing 

quod, which quid, what idem, the same 

nihil novi, nothing new idem consilii, the same (of) adviee 

quid novi? what news? quid causae? what reason? 

The Genitive after these Adjectives and Pronouns may be a 
neuter adjective of the Second Declension, but not of the Third: 
aliquid boni, something good nihil melius, nothing better. 

With the Adverbs of Quantity, Place, Extent: 

satis, enough ubi, where hue ] , , 7 . 7 _ 

. w' J t^ - t. ~- \ to this degree 

parum, too little nusquam, nowhere eo ) 

jiimis, too much affatim, plenty 

nimis lucis, too much light; hue arrogantiae, to this degree of 
insolence; ubi terrarum or gentium? where in the world? 



- 178 — 

7. The Genitive of Specification has the force of an Apposition, 
especially with vox, word; nornen, name; verbuni, word, as: 

vox voluptatis, the word "pleasure" 

arbor abietis, a fir-tree; nomen regis, the title of king. 

8. The Genitive is used with the Ablatives causa and gratia, 
for the sake of; also with ergo, on account of; instar, like, causa, 
gratia, ergo commonly follow the Genitive. Mark the expressions: 

mea, tua, sua causa (not gratia) for my, thy, his sake, 

honoris gratia, for honor's sake, 

instar montis equus, a horse like a mountain. 

9. Frequently aedes and templum, temple, and sometimes 
other nouns are omitted, when no mistake can arise: 

ad Yestae ventum erat, they had arrived at the temple of Vesta. 

1221. 222.} 

With Adjectives. 

567. Many Adjectives are followed by a Genitive to 

complete their meaning. The most common are: 

1. Adjectives denoting Desire, Knowledge, Recollection, Parti- 
cipation, Mastery, Fullness and their Opposites: 

cupidus, eager, desirous expers, without share in 

studiosus,, devoted to compos, capable, master of 

perltus, skillful in impos, not in possession of 

inscius j impotens, unable or powerless 

nesclus V ignorant to control 



ignarus ) pleniis, full 

memor, mindful particeps, sharing, partaker of, 

immemor, unmindful endowed with 

2. Participial Adjectives denoting permanent qualities (mostly 
ending in ns), as: 

diligens, careful, lover of patiens, capable of enduring 

amans, fond of impatlens, that cannot bear 

particeps consilii a sharer in the plan 

compos mentis in possession of one's mind 

cupidus glorlae eager for glory 

amans sui virtus virtue fond of itself 

3. proprlus, own, and communis, common, take the Genitive 
when the idea of property or peculiarity prevails. 

populi Romani est propria libertas, liberty is characteristic of 
the Roman people. i 223 - 22 ^») 



— 179 — 

With Verbs. 

568. Verbs of Reminding, Remembering, Forgetting 
take the Genitive. 

admonSre \ meminissg \ 

commonSrS > to remind rgminisci > to remember 

commonefacere ) rScordari ) 

oblivisci, to forget 
Yerbs of Reminding, with the Accusative of the Person, are fol- 
lowed by the Genitive of the Person or Thing to which the attention 
is called. 

te vetSris amicitiae admongo, I remind you of our old friendship. 
Yerbs of Remembering and Forgetting take the Genitive if a Person, 
and either the Genitive or Accusative, if a Thing is remembered or 
forgotten. 

memini vivorum I am mindful of the living 

animus memmit praeteritorum the mind remembers the past 

oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias you are wont to forget nothing 

except injuries. 

When the Object is expressed by a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective, it 
is with all these verbs in the Accusative, as: 

hoc te admoneo / warn you of this. 

meinini, I remember, when referring to a contemporary, always 
takes the Accusative. 

memineram Catonem I remembered Cato. 

569. Verbs of Valuing are joined with the Genitive, 
when the Yalue is expressed in a General or Indefinite 

Manner. 

Such Verbs are: 
aestimare, to value haberg, to hold 

putare, to reckon pender£, to weigh 

dticgre, to take facere, to make, put 

esse, to be (worth) 

The following are Genitives of general value: 
magni, much quanti, how much 

parvi, little plurimi, maximl, most 

tanti, so much minimi, least 

pluris, more nihil!, naught 

mmoris, less flocci, a lock of wool, a straw 



— 180 — 

The Complete Phrases are, then, as follows: 

parvl pendere or aestimare, to esteem lightly 

magni esse, to be of great account 

pluris esse, to be of more account, to be worth more 

nihil! dticere, to think nothing of 

magni aestimare or habere, to value highly 

pluris aestimare, to esteem of more value 

pluriml aestimare, to value very highly 

minimi facere, to make of very little account 

flocci facere, to care not a straw for 
divitiae a me minimi putantur, riches are very little prized by me; 
operam tuam magni aestimo, your help I value highly. 

570. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning 
and Acquitting, with the Accusative of the Person, 
take the Genitive of the Charge, 

accusare \ ™™^\\ to convict 

mcusarg I , convmcere ) 

insimulare ( ' ^ damnare ) to condemn, find 



i 



arguere j condemnare ) guilty 

arcesserS ) to summon absolved, to acquit 

reum facere ) 

honestam famillam sceleris ar- you accuse an honorable family 

giiis of crime 

aliquem levitatis convincere to convict one of levity. 

The Crime may be expressed by the Ablative with dS: 
accusare aliquem de vi, de re- to accuse one of assault, of ex- 
petundis, de veneficio tortion, of poisoning 

or by the Genitive with nomme or crlmine, as: 
nomine conjurationis condem- they were condemned on the 
nati sunt charge of conspiracy. 

Yerbs of Condemning and Acquitting may also take the 
Ablative of the charge and the punishment, and always take 
the Ablative of fine; multare, to mulct, punish, is always construed 
with the Ablative, 
damnare capitis or capite to condemn to death 

Camillus decern milibus damna- Camillus was fined 10,000 

tus est 
Manlius virtutem filii morte Manlius punished the valor of 
multavit his son with death. 

[225, 226.) 



— 181 — 

571. The Subjective Genitive may be used as a Pre- 
dicate with the verbs esse and fieri to denote that to 
which something belongs or to which something is 
peculiar. 

In English the words party property, duty, office, business, 
characteristic, are commonly supplied. Instead of the Genitive of 
Personal Pronouns the Neuters of the Possessives: ineimi, tiium, 
etc., are used. 

haec domus est Caesaris this house is Caesar's 

temeritas est florentis aetatis, rashness is the characteristic 

prudentia senectutis of youth, prudence of old age 

mentiri non est meum to lie is not my way. 

572. With the Impersonal interest (and sometimes 
also with refert), it concerns, interests, it is the interest 
of, it is of importance for, the Genitive is used to 
denote the Person or Thing concerned. 

The Genitive seems to be governed by causa understood; hence 
instead of the Genitive of the personal pronoun the Ablative singular 
feminine of the Possessives mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra is used 
with these verbs, as: mea interest, I am concerned; with omnium, 
however, nostrum and vestrum must be used: omnium nostrum 
interest, it concerns all of us. 

refert seldom occurs with the Genitive, occasionally with mea, 
tua, etc., and most frequently without either such pronoun or a 
Genitive, as: nihil refert, no matter; quid refert, what matter? 

The thing which is of interest or importance is expressed: 

By a Neuter Pronoun, as: hoc vehementer interest reipublicae, 
this is of very much importance to the stale; 

By an Infinitive, as: interest omnium recte facere, to do right is 
the interest of all; 

By an Accusative with the Infinitive, as: multum mea interest te 
diligentem esse, it is of great importance to me that you be diligent; 

By an Interrogative Sentence, as: multum mea interest utrum dili- 
gens sis necne, it is of great importance to me whether you are 
diligent or not 



— 182 — 

573. The Degree of importance is expressed by: 

Adverbs: magnopere, magis, maxime, parum, etc. 
Neuter Adjectives: multum, plus, plurimum, minus, etc. 
Genitives of Value: magni, pluris, parvl, tantl, etc. 

The Thing with reference to which one is interested is expressed 
by the Accusative with ad: magni ad honorem nostrum interest, it 
is of great consequence to our honor. i 227 - 228 »\ 

ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
Direct Object. 

574. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative 

Case. 

The Object of a transitive verb in the active voice becomes Subject 
in the passive. 

boni cives amant patriam good citizens love their country 

patria a bonis civibus amatur their country is loved by good 

citizens. 

575. Many verbs are intransitive in English which are both 
transitive and intransitive in Latin. Such are: 

dolere, to grieve (for) ridere, to laugh (at) 

horrSre, to shudder (at) sitlre, to thirst (for). 

576. Some intransitive verbs may take an accusative of kindred 
meaning, as: 

vitam jucundam vivere to live a pleasant life 

longam viam ire to go a long way. 

577. Many Intransitive Verbs, especially verbs of 
motion, when compounded with prepositions, become 
transitive, and accordingly take an Accusative 6 The 
commonest of them are Compounds of: 

circum, per, praeter, trans. 

circumstare, to stand around praeterire, to pass by 
permeare, to flow through transire, to cross 

triginta tyranni circumsteterunt the 30 tyrants stood around So- 
Socratem crates. i 2 07. 208.] 



— 183 



Two Accusatives. Same Person. 
578. Verbs of Naming 1 , Making, Taking, Choosing, 
Showing admit two Accusatives of the same person or 
thing. 

facerS } 

efficere >- to make 

reddere ) 

creare ) . , . 
,iw « w t to elect 
eligere ) 

designare, to appoint 

sepraebere ) to show, offer 

se praestare J one's self 



appellare 

noinmare 

vocare 

dlcere 

arbitrari 

existiniare 

habere 

putare 

judicare, to judge 



to name or call 



to regard, con- 
sider, think, 
pronounce 



Neronem senatus hostem judi- 
cavit 



the senate declared Nero an 
enemy. 

Many other verbs, besides their proper Accusative, take a 
second, denoting purpose, time, character. Such are: 

dare, to give relinquere, to leave 

habere, to have sumere, to take 

Atlienienses Miltiadem sibi iin- the Athenians took Miltiades 
peratorem sumpserunt as their commander. 

[209. 210.] 

Two Accusatives. Person and Thing. 

579. docere, edocere, to teach; eelare, to conceal 
from, take two Accusatives, one of the person, and the 
other of the thing. 



Dionysms Epaminondam musi- 

cam dociiit 
non te celavi sermonem 



Dionysius taught Epaminon- 

das music 
I did not conceal from you the 

conversation. 

The Passive of docere or edocere with the Nominative of the 
person and the Accusative of the thing is almost never used, but is 
replaced by discere aliquid ab aliquo. Special uses worthy of note 
are as follows: 

edocere aliquem de aliqua re, to inform some one of something; 
celare.aliquem de aliqua re, to keep some one ignorant of something. 



— 184 — 

580. Verbs signifying to ask, to demand, to request, 
to inquire take two Accusatives, one of the person, 
and the other of the thing. 

The commonest of them are: 

poscere ) . . orare ) to ask, rogare ) 

* „,. „ f to ask, « . w f . \ . f _ . w I to ask, 

flagitare V deman ' d rogare j- entreat, mterrogare \ inQui ' 

postulare ) petere ) beseech quaerere ) 1 

posce deos veniam ask favor of the gods 

me sententiam rogavit he asked me my opinion. 

But to this there are many Exceptions. We may also say: 
poscere or flagitare aliquid ab aliquo. 

We always say: postulare or petere aliquid ab aliquo; 
quaerere aliquid ab, ex, or de aliquo. 

581. The verbs orare, rogare, to ask, request, and rogare, 
interrogate, to ask, inquire, admit a double accusative only when 
the thing is expressed by the neuter of a pronoun or adjective, as: 
hoc te rogo, this I inquire of you. Otherwise we say: interrogate 
aliquem de aliqua re, to ask some one about something. 

582. A noun as second accusative appears with the verb rogare 
only in the official phrase: 

sententiam rogare aliquem, to ask one for his opinion or vote. 

[211. 212.] 

Accusative with Impersonal Yerfos, 

583. The Accusative is used after the Impersonals: 
fallitmS } it escapes my d ^ t it becomes 

fugitme f- notice, is un- dm cet, it is unbecoming 
praeterit me ; known to me 

me fugit ad te scribere / forgot to write to you 

oratorem irasci dedecet it is unbecoming in an orator 

to be angry. 
An Infinitive or a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective, rarely a Substantive, 
may be used as the Subject of decet and dedecet: 
mulierem decet Here it becomes a woman to weep 

parvum parva decent small things become the small 

neglegentia neminem decet carelessness becomes no one. 



— 185 — 

584. Certain Impersonal Verbs take the Person 

who feels in the Accusative, and the Exciting Cause 

in the Genitive, or if a verb, in the Infinitive; viz.: 

miseret, it excites pity pudet, it shames 

paenitet, it causes sorrow taedet ) ._, 

tw w. .; -j. . w Ait wearies, tires. 

piget, it disgusts, grieves pertaesum eat) 

The Persons are expressed as follows : 

miseret me, I pity paenitet ine, I am sorry, repent 

miseret te, thou pitiest piget me, I am grieved at, dis- 

miseret eum, he pities gusted with 

miseret nos, we pity pudet me, I am ashamed 

miseret vos, you pity taedet me \Iamweary, 

miseret eos, they pity ine pertaesum est ) tired 

me stultitiae meae pudet I am ashamed of my folly 

non me paenitet vixisse / am not sorry for having lived. 

Idiomatic Uses. 

585. The Accusative is used in Exclamations, either 

with or without an Interjection. 
0, miseras hominum mentes ! Oh, the wretched minds of men! 

586. A Neuter Adjective or Pronoun is used adverbially in the 
Accusative, as: aliquid, somewhat; nihil, not at all; multum, much, 
etc. The Accusative is also found in a few adverbial phrases, as: 
maximam partem, mostly; id genus, of this kind; id temporis, at 
this time: 

nihil moveor I am not at all moved 

forum id temporis omni turba the forum was at this time free 
vacuum erat from all tumult 

[213. 214.] 
DATIVE CASE. 
With Terbs. 

587. The Dative is the Case of the Indirect Object, 
denoting that for which, to the benefit or loss of which 
any thing is or is done. It may be used with transi- 
tive and intransitive Verbs; dativus commodi et in- 
commodi: Dative of Advantage and Disadvantage. 

scribo vobis nunc librum, I write this book for you; 

tibi seris, tibi metis, you sow for yourself you reap for yourself 



— 186 — 



588. A large number of Transitive Verbs take 

along with the Accusative a Dative as an Indirect 

Object. 

The English expresses the Dative Relation by to or for; but where 
the verb implies removal, the Latin Dative frequently answers to 
the English Objective with from; for —in defence of is pr<5. 

errantibus viam nionstrSmus let us show the way to the erring 

dolor somnum mihi adimit grief takes away my sleep from 

pro patria mori to die for one's country. [me 

589. Many Intransitive Verbs signifying to 'benefit or 
injure, please or displease, command or obey, favor or 
resist, trust or distrust, also indulge, believe, persuade, 
envy, threaten, spare, and the like, take the Dative. 



Examples are: 
prodessS, to do good 
nocSrg, to do harm 
blandirl, to soothe 
favSrg, to favor 
resistere, to offer resistance 
placSre, to please 
displlcere, to displease 
imperarg, to command 
oboedire, parerg, to obey 
fidere, to trust 
diffldere, to distrust 
TrascI, to be angry with 
indulgere, to give up, to favor 

arbor resistit ventis 



credSre, to believe 

suadSre, to advise, recommend 

minari, imminSre, to threaten 

benedlcSrg, to bless 

nubSre, to marry 

persuadSre, to persuade, con- 

mederi, to heal [vince 

supplicare, to beg 

maledicerS, to curse 

parc&rS, to spare 

studere, to devote one's self 

obtrectarS, to decry 

in vide r£, to envy 



the tree offers resistance to the 

winds 
the upright man envies no one 
I will spare no pains. 



probus invidet nemini 
non parcam operae 

Among the most notable Exceptions are: 

j fivard 1 to help, assist d6fIcSrg > to be wanting 



adjuvarg S 
aequare, to be equal 



juberS, to order 
vetare, to forbid 



which govern the Accusative. 



— 187 — 

590. Passives are properly made only from transitive verbs. 
Intransitive Verbs which govern a Dative have an Impersonal Passive 
with the same Case, in the following manner: 

Active. b5nus invidet nemini, a good man envies no one 
Passive, mih! mvidetur, / am envied 

tibi invidetiir, thou art envied 

ei invidetiir, he is envied 

nobis invidetiir, we are envied 

vofois invidetiir, you are envied 

lis invidetiir, they are envied 
a bono invidetiir nSmmi, no one is envied by a good man. 

591. Some Verbs take the Dative or Accusative according to 
their signification: 

cavere alicui, to care for some one 

cavere aliquem, to beware of some one 

caverg ab aliquo, to be on one's guard 

consiilere aliciii, to consult the interest of some one 

consiilere aliquem, to consult some one 

metuere aliquem, to fear some one 

metuere alicui, to fear for some one 

providere aliquld, to foresee something 

providere aliciii rei, to provide for something 

moderari aliquid, to manage something 

moderari aliciii rei, to set bounds to a matter 

temperare aliquid, to rule something 

temperare aliciii, to spare some one 

temperare ab aliqua re, to abstain from something. 

592. The Dative is used with many Verbs com- 
pounded with the Prepositions: 

ad, ante, con, m, inter, 
od, post, prae, sGb, super. 

Examples are: 

afferre, to bring to, to render adimere, to take away 
interjicere, to throw in interesse, to be present 

praecurrere, to precede injicere, to strike into 

imponere, to place on opponere, to oppose 

supponere, to put under 
virtus omnibus rebus anteit virtue goes before all things 

onera quibusdam animalibus im- we put burdens on some anu 
ponimus mals. [215. 216.] 



~~ 188 — 

593. Certain Verbs of giving and putting may take 
either a Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative 

with an Ablative, as: 

dono tibi librum, I present you a book; 

dono te libro, I present you with a book; 

circumdat urbi murum, he puts a wall around the city; 

circumdat urbem muro, he surrounds the city with a ivall. 

So with adspergere, to sprinkle, and induere, to put on. 

594. The Dative is used with esse to denote the 
Possessor, the thing possessed, being the subject. 

When so used it is commonly translated by to have; mihi nomen 
est, means my name is or / am called; the proper name is put 
either in the Nominative or the Dative, as: 
est mihi domi pater I have a father at home 

puero nomen est Carolus (Carolo) the boy's name is Charles. 

595. Certain Verbs take the Dative to denote the 

purpose or end, and often at the same time another 

Dative of the person for whom or to whom. Such are: 

esse, to be mittere, to send habere, to hold 

«.-. j to become, accipere, to receive vertere, to interpret, 

\ turn out venire, to come turn (against) 

dare, to put relinquere, to leave ducere, to count 

exemplo est formica the ant is an example 

malo est hominibus avaritia avarice is an evil to men 

dono dare to give as a present. 

596. The Dative is used with the Gerundive to de- 
note the person on whom a necessity rests, as: 

adhibenda est nobis diligentia we must use diligence 
nobis omnibus moriendum est we all must die. 

597. Yerbs in the Passive Voice are sometimes followed by a 
Dative of the Agent — instead of a, ab with the Ablative. 

res mihi tota provisa est JT have had the whole matter 

provided for 
carmma mihi scripta sunt nulla I have no poems written. 

[217. 218.] 



— 189 — 

With Adjectives. 

598. Many Adjectives and Adverbs are followed 
by the Dative denoting that to which the quality is 
directed. 

The most common are those signifying: 

useful, fit, pleasant, like, 

near, easy, inclined, necessary, and their Opposites. 
aeceptus, acceptable jucundus, agreeable 

amicus, friendly injiicundus, disagreeable 

mimicus, unfriendly, opposed molestus, troublesome 
aptus, apt, suitable necessarius, necessary 

cards, dear odiosus, hateful 

communis, common par, equal, a match for 

dulcis, agreeable dispar, unlike 

facllis, easy salutaris, beneficial 

difficilis, difficult similis, like 

gratus, pleasing dissimilis, unlike 

ingratus, unpleasant turpls, disgraceful 

gravis, burdensome titilis, useful 

canis similis lupo est a dog is similar to a wolf 

flamma fumo est proxima fire is next akin to smoke. 

Many Adjectives which belong to this class become Substantives 
and as such take the Genitive; e. g. : 
amicus, a friend aequalis, a contemporary 

mimicus, an enemy vlciniis, a neighbor 

familiarls, an (intimate) friend necessarius, a relation 

599. Adjectives of Inclination may take the Accusative with erga, 
(when friendly feelings are spoken of) or with in, adversus (for 
friendly and unfriendly feelings)', those signifying useful, suitable 
take oftener the Accusative with ad to denote the thing for which y but 
regularly the Dative of Persons; as: severus in fillum, severe towards 
his son; homo ad nullam rem utilis, a good-for-nothing fellow. 

600. The Adjectives propior, proximus (sometimes), and the 
Adverbs propius, proxlme (commonly) take the Accusative. After 
similis, like, the Genitive is used to denote exact resemblance; as: 
mei, tui, nostri similis, my, your, our like, and verl similis, likely. 

601. A few Derivative Substantives take the Dative after the ana- 
logy of their Primitives, as: justitia est obtemperantia legibus* 
justice is obedience to the laws. 



— 190 — 

Ethical Dative. 

602. The Dative of a Personal Pronoun is sometimes 

introduced for liveliness of expression: Ethical Dative. 

fur mihi est, he is a thief in my opinion; 

quid tibi vis? what do you want? [219. 220.] 

ABLATIVE CASE." 
Ablative of Cause. 

603. The Ablative is used to express the Cause. 

The Ablative of Cause designates that by winch, by reason of 
which, because of which, in accordance with which something is 
or is done. Accordingly it is used with passive verbs and such 
active verbs and adjectives as imply a passive meaning. In the 
passive construction, however, the Person or Living Agent by 
whom any thing is done is put in the Ablative with a, alt). 

Dei providentla mundus admini- the world is governed by God's 

stratur providence 

a Deo mundus administrator the ivorld is governed by God 

concordia res parvae crescunt by concord small affairs grow 
inilites praelio fessi erant the soldiers were weary with 

the battle. 

604. The Ablative of Cause is of very frequent occurrence, and 
is used both with Verbs and Adjeotives like the following: 

dolere, to grieve gloriarl, to boast 

maererg, to mourn laborare, to suffer 

gauderS 1 fo - • MiM siiperbus proud 

laetan ) laetiis, pleased — 

delectarl, to be delighted anxifis, anxious 

agricola gaudet equis, the husbandman delights in horses; 
Miltiades aeger erat vulneribus, Miltiades was ill from his wounds; 
allis malis laboras, you suffer with other ills. 

This includes such Ablatives as: jussu, by order; rogatu, at the 
request, etc. On causa and gratia, for the sake of see 566. 8. 

Akin to the Causal Ablative is the Ablative with verbs expressing 
origin, as: 

humillbus parentibus ortus sprung from low parents. 



laetus, pleased — aeger, ill 



— 191 — 

Ablative of Means or Instrument. 

605. The Ablative is used to denote the Means or 

Instrument by which anything is effected. 

Pyrrhus lapide interfectus est Pyrrhus was killed by a stone 
benevolentiam civiuni blanditia to win the good will of one's 
colligere turpe est fellow-citizens by flattery is 

disgraceful. 

606. The Person, considered as Means or Instrument, is ex- 
pressed by per with the accusative, or by opera with a genitive or 
possessive : 

Caesar certior factus est per Caesar was informed by (means 
legatos of) ambassadors. 

607. Srudire, institiiere, to instruct; as: aliquem artibus eru- 
dire, to instruct some one in the arts; and afficere, to treat, in such 
expressions as: aliquem honorlbus afficere, to honor some one; ali- 
quem molestia afficere, to trouble some one — are worthy of note. 

Ablative of Limitation, 

608. That in respect to which or in accordance with 
lohich anything is or is done is denoted by the Abla- 
tive of Limitationo 

Out of this usage grow a number of Particular Phrases: 

grandis natu, old m$a sententia, mea opinione, 

maj5r natu, older according to my opinion 

maximiis natu, oldest jtidicio, testlmonio alicujfis, 

minor natu, younger according to the judgment, 

minimus natu, youngest testimony, of some one 

reges nomine magis quam im- kings in name rather than in 

perio authority. [229. 230.] 

Ablative of Comparison. 

609. The Ablative of Comparison may be used with 
the Comparative, instead of quam, than, with the 
Nominative or Accusative. 

films melior est quam pater ) ^ SQn u ^ r ^ Ms father 
films melior est patre ) 

scio filium meliorem esse patre I know that the son is better 

than his father. 



— 192 — 

610. The Ablative, instead of quam with the same case as 
the thing compared, must be regularly used in Kelative Sentences: 

amicitia, qua nihil melius habg- friendship than which we have 
mus . . nothing better. . 

quam is often omitted after plus, amplliis, more; minus, less; 
longms, farther ', and the like, without influence upon the construc- 
tion. But the Ablative may also be used when the word with quam 
would be in the Nominative or Accusative. 

ex Romanis minus trecenti per- of the Romans less than 300 

ierunt perished 

tecum plus annum vixit he lived with you more than a 

year 
plus quam ducenti interfecti sunt x 

plus ducenti interfecti sunt t more than 200 were killed. 

plus ducentis interfecti sunt ' 

611. Certain Ablatives, as opmione, exspectationS, spe, solito, 
preceding a comparative are used instead of a Clause, as: 

opinione celerius, sooner than is expected; 

dicto citius, quicker than the word was spoken; 

serius spe, later than was hoped; 

amnis solito citatior, the river running faster than usual 

612. The Ablative is used with comparatives and words im- 
plying comparison to denote the Degree of Difference. This use is 
especially frequent with the Ablatives: 

multo, much altero tanto, twice as much 

paulo, a little nihilo, by nothing, no 

aliquanto, some more quo . . eo ) - ^ 

tanto, so much quanto .. tanto [ 
quanto, how much 

minor uno mense younger by one month 

multo praestat virtus divitiis virtue is much better than riches. 

Ablative of Manner. 

613. The Ablative of Manner answers the question 
How? 

It is used with the preposition cum when it has no Adjective; 
with or without cum when it has an Adjective. Words signifying 
manner themselves, such as: modus, ratio, mos, ritus, and likewise 
animus, mens, consilium, never take cum. 



— 193 



cum voluptate aliquem audlre 
aliquid facere magno studio, 

or magno cum studio 
aliquid aequo ammo ferre 

(never aequo cum ammo) 



to hear some one with pleasure 
to do something with great zeal 

to bear something with an even 
mind. 



614. The following Ablatives are used without an Adjective or 



Preposition: 
silentio, in silence 
ordine, in an orderly manner 
casti, by chance 
via et ratione, methodically 
voluntate, voluntarily 
dolo, fraude, fraudulently 



jure, rightfully 

Injuria, unjustly 

vi, violently 

vl et armis, by force of arms 

pedibus, a-foot 

navibus, by ship 



Ablative of Quality,, 

615. The Ablative with an Adjective or an equiva- 
lent is used to denote Quality; 

616. External qualities are put by preference in the Ablative; 
measure, number, time and space are put in the Genitive only, 
serpens ingenti magnitudme, a serpent of huge size; 

Britanni sunt capillo promisso, the Britons have long hanging locks. 

Ablative of Price. 

617. As a rule, Price is put in the Ablative. 
The Ablative of Price is used with: 

emerS ) 

redimere ?■ to buy 

mercarl ) 

vendere, to sell (pass, venire) 

licere, to be for sale 



• to let 



patriam auro vendidit 
equus mihi talento stetit 



aestimare, to value 

locare i 

collocare ) 

conducere, to hire 

esse, stare, constare, to cost 

he sold his country for gold 

the horse cost me a talent 



618. General Value or Cost is expressed by the following Ablatives: 



magno, at a high price 
parvo, at a low price 
nihilo, for nothing 
hortos istos emamus magno, si 
parvo non possumus 



plurimo, at a very high price 
minimo, at a very low price 

let us buy those gardens at a 
high price, if we cannot have 
them cheap. 



— 194 — 

619. Comparative Value or Cost (see 569) is expressed by these 
Genitives: 

tanti, so much quanti, how much 

tantldem, at the same price pluris, dearer; minoris, cheaper 

mercatores non tantldem ven- merchants do not sell at the 
dunt quanti emerunt same price at which they 

bought 
quanti cenas? what do you pay for your 

dinner? 

Mark the following Particular Phrases: 
b8n6 Smere, to buy cheap bene vendere, to sell dear 

malS emere, to buy dear male vendere, to sell at a loss. 

[231. 232.} 

Ablative of Separation, Plenty, Want. 

620. Verbs signifying to remove, abstain, set free 
take the Ablative with or without the Prepositions 
ex, de, ab; but with Persons a Preposition, usually 
ab, must be used. 

Examples are: 

depellere loco, to drive from a place 

abstinere injuria, to abstain from wrong -doing 

abstinere manus ab aliems, to keep one's hands from other 

people's property 
Gjicere e civitate, to drive from the state 
Grumpere e saxls, to burst from the roclcs 
abhorrere ab aliqua re, to differ from something 
dSterrere ab injuria, to deter from wrong-doing 
Hberare a curls, to release from cares 
dScedere (de) vita, to depart from life 

Hannibal ex Italia decedere Hannibal was forced to with- 

coactus est draw from Italy 

Alexander vix a se manus ab- Alexander hardly kept his 

stinuit hands from himself 

multos fortuna liberat paena, fortune rids many of punish- 

metu neminem ment y none of fear 

Themistoclem Athenienses e the Athenians banished The- 

civitate expulerunt mistocles from the state. 



— 195 



621. Verbs compounded with se and dis take nearly always 
a or &b; such are: 



discernere ) 



to distinguish 



secernere ) 

sejungere >• to separate 

separare ) 

likewise: 
alienare, to alienate 
abhorrere, to be averse 



believe me, my conduct far 
differs from my song. 



distinguere ) 

differre ^ 

discrepare , ,.^ 

dissentire ( to dl # er > disa ^ ree 

distare j 

crede mihi, mores distant a car- 
mine nostro 

Mark the Particular Phrase: 

interdicere alicui aqua et ignl, to forbid one the use of fire 
and water , to banish one. 

622. Verbs of Plenty and Want, of Filling and De- 
priving take the Ablative. 

>abundare, to abound, haveabun- explere 

dance implSre 

carere, to be or do without, to complere 

lack replere 

egere, indigere, to need orbare 

vacare, to be void of, to be free pilvare 

from spoliare 

satiare, to glut midare 

non egeo medicfna 

admonitio acerbitate cargre de- 
bet 

America abundat lacubus et flu- 
minibus 



>- to fill 



to deprive 

> to plunder, to strip 



I do not need medicine 
an admonition should be with- 
out bitterness 
America abounds in lakes and 
rivers. 
egeo and indigeo are often followed by the Genitive. 

623. Adjectives of Plenty and Want regularly take the Genitive 
(see 567. 1. ), but some of -them follow the analogy of the cor- 
responding verbs and take the Ablative. Among the latter are: 

refertus, stuffed 
praeditus, endowed 



nudus, naked 
orbus, deprived of 
liber, free 

asellus onustus auro 
urbs nucla praesidio 



onustus, laden 

inan ! 3 \void 
vacuus ) 



a donkey laden with gold 
a city naked of defense. 

[233. 234.] 



— 196 — 

624. opus est, there is need, it is needful, neces- 
sary, takes the Dative of the Person who is in want, 
and the Ablative of the Thing wanted (Impersonal 
Construction); but the Thing wanted may be the 
Subject and opus est (sunt) the Predicate (Personal 
Construction). 

The Impersonal Construction must regularly be used in Negative 
Sentences, and the Personal with Neuter Adjectives and Pronouns; 
opus is always indeclinable. 

opus mihi est libro I want a book 

liber mihi opus est a hook is what I want 

opus mihi est libris / want books 

libri mihi opus sunt books are what I want 

nihil opus est duce there is no need of a leader 

multa opus sunt there is need of many things. 

Ablative in Special Constructions. 

625. The Ablative is used with the Adjectives: 

dignus, worthy frStiis, trusting, relying 

indignus, unworthy contentus, satisfied 

also with dignor, I deem worthy. 

allenus, strange, foreign, takes the Ablative with or without 
a, ab. 

vir patre dignissimus a man most worthy of his father 

me dignor honore I deem myself worthy of honor 

homo sum, humani nihil a me I am a man, and nothing relat- 

alienum puto ing to man I deem foreign 

to me. 

626. The Ablative is used with the Deponent Verbs: 

tit5r, -I, to use potior, -Iri, to make one's self 

fruor, -i, to enjoy master of 

fungor, -I, to discharge vescor, -i, to feed 

and their Compounds: 
abut5r, -I, to abuse defungor, -I, to discharge 

perfrudr, -I, to enjoy fully perfungor, -I, to fulfil 

utar vestra benignitate, I will avail myself of your kindness; 

vescimur bestiis, we live upon animals. 



— 197 — 

potior sometimes takes the Genitive; always in the phrase: potiri 
rerum, to get control of affairs. 

627. nltor, I stay myself rest upon, takes the Ablative with or 
without in. 

in Pompeji vita nititur salus ci- the welfare of the state depends 
vitatis on Pompey's life. 

628. fido and confldo, I trust, take the Ablative when the object 
is a Thing, and the Dative when the object is a Person, diffido, / 
distrust, commonly takes the Dative. See 589. 

nemo potest fortunae stabilitate no one can trust to the stability 

confidere of fortune 

huic legioni Caesar maxime con- this legion Caesar especially 

fidebat trusted. [235. 236.] 

Time, Space, Place. 

USE OF PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions construed with the Accusative: 
ante, apiid, ad, adversus, 
circiim, circa, citra, cis, 
erga, contra, inter, extra, 
infra, intra, juxta, ob, 
penes, (pone), post & praeter, 
prope, propter, per, secundum, 
supra, versus, ultra, trans. 

629. ad, with many varieties of application, generally means 
to. It denotes: 

direction toward a place or person, as: ad urbem, to town; 
venio ad te, / come to you; 

nearness with reference to place, time or quantity, as: urbs sita 
ad mare, a town situated near the sea; ad vesperam, towards 
evening; ad ducentos, nearly 200; 

time, answering the question till when? as: ad summam senec- 
tfitem, until extreme old age. It also denotes a fixed time, as: ad 
horam, at the hour; 

aim or purpose = in respect of, as: res ad bellum utiles, 
things useful for war; 

accord or agreement = according to, as: ad voluntatem all- 
cujus loqui, to speak according to some one's will 



— 198 — 

Particular Phrases are: 
ad verbum, word for word 

nihil, ad hanc rem, nothing in comparison with this thing 
ad unum omnes, all to the last man. 

630. apud, at, chiefly used of persons, denotes: 

nearness or presence, as: apud Caesarem, at Caesar's house; 
apud judices, before, in presence of, the judges; apud Can- 
nas, near Cannae; 

situation or estimation among, regard by, as: apud veteres, 
among the ancients; apud me nihil valet hominum opinio, tvith 
me the opinion of the multitude has no weight. 

apud is also used with the Names of Authors instead of in 
with the name of their works, as: apud Plinium legimus, we read 
in Pliny (in his works). 

631. ante, before, means preceding in space or time, as: ante 
portas, before the gates; ante noctem, before night. 

632. adversus, more rarely adversum, indicates: 
direction toward a place or person, and combines the meanings 

of both against and toward, as: castra adversus urbem ponere, 
to pitch the camp over against the city; adversus aliquem 
pugnare, to fight with (against) some one; pietas adversus pa- 
rentes, duty to(ward) parents. 

633. cis and citra, on this side, are used in reference to 
place opposed to trans, as: citra Rubiconem, on this side of 

the Rubicon. 

634. circa and circum are equivalent to both around and 
about with reference to place, as: circum haec loca, hereabout; 
homines circum se habent, they have people with them, circa is 
also used of time, as: circa eandem horam, about the same hour. 

Particular Phrase : 
circum amlcos mittere, to send around to one's friends. 

635. circiter, near, about, is used of time only, as: circiter 
meridiem, about noon, but is more commonly an Adverb. 

636. contra is equivalent to against in both its meanings: 
opposite to, as: contra Italiam, over against Italy; 

in opposition to, as: contra naturam vivere, to live against 
nature. 



_ 199 — 

6*57. erga, toward, always implies friendly feelings, as: divina 
bonitas erga homines, God's goodness toward men. 

638. extra means without = out of, sometimes beyond or ex- 
cept, as: extra urbem, without the city; extra modum, beyond 
measure; extra ducem reliqui rapaces sunt, except the leader the 
rest are robbers. 

639. intra denotes within in regard to both place and time, 
as: intra urbem, within the city; intra decern annos, within or 
during 10 years, intra with an Ordinal Number means before the 
expiration of as: intra decimum diem urbem cepit, before the 
expiration of the 10th day he took the city. 

640. inter is equivalent to both between and among, as: inter 
Padum et Alpes, between the Po and the Alps; Croesus inter re- 
ges opulentisslmus, Croesus, the wealthiest among kings. It is also 
used to denote time, as: inter cenam, during dinner; inter lu- 
dendum, while playing. With the personal pronouns, as: inter nos, 
vos, eos, se, it is employed in a reciprocal sense, answering to the 
English one another, each other, as: Ciceronis pueri amant inter 
se, Cicero 1 s boys love one another. 

641. infra, below, means: 

lower in place, as: infra caelum, tinder the sky; 

loiver in rank or esteem, as: eum infra omnes puto, J think 
him beneath all men; 

later in time, as: Homgrus non infra Lycurgum fuit, Homer 
was not later than Lycurgus; 

smaller than, as: magnitudine infra elephantum, in size 
smaller than an elephant 

642. juxta, hard by, beside, as: juxta murum castra posuit, 
he pitched the camp hard by the wall. 

643. ob sometimes means before, as: ob oculos versari, to be 
before the eyes. Generally it means by reason of, on account of, 
as: ob earn causam, for that reason. 

644. penes denotes in the possession or power of, as : summum 
imperlum penes Agamemnonem erat, the chief command was in 
the hands of Agamemnon. 



— 200 — 

645. per, through, is used in a great variety of applications, as: 
denoting place, from end to end, as: per urbem ire, to go 

through the city; 

denoting duration as: per noctem, during the night; 

denoting the agent or means, as: per amlcum servatus sum, by 
(means of) my friend I was saved; 

denoting the manner in which a thing is done, as: per litteras, 
by letter; per potestatem, by authority; per iram, from or in 
anger; per vim, by violence; 

denoting the object invoked in forms of swearing, as: per deos 
immortales jurare, to swear by the immortal gods. 
Particular Phrases: 
per me licet, you may for all I care; per aetatem, on account 
of his age; per valetudinem, on account of ill health. 

646. post, after, denotes: 

behind in place, as: post equitem sedet atra cura, behind the 
rider sits black care; 

later in time, as: post tenebras lux, after darkness comes light. 

647. praeter primarily means along, as: praeter litus, 
along shore; yet it is more commonly equivalent to except or be- 
sides, as: praeter te amlcum neminem habeo, except you I have 
no friend; praeter auctoritatem etiam vires habet, besides au~ 
thority he has also strength. 

Particular Phrases: 
praeter spem, contrary to hope; praeter modum, immoderate- 
ly; praeter ceteros, more than the rest. 

648. prope, near, near by, as: prope urbem, near the city. 

649. propter is equivalent to prope, near, as: propter Si- 
cilian! insulae Yulcaniae sunt, near Sicily are the Vulcanian 
islands; but most frequently it is on account of, implying motive or 
reason, as: propter modestiam tuam te diligo, / love you on 
account of your modesty. 

650. secundum (derived from sequi, to follow) means: 
along, as: secundum mare iter facere, to make a journey 

along the sea shore; 

next to, immediately after, as: secundum cenam, imme- 
diately fifter dinner; 

according to, as: secundum nattiram vivere, to live according 
to nature. 



— 201 — 

651. supra, above (opposite to infra) denotes: 
higher in place, as: supra lunam, above the moon; 

more than, superior to, as: supra duos menses, more than 
two months; supra vires, above one's strength. 

652. traus, beyond, across, on the other side, is used with 
verbs expressing motion, as: multae aves ante hieniem trans mare 
migrant, many birds migrate across the sea before winter; also 
with verbs expressing rest, as: eo ipso tempore trans mare fui, at 
that very time I was beyond the sea. 

653. versus, towards, -ward, follows an accusative which is 
usually governed by ad or in, as: ad Oceanum versus proficisci, 
to set out towards the ocean. With domus and names of towns 
versus alone is used, as: Romam versus, Romeivartl; domum 
versus, homeward. 

654. ultra signifies beyond, on the further side, as: ultra 
Atlantem montem, beyond mount Atlas. It is also used to denote 
measure, as: ultra septa transillre, to go beyond bounds. 

[91. 92. 237. 238.] 

Prepositions construed with the Ablative. 
a, ab, abs, cum, de, 
coram, pro, ex, e, 
teniis, sine, prae. 

655. a (ab, abs), from, is used in a variety of applications; it 
denotes: 

the point of time or space at which the action, state, etc. are 
regarded as setting out, or beginning, as: a prima aetate, from an 
early age; ab urbe profectus est, he departed from the city; 

that from which anything proceeds or by which anything is 
produced, as: calor est a sole, the heat is from the sun; ab hoste 
interfectus est, he was killed by an enemy; 

that from which anything is guarded, with such verbs as cT> 
fendere, tiieri, etc., as: urbem defendere ab hostibus, to defend the 
city against the enemy; 

that with reference to which anything is or is done, equivalent 
to with respect to, as: imparati sumus a militlbus, as to soldiers 
we are not ready. 

Before vowels and h, it is ab; before consonants, a or ab; 
abs before te, but we say also a te, never ab te. 

656. absque, without, is rarely used, 



— 202 — 

657. de primarily means down from or away from, as: de 
caelo, down from heaven; de vita decedere, to depart from life. 
It is also used in a partitive sense in such expressions as : unus de 
plebe, one of the people. When denoting time, it is as early as, 
even at, as: de nocte, even at night] de mense Decembri, as 
early as December. Most commonly, however, it is concerning, 
about or on, as: de gestis Alexandri, on the exploits of Alexander. 
liber de amicitia, a book on friendship. Sometimes it is equivalent 
to secundum, according to, as: de consilio meo, according to my 
advice; and frequently it denotes the manner of action, as: denuo 
(de novo), de integro, afresh; de improviso, unexpectedly; de in- 
dustria, purposely; qua de causa, quibus de eausis, for ivhich reason 
or reasons. 

658. coram, in the presence of, before, as: coram amico, 
in the presence of a friend. When used as an adverb, coram 
means personally, as: coram adesse, to be present in person. 

659. cum, with, expresses association or accompanying 
circumstances, as: cum aliquo ire, to go with some one; esse cum 
telo, to go armed; confligere cum hoste, to fight ivith the enemy. 

cum with the Ablative of a Personal Pronoun is always appended 
to it, as: tecum loquitur, he talks ivith you; and commonly also with 
the Relative: quocum, quibuscum (likewise cum quo, cum quibus); 
quicum is used for the Ablative of both numbers and all genders. 

660. e, ex, out of, from, denotes: 

the place, answering to the question whence? as: aliquem ex 
regno pellere, to drive some one out of the kingdom] e longinquo 
videre, to see from afar; ex equo pugnare, to fight on horseback; 

the point of time from which, as: ex illo die, from that day; 

the cause out of which anything proceeds, as: ex nihilo nihil fit, 
of nothing nothing comes; aeger ex vulnere, sick from a wound; 
ex quo, tohence or for which reason. 

In a great many cases e (ex) has the signification in accordance 
with, as: ex ejus sententia, according to his opinion; or it denotes 
the manner of an action, as: ex ammo laudare, to praise heartily; 
ex improviso, unexpectedly. In such phrases as: unus e multis, one 
of many, it is used in a partitive sense. 

Mark the Particular Phrases: 
ex tua re, to your advantage; e republica, for the good, of the state. 
Before consonants it is ej before vowels and consonants, ex. 



— 203 — 

661. pro means: 

before or in front of preceding in space, as: pro castris aciem 
instruere, to array the army for battle before the camp; 

for = in defence of in behalf of as: pro patria mori, to diefw 
one's country; 

for = instead of as: pro consule, in place of consul; 

in accordance with or in proportion to, as: pro portione, in 
proportion; pro virlli parte, to the best of one's ability. 

662. prae is before = in front of only in combination with 
agere and ferre, as: prae se ferre, to carry before one's self i. e. to 
show. Most commonly it means: in comparison with, in contrast 
ivith, as: prae me beatus es, in comparison with me you are 
happy; it is also frequently used in the sense of on account of im- 
plying an obstacle, as: prae lacrimis scribere non possum, I cannot 
write on account of tears. 

663. terms, as far as, follows its noun, as: Tauro tenus, as 
far as Taurus; hoc tenuis, hitherto. 

664. sine, without, opposed to ctim, has a negative power, 
hence we say: sine ulla spe, without any hope. 

[93. 94 . 239. 240.] 

Prepositions construed with the Accusative & Ablative. 
sub, super, subter, in. 

665. sub and in, when followed by the Accusative, indicate 
motion towards, when by the Ablative, rest in, a place* 

666. sub with the Accusative means: 

under, close to, as: sub montem succedere, to come close to 

the hill; 

about, shortly before, of time, as: sub noctem, towards night; 
sub lucem, near daylight) 

667. sub with the Ablative is always: 

under, as: sub terra habitare, to live under ground; sub divo, 
in the open air; sub monte, at the foot of a hill. 

668. super has the Ablative only when used in the sense of de, 
concerning, as: hac super re, concerning this thing. With the 
Accusative it is over, above, answering to the questions whither? 
and where? as: super aliquem sedere, to sit above some one. 

Particular Phrases: vulnus super vulnus, wound upon wound; 
super cenam, during dinner, 



— 204 — 

669. subter, beneath, takes the Accusative answering to the 
questions whither? and where? as: subter togam, tinder the toga. 

670. in, with the Accusative denotes entrance with regard to 
place, as: in urbem venit, he came into town; it also indicates the 
object toward which an action is directed, either with a friendly or 
hostile intention, as: amor in patrem, love for one's father; oratio 
in Catilmam, a speech against Catiline. With words denoting 
time it is equivalent to for, expressing a predetermination of that 
time, as: in diem vivere, to live for the day; in perpetuum, 
forever; in dies, from day to day. 

Mark the Adverbial Expressions: hunc in modum, in this way; 
mirum in modum, in a wonderful manner; in vicem, alternately 
or instead of 

671. in with the Ablative, denotes presence in place, time or 
circumstances, as: in urbe habito, / live in town; est mihi in 
animo, / have it in mind; in scribendo, while writing. When a 
Number or Quantity is indicated, it is equivalent to among, as: 
numerari in bonis civibus, to be counted among the good citizens. 

[95. 96. 187. 188. 239. 240.] 
TIME. 

672. Time when is expressed by the Ablative of 
words denoting time, such as: 

tempus, time saeciilum, a century 

aetas, an age ver, spring 
punctum temporis, a moment aestas, summer 

hora, an hour auctumnus, autumn 

dies, a day hiems, winter 

mensis, a month vesper, evening 

annus, a year nox, night 

Hannibalis milites vere conve- HannibaVs soldiers assembled 

nere in spring. 

673. Words not explicitly expressing time, such as: bellum, 
pax, pueritia, usually take in with the Ablative, but they are without 
in, if accompanied by an Adjective or Genitive. So we say: 

in bello, in war times bello Persico, at the time of the 

in pace, in time of peace Persian war 

in pueritia, in boyhood prima pueritia, in early boyhood 

in adulescentia, in youth bello Antiochi, during the WQT 

in senectute, in old ag§ with Antiochus, 



— 205 — 

Particular Phrases. 

initi0 . I at the beginning temporibus ) in ^ Umes 

principio 1 aetate 1 

adventu, at the arrival ludis, during the games 

discessu, at the departure bis die, twice a day 

in tempore, at the right time hora nona, at 9 o'clock 

674. Time how long is put in the Accusative. 

Appius caecus multos annos fuit, Appius was blind many years. 

The Preposition per may be used to denote from beginning to 
end, as: est mecum per totum diem, he is with me the livelong day. 

Time how long since may be expressed by an ordinal number in 
the Accusative, as: 

Mithridates jam annum tertium Mithridates has reigned going 
et vicesimum regnat on 28 years. 

Time how long before the present moment is expressed by abhinc 
with the Accusative, as: abhinc sex menses, six months ago. 

675. Distance of time how long before or after is ex- 
pressed by the Ablative with ante or post following: 

paucis diebus ante, a few days before 
paucis diebus post, a few days afterward. 

The Accusative can also be employed, but then the Preposition 
precedes, thus: ante, post paucos dies. 

Either Case and the cardinal as well as the ordinal numbers may 
be used, when the Preposition is placed between the Numeral and the 
Substantive. Hence the English phrase three years after may be 
expressed as follows: 

tribus annis post post tres annos 

tertio anno post post tertium annum 

tribus post annis tres post annos 

tertio post anno tertium post annum 

quam and a verb may be added to ante and post in all the 
forms above specified, as: 

tribus annis postquam venerat \ 
post tres annos quam venerat f three years after he 

tertio anno postquam venerat f had come, 

post annum tertium quam venerat J 



— 206 — 

676. Time within which is expressed by the Ablative 

or by intra with the Accusative : 
Agamemnon vix decern annis Agamemnon in ten years 
(intra decern annos) unam hardly took one city. 
cepit urbem 

677. Time for how long is expressed by in with the 

Accusative, as: 

Phaeton currum paternum in Phaeton asked his father 's char- 
diem rogavit riot for a day. 

678. The Question how old? is answered in different ways: 

By natus (born) with the Accusative, as: puer decern annos natus 
est, the boy is ten years old; 

By the Genitive of Quality: Hamilcar secum duxit filium Hanniba- 
lem annorum novem, Hamilcar took with him his son Hannibal 9 
years of age; 

By agere, to pass, with annus and an ordinal number, as: quar- 
tum annum ago et octogeslmum, / am 83 years old. 

Older and younger are expressed by m(*jor and mSndr with 
following Ablative, as: 

major quinque et triginta annis, older than 85 years. [243. 244.) 

SPACE. 

679. Extent of Space is put in the Accusative, as: 

fossa pedes trecentos longa est, the ditch is 300 feet long, 6 feet 
sex pedes alta deep. 

680. Measures of length, depth, etc., are often expressed by the 
Genitive of Quality, as: 

vallum pedum duodecim fieri he ordered a rampart to be 
jussit made of 12 feet (in height). 

681. Distance how far is put in the Accusative or 
Ablative, as: 

a recta conscientia transversum we ought not to swerve a naiVs 
unguem non oportet discedere breadth from a right con- 
science 

eopiae Ariovisti a Romanis mi- the troops of Ariovistus were 
libus quattuor et viginti afue- twenty four miles from the 
runt Romans. \%4£, 242, \ 



— 20T — 
PLAGE. 

682. To express relations of Place, Prepositions 
are necessary, viz.: 

in with the Ablative to denote the place where, as: in urbe, in town; 

in or ad with the Accusative to denote the place to which, as: in 
Europam, to Europe; ad urbem, to town; 

ex with the Ablative to denote the place from which, as: ex Britan- 
nia, from Great Britain. 

683. But the Prepositions are not used with the 
names of Towns and small Islands. 

In answer to the question whither? names of towns and small 
islands are put in the Accusative Case, as: Romam venit, he came 
to Borne. 

In answer to the question whence? the names of towns and small 
islands are put in the Ablative Case, as: Roma cessit, he retired 
from Borne. 

In answer to the question where? the names of towns and small 
islands, if of the first or second declension and in the singular, 
are put in the Genitive Case, as: Romae mansit, he remained at 
Borne. But if the names are of the plural number or belong to 
the third declension, they are put in the Ablative Case, as: Babylone 
mortuus est, he died at Babylon. (For the place where there 
was formerly a special Case, the Locative, ending in I which is 
preserved in Carthagini, at Carthage; rur'i, in the country, etc.) 

684. urbs or opptdum ivithout an Attribute is placed before 
the proper name, and the preposition in or ex is always em- 
ployed, as: 

in urbem Cirtam to the city of Cirta 

ex oppido Gergovia from the town of Gergovia 

in urbe Roma in the city of Borne. 

685. urbs or oppidum with an Attribute is placed after the 
proper name, commonly with in or ex. But in answer to the question 
where? the Ablative may be used with or without in, even though 
the proper name be in the Genitive. 

Aullde, ex oppido Boeotiae from Aulis, a toivn of Boeotia 

Thalam, in oppidum magnum to Thala, a great town 
Albae, (in) urbe munlta at Alba, a fortified city. 



— 208 — 

686, The following words are used like names of 
towns, without a preposition: 
rus, into the country domum, home 

rCirg, from the country domo, from home hiirno, from the ground 
run, in the country domi, at home huml, on the ground 

d5mi militiaeque, at home and in the field 
belli domique, in ivar and in peace 
foras, to the doors; forls, out-of-doors, abroad. 
A Genitive or Possessive may be used with ddmtis in this con- 
struction, but when it is modified in any other way, a preposition is 
generally employed, as: 

domi meae, at my house; domum Caesaris, to Caesar's house; 
in domum veterem e nova, to the old house from the new. 

-687. The Ablative is used without a preposition to 

denote the place where : 

With nouns when qualified by the Adjective totus, or cunctiis: 

Demosthenes disertissimus tota Demosthenes was the most elo- 

Graecia fuit quent man in all Greece; 

With loco, locis when qualified by Adjectives: 
hoc loco, multis locis in this place, in many places. 

688. The way by which is put in the Ablative: 
terra marlque by sea and by land 

Appia via profectus est he set out by the Appian way. 

689. The Preposition In is generally joined with the Ablative after 
Verbs of Placing, as: 

ponere, to place statiiere ) . , dSmerggre, to plunge 
collocare, to put constituere) imprimere, to stamp 

consider^, to settle dSfigere, to plant inscribere, to write upon 
Plato rationem in capite posuit Plato has put reason in the head 
Lucretia cultrum in corde defl- Lucretia plants a knife in her 
git heart 

690. Again, after Verbs of Assembling and kindred signi- 
fications the Preposition in is followed by the Accusative. Such are: 

advenire, to arrive congregarl, to assemble cogere, to assemble 
convenlre, to meet nuntiare, to bring word 
conjurati in curiam convenerunt the conspirators met in the 

senate house. 

[191, 192. 241. 242.) 



— 209 — 

Special Uses of Substantives. 

691. In place of the Abstract expressions: in pueritia, in 
adulescentia, in senectute, in stating the age at which a person per- 
formed any action, the Latin employs the Concretes puer, adu- 
lescens, senex; ab infante, a parvulo, from childhood. 

692. When official titles are used to indicate time, the con- 
crete nouns consul, praetor, &c, are used instead of . consulates, 
praetura, &c. as: L. Pisone, A Gabinio consullbus, in the consulship 
of L. Piso and A. Gabinius. 

693. Again, Abstract nouns are sometimes used instead of 
Concretes, as: nobilitas for nobiles, noblemen 

posteritas " posteri, descendants 
vicinitas " viclni, neighbors. 

694. In Latin, Abstract nouns when referring to several objects 
or denoting repetition at different times admit of plural use, as: 

adventus imperatorum, the arrival of the generals; 
interitus exercituum, the destruction of the armies. 

695. Some Abstract nouns take such a modified sense as to 
admit of plural use, as: fortitudmes, gallant actions; irae, quarrels. 

696. Symmetrical parts of the human body are usually in the 
plural, as: cervices, the neck; pectora, the breast; also words denot- 
ing phenomena of nature, as: nives, snow; grandines, hail; pluviae, 
rain. 

697. Other Plural expressions to be noted are: 
ligna, (logs of) wood carnes, pieces of meat 
aera, articles of bronze vina, kinds of wine. 

698. The Singular, in a Collective sense, is sometimes used 
for the plural, as: 

pedes, infantry faba, beans 

miles, the soldiery porcus, pork 

eques, cavalry gallina, fowl 

hostis, the enemy vestis, clothing. 

699. A Proper name may be applied to two or more members 
of the same family, or to persons of the same character, and so 
becomes strictly common as: Horatii, the Horatii; Nerones, JSferos 
(tyrants). 

700. The Substantive nemo is often used with other Substan- 
tives so as to become equivalent to the Adjective nullus, as: ngnio 
civis, no citizen. It wants the genitive and ablative. The oblique cases 
of nihil are supplied by the respective cases of nulla res. 



— 210 — 

Special Uses of Adjectives. 

701. Adjectives are often used as Substantives. In the Plural 
masculine adjectives denote persons, neuter adjectives things. 

pauperes, the poor humana, human affairs 

divites, the rich omnia, all things 

omnes, all men vera, truth. 

702. The Neuter Singular may denote either a single object 
or a quality, as: 

honestum, an honorable act bonum, a good 

malum, an evil pulchrum, beauty 

703. Adjectives are often used in Latin where the English has 
the Possessive, or a noun with a preposition, as: 

domus regia, a king's palace 
pugna Cannensis, the fight at Cannae 
iter campestre, a journey across country 
aliena domus, another man's house 
Miltiades Atheniensis, Miltiades of Athens. 

704. The first part, last part, middle part of any place or time 
are generally expressed in Latin by the Adjectives primus, medius, 
ultimus, infimils, lmiis, summiis, reliquus, as: media nox, the middle 
of the night; summa arbor, the top of the tree; supremi montes, the 
summits of the mountains. 

705. The Comparative sometimes has the force of too, un- 
usually, somewhat, and the Superlative of very, as: brevior, rather 
short; audacior, too bold; amicus carissimus, a very dear friend) 
Cato, homo doctissimus, Cato, a very learned man. 

706. The force of the Comparative is increased by multo, 
much, far; aliquanto, some more, considerably; etiam, even, 
still, as: multo mellor, much better; etiam doctior, still more 
learned. 

707. The Superlative is strengthened by long-e, by far; 
multo, much; vel, even; unus omnium, one above all others; 
quam, quantfis potuit, as. .as possible; as: multo maxima pars, 
by far the largest part; quam maximae copiae, forces as large as 
possible; sophistes vel maximus, the very greatest sophist. 

70S. When two qualities of the same object are compared, both 
adjectives (or adverbs) are in the Comparative, as: est doctior quam 
sapientior, he is more learned than wise. Where magis quam is 
used, both Adjectives are in the Positive: amicus tuus disertus ma- 
gis est quam sapiens, your friend is eloquent rather than wise. 



— 211 — 

709. The Comparative is to be used in reference to only two 
objects; the Superlative when comparing more than two objects, as: 
uter fratrum natu major est? Which of the two brothers is the older? 
Quaerltur ex duobus uter dignior, ex plurlbus quis dignissimus; the 
question is: Of two, which is the worthier; of more, which is the 
worthiest. 

Special Uses of Pronouns. 

710. Personal and Possessive Pronouns of the First and Se- 
cond Persons are not expressed in Latin except for distinction or 
emphasis, as: amamus parentes, we love our parents. 

711. As a rule, the Reflexive Pronoun sui, sibi, se and its 
Possessive siius, are used when reference is made to the Subject of 
the sentence; as: Caesar se ad suos recepit, Caesar betook himself to 
his men. 

The Possessive suus may also be used with reference to any noun 
in the same sentence on which emphasis is thrown, as: 
Socratem cives sui interfece- Socrates was put to death by 

runt his own fellow -citizens 

puer columbam cepit in nido the boy caught the dove in its 
suo nest. 

On the other hand, the Determinatives ejus, eorum, earum are used 

as Possessives of the third person, when no emphasis appears, or 

when reference is made to a noun in another sentence, as: 

Deum agnoscis ex operibus ejus you recognize God by his works 

multi cives interfecti, eorum- many citizens were slain, and 

que bona publicata sunt their property confiscated. 

To express reciprocal action inter se is regularly used, as: 
am ant inter se, they love one another. 

712. hie, this, refers to that which is nearer the speaker (De- 
monstrative of the First Person); iste, that (of yours) to the person ad- 
dressed (Demonstrative of the Second Person); ille, that, to that which is 
remote (Demonstrative of the Third Person). 

life very frequently means that which is about to be mentioned. 
as: his condicionibus, on the following terms; 

iste especially refers to one's opponent (in court, etc.) and fre- 
quently implies contempt, as: Mars alter, ut isti volunt, a second 
Mars, as those fellows say; 

ille is often used of that which is well known, notorious, as: 
praeclarum iilud Solonis, that famous saying of Solon. It is also 
used in the sense of the following. 



— 212 — 

713. Often hie and ille are to be rendered the latter and the 
former (hie, the one last mentioned, the nearer; ille, the one men- 
tioned earlier, the remoter), thus: 

melius de quibusdam acerbi ini- bitter enemies deserve better of 

mlci merentur quam ii amlci, some people than those 

qui suaves videntur ; illi friends who seem obliging; 

saepe verum dicunt, lii nun- the former often tell the 

. quam. truth, the latter never. 

But the order is often reversed so that liic refers to the object 

first mentioned (usually the more important), and ille to the one 

mentioned last. 

melior est certa pax quam spe- better is certain peace than 

rata victoria; haec in tua, hoped-for victory; the former 

ilia in deorum manu est is- in your hands, the latter 

in the hands of the gods. 

714. is, that, is either the regular Antecedent of the Relative or 
refers to an Object just mentioned. 

is sapiens est, qui se ad casus he is a wise man who accom- 
accommodet omnes modates himself to all circum- 

stances 
mihi obviam venit tuus puer; is I was met by your servant; he 
mihi litter as abs te reddidit delivered to me a letter from 

you. 

715. When a quality is ascribed with emphasis to an object 
already named, is with a copulative or adversative particle is used, 
thus: 

et is, atque is, isque, and he too, and that too 
neque is, et is non, and he not, and that not 
unam rem explicabo, eamque one point I shall explain, and 
maximam that, too, a very important one. 

716. No demonstrative pronoun is employed in Latin in phrases 
where that or those in English is used in place of a noun which would 
have to be repeated: 

Terentii fabulis plus delector I find more delight in the plays 
quam Plauti of Terence than in those of 

Plautus. 

717. idem is often equivalent to an adverb or an adverbial 
phrase (also, likewise, yet, at the same time), as: Quidquid honestum 
est, idem est utile. Wliatever is honorable is at the same time 
useful 



— 213 — 

718. ipse, self, is used with any of the other pronouns or a 
noun tor the sake of emphasis, often expressed in English by just, 
mere, very, as: triginta erant dies ipsi, it was just SO days. 

When added to any reflexive pronoun, ipse agrees either with 
such pronoun or with the subject of the sentence, according as either 
is emphatic; as: 

piger ipse sibi obstat, the lazy man stands in his own way; 

nosce te ipsum ! know thyself! 

719. For the agreement of Relatives see 551, foil. 

The Antecedent, and the Adjective or Apposition of the ante- 
cedent are often incorporated into the Relative clause, as: in 
quern primum egressi sunt locum Troja vocatur; the first place they 
landed at was called Troy. 

720. The Interrogative quis? is used substantively and ad- 
jectively; qui? mostly adjectively. Thus we say: quis rex? which 
king? inquiring for the individual; but qui homo? what man? in- 
quiring for the character. 

721. The Indefinite Pronouns are used to indicate that some 
person or thing is meant, without indicating what one. 

722. aliquis means some one or other, as: fecit hoc aliquis 
tui similis, some one or other like you did this; aliquid consuetudini 
dandum est, something must be allowed to custom. 

723. quis (fainter than aliquis) is used chiefly after Relatives 
and the following Conjunctions: 

si, if; nisi, if not; ne, lest; ntim, whether; cum, when. 
aliquis after si and the rest is emphatic. 
ne quid nimis! nothing in excess! 
ne qua significatio fiat, that no sign may be made. 

724. quisqu&m (subst.) and ullus (adj.) mean any one at all, 
and are chiefly used in negative, interrogative, and conditional sen- 
tences, also after sine, without; vix, scarcely, quam, than. 

neque ex castris Catilinae quis- nor had any one departed from 

quam omnium discesserat the camp of Catiline 

iegati sine ulla'spe pacis domum the ambassadors returned home 

redierunt without any hope of peace 

Iegati non sine aliqua spe pacis the ambassadors returned home f 

domum redierunt not without some hope of 

peace. 



— 214 — 

725. quidam, means one, a, a certain one; in the plural it is 
equivalent to some, sundry, as: qui dam rhetor antiquus, a certain 
ancient rhetorician; certi quidam homines, some reliable persons. 

726. unusquisqne means every single one; quivis & qui- 

libet, any one you like; quisque, each one; omnes, all together. 

727. The Distributive quisque is used: 

After the reflexive pronoun, sui, sibi, se, and its possessive 
situs, as: sua cuique voluptas, each man has his hobby, 

With Superlatives and Ordinals, as: optimum quidque rarissi- 
mum est, the best is the rarest, or every good thing is rare, or the 
better a thing y the rarer it is; quinto quoque anno, every fifth year. 

728. Slius is simply another; alter, is the other of two, or 
the second; ceterl, all the rest or others. 

729. The expressions alius . . alms, altSr . . alter may be 

used in a reciprocal sense: pueri alter alterum amant, the boys love 
each other, alius repeated in different propositions is translated 
one — another; aliud agitur, aliud simulatur, one thing is done, 
another pretended, alii . . alii, is some, .others; alter! .. alterl, 
one party .. another party, alius with another case of the same 
word may be translated by two separate propositions commencing 
with one-another respectively; as: aliud alii natura iter ostendit, 
nature shows one path to one man, another path to another man. 

[245. 246.] 

Syntax of the Verb. 
Use of Tenses. 

730. There are Six Tenses in Latin, viz.: 

Of Continued Action. 

the Present, as: scribo, J am writing; 

the Imperfect, used chiefly for description or repeated action, as: 
scribebam, I was writing; 

the Future, as: scribam, I shall write. 

Of Completed Action: 

the Perfect, either definite or historical, as: scrips!, I have written 
(definite), or: I wrote (historical); 

the Pluperfect, as: scripseram, I had written; 

the Future Perfect, as: scripsero, I shall have written. 



— 215 — 

731. The Present is used of what is going on now, 

at the present time, and of what is true at all 

times, as: 

loqueris adhuc, cum omnes ta- you are still speaking while all 

cent are silent 

fortes forttina adjuvat fortune helps the brave. 

732. The Present is often substituted for the Historical Perfect 
in lively narration, as: 

triginta rectores reipublicae 30 rulers of the Athenian com* 
Atheniensis constituuntur, qui monwealth are appointed, who 
fiunt tyranni become tyrants. 

733. The Present is used in Latin to express a past action or 
state which is continued so as to be present also, especially with jam, 
now; jam dm, now for a long time; jam pridem, now long since, as: 

tot annos bella gero for so many years I have waged 

and am still waging war. 

734. The Present is regularly used with dum, while, though the 
time referred to is past, as: 

haec dum aguntur, Caesari nun- while this is going on, word 
tiatum est was brought to Caesar. 

735. The Imperfect denotes an action continuing in 
the past, but not then accomplished. It is employed 
to describe manners, customs and situations. 

scribebam epistulam, cum ami- I was writing a letter when my 

cus adesset friend came 

ante oppidum planitles patsbat before the town extended a plain 

Pausanias epulabatur more Per- Pausanias teas wont to banquet 

sarum in the Persian style. 

736. The Future represents an action that is yet to 
come. In subordinate clauses it is used with much 
greater exactness in Latin than in English: 

sanablmur, si volemus ice shall be healed if we wish. 

The Future sometimes has the force of an Imperative-. 
in sudore vultus tui comedes pa- in the sweat of thy face thou 
nem tuum shalt eat thy bread. 



— 216 — 

737. The Perfect has two distinct uses: 

I. As the Perfect Definite it denotes an action as 
now completed, and is rendered by the English Per- 
fect with have. 

triste est nomen carendi, quia sad is the phrase "do without" 
subjicitur haec vis : habuit, because this meaning is at- 
non habet tributed to it: he has had, 

he has no longer. 

II. As the Historical Perfect it denotes an action as 

completed in past time, but leaves it, in other respects, 

wholly indeterminate. 

Caesar armis rem gerere con- Caesar resolved to use armed 

stituit, exercitum finibus Ita- force; he advanced with his 

liae admovit, Rubiconem trans- army to the frontiers of Italy, 

lit, Roniam et aerarmm occu- passed the Rubicon, took pos~ 

pavit, Ponipejum cedentem session of Rome and the 

persectitus est, eumque in treasury, pursued Pompey 

campis Pharsalicis devlcit. and defeated him in the plain 

of Pharsalus 
The following Conjunctions: 



[ after 

.■ as sot.. 
ut primum ) simulatque 



n i as soon as 



at * as soon as sMlc 



!■ 



are usually followed by the Historical Perfect: 
milites postquam victoriam when the soldiers had won the 
adepti sunt, nihil reliqui vie- victory, they left nothing to 
tis fecere the vanquished. 

738. The Pluperfect is used of an action that was 

completed before another was begun; as: 
consul copias, quas pro castris the' consul led back the forces 
collocaverat, reduxit which he had stationed before 

the camp. 

739. The Future Perfect denotes an action as com- 
pleted in the future; it is used with much greater 

exactness in Latin than in English, as: 
ut sementem feceris, ita metes; as you sow, so shall you reap. 



— 217 — 

740. In the statement of an action repeated before another, with 
such particles as: cum, tibi, whenever; simulac, as soon as; si, ivhen; 
and Relatives, as: quotlens, as often as, the Perfect and Pluperfect In- 
dicative are used — the Perfect referring to Present Time, the Plu- 
perfect to Past 

quotlens cecidit, surgit, as often as he falls, he rises, 
quotlens ceciderat, surgebat, as often as he fell, he rose. 
In like manner, in letters the Perfect, or Imperfect may be used for 

the present and the Pluperfect for past tenses, as in the phrase: nihil 

erat quod scriberem, Iliave nothing to write. 

741. The Periphrastic Conjugations are formed by combining the 
tenses of esse with the Future Participle (Active), and with the Ge- 
rundive (Passive). 

The Active Periphrastic Conjugation denotes either intention or 
being on the point of doing something, as: 
scripturus sum, I purpose to write, or am about to write. 
The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation expresses necessity or pro- 
priety, as: 
parentes amandi sunt, parents must be loved, deserve or ought to 
be loved. 
The Person by whom is put in the Dative, as: 
parentes llberis amandi sunt, parents ought to be lotted by their 

children. 
bellum scripturus sum, quod po- I purpose to write the history of 
pulus Romanus cum Jugurtha thewarwhichtheEomanpeople 
gessit carried on with Jugurtha. 

[247. 248.1 

Sequence of Tenses. 

742. When two sentences are so related to each 
other, that the one defines and explains the other, 
or that the one is dependent on the other, they 
are connected in the way of Subordination, as: 

crepant aedificia, priusquam cadant, houses creak before they fall; 
crepant aedificia is the Principal Clause, 
priusquam cadant is the Dependent Clause. 

The Subjunctive is largely used in Subordinate Sentences, and 
will be treated at length in that connection. 



— 218 — 



743. In those Dependent Clauses which require the Subjunctive the 
choice of the tenses of the Dependent Clause is determined by the 
tense of the Principal Clause according to the following 

GENERAL RULES. 

I. Tenses, in regard to their connection, are divided into two 
classes : 

Principal, including the Present, both Futures and the Perfect 

Definite; 
Historical, including the Imperfect, the Historical Perfect and 

the Pluperfect 

II. Principal Tenses are followed by the Present Subjunctive for 
contemporary action, and by the Perfect Subjunctive for antecedent 
action. 

III. Historical Tenses are followed by the Imperfect Subjunctive 
for contemporary action, and by the Pluperfect Subjunctive for 
antecedent action. 

Principal Clause. 
Present. cognosco, I am finding 
out 
cognoscam, / shall find 



Future. 

out 
Fut. Perf. cognovero, / shall have 

foundout(shallknow) 
Perf. Defin. cognovi, / have found 

out (I know) 

cognoscebam, I was find- 
ing out 



Dependent Clause. 

what you are do- 



quid facias, 
ing 

quid feceris, what you have 
done, what you have been 
doing, what you did 



Imperf. 
Pluperf. 



Hist. Perf. Caesar cognovit, Caesar 
found out 



quid faceres, what you ivere 
doing 
cognover&m, I had found] quid fecisses, what you had 
out (I knew) I done, had been doing 

{ quid facerent hostes, what the 
enemy ivas doing 
quid fecissent hostes, what the 
enemy had done. 

744. The Perfect Definite, though properly a Prin- 
cipal tense, is more commonly treated as a Historical 
tense, and admits after it the Imperfect and Pluperfect: 
oblitus es, quod dixerim, you have forgotten what I said; 
interrogavi eum, quid faceret, I have asked him what he was doing; 
feci hoc, ut intellegeres, I have done this that you might see. 



— 219 — 

745. In Sentences of Result, with ut, qui, quin, the 
verb of the Dependent Clause has the same tense as 
it would have if the clause were a Principal one. 

Yerres Siciliam ita perdidit, ut Verves so ruined Sicily, that 
ea restitui in antiquum sta- she can not be restored to her 
turn non possit ancient condition, 

74:6. The Future Tenses are wanting in the Subjunctive. After a 
Future or Future Perfect, their place is supplied by the Present or 
Perfect Subjunctive; after the other tenses by the Active Peri- 
phrastic Subjunctive, Present or Imperfect; as: 
cognoscam, quid facias, I shall find out what you will be doing; 
cognovero, quid feceris, I shall have found out what you have done; 
cognosco, quid facturus sis, I am finding out what you will do; 
cognovSram, quid facturus esses, i" had found out what you would do. 

[249. 250.] 

Use of the Indicative. 

747 o The Indicative is the mood of Direct Assertions 

or Questions, as: 

necessitas non habet legem necessity recognizes no law 

quare vitia sua nemo confitetur? why iv ill no man confess his 
quia etiam nunc in illis est faults? because he continues 

to indulge in them. 

The Indicative is sometimes used where the English idiom would 
suggest the Subjunctive, chiefly in expressions denoting the pro- 
priety, advantage or necessity of an action not performed, such as: 
longum est, it would be tedious possum \r m j j* r ii 
utiiius fuit, it would have been poteram j ' 

better debeo ) T 7 . r 7 ._ 

. , . . ,-,,,. a ^ -u M ought or / should 

par est, it would be fair debebam 1 

perturbationes animorum poteram I might call the disturbances of 
appeilare morbos ? sed non con- the mind "diseases", but 
veniet ad omnia that would not suit all the 

cases. 

The Indicative of the Periphrastic Conjugations is often so used, 
ass haec condicio non accipienda fuit; these terms ought not to 
have been accepted. 



— 220 — 

7d8. The Indicative is used after General Relatives, such as: 
quisquis, no matter who; quotquot, no matter how many, and 

all forms in -cunque, -ever, also after slve..slvej whether.. or, 

where in English the Potential may be used, as: 

quidquid id est, timSo Danaos whatever it may be, I fear the 
et dona ferentes Danai, even when they bring 

presents. 

Independent Uses of the Subjunctive. 

749. The Subjunctive represents the action of the 
verb as something merely entertained by the mind and 
dependent on other circumstances. 

750. The Present and Perfect Subjunctive are used to denote an 
action as possible (Potential Subjunctive); also the second person of the 
Imperfect Subjunctive in the same manner, but only in the expressions: 

credSres, putares, you would, might have thought 
videres, cerneres, you would, might have seen. 
hie quaerat quisplam here some one may ask 

dixerit quis some one may say. 

The regular negative in such cases is non. 

751. The Subjunctive is used to denote a wish — the Present and 
Perfect a wish conceived as possible; the Imperfect and Pluperfect 
an unaccomplished one (Optative Subjunctive). When so used, the Pres- 
ent and Perfect are commonly, and the Imperfect and Pluperfect 
regularly preceded by tttinam, that, I wish that, would that 

stet haec urbs may this city continue to stand 

falsus utinam vates sim I wish I may be a false prophet 

utinam me mortuum vidisses would you had seen me dead, 
The regular negative in such cases is ne. 

752. The Subjunctive is used to express an exhortation or a com- 
mand (Hortatory or Imperative Subjunctive). 

Pres. First Pers. amSmus patriam, let us love our country 
" Second Pers. corporis rob5re utare, use your bodily strength 
" Third Pers. amet, let him love 

Perf. Second Pers. ( ne transieris Iberum, do not cross the Ebro 
(negative only) \ hoc ne feceris, thou shalt not do that 
The regular negative in such cases is ne. 



— 221 — 

753 The Subjunctive is used in the Present and Perfect to ex- 
press a concession (Concessive Subjunctive), as: 
vendat aedes vir bonus, suppose an honest man is selling a house; 
sit fur, granted that he be a thief. 

The regular negative here is ne. 

754. The Subjunctive is used in doubtful questions (Dubitative 
Subjunctive), as: 

quid hoc homme facias? what are you to do with this man? 
quid agerem? what was I to do? 

The regular negative here is non. 

[251. 252.] 

Dependent Uses of the Subjunctive. 

755. Dependent Subjunctive Clauses may be clas- 
sified as follows: 

Conjunctive Clauses introduced by Conjunctions, 

Relative Clauses " " Belatives, 

Indirect Questions " " Interrogative Words, 

Consecutive and Final Conjunctions. 

756. ut, that, governs the Subjunctive: 

I. When it means that, in order that (often to be translated by 
the Infinitive with to, in order to) to express Purpose; its Negative 
is ne, that not, lest 

esse oportet, ut vivas, non vi- you must eat to live, not live 

vere, ut edas to eat 

cura, ne quid ei desit take care that nothing be want- 

ing to him. 

II. When it means so that (often rendered by to, so as to) to ex- 
press a Result. Its Negative is tit non, so that not. 

tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn so great is the power of upright- 
in hoste etiam diligamus ness that we love it even in 

an enemy 

ita vixi, ut non frustra me na- / have so lived that I do not 
turn esse existlmem think I was born in vain, 



— 222 — 

III. When it means granted that to express a Concession; its 
Negative is ne, 
ut desint vires, tamen est lau- granted that strength be wanU 
danda voluntas ing, yet the good will is to be 

praised 
ne sit summum malum dolor, granted that pain is not the 
malum certe est greatest evil, an evil it cer- 

tainly is. 

757. neve, and not, nor, is used as Conlinuative after ne, as: 
Thrasybulus legem tulit, ne quis Thrasybulus proposed a law 

ante actarum rerum accusare- that no one should be accused 
tur neve multargtur of or punished for past o/« 

fences. 

758. The most general way of expressing Purpose is by fit 
(negatively ne) as: esse oportet, ut vivas, non vivere, ut edas; you 
must eat to live, not live to eat This is the regular construction 
with verbs of Willing and Wishing, of Warning and Beseeching, 
of Urging and Demanding, of Resolving and Endeavoring, of 
Forcing and Permitting; such as: 

consiilo, euro, prospicio, pro video, video; 

contendo, laboro, nitor, operam do, id ago. id specto, nihil anti- 

quiushabeo, quam; 
opto, postulo, flagito, oro, rogo, peto, precor, obsecro; 
mando, edico, impero, praecipio; 
impello, incito, moveo, adduco; 
hortor, moneo, suadeo, persuadeo; 
concedo, permitto; 
facio, perficio, adipiscor, assequor, consequor, impetro. 

volo, ut mihi respondeas, / wish you to answer me 

oro et hortor te, ut in munere I entreat and admonish you to 

diligentissimus sis be very careful in your of/ice 

ne noceas, dum vis prodesse vi- see to it that you do not do harm 

deto while you wish to do good. 

759. A clause of Result introduced by ut, so that (negatively 
fit non) is used: 

After such words as tarn, talis, tantus, Tta, sic, adeo; 
After verbs denoting it happens, it remains, it follows, and the 
like; (accidit, contingit, evenit, sequitur, restat, &c.) 
After quam with a Comparative: 



— 223 — 

Atticus ta vixit, ut AtheniensI- Atticus so lived that he was 

bus carisslmus esset very dear to the Athenians 

accidit, ut plena esset luna it chanced to be full moon 

urbs munitlor erat, quam ut the town was too strong to be 

primo impetu capi posset taken in the first attack. 

760. The phrase tantum abest, ut. .ut; it is so far (from being 
the case) deserves special notice: 

tantum abest ab eo, ut malum so far is death from being an 
sit mors, ut verear, ne homini evil that I fear man has no 
sit nihil bonum aliud other blessing. 

761. After metuo, tlmeo, vergor, I fear, metus est, pSri- 
eulum est, there is fear, danger, ne must be rendered by that or 
lest, and tit by that not as: 

Milo metuebat, ne a servis indi- Milo feared that he would be 

caretur betrayed by his servants 

timeo, ut sustineas laborea / fear that you will not hold 

out under your toils. 

762. The prefix &li- in aliquis and similar Compounds is re- 
jected after Relatives and the following Conjunctions: 

si, if; nisi, if not; ne, lest; nihil, whether; cum, vjhen. 

Hence we say in Final Clauses: 

n6 quis, that no one ng quando, that never 

ne quid, that nothing nS quisquam, that no one at all 

nSciibi, that nowhere ne quidquam, that nothing at all. 

[253. 254.] 

763. The Ablative quo (= ut eo, that thereby), in 
order that, so that, with the Subjunctive is used as a 
Conjunction in clauses of Purpose, especially with Com- 
paratives, as: 

ager aratur, quo meliores fruc- the field is plowed that it may 
tus edere posslt yield better fruit. 

764. quomlnus (= ut eo minus, that thereby the 

less), that not, with the Subjunctive is used with verbs 

of Hindering, such as: 

impedTre, to hinder obstarS, to be in the way 

deter r6rS, to frighten off obsistere, to oppose 

prohlbere, to keep from recusare, *o refuse 



— 224 — 

paors non deterret sapientem, death does not deter a wise man 
quominus in omne tempus rei from consulting the interest 
publicae consulat of the state the whole time. 

aetas non imp edit, quominus age does not hinder our retain- 
agri colendi studia teneamus ing interest in agriculture. 

Instead of quominus, we may use ne, and when the principal 
clause is negative, quin: 

Eegulus ne sententiam dieeret Eegulus refused to pronounce 
recusavit an opinion 

765. quin (= qui 5 how, and ne, not), that not, with 

the Subjunctive is used only after negative clauses or 

such questions as expect a negative answer. It is 

equivalent 

to qui non, quod non, but, as: 
nemo est, quin hoc videat there is no one but sees this; 

to ut n5n, but, as not, as: 
nemo est tarn fortis, quin rei no one is so brave as not to be 
novitate perturbetur confounded by the newness 

of a thing. 

766. quin is used in the sense of that not or that after Negative 
Expressions implying doubt, omission and the like; such are: 

non dubito, / do not doubt 

non est dubium, there is no doubt 

quis dubitet? who can doubt? 

non multum abest, there is not much wanting 

nihil abest, there is nothing wanting 

nihil praetermitto ) JomU wm 

nihil mtermitto ) 

temperare mihi non possum, I cannot restrain myself 

vix me contineo, / hardly refrain from 

retineri non possum, / cannot be restrained 

facere non possum quin, / cannot help 

fieri non potest quin, it cannot happen but that 

quis dubitet, quin in virttite di- who can doubt that wealth con- 

vitiae sint? sists in virtue? 

non multum afuit, quin interfice- / was not far from being 

rer Tcilled* [255, 256.] 



— 225 — 

Concessive and Comparative Conjunctions, 

767. Concessive Conjunctions express a Concession, 

with the general signification although, granting that. 

These are: etsi, Stiamsi, tametsi, quamquam, although 

quamvis (quantumvls), however much, however 
licSt, iit, cum, though, suppose, whereas. 

768. Of these, licet (properly a verb) exclusively, and quam- 
vis usually, take the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, as: 

licet superbus arnbiiles pecunia, although you may strut about 
fortuna non mutat genus proud of your purse, fortune 

changes not birth 
vitia mentis, quamvis exigua defects of the mind, no matter 
sint, in majus excedunt how slight they be, go on in- 

creasing. 

769. cum, whereas, since; iit, granted that; ne, granted that 
not (see 756. III.) take the Subjunctive. 

Phocion fuit perpetuo pauper, Phocion was constantly poor, 
cum divitisslmus esse posset though he could be very rich. 

770. Stiamsi takes the Indicative to denote real concessions, 
and the Subjunctive to denote such as are merely conceived in the 
mind, as: 

ista Veritas, etiamsi jucunda non that truth, although it is not 
est, mihi tamen grata est agreeable, is nevertheless 

acceptable to me 

vita brevis est, etiamsi supra life is short, although it should 
centum annos duret last over 100 years. 

771. etsi, tametsi and quamquam regularly take the In- 
dicative (unless otherwise required by the connection, as: 

viri boni recte agunt, etsi nul- good men do right, though they 
lum consecutfirum emolumen- see no profit about to result 
turn vident 

quamquam omnis virtus nos ad though all excellence attracts us 
se allicit, tamen justitia et to itself, yet justice and liber- 
liberalitas id maxime efficit ality do this most. 

772. The Conjunctions of Comparison 
tamquam, quasi (veltit si, ut si, proinde ac si), as if, 

take the Subjunctive. 



_ 226 — 

The Tenses follow the general rule of Sequence {743)] accord- 
ingly the Present and Perfect Subjunctive are sometimes used 
where the English idiom would suggest the Imperfect, as: 
superbi saepe ita se gerunt, haughty people often behave as 
quasi ipsi soli sint homines if they alone were men. 

The Particles of Comparison: ut, sicut, quemadmodum, as, 
usually referring to ita, sic, so, take the Indicative: 
ut sementem feceris, ita metesj as you sow, so shall you reap. 

[255. 256.1 

Temporal Conjunctions. 

773. As a rule, Temporal Clauses take the Indicative; 
they are introduced by the following Conjunctions: 

postquam, after that, after ciim, when 

?V as , f m „ \ while, until 

ubi, when donee) 

simulac ) as S0Qn as quoad, up to 

simulatque ) quamdiii, as long as 

fitprfmum ) the first moment antequam \ Worethatbefore 

cum primum ) that (see 737) priusquam J 

774. Temporal cum, meaning when, at the time when, takes 
the Indicative of all the tenses, as : 

ager cum multos annos quievit, when a field lias rested many 
uberiores efferre fructus solet years, it usually produces a 

more abundant crop 

oracula Graeci consulebant, cum the Greeks consulted the oracles 
bella erant inituri when they were to begin war. 

775. Historical cum, meaning when, as, takes the Imperfect and 
Pluperfect Subjunctive. 

Agesilaus cum ex Aegypto re- Agesilaus died as he was re- 

verteretur, mortuus est turning from Egypt 

cum Caesar Anconam occupas- when Caesar had occupied An- 

set, urbem reliquimus cona, we left the city. 

776. dum, quoad and donSc (= quamdiu), so long as, while, 
take the Indicative of all the tenses ; in narrative diim, while, takes 
the Present Indicative. (734) 

dum spiro, spero while there is life, there is hope 

quoad potuit, restitit as long as he could, he withstood 

haec dum aguntur, domi res while this was going on, affairs 

quietae erant were quiet at home. 



— 227 — 

777. dum, quoad, donSc, until, take the Present, Perfect and 
Future Perfect Indicative when a, fact is to be expressed, as: 

haud desinam, donee perfecero / will not cease, until I shall 

have accomplished. 

778. dum, qudad, until, implying purpose, doubt or futurity, 
take the Subjunctive: 

Alexander paulisper exercitum Alexander ordered the army to 
consistere jussit, donee consi- halt a short time, until the 
deret pulvis dust should be down. 

779. antequ&m and priusquam, before, have in narration 
the same construction as historical cum or postquam, viz. either the 
Subjunotive of the Imperfect and Pluperfect, or the Perfect Indica- 
tive, as: 

Achaei non ante ausi sunt bel- the Achaeans did not dare to 

lum capessere quam ab Roma begin the war before the am- 

revertissent legati bassadors had returned from 

Borne 

antequam bellum urbis nostrae before war consumed the wealth 

opes absumpsit, potentissima of our city it was very pow- 

fuit erful. 

780. In reference to Future Time, these conjunctions take the 
Present and Future Perfect Indicative, also the Present Subjunctive, as: 

tempestas minatur, antequam the storm threatens before it 

surgat rises 

ante revertar quam luna bis ini- / will return before the moon 

pleverit orbem has twice filled her orb. 

{257. 258.] 

Causal Conjunctions. 

781. The following Causal Conjunctions take the 
Indicative: 



y because quandoquldem V ■ U 



quoniam \ 

quodi quandoquldgm^ ft ^ 

H siquidem ) 

quoniam jam nox est, in vestra since it is now night, go to your 

tecta discedite houses 

quia natura mutari non potest, because nature cannot change, 

idcirco verae amicitiae aeter- therefore true friendships 

nae sunt are everlasting. 



— 228 — 

782. The Subjunctive is used in causal clauses when a statement 
is made not as a fact, but as the assertion or opinion of some one 
else, as: 

Socrates accusatus est, quod Socrates was brought to trial 
eorrumperet juventutem because (as they said) he cor- 

rupted youth. 

783. After those verbs which express the feeling of joy, grief, 
etc., as: gaudere, to rejoice; gratiam agere, to thank; dolere, to grieve; 
gloriarl, to boast, quod is used to give the ground of emotion, as: 

quod scribis, gaudeo / am glad that you write 

tibi gratias ago, quod me omni jf thank you that you free me 
molestia liberas from all trouble. 

784. quSd, that, is also used to introduce explanatory clauses, 
chiefly after a Demonstrative : 

bene facis, quod me adjiivas you do well in assisting me 

quod Begiilus rediit mihi mira- that Eegulus returned seems 
bile videtur wonderful to me. 

785. At the beginning of a sentence, quod is used in the sense 
of as to, especially in letters, as: 

quod de domo scribis. . , as to what you write of the house. . 

non quod, non quo, not as if and non quin, not as if not, 
take the Subjunctive, as: 

pugiles ingemiscunt, non quod boxers groan not as if they 
doleant, sed quod omne cor- were in pain, but because all 
pus intenditur the body is put to the stretch. 

786. Causal cum, as, since, takes the Subjunctive. 

cum vita sine amicis insiciiarum since life without friends is full 
et metus plena sit, ratio ipsa of treachery and fear, reason 
monet amicitias comparare itself advises us to contract 

friendships. 1259. 260.] 

Conditional Conjunctions. 

787. In a Conditional Sentence the clause containing 
the condition is called the Protasis, and that con- 
taining the conclusion the Apodosis. 

Protasis, si bovem non possis, if you cannot drive an q%, 
Apodosis. asinum agas drive a donkey, 



— 229 — 

The Protasis is regularly introduced by the conditional particle 
si, if, or one of its compounds, viz: 

nisi, unless sin, if not, but if 

si non, if not quodsl, but if. 

788. There are Three Classes of Conditional Sen- 
tences: 

I. The condition is represented as a fact: si with the Indicative 
in both clauses: 

si Deus est, aeternus est if there is a God, lie is eternal. 

II. The condition is represented as possible or likely to be real- 
ized: si with Present or Perfect Subjunctive: 

si quia ita agat, imprudens sit if anybody were to act thus, he 

would not be wise. 

III. The condition is represented as contrary to fact: si with 
Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive: 

facerem, si posseni I should do it if I could. 

789. nisi and si non are used for negative conditions; with 
nisi the negative belongs to the whole sentence, with si non to a 
particular word, as: 

nisi id confestim facis, tetradam unless you do this at once 1 
magistratui shall deliver you to the ma- 

gistrate 

•doloreni si non potero trangere, if I shall not be able to over- 
occultabo come sorrow, I will conceal it. 

790. The Subjunctive is used in Conditional Wishes 

with: 

dummodo \ dummodo ne ) 

diim t if only, provided dum nS > provided only not 

modo j modone ) 

oderint, dum metuant let them hate if they only fear 

Athenienses summas laudes me- the Athenians deserve the high- 
" rentur, dummodo ne tarn leves est praise if only they had 
fuissent not been so wanton. 

si modo, if only, provided that, requires the Indicative. 

[261. 262.] 



— 230 — 

Relative Clauses with the Subjunctive. 

791. As a rule, the Relative Clause is in the In- 
dicative when a definite fact is stated: 

planta, quae saeplus transfer- a tree often transplanted does 
tur, non coalescit not thrive. 

792. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses: 

I. to denote purpose or motive; qui = ut eg-5, tit tu ; lit is, etc. 
missi sunt delecti cum Leonida, picked men were sent with 

qui Thermopylas occuparent Leonidas to take possession 

of Thermopylae. 

II. to denote the cause, on account of which or the hindrance in 
spite of which; qui = cum Sg-o, cum tii, cum is, etc. (often with 
ut, iitpote, as; quippe, namely). 

o virum simplicem, qui nos nihil guileless man who hidest 
celet ! n othing from us I 

III. to denote result or to indicate a characteristic of the antecedent, 
sometimes in a restrictive sense, as: 

non is sum, qui hoc faciam lam not such a one as to do this 

orationes Catonis, quas quidem Cato's speeches as far as I have 
legerim read them. 

793. The construction of the Consecutive or Characteristic Eelative 

is especially common: 

a. after is, talis, ejusmocli, tantus, tarn with an Adjective 
or Adverb, solus and uniis : 

est innocentia affectio talis animi, quae noceat nemmi, innocence 
is such a quality of mind as to do harm to no one. 

b. after general expressions of existence and non-existence, as: 

est qui \ there is, there are habeo quod, i" have to 

sunt qui f some who reperiuntur qui, persons are 

nemo est qui, there is none to found who 

nihil est quod, there is nothing 

sunt qui censeant una animum cum corpore interire, there are 
some who believe that the soul perishes together with the body. 

c. after diguus, indigniis, idoneiis, aptus: 

indignus es, cui fides habeatur, you are unworthy of being believed,. 



— 231 — 

794. A clause joined to another by a Relative, takes the 
Subjunctive, when it contains not the sentiment of the writer, but of 
some other person alluded to, as: 

Paetus omnes libros, quos frater Paetus presented to me all the 
suus reliquisset, mini donavit hooks that his brother had left. 

795. Comparatives may be followed by quam lit, quam qui 
with the Subjunctive, corresponding to the English too. .to, as: 

damna majora sunt quam quae the losses are too great to be 
aestimari possint estimated. 

[263. 264.] 

Direct Questions. 

796. Questions in Latin are introduced by Inter- 
rogative Pronouns, Adverbs or Particles. 

Interrogative Pronouns, 
qtiis? quid? who? what? quisnam? quidnam? ivho, what pray? 
qui? quae? quod? which? 
iiter? utra? utrurn? which of the two? 
quails? quale? of what kind? 
quantus? quanta? quantum? how great? 
quotus? quota? quotum? what? (in number or order) 
quotusquisqug? quotaquaeque? quotumquodque? how few? 
quot? how many? 

Interrogative Adverbs, 
ubt? where? iibmam? where pray? 

unde? ivhence? undenam? whence pray? 

quo? whither? quonam? whither pray ? 

qua? where? which way? quanam? which way pro.y? 

quando? when? quamdm? ) ]ww x 

quotiens? how often? quousque? 1 

quomodo? \ ^ ? quam? (only before Adjectives and 

quemadmodum? ) Adverbs) how? how much? 

cur? ) quantopere? (only before Verbs) 

quare? >- why? what for? how greatly? how much? 

quam ob rem? ) quidni? cur non? why not? 

797. The Interrogative Particles are: 

ne, niim, nonne, utruni, an. 

Of these ne asks merely for information: it cannot stand by 
itself, but is joined to any emphatic word, usually the verb, which 
then comes first in the sentence ; it is not translated, as: 
omnisne pecunla debita soliita est? is all the money owing paid? 



— 232 — 

When a negative answer is expected, nuiii is used, which stands 
at the beginning of the sentence and is likewise not translated, as: 
num vespertilio avis est? Is the bat a bird? 

With non, ne forms a special interrogative particle nonne, 
not; the answer expected is yes, as: 
nonne lectio hujus libri te de- does not the perusal of this 
lectat? book delight you? 

798. Double or Alternative questions have the fol- 
lowing forms: 

utrum, whether . . an, or. . 

ne, " .. an u . . 

, " .. an " .. 

have you been at home or in 
school? 



utrum domi fuisti an in schola? 
domlne fuisti an in schola? 
domi fuisti an in schola? 



Sometimes the first part of an alternative question is omitted or 
implied, and an alone asks a question, as: 
an nescis regibus longas esse or perhaps do you not know 
manus? that kings have long arms? 

In Direct questions or not is annon; in Indirect necne. 
utrum domi fuisti annon? have you been at home or not? 

QUESTION and ANSWER 

799. In answering a question the emphatic word is generally 
repeated, as: 
vidistine eum? did you see him? vidi, yes, I did. 
solusne venisti? did you come alone? non solus, no, I did not 
The following Responsives are also used in answer to a direct 
question: 

yes no 

ita, so non ita, no, not so 

ita est, so it is mtnime, by no means 

ita vero est, so it is indeed minime vero, by no means in- 

sane, of course deed 

sane quidem, yes, indeed nihil minus, nothing less so 

Stiam, even so neutiquam, not at all. 

vero, truly, in truth 



— 233 — 

800. immo, as a negative, substitutes something stronger in 
the place of a previous statement, as: 

causa igitur non bona est? Im- the cause, then, is a bad one? 

mo optima Nay, it is an excellent one 

num ille tibi familiaris est? Im- is he a friend of yours? On the 

mo alienissimus contrary, a perfect stranger. 

[265. 266.] 

Indirect Questions. 

801. The Subjunctive is used in such questions as 
are dependent upon some word in the former part of 
the sentence (Indirect Questions). 

The words: ubi fuisti? where have you been? 
are a Direct Question, with the verb in the Indicative; in the sentence: 

die mihi ubi fueris, tell me where you have been, 
the same words are an Indirect Question, and the dependent verb is in 
the Subjunctive Mood, 
qualis sit animus ipse animus the mind itself knows not what 

nescit the mind is 

quis ego sim me rogitas? do you ask me who lam? 

802. Indirect Questions have the same particles as the direct, 
num and ne, corresponding to whether in English; si, if, is used 
for whether after tentare, experiri, to try, and exspectare, to expect. 

Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne Epaminondas asked whether 
esset clipSus his shield was safe 

paludem si nostri transirent the enemy were waiting (to see) 
hostes exspectabant whether our men would cross 

the swamp. 

803. INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 

quaero utrum verum an falsum sit \ 

quaero verumne an falsum sit f I ask whether it is true or 
quaero verum an falsum sit f false 

quaero verum falsumne sit ' 

When the interrogative particle is omitted in the first member, 
ne may stand in the second, but only in Indirect Questions. 

or not in Indirect Questions is necne, as: dii utrum sint, necne 
eint, quaerltur, the question is whether there are gods or not. 

[267, 268.1 



— 234 — 

The Imperative. 

804. The Imperative is used to express a command, 
wish, advice or exhortation. 

The Present Imperative denotes that an action is to be performed 
at once, or to be continued if actually being performed, as: 
si quid in te peccavi, ignosce if I have sinned against you, 

forgive me 
justitiam cole et pietatem cultivate justice and piety. 

The Future Imperative is used where there is a direct reference to 

future time; it corresponds to the imperative use of the English 

Future with shall or to the Imperative let, and is properly used in 

general directions, laws, statutes and wills, as: 

regio imperio duo sunto, consu- there shall be two officers with 

les appellantor * royal power] they shall be 

called consuls. 

805. The regular negative of the Imperative is ne, which is, 
however, in classical Latin only found with the Future Imperative, as: 

hominem mortuum, inquit lex, thou shalt not bury a dead man 
in urbe ne sepelito in the city, says the law. 

In prohibitions instead of the Negative Imperative the following 
forms of the Subjunctive with ne are usually employed: 
the second person of the Perfect Subjunctive, as: 

hoc nS feceris, leave that undone; 
the third person of the Present Subjunctive : 

puer telum ne habeat, a boy is not to have a weapon. 

806. Instead of the Simple Imperative several Imperative 
Phrases are common: 

cura iit, take care that } 

fac ut, cause that > each with the Subjunctive. 

fac, do ) 

cura ut quam primum venias, come as soon as possible; 
valetudlnem tuam fac ut cures, take care of your health. 

cave ne, beware lest ) each with the Subjunctive . 

cave, beware S 

noli, be unwilling, with the Infinitive, 
cave festmes, do not be in a hurry; cave existimes, do not think; 
noli me tangere, do not touch me; noli putare, do not suppose. 

[269, 270.1 



— 235 — 

The Infinitive. 

807. The Infinitive is not limited to a particular 
number or person, as the ordinary verbal forms, but 
is really a Verbal Noun. 

The Infinitive governs the case of its verb, and is modified by 
adverbs and not by adjectives, as: 

legere libruin, the reading of a book; 

diligenter legere librum, the careful reading of a book. 

808. The Infinitive may be used as the Subject of 

a verb. 

As such it is chiefly found with esse and impersonal verbs: 
nunquam est utile peccare to do wrong is never useful 

interest omnium recte facere it is the interest of all to do right. 

When the verb esse, to be (or others of similar meaning, see 
54:0) with an Adjective or Noun is used as the Subject of the sentence, 
such Adjective or Noun is put in the Accusative; as: senem ante 
tempus fiSri miserum est, it is miserable to grow old before the time. 

809. The Infinitive is used as the Object of verbs. 
Such are verbs denoting: 

to be able, must, dare, posse, debere, audere 

to begin, continue, cease, incipere, pergere, desingre 

to be accustomed, learn, know how, assuescere, discere, scire 

to wish, desire, resolve, velle, cupere, statuere. 

vincere scis, Hannibal, victoria uti nescis, how to win victory you 
know, Hannibal; how to make use of victory you know not. 

When the verb esse, to be (or others of similar meaning, see 
540) with an Adjective or Noun is used as the Object of a verb, 
such Adjective or Noun is put in the Nominative, as: beatus esse 
sine virttite nemo potest, no one can be happy without virtue. 

The Infinitive of the Present is often used for the tenses of the 
Indicative in lively narration, and takes the Subject in the Nomina- 
tive (Historical Infinitive.) 

pars cedere, alii insequi, neque a part give way, others press 
signa neque ordines servare on, they hold neither to stand- 

aids nor ranks. [27l ^ 272 ^ 



— 236 



Accusative with the Infinitive. 

8io. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used like 
the English Objective with the Infinitive in such sen- 
tences as: hoc verum esse scimus, we know this to be true. 

In English we might also say: We know that this is true; but 
Latin permits only of the Infinitive Construction. 

811. The Accusative with the Infinitive may be the 
Subject of the sentence. The Predicate is either a 
noun or an adjective with est, or an impersonal verb. 
The most common phrases under this rule are: 



par est, it is fair 
justiim est, it is just 
certum est, it is certain 
crediblle est, it is credible 
fas est, it is right 
nefas est, it is forbidden 
fama est, the story goes 
opinio est, there is a report 
spes est, there is hope 



oportet, there is need, ought 
apparet, it is clear 
constat, it is agreed, evident 
condiiclt, expedit, it is useful 
convenit, it is fitting 
placet, it pleases 
displicet, it displeases 
necesse est, it must needs 
opus est, there is need 



me scribere oportet, I must write or I ought to write 
certum est liberos amari, it is certain that children are loved. 

812. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used as 
the Object of verbs of Perceiving and Declaring: 



Verba sentiendi: 
sentire, to perceive, notice 
animadvertere, to see 
audire, to hear 
videre, to see 
accipere, to hear 
comperire, to ascertain 
cognoscere, to know 
intellegere, to learn 
cogitare, to think 
arbitrary credere, to believe 



Verba declarandi: 
declarare, to declare 
dicere, to say 
negare, to deny 
affirmare, to affirm 
respondSre, to answer 
scribere, to write 
faterl, to confess 
demonstrate, to prove 
narrare, to tell 
nuntiare, to bring wore 



aves videmus construere nidos, we see that birds build nests; 
nemo negabit se esse mortalem, no one will deny that he is mortal 



— 23? — 

813. Verbs of Perceiving take the Ace. with the Pres. Participle 
to represent the object as actually seen, heard, etc., as: Catonem 
vidi in bibliotheca sedentem, / saw Gato sitting in the library. 

814. Verbs of Wishing and Desiring take a depen- 
dent Accusative with the Infinitive, Such are: 

volo, / wish ciipio, I desire slno, I permit 

nolo, I do not wish jubeo, Ibid patior, I suffer 

malo, I like better veto, I forbid 

discipulum me haberi volo, non I wish to be taken for a learner, 

doctorem not for a teacher 

Caesar pontem jubet rescindi Caesar orders the bridge to be 

broken down. 
These verbs may take the simple Infinitive when the subject 
remains the same. Instead of the Accusative with the Infinitive, 
ut with the Subjunctive is frequently used with this class of verbs 
(758); but never with nolo, and seldom with volo and malo; jubeo 
and veto regularly take the Accusative with the Infinitive. 

815. Verbs of Emotion, as: gaudere, to rejoice, gratiam agerS, 
to thank, dolerg, to grieve (see 783) may be considered as verbs of 
saying and thinking and, as such, take an Accusative with Infinitive, as: 

salvum te advenisse gaudeo, / rejoice that you have arrived safe. 

816. To translate such clauses as are introduced 

in English by the conjunction that, and require in 

Latin the Accusative with the Infinitive, 
take no notice of that; 

translate the English Nominative following that by the Latin Accusative; 
translate the English Verb by the Latin Infinitive. 

817. A Predicate Noun or Adjective and the Par- 
ticiples of the Compound Infinitives must agree with 
the Accusative -Subject; but, of course, the Supine 
remains unaltered. 

sentio boreain frigidum esse I feel that the north-wind is cold 

medici causa morbi inventa cu- physicians think that when the 

rationem esse inventam pu- cause of disease is discovered, 

tant the cure has been discovered. 

[273. 274.] 



— 238 — 

Tenses of the Infinitive. 

818. After Verbs of Perceiving and Declaring 

(verba sentiendi et declarandi) 

the Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action, 
the Perfect Infinitive expresses antecedent action, 
the Future Infinitive expresses future action. 

Present Infinitive. 
I. credo eum scribere / believe that he is writing 

II. credebam eum scribSre / believed that he was writing. 

Perfect Infinitive. 
I. credo eum scripsisse I believe that he has written 

II, credebam eum scripsisse I believed that he had written. 

Future Infinitive. 
I. credo eum scripturum esse / believe that he will write 

II. credebam eum scripturum esse / believed that he would write, 

I. After a Principal Tense translate: 
the Infinitive like the Indicative of the same tense. 

II. After a Historical Tense translate: 
the Infinitive Present like the Indicative Imperfect 
the Infinitive Perfect " Indicative Pluperfect 
the Infinitive Future " Subjunctive Imperfect (should and would). 

819. The Future Infinitive is often expressed by fore or fQturum 
esse ut — necessarily so when the verb has no Supine, as: 

credo fore ut pluat I believe it will rain 

credebam fore ut plueret I believed it would rain. 

820. The Personal Pronouns, which are in general used only for 
the sake of distinction or emphasis, must be always expressed in 
the Accusative with Infinitive. For the Pronouns of the third person 
the Eeflexive se is used in reference to the subject of the Principal 
Clause, and the Demonstratives eHm, earn, eos, eas when referring 
to another noun. 

nemo tarn senex est qui se an- no one is so old but thinks he 
num non putet posse vivere can live another year 

Ennius deos esse censet, sed Ennius believes thyt there are 
eos non curare opinatur, quid gods, but he does not think 
agat humanum genus they care what mankind are 

doing. 

{275. 276'.] 



— 239 — 

Nominative with the Infinitive. 

821. With Passive Verbs of Perceiving and De- 
claring, instead of the Infinitive with the Accusative 
a personal construction . is more common by which 
the Subject Accusative becomes the Subject Nominative 
of the leading verb: Nominative with the Infinitive. 

Accus. with Inf. tradunt Homerum caecum fuisse, they say that Ho- 
mer was blind 

Nomin. with Inf. HomSrus caecus fuisse traditur, Homer is said to 
have been blind. 

822. Especially to be noted is the construction of the Nominative 
with the Infinitive after: 

jubeo, I order sino, I permit 

veto, I forbid videor, I seem 

consules jubentur exercltum the consuls are ordered to levy 

scribere an army 

omnibus videmur recte fecisse, it seems to all that we did right 

quod amlci causam defender!- in defending the cause of our 

mus friend. [277. 278.] 

Direct Discourse. 

823. A Statement which gives the exact words of 
the original speaker or writer is called o r a 1 1 o recta, 
or Direct Discourse. 

inquani, quoth I, is used in direct quotations, ajo, I say, in 
indirect quotations, inquam always follows one or more of the words 
quoted. When a nominative is added to inquit, it commonly follows 
this verb: uva, inquit vulpes, nondum matura est, the grape is not 
yet ripe, says the fox [279. 280.} 

Indirect Discourse. 

824. An Indirect Quotation expresses a thought in- 
directly, as reported, recognized or contemplated by 
some one: oratio obllqua. 



— 240 — 

Oratio recti. Oratio obliqua. 

Socrates dicere solebat: "omnes Socrates dicere solebat, omnes 

in eo quod sciunt satis sunt in eo quod scirent, satis 

eloquentes," Socrates used to esse eloquentes ; Socrates 

say: u All men are eloquent used to say that all men were 

enough in what they under- eloquent enough in what they 

stand. 11 understood. 

825. In Indirect Discourse the Verb of the Principal 
Clause is in the Infinitive and its Subject in the Accu- 
sative; Dependent Clauses connected with it by Rela- 
tives and Particles take the Subjunctive. 

Interrogative Sentences are put in the Subjunctive according to 801. 

Ariovistus ad postulata Caesaris Ariovistus gave a brief answer 

pauca respondit : quid sibi to Caesar's demands : what 

vellet? cur in suas posses- did he mean? why did he 

siones venlret? come into his possessions? 

Imperative Sentences are put in the Subjunctive ; the negative is, of 

course, ne. 

raandata remittunt, quorum haec they sent back orders of which 

erat summa : Caesar in Gal- the substance was as follows: 

Ham reverteretur, exercitus Caesar should return into 

dimitteret ' Gaul and disband his armies. 

826. A Clause depending upon a Subjunctive or In- 
finitive takes the Subjunctive if it is regarded as an 

integral part of that clause. This is called Attraction 
of Mood. 

mos est Athenis laudari in con- it is custom at Athens for those 
done eos, qui sint in proelii3 to be publicly eulogized who 
interfecti have been slain in battle. 

827. The Subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses to express 
the thought of some other person than the speaker or writer • 

quos viceris, amlcos tibi esse do not believe that those whom 
cave credas you have conquered are your 

friends. 

828. All references to the Subject of the leading clause are re- 
gularly expressed by the Reflexive sui (stius) ; as: animus sentit se 
sua vi moveri, the mind feels that it moves by its own force. 

1281. 282.\ 



— 241 — 

Participles. 

829. There are two Participles in the Active Voice: 
the Present Participle denotes continuance, as: scribens, writing; 
the Future Participle is used to express what is likely or about to 

happen, as: scripturus, about to write. 

830. There are two Participles in the Passive 

Voice : 

the Perfect Participle denotes completion^ as: seriptus, written; 
the Gerundive (so-called Future Participle) denotes necessity or pro- 
priety, as: scribendus, to be written. 

831. Deponent Verbs have four Participles: 

the Present Participle, as: hortans, exhorting; 
the Perfect Participle, as: hortatus, having exhorted; 
the Fut. Part. Act., as: hortaturiis, being about to exhort; 
the Fut. Part. Pass., as: hortandiis, to be exhorted. 

832. The Participles are used attributively, or in 

the manner of ordinary Adjectives, as: 

arbor florens, a blossoming tree ecripta epistula, a written letter 
puer dormiens, a sleeping boy urbs obsessa, a besieged town. 

833. The Participles are used with the utmost 
freedom appositively, and may have the value 

of a Relative, as: divitiae semper duraturae, riches which will 

last forever; 
of while, ivhen, after, as: Plato scribens rnortuus est, Plato 

died while writing; 
of if, as : mendaci homini ne verum quidem dicenti credimus, 

we do not believe a liar, even if he speaks the truth; 
of since, because, as: cantus olorlnus recte fabulosus habetur 

nunquam audltus, the swan's song is justly regarded as 

fabulous, because it has never been heard; 
of though, although, as : oculus se non videns alia cernit, 

the eye, though not seeing itself, sees other things; 
of to, in order to (expressing a purpose), as: ScipTo in Africam 

trajScit Carthaglnem dele turns, Scipio crossed over into 

Africa to destroy Carthage. 



— 242 — 

834. The Participle with a negative, as non, nihil 

is often best rendered 
by without and a Participial Noun, as: raulti homines vitupe- 
rant libros non intellectos, many men find fault with books 
without understanding them. 

835. Verbs of Perceiving take the Accusative with the Present 
Participle, when the object is to be represented as actually seen, 
heard, etc.; also: facere, inducere, to represent, introduce (see 
8 13) , as: 

vidi pueros iudentes I saw the boys playing 

Xenophon facit Socratem dispu- Xenophon represents Socrates 
tantem disputing. 

[195. 196. 283-286.] 

Ablative Absolute. 

836. A Noun or Pronoun with a Participle is used 
in the Ablative Case absolutely to express some accom- 
panying circumstance or condition of the action. 

The Ablative Absolute may be translated by the English Nominative 
Absolute which is a close equivalent; but, as a rule, the same 
change of form is required as in translating Participles in general 
(see 833). Examples are: 
Numa Pompillo regnante. Numa Pompilius reigning. When Nu- 
ma Pompilius was reigning. In the reign of Numa Pomjnlius. 
Tito imperante. In the reign of the emperor Titus. 
Caesare interfecto. Caesar being, having been murdered. When 

Caesar had been murdered. After the murder of Caesar. 
Another Ablative should not be placed in apposition with the abla- 
tive absolute. Thus we may say: puero mortuo, the boy having died; 
but not: Gaio puero mortuo, the boy Gaius having died; this should 
be expressed by: cum Gaius puer mortuus esset. The ablative ab- 
solute with the Future Participle is also avoided by the classic authors. 

An Adjective, or another Noun may take the place of the Parti- 
ciple, as: 
Xerxe rege. Xerxes being king. 

natfira duce JVa^re being the leader. Under the guidance of nature. 
nolentibus nobis. While we are unwilling. Against our will. 

In spite of us. 
patre invito. While father is, was unwilling. Against father's will. 



— 243 — 

837. The want of a Perfect Active Participle in 
Latin is frequently supplied by the Ablative Ab- 
solute with a Perfect Passive Participle, thus: 

Caesar, urbe capta, rediit \ V xe ci ^ being taken, Caesar returned. 

( Having taken the city, Caesar returned. 

[197. 198. 287. 288.] 

Gerund. 

838. As the Infinitive is used as a Verbal Noun in 
the Nominative and Accusative Cases, so the Gerund, 
corresponding to the English participial noun in ing, 
is used in the remaining cases, viz.: 



writing 



as the 

verb: ars scribendi epistiilam the art of writing a letter 

cupidus te audiendi desirous of hearing you 

injurias ferendo by bearing wrongs 

ad beate vivendum for living happily 

parendo legibus by obeying the laws. 

Gerundive. 

840. The Gerundive, in its adjective use, denotes 

'necessity or propriety. 

Its most frequent use is with esse in the Passive Periphrastic Con- 
jugation (see 314:). The neuter of the Gerundive with est, erat, 
etc., is used impersonally if what is said holds good of people in 
general, as: vivendum est, we or you must live. 

But the person by whom may also be added in the Dative, thus: 
miki scribendum est, I must or should write 
tibi scribendum est, thou must or shouldst write 
ei scribendum est, he must or should write 
nobis scribendum est, we must or should write 
vobis scribendum est, you must or should write 
eis scribendum est, they must or should write. 



Nom. 


scribere est utile 


writing is useful 


Gen. 


ars scribendi 


the art of writing 


Dat. 


scribendo adfui 


I was present at the 


Ace. 


scribere disco 


I learn to write 




ad scribendum utHis 


useful for writing 


Abl. 


scribendo discimus 


we learn by writing, 


839 


. The Gerund g 


overns the same cas 



— 244 — 

841. The Gerundive is used as an Objective Predi- 
cate to denote Purpose after verbs signifying to give, 
take, send, leave, as: 

curare, to take care accipSre, to receive 

dare, to give permittere, to permit 

relinquere, to leave locare, to let, lease 

mittere, to send conducgre, to contract for 

diviti homini id aurum servan- he gave that gold to a rich man 
dum dedit to keep. 

842. The Gerundive of verbs governing the accu- 
sative is frequently used instead of the Gerund in 
the following manner: 

The Accusative is put in the same Case as the Gerund; 
The Gerund is then changed into the Gerundive; 
The Gerundive is made to agree with the Substantive in Gender, 
Number and Case; thus: 

Gerund. Gerundive. 

Gen. scribendi epistulam scribendae epistiilae 

Dat. scribendo epistulam scribendae epistiilae 

Ace. ad scribendum epistulam ad scribendam epistulam 

Abl. scribendo epistulam scribenda epistula. 

• 843. The Genitive of the Gerund or Gerundive is 

used with nouns and adjectives, as: 

ars Vivendi, the art of living equitandi peritus, skillful in riding 
consilium urbis delendae, a civitatis regendae peritus, skilU 
plan for destroying the city ful in governing the state. 

Very common are causa and gratia, on account of for the 
sake of, for the purpose of with the Genitive of Gerund and Gerun- 
dive to point out design or purpose, as: 
memoriae exercendae gratia, for the sake of exercising the memory. 

844. The Dative of the Gerund or Gerundive is 
used with adjectives of fitness and their opposite^: 
Mills, -e, useful, good aptfis, -a, -iim, adapted, suited 
InutHis, -S, useless, unfit IdOnSiis, -a, -urn, fit % suitable 



— 245 — 

to denote the object for which; but the more common 
construction of these adjectives is that of the Ac- 
cusative with ad, to, thus : 

aqua utilis bibendo, water good for drinking, 

charta inutilis ad scribendum, paper unfit to write upon. 

845. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive 
is most frequently used after ad, to, denoting pur- 
pose, as: 

ad colendos agros, for cultivating the fields; 

me vocas ad scribendum, you summon me to write; 

propensus ad discendum, inclined to learn. 

846. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive 

is used as Ablative of means or instrument, and most 

frequently after the preposition in, in, as: 

mens discendo alltur, the mind is nourished by learning 
moderatio in jocando, restraint in joking. 

[199. 200. 289-292.} 

Supine. 

847. The Supines are verbal nouns of the Fourth 
Declension, having only the accusative and ablative 
singular, as: amatum, amatu, to love. 

The Former Supine (in urn) is used after verbs of motion to ex- 
press the purpose of the motion; it has an active meaning, as: 
venlo te rogatum / come to ask you. 

With the passive infinitive Iri (lit. to be gone) the Supine in Qm 
forms the Future Infinitive Passive, amatum Iri, to be about to be loved 
{315). 

The Latter Supine (in u) has a passive meaning-, it is used only 
with a few Adjectives denoting ease or difficulty, pleasure or dis- 
pleasure, right or wrong; with the nouns fas, right, nefas, wrong, 
sometimes with opus, need, as: 
quid est tarn jucundum audltu? what is so agreeable in hearing? 



— 246 — 

Equivalents of the Supine. 
848* The Former Supine, as an expression of purpose, is not very 
common, its place being supplied in various ways. Thus the sen- 
tence: 

The Carthaginians sent ambassadors to sue for peace, 
may be rendered: 
Supine. Carthaginienses legatos misSrunt pacem petitum. 

Q ™, w, JO. legatos miser unt ad pacem petendam. 
- ' j 0. legatos miser unt pacis petendae .causa. 

Fut. Part. C. legatos miserunt pacem petitiiros. 
ut w. Subj. C. legatos misSrunt, ut pacem peterent. 
qui w. Subj. C. legatos miserunt, qui pacem peterent. 

The use of the Latter Supine is confined to a few verbs, as: dictu, 
to tell; factu, to do; auclitu, to hear; visii, to see. With facilis, dif- 
ficilis, jucundfis, the construction of ad with the gerund is more 
common, as: res est facilis ad cognoscendum (cognitu), the thing is 
easy to know. [293. 294.] 

Co-ordinating Conjunctions. 
849. The following Particles are called Copulative 

Conjunctions: et, -que, at que (ac), and 
neque, and not 
etiam, quoque, also 
et is simply and, the most common and general copulative, and 
connects independent words and clauses without any additional 
meaning; -que, affixed to the word it annexes, combines things that 
belong closely to one another; atque adds a more important to a 
less important member. The following may serve as an example to 
illustrate the various usages: 

dies et noctes means days and nights, simply; 
dies noctesque " days and nights, as a whole; 
dies atque noctes " days and (also) nights. 

furem fur cognoscit, et lupus thief knows thief, and wolf 

lupum knows wolf 

dum vires annique sinunt, tole- work while your strength and 

rate laborem years permit you 

intra moenia atque in sinu urbis within the walls and even in 

sunt hostes the heart of the city are the 

enemies. 



— 247 — 

ac does not stand before a vowel or li ; atque either before 
vowels or consonants. They generally mean as, than, after adjectives 
and adverbs of likeness and unlikeness, as: aeque ac, as much as, 
equally as; seciis &c, aliter atque, otherwise than. 

etiam (lit. and farther) even, yet, still, adds a new circumstance, 
and generally precedes the words to which it belongs; quoque, so 
also, which refers only to a single word and follows that word, im- 
plies a sameness in the whole, as: 
etiam mendlcus mendico invidet even the beggar envies the beggar 
otla corpus alunt, animus quo- rest strengthens the body, the 
que pa-scltur illis mind, too, is thus supported. 

850. Several Subjects or Objects, standing in the 
same relations, 

either take et throughout: polysyndeton, i.e. joined in various ways; 

or omit it throughout: asyndeton, i. e. unconnected] 

or take que only after the last member, thus: 

summa fide et constant* et justitia j ^ ^ $( h con . 

summa fide, cons an m, jnstitia I and justice. 

summa fide, constantia, justitiaque ) 
et is used after multi followed by another adjective, where in 
English and is usually omitted; as: multae et magnae arbores, 
many large trees. 

851. In the second member of a sentence and not is expressed 
by neque, as: dicunt, neque dubitant, they say and do not doubt, 
Mark the following Idiomatic Expressions: 

and no one neque quisquam nor any one 

and no neque ullus nor any 

and nothing neque quidquam nor any thing 

and never neque unquam nor ever 

852. The following are Disjunctive Conjunctions: 

aut, vel, -ve. sive (sen), or. 

aut, or, denotes absolute exclusion or substitution, as: 
vinceris aut vincis, you are conquered or conquering. 
vel (lit. you may choose) gives a choice, often with etiam, even, 
potius, rather, as: 
hie populus indomitus vel potius this untamable or rather savage 
immanis people. 



— 248 — 

-vg, which is always affixed to another word, is only a weaker 
form of vel, as : plus minusve, more or less. 

sive (seu), if you choose, indicates merely an alternative of 
words, as: 
discessus sive potius turpissima the decampment, or rather the 
fuga most shameful flight 

[295. 296.] 

853. The following are Adversative Conjunctions: 
autem, sed, verum, vero, at, but 
atqui, but for all that 
tamen, nevertheless 
ceterum, for the rest 

The weakest of them all in adversative power is autem which is 
only used to connect sentences, and commonly follows the first word, 
spirltus promptus, caro autem the spirit is willing, but the 
infirma flesh is weak. 

sed has two meanings; after affirmative sentences it is equivalent 
to but (yet)] after negative sentences to but (on the contrary). 
homo proponit, sed Deus dispo- man proposeth, but God dis- 

nit poseth 

non opus est verbis, sed fustibus there is no need of words, but 

of knocks. 

verum, lit: it is true ) always takes the first place in the sen- 
tence; vero, lit: in truth, is generally put in the second place: 
verum praeterlta omittamus but let us lay aside past things 

iflud vero plane ferendum non but this, indeed, is not at all to 
est be suffered. 

at is stronger than sed ; and atqui, but for all that, is even 
stronger again: 

populus me sibilat, at mihi the mob may hiss me, but I 

plaudo congratulate myself 

o rem diffiellem, inquis, et in- a hard case, you say, and an 

explicabilem. Atqui expli- inexplicable one. And never- 

canda est theless it ought to be explained. 

tamen, yet, nevertheless, is the usual correlative of a concessive 
conjunction; generally it comes first unless a particular word is to 
be made emphatic: naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret, 
you may drive out nature with a pitchfork, for all that she will 
ever be returning. 



— 249 — 

854. The Causal Conjunctions are: 

nam, enini, namque, etenim, for 

n&m is always put at the beginning, enim always follows the 
first word of the sentence; namque and etenim are commonly 
put in the first place. 

855. The Illative Conjunctions are: 

lt&que, lgitiir, ergo, therefore 
ideo, idcirco, on that account 
proinde, accordingly 

lt&que is put at the beginning of the sentence and is used of 
facts; lgitiir follows one or more words in its clause, and is used 
of opinions; ergo, therefore, denotes necessary consequence and 
is more emphatic than igltur; it is put at the beginning of the sen- 
tence or after an emphatic word; proinde is only employed in ex- 
hortations: 
quot homines, tot sententiae; many men, many minds; there- 

falli igltur possunius fore we may be mistaken 

negat haec filiam me suam esse; she says that I am not her 
non ergo haec mater mea est daughter, therefore she is not 

my mother 
proinde fac magno ammo sis! accordingly, be of good cheer! 

856. neque is used for non with the conjunctions: enini, 
vero, tamen, lgitiir, thus- 

neque enim, for not neque vero, but not 

neque tamen, yet not neque igltur, therefore not. 

[297, 298.] 

Corresponsive Conjunctions. 

857. Some Conjunctions frequently have a Corre- 
lative in the preceding clause, to which they cor- 
respond. 

Copulative, 

et . . et, both . . and neque . . neque ) neUher . , nor 

cum . . turn, both . . and especially nee . . nee f 

modo . . modo ) nQW nequg . . -qug, on the one hand 

nunc . . nunc i • not . . and on the other 

turn, .turn, then, .then 6t. .neque, on the one hand.. 
tarn . . quam, both . . and and on the other hand not 



— 250 — 

non solum, .seel Stiam } 
non modo . . seel etiarn >- not only . . but also 
non tantum . . seel etiam ) 
Disjunctive. Comparative. 

a ^-^H either.. or fit V M H ... „. I as., so 

vel . . vel ) quemadmoeluin . . ita ) 

slve . . slve, whether . . or [299. soo.) 



POETICAL FORMS. 

Prosody. 

858. Prosody means Accent, and since Latin accent is regu- 
lated by quantity, Prosody, in the classic sense, has reference to the 
length of syllables, measured by the length of time taken up in pro- 
nouncing them. By modern Grammarians, Prosody is used in a 
wider sense to include both quantity and versification. 

Quantity. 

859. As a general rule, each simple vowel is either long (-) or 
short, (u) and each syllable is considered as either long or short, ac- 
cording as it contains either a long or a short vowel — (Longs and 
Shorts by Nature). A long syllable is generally reckoned in length 
equal to two short ones. 

860. All diphthongs and vowels formed by contraction are long: 
aurum, cogo (co-ago), nialo (magis volo), nil (nihil), junior (juvemor). 

Likewise e and i when corresponding to Greek ei : 
Aeneas, Alexandria, Thalia, Arion. 

861. A vowel before another vowel is short, no account being 
taken of h, as: plus, deus, traho. Even a vowel naturally long or 
a diphthong becomes short before another vowel, as: deorsum, 
praeopto. 

Exceptions: 

e in ei of the Fifth Declension is long when a vowel precedes, as: 
diei, but fidei. 

i in the Genitive form Iiis is long; it is, however, sometimes made 
short in verse, but never in alius (for aliius). 

In fiO, i is long, except when followed by er, as: 116, fiebam; 
but fieri. 

In the Vocative of proper names in -gjus, -ejus, a and e are 
long: Gai, Pompel 



— 251 



In words from the Greek, vowels are often long before a vowel, 
because long in the original, as: aer, museum, eos, Agesilaus, 
Amphlon. 

862. A syllable with a short vowel is considered as long when 
the short vowel is followed by two or more consonants or a double 
consonant either in the same or in the following syllable, as: est, 
essern, restare, dux. The consonants may be divided between two 
words, as sub sldere. A short syllable made long by this rule is said 
to be long by Position. 

863. But if the syllable ends in a short vowel, and the next 
syllable in the same word begins with a mute (see 6.) followed by r 
or 1, the syllable before the two consonants is common (anceps) — 
that is, it may be either long or short (y) in verse, as in tenSbrae; 
in prose it is invariably short 

864. Every vowel sound followed by j is long; only compounds 
of jugum, yoke, retain the short vowel before j, as: bijilgus, 
two-horse. 

865. Forms from the same stem, whether Inflections, Deriva- 
tives, or Compounds retain the original quantity of the radical 
syllable, even when the vowel is changed, as: 

amor, Amicus, inlmlcus, inimicitia 
sapio, s&por, sapiens, insipiens. 



pax, pacis 


from 


paciscor 


fides 


rex, reg 


is 


it 


rego 


fidelis 


secies 




u 


sedeo 


perfidus 


vox, voois 


a 


voco 


perfidia 


dux, ducis 


u 


duco 


but: 


n5ta 


I 






confido 


n5tio 


u 


notus 


diffido 


notare 






fidus 


ddium 




it 


Odi 


infidus 
fiducia 



from fido 



Middle Syllables. 

866. Perfects and Supines of two syllables have the first syllable 
long even when that of the present is short, as: venl, vidi, vicl. 
Exceptions: 7 Perfects: bibi, dedi, fidi 

steti, stiti, tuli, scidi. 
10 Supines: datum, ratum, satum 
citum, itum, statum 
Htuoi, quitum, situm, rutum. 



— 252 — 

867. Reduplicated Perfects shorten both syllables, but the second 
may be made long by position, as: tango, tetigi — • f alio, fefelli. The 
only exception is caedo, cecidi in distinction from cado, cecidi. 

868. Perfects in in have their stem vowel short, as: 

veto-vetui; pl&c6o-placui; cdlo-colui. 

Exceptions: debeo, = dehibeo; floreo from flos; pareo, and pono, 
but posui. 

869. Supines in itum have i long when from Perfects in Ivi 
(ii), as: cupitum, petitum, auditum. recenseo has recensitum from 
recensui in the Perfect. 

870. Verbs in id (i6r) of the Third ConjugatioD have a short 
stem vowel: facio, ctipio, jacio, potior, &c. &c. 

871. The verb endings imus, itis have only in the Present of 
the Fourth Conjugation a long penult; also in simus, sitis; posslmus, 
possitis; vellmus, velltis; nolTmus, nolftis; malimus, malitis; faxl- 
mus, faxitis. 

872. In rimiis and ritis of the Future Perfect, and Perfect Sub- 
junctive, i of the penult is common, i. e., it may be long in verse. 
amaverimus, amaveritis. 

873. The terminations abiis, ol>us, €bQs in plural cases, have 
a long penult, ibus and tibus a short one. 

filiabus, duobus, diebus — ducibus, acQbus. 

874. Derivative Adjectives in alls, aris, anus, Ivtts, ostis 

have the penult long: naturalis, vulgaris, humanus, nativus, odi- 
osus; 

those in icus and ldus have it short: bellicus, cupidus. 

Exceptions: amicus, anticus, apricus, posticus, pudicus. 

875. Verbal Adjectives in ilio have the penult short, as docllis, 
facilis. But Derivatives from nouns have it long, as hostilis, puerllis. 

Exceptions: humilis from humus; parilis from par. 

876. Adjectives in mtis have the penult long, as: 

divinus, genuinus, peregrinus, vicinus. 

But if such Adjectives denote time or material, the penult is 
short, as: adamantinus, crastinus, diutinus. 

Exceptions: matutlnus, vespertlnus, repentlnus. 



— 253 — 

Final Syllables. 

877. In words of more than one syllable, final a, e, and y are 
short, i, o, and u are long: 

1. a is short: terra, tectil, capita. 
Exceptions: 

Ablative of the First Declension: terra. 

Vocative of Greek words in as: Aenea. 

Imperative of First Conjugation: ama. 

Most uninflected words as triginta, antea, contra; but: ita, quia. 

2. e is short: rete, ipsS, ante. 

Exceptions: 

Ablative of Fifth Declension, die. 

Imperative of Second Conjugation, mone. 

Most Adverbs from Adjectives of the Second Declension, as: recte, 
docte. But notice: bene, male, saepe, temere, superne, in- 
fernS. impune and necesse are from old forms impunis and 
necessis. 

Greek words in e (?) : Niobe, Tempe. 

3. i is long: domini, viginti, amarx 
Exceptions: 

nisi, quasi. 

Dative and Vocative of Greek words, Daphnidi, Alexl 

i is common in: mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi. 

Notice the Compounds: of ubi: ubinam, ubivis, ubique — of ibi: 
alibi, ibidem — of ut, utl: utinam, utique. 

4. o is long: bono, amato. 
Exceptions: 

Nouns of the Third Declension and verbal forms, as: le6, vet6. 

ego, duo, modo, dummodo, tantummodo, quando, quanddquidem. 

5. u is always long: cornu, fructu, auditu. 

878. All Final Syllables that end in a single consonant other 
than s are short: ad, amat, consul, caput. 
Exceptions: 
Compounds of par, dispar, impar.— The Adverbs illic, illtic, istUc. 

Many Greek nouns, as; aer, aether, crater; also alec, lien. 



— 254 — 

879. Final as, es, os are long; final is, us, ys are short. 

1. as is long: Messlas, silvas, vocas. 
Exceptions: 

Greek nouns in as, adis, as Areas, Arc&dis. 
Greek accusative plur. : heroas, Arcadas. 
anas, anatis. 

2. es is long: leges, dies, doces. 
Exceptions: 

Norn. Sing. Third Declension, when the Genitive has etis, itis, 
idis with short penult, as miles, seges, obses; but abies, aries, 
paries. 

Compounds of Ss, be; as: ades 

penes (Preposition). 

Greek words in es (eg) Thraces, Arcades. 

3. os is long: deos, nepos. 

Exceptions: compos, impos — Greek words in os: Delos. 

4. is is short: canis, legis. 
Exceptions: 

Plural Cases of all Declensions: mensis, servis, nobis, omnis, 
partis (Accus. pi.). 

The Nominative of such substantives as have in the Genitive itis, 
Inis, entis, as Salamis, Samnis, Simois, -entis. 

Second Pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. Active, Fourth Conjugation audis; 
likewise veils, noils, malis, possis and the Compounds of sis. 

pulvis and sanguis. 

5. us is short: gladius, vulnus, fructus, amamus. 
Exceptions: 

Gen. Sing. Norn, and Ace. Plur. Fourth Declension, fructus. 

Nominative of the Third Declension when the Genitive has a long 

u: virtus, palus, tellus. 
Greek words with u long (ov) • tripus. 

6. ys (in words of Greek origin) is short: chlamys, Halys. 

Monosyllables* 

880. All words of one syllable that end in a vowel, are long: 
a, da, me, de, hi, pro, tu. 

The attached particles -que, -ve, -ne, ~ce, -te, -pte are short 
On the Prefix re see below 885. 



— zao — 

881. Substantives and Adjectives of one syllable are long, when 
they end in a consonant even if the stem-syllable be short, as: os, 
inos, ver, sol, fur, plus; pes (pedis), bos (bovis), par (pans). 
Exceptions: vir. lac, os (ossis), mel 
ccr, vas (vadis), fel. 
liic, this one, is sometimes short. 

' 882. All other words of one syllable that end in a consonant, 
are short: per, ter, cis, in, fac. 

Exceptions: en, non, quin — eras, cur, sin 
the Adverbs, hie, hue, hac, sic. 
die and due have the quantity of their verbs; es, be, is short. 

Quantity in Compounds. 

883. Compounds generally retain the quantity of their compo- 
nent parts, as: duco, deduco, conduco; eo, abeo, obeo, m£o; dleo, 
contradico. 

884. pro is short in Greek words, as propheta; but long in 
Latin (880) though there are many exceptions, especially before f ; 
as: 

procella profestus profundo 

profanus proflteor pronepos 

profari proficiscor propago 

profecto profugio protervus. 

885. Of the inseparable Prefixes, di, se, and ve are long, re 
is short: diduco, sediico, reduco. 

Exceptions: dirimo, disertus 

religio, refert, reliquiae. 

886. In a few words, the quantity of the second part is 
changed. Such are: pejero, fromjiiro; cognitus from notus. 

A remarkable change of quantity appears in the Compounds of 
-dieus, from dico: fatidicus, veridicus, maledicus, and in: innuba, 
pronuba, from nubo. 

FIGUEES or PROSODY. 

887. Elision is the omission or rather partial su^ression 
of a final vowel or a final m when the following word begins with a 
vowel or h, as: 

deserto in litore to be read desert' in litore 

certae occumbere morti " cert' occumbere morti 

supremum audire laborem " suprem' audire laborem. 



— 256 — 

888. The practice of elision is followed in poetry to avoid the 
hiatus (gaping) , or the meeting of two vowels in separate syllables. 
But before and after Interjections the hiatus is allowed, as: 

et | de Lati|a, o | §t de | gente Sa|bma. 

889. Elided syllables should be sounded but lightly. After a 
vowel or m final, the word est drops its e and is joined with the 
preceding syllable; as: 

multa est, read multa'st; multum est, read multum'st. 

890. Synaeresis, or the contraction of two vowels which are 
commonly pronounced separately, is regular in the following words: 
deinde, proinde, deest, deesse, antehac (= anthac) and in all forms 
of the verb anteire (= antire). 

891. In like manner i and u before vowels are sometimes used 
as consonants with the sounds of y and w, as: fluviorum say fluvyo- 
rum; ablete = abyete; genua — genwa. 

892. One syllable is sometimes resolved into two by D i a e r e s i s, 
as: si lii ae = sil vae; in sd e* tus == in sue tus. 

893. Syncope, a cutting short is the taking away of one or 
more letters from the middle of a word, as: saeclum for saeciilum; 
prendere for preliendere., 

894. Apocope, a -cutting off, is the cutting off a letter or 
letters from the end of a word, as: viden, for videsne; ain for aisne. 

895. Systole is the shortening of a long syllable, as: dede- 
runt for dederunt; Diastole the lengthening of a short syllable, 
as Priamides for Priamides. 

896. Epenthesis is the insertion of a letter or a syllable 
in the middle of a word, as in the old forms siet, possiet for sit, 
possit. 

897. T m e s i s is the separation of compound words into their 
parts, as: 

quam rem eunque for f quamcunque rem 
per mihi gratum " mihi pergratum 
super unus eram " unus supereram, 



— 257 



Essentials of Versification. 
898. A verse, or line of poetry consists of a series of measures 
which are called Feet. 

The feet most frequently employed in Latin verse are the fol- 
lowing: 

Of two syllables. 
kj \j Pyrrhichius, Pyrrhic 

Spondeus, Spondee 

v - Iambus, Iambus 

jTrochaeus, Trochee ) 



w w _ 

<J _ KJ 



I C h o r e u s, Choree 

Of three syllables. 
Tribrachys, Tribrach 
Molossus, Molossus 
D a c t y 1 u s, Dactyl 
Anapaestus, Anapaest 
Amphibrachys, Amphibrach 
[Amphimacrus, Amphimacer ) 
[Creticus, Cretic ) 

Bacchius, Bacchius 



pater 
virtus 
amans 

mater 



aderit 

mOrtales 

tempora 

sapiens 

adesse 

tScerant 

amorl 
peccata 



\j Antibacchlus, Antibacchius 

Of Feet of four syllables the following are recognized: 

Proeeleusmaticus, Proceleusmatic celerit-Sr 



\J W \J *u 



u _ u _ 
u u 



u \J 



Dispondeus, Double Spondee IntSrrumpiint 

Ditrochaeus, Double Trochee Inf Idelis 

Dii ambus, Double Iambus renuntians 

Ionicus a minor e, Lesser Ionic metuentes 

Ionicus a majore, Greater Ionic sententia 

Choriambus, Choriambus ■ curriculo 

Antispastus, Antispast verecimdus. 



899. The Unit of measure is the short syllable (-); this is 
called a mora (time). A long syllable (-) is regularly equal to two 
morae. Accordingly in some verses, two short syllables may be used 
instead of a long, or a long instead of two short. 

900. Rhythm is the alternate elevation and depression of the 
voice at certain intervals of time. That part of the foot which is 
distinguished from the rest by a greater stress of voice is called 
Arsis, the other part Thesis. The stress of voice laid upon the 
arsis is called ictus (beat) ; it is marked thus L 



— 258 — 

901. The natural arsis is invariably on the long syllable or 
syllables of a foot; hence the Trochee and Dactyl have the ictus on 
the first syllable, the Iambus and Anapaest on the last, and the Cretic 
on the first and last. Only those feet which consist of both long and 
short syllables can have Arsis and Thesis, or Rhythm, and are, there- 
fore, called Rhythmical Feet. Those consisting entirely of long or 
entirely of short syllables are only used as substitutes for rhythmical 
feet, and take the ictus of the foot for which they stand; hence, a 
Spondee when used for the Dactyl takes the ictus of the Dactyl, viz: 
on the first syllable; but when used for the Anapaest, it takes the 
Anapaestic rhythm, viz: the ictus on the last syllable. 

902. Rhythmical Feet are simple when they have only one 
arsis, and compound when they have more than one. If the arsis 
follows, the rhythm is called ascending, if it precedes, descending. 

903. A Verse is simple when it has one dominant measure 
which determines the rhythm of the whole verse; and compound, 
when different rhythms are combined in the same verse. The latter 
are only found in lyric poetry. 

904. A verse takes its name from the predominant measure as 
Iambic, Trochaic^ Dactylic, Anapaestic, and from the number of 
feet that compose it, as, Hexameter, Pentameter, Tetra- 
meter, Trimeter, Dimeter, Monometer. 

905. In Dactyls and all compound rhythmical feet (see above 
902) a measure is a single foot; accordingly, a verse having five 
dactyls is called a pentameter; one having six dactyls, hexa- 
mete r. 

906. Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic verses are measured 
not by single feet, but by pairs (d i p o d! a, dipody). In these rhythms 
a monometer contains two feet, a dimeter four, a trimeter 
six, a tetrameter eight. 

907. A verse is termed Acatalectic (not halting short) when 
its last foot is complete; a verse lacking a syllable at the end is 
called Catalectic; it is catalectic in syllabam, or in bisylla- 
b u m, according to the number of syllables in the last foot. 

908. The last syllable of a verse may be long or short indif- 
ferently, and is, therefore, called syllaba anceps, because the time 
wanting is made up by pause. 



— 259 — 

909. Most simple verses have certain breaks or pauses to rest 
the voice, and to prevent monotony. The break occasioned by the 
ending of a word in the middle of a foot, is called Caesura marked 
thus \. The verse 

L w kj\L \jd\L ud I L \j ^>\L \j w|Z _ 
Donee f eris f felix f multos \ numerabis \ amicos 
has live Caesurae. Again, the coincidence of the end of a word 
with the end of a foot is called Diaeresis marked thus ||. 
L w \j | L uu | L |i L u w | L \j u[y 
Tempora || si fuerint || nubila || solus eris. 
Every verse must have, about its middle, one principal caesura 
or diaeresis. 

910. Caesura is prevailing in Iambic and Dactylic verses, 
while the Anapaestic Dimeter, Trochaic Tetrameter, Dactylic Pen- 
tameter and the Choriambic verse have a fixed diaeresis in the 
middle of the verse. 

911. A caesura occurring after the arsis of a foot is called 
masculine; a caesura occurring after the thesis is called femi- 
nine: 

Una salus f victis f nullam f sperare f salutem. 
masc. masc. masc. fern. 

A caesura may be found in any foot of the verse except the first. 

912. In Iambic and Dactylic metres, the Caesurae are named 
according to the number of half-feet before them, thus: 

1. t r i t h e m i m e r e s (f ) at the end of the 3d half foot 

2. penthemimeres (■§-) " 5th " 

3. heph them i meres (i) u 7th " 

4. en n eh e mi meres (f) " 9th " 
They are all represented in the following hexameter: 

!u uj-I uujZ UJ\1 Cu|Z uu|Z_ 

Ille latus f niveum f molli f fultus f hyacyntho. 

1 2 3 4 

913. To read verse rhythmically is an accomplishment which 
must be taught orally. Observing the rules of quantity and versifi- 
cation, take care not to dwell on the rhythm of the verse to the 
neglect of accent and connection of the words. The ordinary mode 
of scanning, as: 

L \j \j\ Lud\ L uj \ L kj \j | L \j \j | L _ 
Donece risfe lixmul tosnume rabisa micos 
is worse than useless. 



— 260 — 

DACTYLIC HEXAMETER 
914. The Dactylic Hexameter (Heroic Verse) or simply He- 
xameter consists regularly of six dactyls and is catalectic in bisylla- 
bum. Spondees may be substituted for the dactyl in the first four 
feet. Rarely a spondee is found in the fifth place, and when it is, the 
verse is called Spondaic. Accordingly its formula is: 



91 5. Of the great number of possible caestirae in the Hexa- 
meter the following are the most usual: 

The principal caesura is the Penthemimeral, or masculine caesura 
of the third foot, as: 

L \j \j | L \j u\I. ud | L co | L \j kj \ L _ 
Anna virumque cano, f Trojae qui primus ab oris. 

The next is the feminine caesura of the third foot, also called 

juera rpirov rpoxcuov 1 as: 

passi graviora, f dabit deus his quoque finem. 

Then comes the Hephthemimeral in the arsis of the fourth foot, 
usually accompanied by the trithemimeres after the second arsis, as: 

L u u| I co| L kj kj\ L \jz>\ L uw | L \j 
Stat sonipes f ac frena ferox \ spumantia mandit. 

916. The last word of a Hexameter should be either a dis- 
syllable, or a trisyllable; monosyllables at the end denote em- 
phasis, as: 

L \j kj\L \3o\ L \jd\L co | Lkj u| L _ 
Parturiunt montes f nascetur ridiculus mus. 

917. In the first part of the verse variety in the use of dactyls 
and spondees has an agreeable effect. A light and rapid movement 
is produced by the frequent recurrence of dactyls, a slow and heavy 
one by that of spondees. The following examples have been chosen 
with especial reference to this point: 

L u u| i. u u I — u KJ \— u w I — w u I — u 

Quadrupedante f putrem f sonitu f quatit ungula campum. 

lW\l ud\1 co I L co|Zuu|Z_ 
(Cyclopes) Illi inter \ sese f magna f vi brachia tollunt. 



— 261 — 

ELEGIAC PENTAMETER. 

918. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two parts separated 
by DiaerSsis. Each part consists of- two dactyls and the arsis of a 
third; the first part admits spondees, the second does not: 

1 \j\j\L uu| _ || 1 v u | 1 u w|y 
Tempora si fuerint nubila solus eris. 

It derives its name from the number of dactyls. (2^ + 21 = 5.) 

919. The Elegiac Pentameter is seldom, if ever, used except 
in the Elegiac Distich, which consists of the Hexameter followed by 
the Pentameter: 

L kj u|1gd|1 co| 1 \j \j\L\j kj\-u 
Donee eris felix, multos nurnerabis amicos; 

1 \j \j\1 \jkj\1 || 1 \j kj | 1 u u|y 
Tempora si fuerint nubila, solus eris. 

920. No monosyllables can stand at the end of either part of 
the Pentameter, except when preceded by another one, as: 

L v u\l uo | _ ||1 u w|!u u|_ 
Magna tamen spes est in bonitate Dei. 

921. Neither syllaba anceps nor hiatus is allowed at 
the diaeresis. Almost every Pentameter ends in a dissyllable, 
and elision is avoided. 

IAMBIC TRIMETER. 

922. The most common form of Iambic verse is the Senarian, 
or Iambic Trimeter; it is of frequent occurrence in lyric poetry, 
and is also the ordinary verse of dramatic dialogue. Since the final 
syllable must be anceps, the formula of the verse is as follows: 

uZ u_ | ulu_|uluy 

923. In the Iambic Trimeter a Spondee or its equivalent 
(Anapaest or Dactyl with Iambic ictus »iu) may be regularly sub- 
stituted in the odd places (1st, 3d, 5th foot), also a Tribrach (\j w vj) 
anywhere except in the last place. 

924. The principal caesura of the Iambic Trimeter is either the 
penthemimeral which falls on the middle of the 3d foot, or the 
hephthemimeral which falls on the middle of the fourth foot. 

COMPOUND VERSES. 

925. A verse is compound if different measures are combined 
in the same to produce a more artificial movement especially 



— 262 — 

characteristic of lyric poetry. If a dactylic rhythm passes into 
trochees, the movements are intermediate between those of prose 
and poetry. Hence the name Logaoedic verse (from M-yog, prose, 
and hoidf], song). Sometimes an introductory foot of two syllables 
which is called Basis and commonly marked thus X, is put before 
the dactylic or logaoedic series. The Verses constructed upon the 
Logaoedic form (especially those used by Horace) are the following: 

1. Adonic (a dactyl ; a trochee): 









/ 


\jkj\L v 








Terruit urbem. 


2. 


Aristophanic 


(a 


dactyl; 


two trochees): 

L u | L o 



Lydia die per omnes. 

3. Pherecratean (basis; a dactyl; a trochee): 

i. X _ \1xj v\l O 

Yix durare carinae. 

4. Gly conic (basis; a dactyl; trochaic dipody catalectic): 

L*_ | L u u| 1 u|y 
Eomae principis urbium. 

5. Lesser Sapphic (double basis; a dactyl; two trochees): 

Z/l A X _|Zf yj\j\l u | L o 

Integ6r vitae scelerisque purus. 

6. Greater Sapphic (double basis; a dactyl; a trochee catalectic; 

a dactyl ; two trochees) : 

Z. x w Z. X _|i. uu|JL||.i u u|l Ojl a 
Te Deos oro, Sybarin cur properas amando. 

7. Lesser Asclepiadean (basis; a dactyl; a trochee catalectic; a 

dactyl; a trochaic dipody catalectic): 

L*-\L w\L\\Lw\Lsj \\j 
Maecenas atavis edite regibus. 

8. Greater Asclepiadean (basis; a dactyl; a trochee catalectic] a 

dactyl; a trochee catalectic, a dactyl; trochaic dipody ca- 
talectic) : 

Z. x _ | L u u\L\\ !^ #|i || 1 yj kj 1 1 o | y 

Nullam Vare sacra vite prius severis arborem. 

In the Greater Sapphic and both the Asclepiadeans, the dactyl 

with the catalectic trochee appears a simple Ohoriambus :_ u w_; 

hence these metres have obtained the general name of Choriambic. 



— 263 — 
9. Lesser Alcaic (two dactyls; two trochees): 

wrginibus puerisque canto. 

10. Greater Alcaic (anacrusis; double basis; a dactyl; trochaic 

dipody catalectic) : 

Just urn et tenacem propositi virum. 
One or more syllables placed before the proper beginning of 
the measure are called an anacrusis; it is separated hj a colon: 

11. Archilochian (dactylic tetrameter; three trochees): 

JLw\lu <j\1 f: ro l- uu||Iu|Z u|Zo 
Solvitur acris hiems f grata vice veris et Favoni. 

METRES of HOEACE. 

926. Verses are combined in two different ways. Either the 
same verse is repeated throughout; such are the Heroic Hexameter 
and the Iambic Trimeter. Or the same verse or different verses 
recurring in a certain order are combined in a Stanza or Strophe. 
A strophe of two lines is called a Distich; of three, a Tristich; of 
four a Tetrastich. 

927. Horace uses the Hexameter in his Epistles and Satires. 
The Odes include nineteen varieties of strophe, viz. : 

1. Alcaic Strophe, consisting of: 

Two Greater Alcaics \ ° : V ~v~ " " u U '~ u ' ~ I 925. 10 
(o :l?\j l x _||Zww|Zu|^) 

One Trochaio Dimeter with anacrusis o :lu!o |Iula 

One Lesser Alcaic Zuu| Zuu|lu | lu 925. 9 

Justum et tenacem propositi virum 

Non civium ardor prava jubentium 

Non vultus instantis tyranni 

Mente quatit solida neque Auster. 

2. Sapphic Strophe (minor), consisting of: 



/X ,x 

_ \J _ _ 


\L\\j\j\Lkj 


/X^ /X_ 


| Ifvu| Lkj 


Z?L Z. x - 


| l\w\ Ikj 



l 



Three lesser Sapphics -\ rb Z. _ |Ifuu|ZujZo > 925. 5 

o ) 

One Adonic luu|lo 9£5. i 

Jam satis terris nivis atque dirae 
Grandinis misit pater et rubente 
D6xtera sacras jaculatus arces 
Terruit urbeni. 



925. 7 



— 264 — 

3. Sapphic Strophe (major), consisting of: 

One Aristophanic L u u J L u | L o 925. 2 

One Greater Sapphic Z. x ^ Z. X _ |iwu'|'JL||iuu|iu|ic 925. 6 
Two pairs are combined into a tetrastich. 
Lydia die per omnes 
Te deos oro, Sybarin cur properas amando. 

4. Asclepiadean Strophe I. (minor), consisting of: 

Lesser Asclepiadeans \ -*- I 1 u u I 1 H L u u I . -^ I y 

( Z. X _ I J. u u I Z || I u u I L u I y 9 

repeated in tetrastichs: 

Maecenas, atavis edite r£gibus 

et praesidium et dulce decus meum. 

5. Asclepiadean Strophe II., consisting of: 

One Glyconic _ _ |Zuu|Zu| y 925. 4 

One Lesser Asclepiadean A x _ \ L \j u | L |[ I v u | 1 u | y 9£& 7 
alternating, and so forming tetrastichs. 
Navis, quae tibi creditum 
D6bes Vergilium, finibus Atticis 
Eeddas incolumem, precor, 
Et serves animae dimidiiim meae. 

6. Asclepiadean Strophe III., consisting of: 

( Z. X _|Zuu|Z||Zuu|Zu|y) 
Three Lesser Asclepiadeans -l _ _ |Zuu|Z||_!.uu|Zujy>- 925. 7 



v 



.|i-uu|ipuu|I w|y J 
One Glyconic ! x _ | Z u u 1 1 u | y 9£& 4 

Quis desiderio sit pudor aut modus 
Tarn cari capitis? — Praecipe lugubr^s 
Cantus, Melpomene, cui liquidain pater 
Vocem cum cythara dedit. 

Asclepiadean Strophe IV., consisting of: 

t v 
Two Lesser Asclepiadeans •< "V I - v «->| -- 1| - w v | _ u| y ( Q 

I l x _|Zu v|Z|| Lxjkj\1 u|y ) 
One Phereoratean L _ |Zuu|lo 0£5. 3 

One Glyconic Z_ x _ |Zuu|Zu|y 925. 4 

fons Bandusiae splendidior vitro 
Dulci digne mero, non sine floribus 
Cras donaberis haedo 
Cui frons tiirgida cornibus. 



— 265 — 
8. Asclepiadean Strophe V., consisting of the 

Greater Asclepiadean 1 Z. X _ \L u u | L \\ L u u \L\\L u u 



repeated in fours 



Tu ne quaesieris, scire nefas quem mihi, quern tibi 
Finem di dederint, Leuconoe, nee Babylonios 
Tentaris numeros. At melius, quidquid erit pati ! 
Seu plures hiemes, seu tribnit Juppiter ultimam. 

9. Alcmanian Strophe, consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter J-Ud\1uo\1^kjd\1uo\1kjkj\1d 
Dactylic Tetrameter Zoo|lcujluvj|lo 

Quo nos cunque feret melior fortuna parente, 
Ibimus 6 socii comitesque. 

10. Archilochian Strophe I., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter 1uj\1ud\1\uo\1ud\1^^\-D 
Dactylic Trimeter !uu |Zuw| ^ 

Diffugere nives, redeunt jam gramma campis 
Arboribusque comae. 

11. Archilochian Strophe II., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter L\jj\1\jd\1^\jj\1kxj\L\j\j\Lo 

Iambic Dimeter olw_|olw^ 

Dactylic Trimeter L w u j L u w ! y 

Horrida tempestas caelum contraxit et imbres 

Xivesque deducunt Jovem: 

Nunc mare, nunc siiuae. 

The second and third lines of this strophe are often written as 
one verse. 

12. Archilochian Strophe III., consisting of: 
Iambio Trimeter ulu_!oj|Zu_|cijLvjy 
Dactylic Trimeter !uu|Iuu|y 

Iambic Dimeter olu_.|oIuy 

Pecti, nihil me sicut antea juvat 
Scribere versiculos 
Am ore perculsum gravi. 

The second and third lines of this strophe are often written as 
one verse. 



— 266 — 

13. Archilochian. Strophe IV., consisting of: 

Archilochian i&o\luj\l1-oo\±KjKj\\lv\lKj\i& 925. n 
Iambic Trimeter ulu_|of!u_ | uZu 

Solvitur acris hiems grata vice veris et Favoni 
Trahuntque siccas macliinae carinas. 

Two pairs are combined to form a tetrastich. 

14. Iambic Trimeter alone (see 922). 

15. Iambic Strophe, consisting of: 

Iambic Trimeter uZu_| of Zu_|oZuy 
Iambic Dimeter o!u_| oZuy 

Beatus ille qui procul negotiis 

Ut prisca gens mortalium. 

16. Pythiambic Strophe I., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter Lkjd\Luj\L\ud\Lud\Lkjkj\Lkd 
Iambic Dimeter y!u_ | u Z u y 

N6x erat, et caelo fulgebat lima sereno 
Inter minora sidera. 

17. Pythiambic Strophe II., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter L uo \ 1uj\1^uo\1ud\1kjkj\Lkj 
Iambic Trimeter o Z w _. |oflu_|alvjy 

Altera jam teritur bellis civilibus aetas, 
Suis et ipsa Koma viribus ruit. 

18. Trochaic Strophe, consisting of: 

Trochaic Dimeter lu_o|!uy 

Iambic Trimeter olu_[vjfZu_|vj_Lo 

N6n ebur neque aureum 
Mea renidet in domo lacunar. 

19. Lesser Ionics (see 898). 



Two Dipodies 
Two Tripodies 



VJ u . 



VJ <o> _ 
, , , , I 



! 



Miserarum est neque amori 
Dare ludum neque dulci 
Mala vino lavere aut exanimari 
Metuentes patruae verbera linguae. 



267 



928. 



INDEX to the METRES of HORACE. 



The references are to the numbers in the preceding paragraph. 
Lib. I. 



1. 
2. 
3. 

4. 
5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 



Maecenas atavis: 4. 

Jam satis terris: 2. 

Sic te diva: 5. 

Solvitur acris hiems: 13 

Quis multa: 7. 

Scriberis Yario: 6. 

Laudabunt alii: 9. 

Lydia die: 3. 

Vides ut alta: 1. 

Mercuri facunde nepos: 2. 

Tu ne quaesieris: 8. 

Quern virum: 2. 

Cum tu Lydia: 5. 

navis: 7. 

Pastor cum traheret: 6. 

matre pulchra: 1. 

Yelox amoenum: 1. 

Nullam Tare: 8. 

Mater saeva: 5. 



1. Motum ex Metello: 1. 

2. Nullus argento: 2. 

3. Aequam memento: 1. 
4 Ne sit ancillae: 2. 

5. Nondum subacta: 1. 

6. Septimi Gades: 2. 

7. O saepe mecum: 1. 

8. Ulla si juris: 2. 

9. Non semper imbres: 1. 
10. Rectius vives: 2. 

1. Odi profanum: 1. 

2. Angustam amice: 1. 

3. Justum et tenacem: 1. 

4. Descende caelo: 1. 

5. Caelo tonantem : 1. 

6. Delicta majorum: 1. 



20. Yile potabis: % 

21. Dianam tenerae: 7. 

22. Integer vitae: 2. 

23. Yitas hinnuleo: 7. 

24. Quis desiderio: 6. 

25. Parcius junctas: 2. 

26. Musis amicus: 1. 

27. Natis in usum: 1. 

28. Te maris: 9. 

29. Icci beatis: 1. 

30. Yenus: 2. 

31. Quid dedicatum: L 

32. Poscimur: 2. 

33. Albi ne doleas: 6. 
34 Parcus deorum: L 

35. diva: 1. 

36. Et ture: 5. 

37. Nunc estbibendum: 1. 

38. Persicos odi: 2. 

Lib. II. 

11. Quid bellicosus: 1. 

12. Nolis longa: 6. 

13. Ille et nefasto: 1. 

14. Eheu fugaces: 1. 

15. Jam pauca: 1. 

16. Otium divos: 2. 

17. Cur me querelis: 1. 

18. Non ebur: 18. 

19. Baechum in remotis: 1. 

20. Non usitata: 1. 

Lib. III. 

7. Quid fles: 7. 

8. Martiis caelebs: 2. 

9. Donee gratus: 5. 

10. Extremum Tanain: 6. 

11. Mercuri nam te: 2. 

12. Miserarum est: 19. 



268 — 



13. fons Bandusiae: 7. 

14. Herculis ritu: 2. 

15. Uxor pauperis: 5. 

16. Inclusam Danaen: 6. 

17. Aeli vetusto: 1. 

18. Faune nyrapharum: 2. 

19. Quantum distet: 5. 

20. Non vides: 2. 

21. nata mecum: 1. 



1. Intermissa Yenus: 5. 

2. Pindarum quisquis: 2. 

3. Quern tu Melpomene: 5. 

4. Qualem ministrum: 1. 

5. JLMvis orte bonus: 6. 

6. Dive quern proles: 2. 

7. Diffugere nives: 10. 

8. Donarem pateras: 4. 



1. Ibis liburnis: 15. 

2. Beatus ille: 15. 

3. Parentis olim: 15. 

4. Lupis et agnis: 15. 

5. At Odeorum: 15. 

6. Quid immerentes: 15. 

7. Quo quo scelesti: 15. 

8. Rogare longo: 15. 

9. Quando repostum: 15. 



22. Montium custos: 2. 

23. Caelo supinas: 1. 

24. Intactis opulentior: 5. 

25. Quo me Bacche: 5. 

26. Yixi puellis: 1. 

27. Impios parrae: 2. 

28. Festo quid: 5. 

29. Tyrrhena regum: 1. 

30. Exegi monumentum: 4. 

Lib. IV. 

9. Ne forte credas: 1. 

10. crudelis adhuc: 8. 

11. Est mihi nonum: 2. 

12. Jam veris comites: 6. 

13. Audivere Lyce: 7. 

14. Qua cura patrum: 1. 

15. Phoebus volentem: 1. 
Carmen Saeculare: 2. 

Epodes. 

10. Mala soluta: 15. 

11. Pecti nihil: 12. 

12. Quid tibi, vis: 9. 

13. Horrida tempestas: 11. 

14. Mollis inertia: 16. 

15. Nox erat: 16. 

16. Altera jam: 17. 

17. Jam jam efficaci: 14. 



269 



MISCELLANEOUS. 

THE KOMAN CALENDAR. 

929. The Roman Year, by the reformed Calendar of Julius 
Caesar, had 365 days, divided as at present into 12 months: 
Januarius, 31 days. Maius, 31 days. September, 30 days. 



Februarius, 


28 


u 


Junius, 


30 


IC 


October, 


31 


Martius, 


31 


k 


Quintilis, 


31 


« 


November, 


30 


Aprilis, 


30 


u 


Sextliis, 


31 


ii 


December. 


31 



Every fourth year the 24th of February (VI. Kal. Mart.) was 
counted twice giving 29 days to that month. The Intercalary 
day — 25th of February — was called bis sextus. 

In early times the year began in March; hence the names, 
Quintilis, Sextliis, September, etc. Quintilis and Sextliis were after- 
wards changed to Julius and Augustus, in honor of the first two 
Caesars. 

930. The first day of the month was called Kalendae 
(Calends) ; on the fifteenth day of March, May, July, and October, 
but the thirteenth of the other months, were the Id us (Ides); on 
the seventh day of March, May, July, and October, but the fifth of 
the other months were the N o nae (Nones). To these the names 
of the months were added as Adjectives, as: Kalendae Januariae = 
Jan. 1; Nonae Februariae = Febr. 5; Idus Martiae = March 15. 

931. From these three points the days of the month were 
reckoned backward in the following manner: The day before each 
of them was expressed by p r i d I e with the Accusative, as: 

pridle Kalendas Januarias = Dec. 31. 
pridie Nonas Januarias = Jan. 4. 
pridle Idus Januarias = Jan. 12. 

In counting further backward the point of departure was, by Eo- 
man custom, counted in the reckoning so that ante dien. tertium 
Kal. Jan. means two days before the Calends of January; ante 
diem quartum Kal. Jan., three days before the Calends of January, 
and so on. This combination is treated as one indeclinable word, 
so that it can be used with prepositions, as: ex ante diem III. Nonas 
Junias usque ad pridie Kal. Septembres, from June 3 to August 31. 



— 270 — 

932. In stating the day of a month, two different constructions 
are used. The original construction is die tertio ante Kalendas 
Martias, February 27.; but die and ante are regularly omitted, 
thus: tertio Kalendas Martias, or in figures: III. Kal. Mart. The 
other form is: ante diem tertium Kalendas Martias, or in figures: 
a. d. III. Kal. Mart. 



933. 


CALENDAR 


FOB THE YEAR, 


Days of 
our months 


January. 


February. 


1. 


Kalendis Jan. 


Kalendis Feb. 


2. 


iv. Nonas Jan. 


iv. Nonas Feb. 


3. 


in. " " 


m. " " 


4. 


prid. " " 


prid. " " 


5. 


Nonis Jan. 


Nonis Feb. 


6. 


viii. Idus Jan. 


viii. Idus Feb. 


7. 


VII. " " 


VII. f 1 m 


8. 


VI. " " 


VI. " u 


9. 


v. " " 


v. " " 


10. 


IV. " " 


IV. " " 


11. 


III. " " 


III. " " 


12. 


prid. u " 


prid. " < l 


13. 


IdTbus Jan. 


Idibtts Feb. 


14. 


xix. Kalendas Feb. xvi. Kalendas Mart. 


15. 


XVIII. " 4 


t XV. " " 


16. 


XVII. " 4 


4 XIV. M " 


17. 


XVI. " 4 


4 XIII. " u 


18. 


XV. M 4 


4 XII. " " 


19. 


XIV. " 4 


i XL « « 


20. 


XIII. " 4 


4 X. " " 


21. 


XII. " ' 


4 IX. " " 


22. 


XI. " 4 


I yj IL it l( 


23. 


x. " l 


i vn# a a 


24. 


IX. Cl ' 4 


i yL CI u 


25. 


VIII. 4< l 


I v , CI « 


26. 


VII. M 4 


4 IV. " 44 


27. 


VI. " 4 


4 III. 44 44 


28. 


V. " ( 


1 prid. 44 44 


29. 


IV. " 4 


4 [prid. Kal. Mart, in leap- 


30. 


III. " 4 


4 year, the vi. Kal. (24th) 


31. 


prid. u 4 
(So Aug., Dec.) 


4 being counted twice.] 



— 271 



Days of 

our months. 


March. 


April. 


1. 


Kalendis Mart. 


Kalendis Apr. 


2. 


vi. Nonas Mart. 


iv. Nonas Apr. 


3. 


v. " " 


in. " " 


4. 


IV. " " 


prid. " " 


5. 


III. " " 


Nonis Apr. 


6. 


prid. " « 


viii. Idus Apr. 


7. 


Nonis Mart. 


VII. u " 


8. 


viii. Idus Mart. 


VI. " " 


9. 


VII. " " 


V. " u 


10. 


VI. « " 


IV. " " 


11. 


v. " u 


III. " " 


12. 


IV. " " 


prid. " " 


13. 


III. "' u 


Idibus Apr. 


14. 


prid. " " 


xviii. Kalendas Maias. 


15. 


Idibus Mart. 


XVII. u " 


16. 


xvii. Kalendas Aprilis. xvi. u u 


17. 


XVI. " i 


* XV. " " 


18. 


XV. " ■ 


c XIV u u 


19. 


XIV. " * 


i XIII. " " 


20. 


XIII. " * 


i XII. " " 


21. 


XII. " * 


c XI i< cc 


22. 


XI. " l 


( X. " " 


23, 


x. " ' 


1 IX. " " 


24. 


IX. M c 


i yjjj 44 44 


25. 


VIII. " * 


i yjj 4 4 4 4 


26. 


VII. " l 


4 VI. " " 


27. 


VI. " c 


< V. " u 


28. 


y 44 l 


I jy It 44 


29. 


IV. " l 


* III. " " 


30. 


in. ll l 


* prid. " " 


31. 


prid. " ( 


1 (So June, Sept., Nov.) 



(So eMaz/, r/^Zz/, Cte£.) 
954. To turn Roman dates into English: 

For Calends: Add two to the days of the preceding month, and 
subtract the given number. 

For Ides and Nones: Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides 
of the month in question, and subtract the given number. 
Examples: a. d. VIII. Kal. Febr. (31 + 2 — 8) - Jan. 25. 
a. d. IV. Non. Mart. ( 7 + 1 — 4) == March 4. 
a. d. IV. Id. Sept. (13 + 1 — 4) = Sept 10. 



— 272 — 

935. The Year was designated by the names of the Consuls 
for that year: but was also reckoned from the building of the 
City (ab urbe condita, anno urbis conditae) which, according to 
Varro, corresponds with the 753d year B. C. In order to reduce 
such dates to those of the Christian era, if the given number be less 
than 754, subtract it from the latter, and the remainder will be the 
year B. C. as: a. u. c. 691 (the year of Cicero's consulship) = B. C. 
63; if greater than 753, subtract 753 from it, and the remainder will 
be the year after Christ (A. D.), as: a, u. c. 767 (the year of Augustus* 
death) = 14 A. D. 

936. The Week of seven days (hebdomas) was not in use among 
the Romans under the republic, but was introduced under the em- 
perors. The days of the week were named from the planets: 

dies Solis, Sunday dies Jovis, Thursday 

dies Lunae, Monday dies Veneris, Friday 

dies Martis, Tuesday dies Saturni, Saturday. 
dies Mercurii, Wednesday 

ROMAN MONEY, WEIGHTS, and MEASURES. 

937. The Coins of the Romans were in early times of copper. 
The as, being originally the unit of currency, was nominally a pound 
weight, but was reduced by degrees to one twenty-fourth of its 
original weight and value. In the third century silver coins were in- 
troduced; the denarius = 10 asses, and the sestertius = 2\ asses 
(sestertius = semis-tertius, half third, represented by IIS or HS 
= duo et semis, 2^). 

938. The Sestertius was the ordinary coin of the Romans, 
by which the largest sums were reckoned. Gold was introduced later, 
the aureus being equal to 100 sesterces. The value of these 
eoins is seen in the following: 

1 as nearly 2 cents. 

1\ asses = 1 sestertius or nummus (HS) " 4 " 
10 asses = 4 sestertii = 1 denarius " 16 " 

1000 sestertii = 1 sestertium $40.00 

939. The Sestertium was a sum of money, not a coin. 
Though probably the genitive plural of sestertius, the word is 
inflected regularly as a neuter noun, thus: tria sestertia = $120.00. 
When joined with the multiplicative adverbs it denotes a sum of a 
hundred thousand, centena milia being omitted, thus: decies sester- 
tium, a million = $40,000. 



— 273 — 

940. The Roman Measures of Length are the following 
12 unciae, inches = 1 pes, Roman foot (11.6 Engl, inches) 

1 cubitus, cubit = l\feet 

1 gradus, step = °2\feet 

1 passus, pace = 5 feet 

mille passuum, 1000 paces = i mite (^50 Engl. feet). 

941. The basis of Square Measure was the j u g e r u m, an 
area of 240 Roman feet long and 120 broad, a little less than f of 
an English acre. 

942. The Measures of Weight are : 

12 unciae (ounces) = one pound (libra, about } lb. avoirdupois). 
Fractional parts (weight or coin) are: 

1. dV), uncia; 5. (fV), quincunx; 9. (f), dodrans; 

2. (-J-), sextans; 6. ($), semissis; 10. (f), dextans; 

3. (i), quadrans; 7. (A), septunx; 11. (J^), deunx; 

4. (i), trlens; 8. (f), bessis; 12. As. 
The Talent was a Greek weight = 60 librae. 

943. The Measures of Capacity are: 

12 cyathi = 1 sextarlus (nearly a pint). 
16 sextarii^ 1 modius (peck). 

6 sextarii = 1 congius (3 quarts, liquid measure). 

8 congii = 1 amphora (6 gallons) . 

944. ABBREVIATIONS. 

A., absolvo. N. L., non liquet. 

A. Chr., ante Christum. Non., Nonae. 

A. D., ante diem. P. C, patres conscripti. 

A. IT. C, anno urbis conditae. P. M., pontifex maximus. 

C, condemno. P. R., populus Romanus. 
Cos., consul. Coss., consules. Pr., praetor. 

D. D., dono dedit, Proc, proconsul. 

D. D. D., dat, dicat, dedicat. Q. B. F. F. Q. S., quod bonum felix 

Des., designatus. faustumque sit. 

F., filius. Quir., Quirites. 

H. S., sestertius. Resp., respublica. 

Ictus, jurisconsultus. S., senatus. 

Id. , idus. S. C, senatus consultum. 

Imp., imperator. S. D. P., salutem dicit plurimam. 

J. O. M., Jovi optlmo maximo. S. P. Q. R., Senatus Populusque 

K., Kal., Kalendae. Romanus. 

Leg., legatus, leglo. Tr. pi., tribunus plebis. 



— 274 — ! 

I 

94:5. PKINCIPAL LATIN AUTHOKS. 

T. Maccius Plautus . . . b.c.254-184 

Comedies. 
Q. Ennius 239-169 

Annals, Satires , Sc. (Fragments). 
M. Porclus Cato 236-149 

Husbandry , Antiquities, &c. 
M. Pacuvius 220-130 

Tragedies (Fragments). 
P. Terentms Afer (Terence) 195-159 

Comedies. 
C. Lucilius 149-103 

Satires (Fragments). 
L. Attius (or Accius) . . . ', 170-75 

Tragedies (Fragments). 
M. Terentms Yarro 116-28 

Husbandry , Antiquities, &c. 
M. Tullius Cicero . . 106-43 

Orations, Letters, Dialogues. 
C. Julius Caesar 100-44 

Commentaries. 
T. Lucretius Carus 99-55 

Poem "De Kerum Natura". 
C. Valerius Catullus 87-47 

Miscellaneous Poems. 
C. Sallustius Crispus (Sallust) 86-35 

Histories. 
Cornelius Nepos 90- 

Lives of Famous Commanders. 
P. Vergilius Maro (Virgil) 70-19 

Eclogues, Georgis, Aeneid. 
Q. Horatms Flaccus (Horace) 65-8 

Satires, Odes, Epistles. 
Albius Tibullus . 54-18 

Elegies. 
Sex. Aurelius Propertius 49-15 

Elegies. 

T. Livius Patavmus (Livy) B.C.59-A.D.17 

Roman History. 



— 275 — 

P. Ovidius Naso (Ovid) b.c.43-a.d.16 

Metamorphoses, Fasti, &c % 
C. Velleius Paterculus ...... b.c.19-a.d.31 

Roman History. 
M. Valerius Maximus A.D.-31 

Anecdotes, &c. 
Pomponius Mela -50 

Husbandry & Geography. 
A. Persius Flaccus 34-62 

Satires. 
L. Annaeus Seneca ............ -65 

Philos. Letters, &c; Tragedies. 
M. Annaeus Lucanus 38-65 

Historical Poem "Pharsalia". 
Q, Curtms Rufus .............. ? 

History of Alexander. 
C. Plinius Secundus (Pliny) 23-79 

Nat. Hist, &c. 
C. Valerius Flaccus -88 

Heroic Poem "Argonautica". 
P. Papinius Statius 45-96 

Heroic Poems "Thebais", &c. 

C. Silius Italicus . ' . . . 25-100 

Heroic Poem "Punica". 

D. Junius Juvenilis (Juvenal) 42-121 

Satires. 
L. Annaeus Floras -120 

Historical Abridgment. 
M. Valerius Martialis (Martial) 43-104 

Epigrams. 
M. Fabius Quintilianus . 40-118 

Rhetoric. 
C. Cornelius Tacitus ............ 57-118 

Annals, History, <&c. 

C. Plinius Caecilius Secundus (Pliny Junior) .... 62-113 
Letters. 

C. Suetonius Tranquillus 70-150 

TJie Twelve Ccesars. 



— 276 — 

Apuleius A, D. 110- 

Philos. Writings, "Metamorphoses". 
A. Gellius -180 

Miscellanies , "Noctes Atticae". 
*Q. Septimius Florens Tertullianus 160-220 

Apologist 
*M. Minucius Felix -250 

Apologetic Dialogue, "Octavius". 
*Firmianus Lactantius . , 250-325 

Theology. 
D. Magnus Ausonius . -380 

Miscellaneous Poems. 
Ammianus Marcellinus . , . -395 

Roman History. 
Claudius Claudianus -408 

Poems, Panegyrics, &c. 
*Aurelius Prudentius Clemens , 348-410 

Christian Poems. 
*Aurelius Augustlnus 354-430 

Confessions, Discourses, &c. 
Anicius Manlius Boethius 470-520 

Philosophical Dialogues. 



* Christian writers. 



— 277 — 



INDEX OF VERBS. 

This Index contains all the Simple Verbs in common use which involve 
any important irregularities, with such of their Compounds as require par- 
ticular notice. — The references are to paragraphs. 



A. 

abeo, -ire, to go away, 407 
ablgo, -ere, to drive away, 383 
abluo, -ere, to wash (off), 366 
abntio, -ere, to dissent, 366 
aboleo, -ere, to abolish, 356 
aboleseo, -ere, to disappear, 394 
abscindo, -ere, to tear off, 374 
abscondo, -ere, to hide, 372 
absisto, -ere, to cease, 374 
absolvo, -ere, to acquit, 366 
abstergeo, -ere, to wipe off, 360 
abstineo, -ere, to abstain, 358 
absum, abesse, to be absent, 306 
absumo, -ere, to use up, 385 
abiitdr, -I, to use, abuse, 396 
aceedo, -ere, to approach, 374 
accendo, -ere, to kindle, 373 
accio, -Ire, to call in, 362 
accipio, -ere, to receive, 368 
accubo, -are, to lie near, 347 
accumbo, -ere, to recline at 

table, 376 
accurro, -ere, to run to, 387 
acesco, -ere, to turn sour, 394 
acquiro, -ere, to acquire, 389 
actio, -ere, to sharpen, 366 
adfero, -re, to aford, 404 
adhaereo, -ere, to stick, 360 
adimo, -ere, to take away, 389 
adipiscor, -l, to obtain, 396 
adjungo, -ere, to join (to), 378 
adjuvo, -are, to assist, 348 



admin o, -ere, to admit, 374 
adnuo, -ere, to nod assent, 366 
adoleo, -ere, to grow up, 356 
adolesco, -ere, to grow up, 394 
adorior, -11% to attack, 399 
adsisto, -ere, to stand by, 374 
adsum, adesse, to be present, 306 
aegresco, -ere, to fall sick, 395 
affligo, -ere, to dash, 378 
age, come, 417 
aggredior, -i, to attack, 396 
aguosco, -ere, to acknowledge, 

393 
ago, -ere, to drive, do, 383 
ajo, I say, 416 

albeo, -ere. to be white, 354 
algeo, -ere. to be cold, 360 
allego, -ere, to choose, 383 
allicio, -ere, to allure, 368 
allldo, -ere, to dash against, 371 
alllno, -ere, to besmear, 388 
alloquor, -I, to address, 396 
alo, -ere, to nourish, 386 
ambigo, -ere, to contend, 383 
ambio, -ire, to go about, 408 
amicio, -ire, to clothe, 398 
amitto, -ere, to lose, 374 
amplector, -l, to embrace, 396 
ango, -ere, to torment, vex, 381 
anquiro,-ere, to search after, 389 
antecello, -ere, to excel, 386 
antepono, -ere, to prefer, 386 
antisto, -are, to excel, 349 



278 



apage, be gone, 417 
aperio, -ire, to open, 398 
apiscor, -I, to reach after, 396 
applaudo, -ere, to applaud, 371 
appllco, -are, to apply, 347 
appono, -ere, to put by, 386 
arceo, -ere, to keep off, 353 
arcesso, -ere, to summon, 390 
ardeo, -ere, to burn, 360 
areo, -erg, to be dry, 353 
aresco, -ere, to become dry, 394 
arguo, -ere, to accuse, 366 
arrldeo, -ere, to smile upon, 360 
arripio, -ere, to seize, 368 
ascenclo, -ere, to ascend, 373 
aspicio, -ere, to look, 368 
assentior, -Iri, to assent, 399 
asseqnor, -I, to pursue, 396 
assideo, -ere, to sit by, 361 
assido, -ere, to sit down, 374 
assuesco, -ere, to be accustomed, 

393 
attendo, -ere, to attend to, 371 
attineo, -ere, to belong, 358 
attingo, -ere, to touch, 382 
andeo, -ere, to dare, 363 
aufero, -re, to carry away, 404 
augeo -ere, to increase, 359 
augesco, -ere, to augment, 394 
ave, hail, 417 

avello, -ere, to pull down, 389 
aveo, -ere, to long for, 354 



btbo, -ere, to drink, 376 

C. 

cado, -ere, to fall, 371 
caedo, -ere, to fell, 371 
calesco, -ere, to become warm, 

394 
calleo, -ere, to be versed^ 353 



calveo, - ere, to be bald, 354 
candeo, -ere, to shine, 353 
cando, I burn, 373 
caneo, -ere, to be gray, 354 
cano, -ere, to sing, 387 
capesso, -ere, to lay hold of, 390 
capio, -ere, to take, 331, 368 
carpo, -ere, to pluck, 375 
caveo,-ere, to take heed, 357 
cedo, give, 417 
cedo, -ere, to yield, 374 
cello, I impel, 386 
cSno, -are, to dine, 278 
censeo,-ere, to value, think, 358 
cerno, -ere, to see, discern, 388 
cettS, give, 417 



cieo, -ere 
cio, -ire 



re { 
e ) 



to rouse, 362 



cingo, -ere, to gird, 378 
circumdo,-are, to surround, 349 
circumfundo, -ere, to surround, 

373 
circumsedeo,-ere, to sit around, 

361 
circumsto,-are, to stand around, 

349 
clango, -ere, to clang, 381 
claudo, -ere, to shut, close, 371 
coalesco, -ere, to grow together, 

394 
coarguo, -ere, to convict, 366 
coemo,-ere, to buy together, 389 
coepi, coepisse, to have begun, 415 
cognosco, -ere, to know, 393 
cogo, -ere, to force (co-ago), 383 
cohaereo, -ere, to stick, 360 
collldo, -ere, to dash together, 

371 
colllgo, -ere, to collect, 383 
c51o, -ere, to cultivate, 386 
comMro, -ere, to burn [wholly), 

389 



279 — 



commmiscor, -I, to devise, 396 
committo, -ere, to commit, 374 
cOmo, -ere, to adorn, 385 
compesco, -ere, to restrain, 393 
compingo, -ere, to drive tight, 382 
compleo, -ere, to fill (up), 356 
comprinio, -ere, to press to- 
gether, 389 
concino, -ere, to sound together, 

387 
concio, -Ire, to call together, 362 
concludo, -ere, to shut up, 371 
concupisco, -ere, to covet, 394 
concurro, -ere, to run together, 

387 
concutio, -ere, to shake, 368 
condo, -ere, to found, 372 
condolesco,-ere, to feel pain, 394 
confero, -re, to collect, 404 
conficio, -ere, to make, 368 
confido, -ere, to confide, 373 
conflteor, -eri, to confess, 364 
confllgo, -ere, to fight, 378 
confodio, -ere, to pick out, 368 
confringo, -ere, to break in two, 

383 
congero, -ere, to bring together, 

389 
congruo, -ere, to agree, 366 
cOnlveo, -ere, to shut the eyes, 

357 
conscisco, -ere, to bring upon, 

394 
ccnscribo, -ere, to frame, 375 
consero, -ere, to plant, 388 
consido, -ere, to settle, 374 
conspergo, -Sre, to sprinkle, 384 
consto, -are, to consist, 349 
construo, -ere, to construct, 367 
consuesco, -ere, to be wont, 393 
consulo, -ere, to counsel, 386 
consumo, -ere, to consume, 385 



contemno, -ere, to despise, 385 
contendo, -ere, to exert, 371 
contero, -ere, to rub off, 388 
conticesco, -ere, to become still, 

394 
contmeC, -ere, to hold together, 

358 
contraho, -ere, to contract, 378 
contremisco,-ere, to tremble, 394 
contrlbuo, -ere, to contribute, 

366 
contundo, -ere, to break down, 

371 
convalesco, -ere, to recover, 394 
coquo, -ere, to cook, bake, 378 
corrigo, -ere, to correct, 378 
corrumpo, -ere, to corrupt, 376 
corriio,-ere, to fall to the ground, 

366 
crebresco, -ere, to become fre- 
quent, 395 
credo, -ere, to believe, 372 
crepo, -are, to creak, 347 
cresco, -ere, to grow, 393 
cubo, -are, to lie down, 347 
cudo, -ere, to forge, 373 
cupio, -ere, to desire, 332, 368 
curro, -ere, to run, 370, 387 

D. 

decerno, -ere, to determine, 388 
decerpo, -ere, to pluck, 375 
decet, it becomes, 420 
decido, -ere, to cut down, 371 
decipio, -ere, to deceive, 368 
dedecet, it is unbecoming, 420 
dedisco, -ere, to unlearn, 393 
defendo, -ere, to defend, 373 
dSletiscor, -T, to be worn out, 396 
defungor, -T, to discharge, 396 
deglubo, -ere, to skin, 375 
dego,-ere, to spend (&e-&gd), 383 



280 — 



deleo, -ere, to destroy, 351, 356 
deligo, -ere, to choose, 383 
delltesco, -ere, to hide away, 394 
demo, -ere, to take away, 385 
dSpello, -ere, to dispel, 387 
dependeo, -ere, to hang down, 

361 
deposco, -ere, to request, 393 
depso, -ere, to knead, 390 
derldeo, -ere, to laugh at, 360 
describe, -ere, to describe, 375 
deseco, -are, to cut down, 347 
desero, -ere, to forsake, 388 
deslno, -ere, to leave off, 388 
desipio, -ere, to be foolish , 368 
despicio, -gre, to despise, 368 
despondeo, -ere, to promise, 361 
desum, deesse, to be wanting, 306 
detego, -ere, to discover, 378 
detero, -ere, to wear away, 388 
devineio, -ire, to bind, 398 
dev6veo,-ere,£o vow, devote, 357 
dico, -ere, to say, tell, 336, 378 
differo, -re, to defer, 404 
diffiteor, -eri, to disavow, 364 
diffundo, -ere, to pour forth, 373 
dllabor, -l, to fall asunder, 396 
dlligo, -ere, to love, 383 
dimico, -are, to fight, 347 
dingo, -ere, to direct, 378 
diriio, -ere, to destroy, 366 
discerno,-ere, to distinguish, 388 
discerpo, -ere, to tear asunder, 

375 
discindo, -ere, to split, 374 
disco, -ere, to learn, 370, 393 
discrepo, -are, to disagree, 347 
dissero, -ere, to discourse, 388 
dissideo, -ere, to disagree, 361 
dissilio, -ire, to burst asunder, 

398 
dissuadeo, -ere, to dissuade, 360 



distinguo, -ere, to distinguish, 

378 
disto, -are, to be distant, 349 
distribiio, -ere, to distribute, 366 
dltesco, -ere, to grow rich, 395 
divido, -ere, to divide, 371 
do, -are, to give, 349, 370 
doceo, -ere, to teach, 358 
domo, -are, to tame, 347 
duco, -ere, to lead, 336, 378 
dulcesco, -ere, to become sweet, 

395 
duresco, -ere, to grow hard, 395 

E. 

edisco, -ere, to learn by heart, 

393 
edo, -ere, to eat y 373, 410 
edo, -ere, to give out, 372 
educo, -ere, to lead forth, 378 
effero, -re, to carry out, 404 
efferveseo, -ere, to boil up, 394 
effloresco, -ere, to begin to 

bloom, 394 
effodio, -ere, to dig out, 368 
effringo,-ere, to break open, 383 
effundo, -ere, to pour out, 373 
egeo, -ere, to be in want, 353 
elicio, -ere, to entice out, 368 
elido, -ere, to strike out, 371 
eligo, -ere, to elect, 383 
Srnico, -are, to shine forth, 347 
emmeo, -ere, to be prominent, 

353 
emo, -ere, to buy, 389 
eneco, -are, to slay, 347 
eo, ire, to go, 406 
erubesco, -ere, to turn red, 394 
erumpo, -ere, to break out, 376 
eruo, -ere, to dig out, 366 
Gsurio, -ire, to want to eat, 398 
evado, -ere, to turn out, 371 



— 281 



evanescO, -ere", to vanish, 395 
everto, -ere, to overthrow, 373 
evomo, -ere, to vomit up, 386 
exardesco, -ere, to take fire, 394 
excello, -ere, to excel, 386 
excldo, -ere, to hew out, 371 
excindo, -ere, to destroy, 374 
exhaurio, -ire, to exhaust, 398 
expergiscor, -I, to awake, 396 
experior, -Iri, to try, 399 
explico, -are, to unfold, 347 
explodo, -ere, to hiss off, 371 
exposco, -ere, to request earn- 
estly, 393 
exprimo, -ere, to press out, 389 
exsisto, -ere, to come forth, 374 
exstinguo, -ere, to put out, 378 
exsto, -are, to exist, 349 
extendo, -ere, to stretch out, 371 
extimesco, -ere, to fear, 394 
exuo, -ere, to put off, 366 

F. 

facesso, -ere, to accomplish, 390 
facio, -ere, to do, make, 368 
fallo, -ere, to cheat, 387 
farcio, -ire, to stuff, 398 
fan, to speak, 416 
fateor, -eri, to confess, 364 
faveo, -ere, to favor, 357 
fendo, I fend, 373 
ferio, -Ire, to strike, beat, 398 
fero, -re, to bear, 336, 389, 403 
ferocio, -ire, to be unruly, 398 
ferveo, -ere, to glow, 357 
fido, -ere, to trust, confide, 373 
figo, -ere, to fix, 379 
findo, -ere, to split, cleave 374 
fingo, -ere, to fashion, 379 
tio, fieri, to become, 368, 411 
flaveo, -ere, to be golden yellow, 
354 



flavesco, -ere, to become yellow, 

394 
flecto, -ere, to bend, 380 
fleo, -ere, to weep, 356 
fligo, -ere, to strike, 378 
floreo, -ere, to blossom, 353 
fluctuo, -are, to wave, 365 
fluo, -ere, to flow, 367 
fodio, -ere, to dig, 332, 368 
forem, / should be, 418 
foveo, -ere, to cherish, 357 
frango, -ere, to break, 385 
fremo, -ere, to growl, 386 
frico, -are, to rub, 347 
frigeo, -ere, to be cold, 359 
friior, -I, to enjoy, 396 
fugio, -ere, to flee, 332, 368 
fulcio, -ire, to support, 398 
fulgeo, -ere to shine, 360 
fundo, -ere, to pour, 373 
fungor, -I, to discharge, 396 
furo, -ere, to rage, 389 

G. 

gaudeo, -ere, to rejoice, 363 
gemo, -ere, to groan, 386 
gero, -ere, to carry on, 389 
gigno, -ere, to beget, 386 
glisco, -ere, to grow up, 393 
glubo, -ere, to peel, 375 
gradior, -T, to step, 396 
grandesco, -ere, to grow, 395 
grave sco, -ere, to grow heavy, 

395 
gruo or ruo ? 366 

H. 

haereo, -ere, to hang, 360 
haurio, -ire, to draw, 398 
hebeo, -ere, to be blunt, 354 
hebesco, -ere, to grow dull, 394 
hisco, -ere, to yawn, 394 



— 282 



horreo, -ere, to shudder, 353 
horresco, -ere, to stand on end, 

394 
humeo, -ere, to be moist, 354 

I. 

ico, -ere, to strike, 383 
illino, -ere, to bedaub, 388 
illucesco, -ere, to grow light, 

394 
illudo, -ere, to mode, 371 
imbuo, -ere, to dip, dye, 366 
immrneo, -ere, to threaten, 354 
imminuo, -ere, to lessen, 366 
impendeo, -ere, to hang over, 

361 
impleo, -ere, to fill (up), 356 
implico, -are, to involve, 347 
incesso, -ere, to fall upon, 390 
incido, -ere, to fall into, 371 
incido, -ere, to engrave, 371 
incipio, -ere*, to begin, 368 
incolo, -ere, to inhabit, 386 
increpo, -are, to scold, 347 
incubo, -are, to lie upon, 347 
indico, -ere, to declare, 378 
indiggo, -ere, to be in want, 353 
indolesco, -ere, to feel pain, 394 
indulgeo, -ere, to indulge, 359 
induo, -ere, to put on, 366 
ineo, -ire, to go into, 407 
infero, -re, to carry into, 404 
ingemisco, -ere, to groan, 394 
ingriio, -ere, to rush, 366 
innotesco,-ere,fo becomeknown, 

395 
inquam, I say, 416 
inquiro, -ere, to inquire, 389 
insero, -ere, to plant in, 388 
ins6ro, -ere, to insert, 388 
insideo, -ere, to sit upon, 361 
instruo, -ere, to instruct, 367 



insum, inesse, to be in, 306 
integrasco, -ere, to begin anew, 

395 
intellego, -ere, to understand, 

383 
intereo, -ire, to perish, 407 
interficio, -ere, to kill, 368, 413 
intersum,interesse, to be between, 

306 
intumesco, -ere, to swell, 394 
invenio, -ire, to find out, 398 
inveterasco, -ere, to grow old, 

394 
in video, -ere, to envy, 361 
Irascor, -l, to grow angry, 396 
irrepo, -ere, to creep into } 375 

J. 

jacio, -ere, to throw, 368 
jubeo, -ere, to order, 360 
jungo, -ere, to join, 378 
jfiro, -are, to swear, 278 
juvenesco, -ere, to grow young } 

395 
juvo, -are, to assist, 348 

L. 

labor, -i, to glide, roll on, 396 
lacesso, -ere, to excite, 390 
lacio, / entice, 368 
laedo, -ere, to violate, hurt, 371 
lambo, -ere, to lick, 376 
langueo, -ere, to be weary, 353 
lateo, -ere, to be hid, 353 
lavo, -are, to wash, 348 
lego, -ere, to read, 383 
libet, it pleases, 420 
licet, it is lawful, 420 
lino, -ere, to smear, 388 
linquo, -ere, to leave, 383 
liquefacio, -ere, to liquefy, 413 
liqueo, -ere, to be fluid, 353 



— 283 — 



liquet, it is clear, 420 
liveo, -ere, to be pale, 354 
loquor, -I, to speak, 396 
luceo, -ere, to shine, 359 
liido, -Sre, to play, 371 
liigeo, -ere, to mourn, 359 
liio, -ere, to atone for, 366 
luo, -ere, to wash, 366 

M. 

macresco, -ere, to grow meager, 

395 
madeo, -ere, to be wet, 353 
maereo, -ere, to grieve, 354 
malo, malle, to be more willing, 

405 
mando, -ere, to chew, 373 
maneo, -ere, to remain, 360 
niansuefacio, -ere, to lame, 413 
maturesco, -ere, to ripen, 395 
medeor, -eri, to cure, 364 
memini, -isse, to remember, 415 
mergo, -ere, to dip in, 384 
metior, -Iri, to measure, 399 
meto, -ere, to reap, 374 
metuo, -ere, to fear, 366 
mico, -are, to shine, 347 
mmiscor, / recollect, 396 
minuo, -ere, to lessen, 366 
misceo, -ere, to mix, 358 
misereor, -eri, to have pity, 364 
miseret, it excites pity, 420 
mltesco, -ere, to become mild, 

395 
mitto, -ere, to send, 374 
molo, -ere, to grind, 386 
mordeo, -ere, to bite, 361 
morior, -I, to die, 396 
moveo, -ere, to move, 357 
mulceo, -ere, to soothe, 360 
mulgeo, -ere, to milk, 360 



N. 
nanciscor,-i, to get, 396 
nascor, -I, to be born, 396 
necto, -ere, to tie, 380 
neglego, -ere, to neglect, 383 
neo, -ere, to spin, 356 
nequeo, -Tre, not to be able, 409 
nigresco, -ere, to become black, 

395 
ningo, -ere, to snow, 381 
niteo, -ere, to glitter, 353 
nitor, -1, to stay one's self on, 396 
nolo, nolle, to be unwilling, 405 
nosco, -ere, to (learn to) know, 

393 
nubo, -ere, to marry, 375 
niio, / nod, 366 

O. 

obdormisco, -ere, to fall asleep, 

394 
obeo, -ire, to meet, 407 
objicio, -ere, to throw to, 368 
obliviscor, -I, to forget, 396 
obmutesco, -ere, to grow dumb, 

395 
obruo, -ere, to cover, 366 
obsideo, -ere, to besiege, 361 
obsisto, -ere, to oppose, 374 
obsoleo, -ere, to go out of use, 

356 
obsolesco, -ere, to become 06- 

solete, 394 
obsiim, obesse, to be in the way % 

306 
obtineo, -ere, to occupy, 358 
obtundo, -ere, to stun, 371 
occido, -ere, to set, 371 
occido, -ere, to kill, 371 
oeciilo, -ere, to conceal, 386 
occurro, -ere, to meet, 387 
odi, -isse, to hate, 415 



284 — 



offendo, -ere, to offend, 373 
oleo, -ere, to smell, 353 
oleo, / grow, 356 
oportet, it is needful, 420 
opperior, -iri, to await, 399 
oppono, -ere, to oppose, 386 
ordior, -iri, to begin, 399 
orior, -iri, to rise, 399 
ostendo, -ere, to show, 371 

Po 

paciscor, -T, to strike a bargain, 

396 
paenitet, it causes sorrow, 420 
palleo, -ere, to look pale, 353 
pallesco, -ere, to turn pale, 394 
pando, -ere, to spread, 374 
pango,-ere, to strike, drive, 382 
pango, -ere, to bargain, 382 
parco, -ere, to spare, 382 
pario, -ere, to bring forth, 368 
pasco, -ere, to graze, 393 
pascor, -l, to feed, 396 
patefaeio, -ere, to open, 332, 368 
pateo, -ere, to stand open, 353 
patior, -i, to suffer, 396 
paveo, -ere, to fear, 357 
pecto, -ere, to comb, 380 
pellicio, -ere, to allure, 368 
pello, -ere, to drive (away), 387 
pendeo, -ere, to hang, 361 
pendo, -ere, to weigh, 371 
perago, -ere, to accomplish, 383 
percello, -ere, to beat down, 386 
percenseo, -ere, to survey, 358 
perdo, -ere, to ruin, 372 
pereo, -IrS, to perish, 408 
perficio, -ere, to finish, 368 
perfruor, -i, to enjoy fully, 396 
pergo, see perrigo 
perimo, -ere, to slay, 389 
perl ego, -ere, to read through, 383 



permitto, -ere, to permit, 374 
permuleeo, -ere, to appease, 360 
perpetior, -I, to endure, 396 
(perrigo) pergo, -ere, to go on, 

378 
perrumpo,-ere,fo break through, 

376 
persuadeo,-ere, to persuade, 360 
pertlneo, -ere, to pertain, 358 
pessumdo, -are, to ruin, 349 
peto, -ere, to seek, 374 
piget, it grieves, 420 
pingo, -ere, to paint, 379 
pinguesco, -ere, to grow fat, 395 
pinso, -ere, to pound, 390 
plango, -ere, to beat, lament, 378 
plaudo, -ere, to applaud, 371 
plecto, -ere, to beat, 380 
plector, 396 
pleo, I fill, 356 
plico, I fold, 347 
plumesco, -ere, to get feathers, 

395 
pluo, -ere, to rain, 366 
polleo, -ere, to be powerful, 354 
pono, -ere, to place, 386 
poseo, -ere, to demand, 370, 393 
possideo, -ere, to possess, 361 
possum, posse, to be able, 401 
poto, -lire, to drink, 278, 347 
praecello, -ere, to excel, 386 
praecino,-ere, to sing to one, 387 
praedico, -ere, to predict, 378 
praefero, -re, to prefer, 404 
praescrlbo, -ere, to prescribe, 375 
praesideo, -ere, to preside, 361 
praesto, -are, to afford, 349 
praesum, praeessg, to be over, 

306 
praetereo, -ire, to p)ctss by, 407 
prandeo, -ere, to breakfast, 361 
prehendo, -ere, to seize, 373 



— 285 — 



premo, -gre, to press, 389 
proflciscSr, -I, to set out, start, 

396 
profligo,-are, to strike down,3!8 
prouiitto, -ere, to promise, 374 
promo, -ere, to take out, 385 
prosterno, -ere, to overthrow, 

388 
prosum, prodesse, to be useful, 

306 
protego, -ere, to protect, 378 
provided, -ere, to provide, 361 
psailo, -ere, to play on the ci- 
thern, 389 
pudet, it shames, 420 
puerasco, -ere, to become a 

child, 395 
pungo, -ere, to pierce, sting, 382 
putresco, -ere, to rot, 394 

Qo 

quaero, -ere, to seek, desire, 389 
quaeso, I beseech, 418 
quatio, -ere, to shake, 332, 368 
queo, -Ire, to be able, 409 
queror, -I, to complain, 396 
quiesco, -ere, to rest, 393 

K, 

rado, -ere, to scrape, 371 
rapio, -ere, to seize, 332, 368 
recenseo, -ere, to review, 358 
recrudesco, -ere, to break open 

afresh, 395 
recurro, -ere, to run back, 387 
redargiio, -ere, to refute, 366 
reddo, -ere, to give back, 372 
redeo, -ire, to return, 407 
rgdimo, -ere, to buy back, 389 
refello, -ere, to refute, 387 
refercio, -ire, to cram, 398 
refero, -re, to bring back, 404 



refluo, -ere, to flow back, 367 
rego, -ere, to rule, govern, 378 
relego, -ere, to read over, 383 
relinquo, -ere, to leave {behind), 

383 
remaneo, -ere, to remain, 360 
rSmmiscor, -i, to remember, 396 
renideo, -ere, to shine, 354 
reor, -eri, to think, 364 
repello, -ere, to repel, 387 
reperlo, -Ire, to find, 398 
repeto, -ere, to repeat, 374 
repleo, -ere, to fill (up), 356 
repo, -ere, to creep, crawl, 375 
reposco, -ere, to demand back, 

393 
requleseo, -ere, to rest, 393 
resideo, -ere, to remain behind, 

361 
reslpisco, -ere, to come to one's 

self again, 394 
resono, -are, to resound, 347 
respicio, -ere, to consider, 368 
respondeo, -ere, to answer, 361 
restituo, -ere, to restore, 366 
revertor, -% to turn back, 396 
revivisco, -ere, to revive, 394 
rldeo, -ere, to laugh, 360 
rigeo, -ere, to be stiff, 353 
rodo, -ere, to gnaw, 371 
riibeo, -ere, to be red, 353 
rumpo, -ere, to break, 376 
ruo, -ere, to rush forth, 366 

S. 
saepio, -ire, to hedge in, 398 
salio, -Ire, to leap, 398 
salve, hail, 417 
sancio, -Ire, to sanction, 398 
sapio, -ere, to be*wise, 368 
sarcio, -Ire, to mend, 398 
satisdo, -are, to give bail, 349 



286 



scabo, -ere, to scratch, 376 
scalpo, -ere, to carve, 375 
scando, -ere, to climb, 373 
scateo, -ere, to gush, 354 
scindo, -ere, to cut, 374 
scio, -ire, to know, 338 
sciseo, -ere, to decree, 394 
seribo, -ere, to write, 375 
sculpo, -ere, to chisel, 375 
seco, -are, to cut, 347 
sedeo, -ere, to sit, 361 
senesco, -ere, to grow old, 394 
sentio,-ire, to feel, perceive, 398 
sepelio, -ire, to bury, 398 
sequor, -i, to follow, 396 
sero, -ere, to sow, 388 
sero, -ere, to join, 388 
serpo, -ere, to creep, 375 
sldo, -ere, to sit down, 374 
sileo, -ere, to be silent, 353 
sino, -ere, to let, 388 
sisto, -ere, to stop, 374 
soleo, -ere, to be wont, 363 
solvo, -ere, to loose, 366 
sono, -are, to sound, 347 
sorbeo, -ere, to sip, 353 
sordeo, -ere, to be dirty, 353 
spargo, -ere, to scatter, 384 
specio, I see, 368 
sperno, -ere, to despise, 388 
splendeo, -ere, to gleam, 353 
spondeo, -ere, to pledge, 361 
spuo, -ere, to spit, 366 
squaleo, -ere, to be filthy, 354 
statuo, -ere, to set, place, 366 
sterno, -ere, to strew, 388 
sternuo, -erg, to sneeze, 366 
sterto, -ere, to snore, 373 
stinguo, I put out, 378 
sto, stare, to siand, 349, 370 
strepo,-ere, to make a noise, 376 
str!deo ; -ere, to whiz, creak, 361 



stringo, -ere, to bind, 379 
struo, -ere, to build, 367 
studeo, -ere, to be zealous, 353 
stiipeo, -ere, to be amazed, 353 
suadeo, -ere, to advise, 360 
siibeo, -ire, to come under, 407 
subigo, -ere, to subdue, 383 
subjicio, -ere, to subject, 368 
subsum, subesse, to be under, 306 
succenseo, -ere, to be angry, 353 
succurro, -ere, to succor, 387 
suesco, -ere, to become used, 393 
stigo, -ere, to suck, 378 
sum, esse, to be, 303 
sumo, -ere, to take, 385 
suo, -ere, to sew, 366 
superbio, -ire, to be proud, 398 
supersedes, -ere, to forbear, 361 
supersum, superesse, to remain 

over, 306 
supprimo, -ere, to keep back, 389 
(surrigo) surgo, -ere, to rise, 378 
suspendo, -ere, to hang, 371 

T. 

taedet, it wearies, 420 
tango, -ere, to touch, 382 
tego, -ere, to cover, 378 
temno, I despise, 385 
tendo, -ere, to spread, 371 
teneo, -ere, to hold, 358 
teneresco, -ere, to grow tender, 

395 
tergeo,-ere)^ m . 360 384 
tergo, -ere ) 

tero, -ere, to rub, wear out, 388 
texo, -ere, to weave, 390 
timeo, -ere, to fear, 353 
tingo (tinguo), -ere, to stain, 378 
tollo, -ere, to lift, take away, 389 
tondeo, -ere, to shear, 361 
tono, -are, to thunder, 347 



28T — 



torpeo, -ere, to be numb, 353 
torqueo, -ere, to torture, 359 
torreo, -ere, to roast, 358 
trado, -ere, to deliver, 372 
traho, -ere, to draw, 378 
transeo, -ire, to pass over, 407 
treuio, -ere, to tremble, 386 
tribiio, -ere, to confer on, 366 
trudo, -ere, to thrust, 371 
tdmeo, -ere, to swell, 353 
tundo, -ere, to thump, 371 
turgeo, -ere, to swell, 360 

Uo 

ulciscor, -T, to avenge, 396 
ungo(unguo), -ere, to anoint, 378 
urgeo, -ere, to urge, 360 
Tiro, -ere, to burn, 389 
fitor, -i, to use, 396 



vado, -ere, to go, 371 

vale, farewell, 417 



veho, -ere, to carry, 378 
vello, -erg, to pluck, pull, 389 
vendo, -ere, to sell f 372 
vSneo, -ire, to be for sale, 408 
venio, -ire, to come, 398 
venumdo, -&re, to sell, 349 
vergo, -ere, to verge, 384 
verro, -ere, to sweep, 389 
verto, -ere, to turn, 373 
vescSr, -I, to feed upon, eat, 396 
veto, -are, to forbid, 347 
video, -ere, to see, 361 
vigeo, -ere, to be vigorous, 353 
vilesco, -ere, to become vile, 395 
vincio, -ire, to bind, 398 
vinco, -ere, to conquer, 383 
vireo, -ere, to be green, 353 
viso, -ere, to visit, 390 
vivo, -ere, to live, 367 
volo, velle, to be willing, 405 
volvo, -ere, to roll, turn, 366 
vomo, -ere, to vomit, 386 
voveo, -ere, to vow ) 357 



— 288 — 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 

The references are to paragraphs. 



A. 

-a, Nouns in, of 1st decl., 56; of 3d 
decl., 83; ace. sing. 3d decl., 153; 
changed in compounds, 517 

a, ab, abs, 655; with abl. of se- 
paration, 620; of agent, 603; 
in compounds, 519; with nega- 
tive force, 531. 2 

Abbreviations, 944 

abesse — non multum abest quin, 
nihil abest quin, 766; tantum ab- 
est ut. .ut, 760 

abhinc, denoting time, 674 

abhorrere, with abl., 620, 621 

Ablative, 49; sing, of 3d decl., 140, 
144; Syntax, 603-628; abl. of 
agent, 603; of cause, 603, 604; 
of comparison, 609-612 ; of dif- 
ference, 612; of limitation, 608; 
of manner, 613, 614; with opus 
est, 624; of means or instru- 
ment, 605-607; of plenty and 
want,622,623; of price, 617-619; 
of quality, 615, 616; of separa- 
tion, 620, 621; in special con- 
structions, 625; of time, 612; with 
prepositions, 445, 446, 655-671; 
of place, 687, 688; with names 
of towns, 683-686; of distance 
how far, 681 

Ablative absolute, 836, 837 

absolvere, with gen., 570 

absque, 656 



abstinere, with abl., 620 

Abstract substantives, 37; for 
concretes, 691, 693; in the plur., 
694, 695; derivation, 488, 493 

abundare, with abl, 622 

-abus for -is, 1st decl., 59 

abtiti, with abl., 626 

ac, atque, 849 

Acatalectic verses, 907 

Accent, rules of, 29-31 

acceptus, with dat, 598 

accidit, with ut, 759 

accipere, with dat. of purpose, 
595; with ace. & infin., 812; with 
gerundive, 841 

accusare, with gen., 570 

Accusative, 49; sing: 3d decl., 143; 
plur., 148; in -as, 157; Syntax, 
574-586; with active transitive 
verbs, 574; with intransitive 
verbs, 575, 576; with compound 
verbs, 577; with verbs of nam- 
ing, 578; with verbs of teaching 
and asking, 579-582; with im- 
personal verbs, 583, 584; in ex- 
clamations, 585; used adver- 
bially, 586; with prepositions, 
629-654; with names of towns, 
683; to denote space, 679, 680; 
time how long, 674; how old, 678 

Accusative with Infin., 810-820; 
as subject, 811; as object, 812; 
after verbs of wishing, &c, 



— 289 — 



814, 815; tenses, 818, 819; in 
indirect discourse, 825; how to 
translate, 816 
Active voice, 272; its participles, 

829 
ad, 629; assimilated in com- 
position, 520 ; in compounds 
with dat, 592 ; with gerund, 845 ; 
with interest, 573; with adjec- 
tives signifying usef unsuitable, 
599 
adducere, with ut, 758 
-ades, suffix in patronymics,^! 
adipisci, with ut, 758 
Adjectives, 32, 198-227; of 1st 
and 2d decl, 72-77; of 3d decl., 
137-142 ; of three terminations, 
199; of two terminations, 200; 
of one termination, 141, 201; de- 
fective, 203, 204; indeclinable, 
205; indefinite, 268; pronominal, 
269; comparison, 207-227; used 
as substantives, 701, 702; used 
instead of adverbs, 550; used 
instead of possessives, 703; de- 
noting a part of a thing, 704; 
appositive, 550 ; attributive, 546; 
predicative, 536, 544; in re- 
lative clauses, 554; with gen., 
567; with dat., 598-600; with 
abl, 623, 625; position, 559, 561; 
derivation, 496-511; special 
uses, 701-709; in abl. absol, 836 

Adjuncts of the predicate, 558; 
of the subject, 558 

adjuvare, with ace, 589 

admonere, with gen., 568; with ut, 
758; with ace. & inf., 814 

Adonic verse, 925. l 

adspergere, with dat. & ace, 593 

adulescens for in adulescentia, 
691; in adulescentia, 673 



Advantage, dative of, 587 
advenire, with in & ace, 690 
adventu, abl. of time, 673 
Adverbial accusative, 586; phra- 
ses, 431 
Adverbs, 32,424-446; derivation 
of, 425-434; from adjectives of 
the 1st & 2d decl., 425; of the 3d 
decl., 426; of time, 437; of man- 
ner, 438; of order, 242; nu- 
meral, 241; of place, 436; used 
as prepositions, 436; compari- 
son, 440-442; with gen., 566. 6; 
correlative, 439; position, 562 
Adversative conjunctions, 451,853 
adversus, adversum, 632 
ae, changed in compounds, 517 
aedes & templum omitted, 566. 9 
aeger, with abl. , 604 
aequalis, w. gen., 598 
aequare, w. ace 589 
aeque ac, 849 

aestimare, w. gen., 569; w. abl., 617 
aetate, abl. of time, 673 
-aeus, suffix, 508 
afl&tim, w. gen., 566. 6 
afferre, w. dat., 592 
afficere, w T . abl., 607 
affirmare, with ace & infin., 812 
Agent, abl. of, with a or ab, 603; 
dat.of,596,597; w. opera, per, 606 
agere, with annus, to express how 
old, 678; id agere, with ut, 758 
agnomen, 194 

Agreement of predicate and sub- 
ject, 536-539; of attribute and 
substantive, 546, 547; of appo- 
sition and substantive, 548-550; 
of pronoun & antecedent, 551- 
557 
ajo, conjugated, 416; its use, 823 
-31, Nouns in, 3d decl., 91 



290 — 



Alcaic verses,925.9.io;stanza,927.i 

Alcmanian stanza, 927. 9 

ail- in aliquis rejected, 723, 762 

alienare, with a and abl., 621 

alienus, with abl, 925 

allquanto, with comparatives ,1^ 

aliquantum, w. gen., 566. 6 

aliquid, with gen., 566.5; used ad- 
verbially, 586 

aliquis, 266; its use, 722; after si 
emphatic, 723 

-alls, suffix, 501 

aliter atque, 849 

alius, 202, 728; alius, .alius, alii. . 
alii, 729; quantity in gen., 861 

Alphabet, 3; vowels and diph- 
thongs, 4, 5; consonants, 6, 7 

alter, 202, 728; alter .. alter, 729 

Alternative questions, 798 

altero tanto, 612 

alter uter, 202 

amans, w. gen., 567. 2 

amicus, w. dat. & gen., 598 

amplius, without quam, 610 

an, interrog., 797, 798; annon, 798 

Anacrusis, 925. 10 

anceps syllaba, 908 

animadvertere, w. ace. & inf., 812 

Animals, Names of, 47 

animo, abl. of manner, 613; amnio 
aequo, without cum, 613 

Answer, Form of, 799 

ante, 631; in composition, 521; in 
compounds with dat. 592; to de- 
note distance of time, 675; with 
quam, 675; ante diem, 931 

Antecedent of relative, 553; in- 
corporated in the relative 
clause, 719; agreement, 551-557 

antepenult, 25 

autequam, 779, 780 

-anus, suffix, 504, 505, 507 



anxius, with abl., 604 

Apocope, 894 

Apodosis, 787 

apparere, with two nom., 540 

apparet, with ace. & inf., 811 

appellare, with two ace, 578 

appellari, with two nom., 540 

Appendix to 3d conjugation, 331 

Apposition,548; in relative clause, 
554; gen. of specification in its 
stead, 566. 7; expressing time, 
549; with names of towns, 684, 
685; agreement, 548-550 

aptus, with dat., 598; with gerund. 
& gerundive, 844; with qui & sub- 
junct, 793 

apud, 630 

-ar, Nouns in, 3d decl., 94, 95 

arbitrari, with two ace, 578; with 
ace. &inf, 812 

arcessere, with gen., 570 

Archilochian verse, 925. 11; stan- 
zas, 927. 10-13 

arguere, with gen., 570 

-aris, suffix, 501 

Aristophanic verse, 925. 2 

-armm, suffix, 482 

-arms, suffix, 501 

Arsis, 900 

Article, not in Latin, 57 

as, Unit of value, 937 

-as, Nouns in, 1st decl., 60; 3d 
decl., 105-107; -as, Greek ace. pi. 
3d decl., 157; suffix, 507 

Asclepiadean verses, 925. 7. 8; 
stanzas, 827. 4-8 

-asco, Yerbs in, 472 

assequi, with ut, 758 

Assimilation of prepositions, 518 

assuescere, with inf., 809 

Asyndeton, 850 

at/853 



— 291 



atque, 849; atque is, 715 

atqui, 853 

Attraction of mood, 826 

Attribute, its agreement, 546, 547 

Attributive adjective, 546 

-atus, suffix, 503 

au, changed in compounds, 517 

audere, with inf., 809 

audire, with ace. & inf., 812; with 

pres. participle, 813, 835 
audltu, 848 
aureus, the coin, 938 
-aus, Nouns in, 3d decl., 123 
aut, 852 • 

autem, 853; its place, 564 
Authors, Latin, 945 
Auxiliary esse, 303 
-ax, Nouns in, 3d decl., 132; suffix, 

498 



b changed to p, 375 

belli, in connection with domi, 
686; bello Antiochi, 673; bello 
Persico, 673; in bello, 673 

bene, compared 441; with emere 
& vendere, 619 

benedicere, with dat, 589 

-ber, Nouns in, 3d decl., 96 

-"bills, suffix, 498 

bini, instead of duo, 238 

bis die, abl. of time, 673 

blandiri, with dat., 589 

-bs, Nouns in, 3d decl., 124-126 

-buliim, suffix, 494 

-bundus, suffix, 496 

C. 

-c, Nouns in, 3d decl., 89 
caelum, decl., 191 
Caesura, 909-911; of the hexa- 
meter, 915; of the trimeter, 924 



Calendar, Roman, 929-936 

Calends, 929 

capio, -ere, conjugated, 331 

Capital initial letters, 3 

capitis et capite damnare, 570 

caput, 129 

Cardinal numerals, 228-233 



carere, with abl., 622 
cams, with dat., 598 
Case-endings of the 5 declen- 
sions, 54 
Cases, 35,49; dependent, 50; in- 
dependent, 50; of adjectives & 
nouns used adverbially, 430; 
construction of, 566-690 
casu, abl. of manner, 614 
casus obliqui, 50; recti, 50 
Catalectic verses, 907 
causa, w. gen. &mea,tua &c, 566. 8, 
604; w. gerund & gerundive, 843 
Causal clauses, w. subjunctive,! '82 
Causal conjunctions, 452, 456; 

their uses, 781-786,851 
cave, cave ne, in prohibitions, 806 
cavere, with dat. & ace, 591 
-ce, -cine, appended to hie, 254 
eel are, with two ace, 579 
celer, special forms of, 138, 140 
-ceps, Compounds in, 3d decl., 126 
cernere, with ace. & inf., 812; with 

pres. part., 813 
cerneres, potential subjunct, 750 
certe, certo, 430 
certum est, w. ace. & inf., 811 
ceteri, defective, 204, 728 
Characteristic of stem; 52 
circa, circum, 634; in composi- 
tion, 522; compounds of, w. ace, 
577 
circiter, 635 
circuire, 522 
circumdare, w. ace, 593 



— 292 — 



cis, citra, 633 

Classification of Verbs, 346- 
399 

coarguere, w. gen., 570 

cogere, with in & ace, 690 

cogitare, with ace. & inf., 812 

cognomen, 194; with dat., 594 

cognoscere, with ace. & inf., 812 

Collective noun, 38; with plural 
verb, 543 

collocare, to let, w. abl., 617; with 
in & abl., 689 

com = cum, in composition, 523; 
in compounds w. dat, 592 

Common gender, 45; common noun 
38; common quantity, 27, 863 

commonere, commonefacere,with 
gen., 568 

communis, w. gen., 567. 3; w. dat., 
598 

Comparative, how formed, 209; 
how declined, 139; wanting,224; 
with abl., 609; with the force of 
too, unusually , somewhat, 705 ; 
used in reference to only two 
objects, 709; its force increased, 
706; with -cuius, 510; followed 
by quam ut, quam qui w. sub- 
jnnct., 795 

Comparative conjunctions, 461, 
772; comparative value with 
verbs of "buying and selling ,619 

Comparison of adjectives, 207- 
227; irregular and defective, 
220-227; of participles, 227; of 
adverbs, 227, 440-442; of two 
qualities of the same object, 
708 

comperire, with ace. & inf., 812 

complere, with abl., 622 

complures, decl., 221 

compos, with gen., 567. 1 



Composition of Words, 465, 512- 

531 
Compound adjectives, 531; comp. 
forms of the verb, 303-315; 
comp. numerals, 231, 232; comp. 
substantives, 530; declined, 192; 
comp. tenses of the passive, 
309; comp. verbs, 513-529; comp. 
verses, 903, 925 
Compounds, Quantity, 883; sylla- 
bification, 24; of dare, 572; of 
esse, 306; of facere, 413; of ire, 
407; of prepositions with dai, 
592; of prepositions with aco., 
577 
con see com 
concedere, with ut, 758 
Concessive conjunctions, 458; 

uses, 767-771 
Concessive subjunctive, 753 
Concrete substantives, 37; used 

for abstracts, 691 
condemnare, with gen., 570 
Conditional conjunctions,457; use, 
787-790; conditional sentences, 
787-788; conditional wishes w, 
diim, modo, 790 
conducere, to hire, with abl., 617; 

with gerundive, 841 
conducit, with ace. & inf., 811 
confidere, with. dat. or abl., 628 
congregari, with in & ace, 690 
Conjugation, 35, 270, 295; First, 
316, 317, 327, 346-350; Second, 
318,319,328,351-364; Third,320, 
321, 329, 365-396; appendix to 
Third, verbs in 10, 331, 332; 
Fourth, 322,323,330,397, 398; of 
deponents, 324-330; periphra- 
stic, 311-314; special forms in 
conjug., 333-338; of irregular 
verbs, 400-413; of defective 



293 



verbs, 414-418; of impersonal 
verbs, 419-423 
Conjunctions, 32, 447-462; co-or- 
dinating, 448-453; use of, 849- 
857 ; subordinating, 454-462; 
use of, 749-790; place of, 564 
Conjunctive clauses, 755 ff. 
Consecutive conjunctions, 460; 

use of, 756-766 
consequi, with ut, 758 
considere, with in & abl., 689 
consilio, abl. of manner, 613 
Consonants, Classification of, 6 
Consonant-stems, 3d decl., 79, 81; 

of verbs, 339, 345 
constare, to cost, with abl., 617 
constat, with ace. & inf., 811 
constituere, with in &• abl., 689 
Construction of Cases, 566-690 
consul, used for consulatus, 692 
-consulere, its construction, 591; 

with ut, 758 
contendere, with ut, 758 
contentus, with abl., 625 
Continental pronunciation, 15 
continere ; vix me contineo quin, 

766 
contingit, with ut, 759 
contra, 636 

Contracted syllables, Quantity of, 
860; contracted vowels in con- 
jugation, 344 
convenire, with in & ace, 690 
convenit, w. ace. & inf. 811 
convincere, with gen., 570 
Co-ordinating conjunctions, 448- 

453; use of, 849-857 
Copulative conjunctions, 449; use 

of, 849-851 
coram, 658 
Correlatives, 269, 439 
Corresponsive conjunctions, 858 



Countries, Gender of names of, 42 

creare, with two ace, 578 

creari, with two nom., 540 

credere, with dai, 589; with two 
ace, 578; in the pass. w\ two nom., 
540; with ace. & inf., 812 

crederes, potential subjunct., 750 

credibile est, with ace & inf., 811 

crime or charge, gen. of, 570 

crimme or nomine, with gen., 570 

-crum, suffix, 495 

cujas, patriot adject., 264 

-culum, suffix, 494 

-cuius, suffix, 480, 510 

cum, prep., 659; with abl. of man- 
ner, 613; in composition, 523 

cum, conjunction; cum temporal, 
774; cum, whenever, 740; cum 
causal, 786; cum concessive, 
769; cum historical, 774; cum 
primum, 773; cum quis, 723, 762 

cum-tum, 857 

cunctus, Nouns with, in abl. with- 
out prep., 687 

-cundus, suffix, 496 

-cunque, appended to pronouns, 
258; followed by indie, 748 

cupere, w. inf. or w. ace & inf., 814 

cupidus, with gen., 567. l 

cura, ut, imperat. phrase, 806 

curare, w.ut, 758; w. gerundive, 841 

D. 

Dactylic Hexameter, 914 ff. 

damnare, with gen., 570. i 

dare, 349; with two ace, 578; with 

two dai, 595; with gerundive, 841 
Dates, Roman, 931; of year, 935; 

how to turn into English, 934 
Dative, 49 ; pi. 3d decl., 149 ; 4th deel. , 

172; Syntax, 587-602; indirect 

object, advantage, 587; with 



294 — 



intransitive verbs, 589; with 
transitive verbs, 588 ; with com- 
pounds of ad, ante, &c, 592; 
with verbs of twofold construc- 
tion, 593; of purpose, with verbs 
of giving and receiving, 595; 
ethical, 602; of agency, with 
gerundive, 596, 741, 840; with pas- 
sives, 590, 597; of possession, 
594; with adjectives, 598-600; 
with substantives, 601 
de, 657; with accusare, 570; ne- 
gative meaning in compounds, 
531. 2 
dea, deus, decl., 59, 67 
debere, with inf., 809; with the 

force of the potential, 747 
decedere, with abl, 620 
decet, dedecet, with ace, 583 
declarare, with ace. & inf., 812 
Declension, 35, 51; general rules, 
55; First, 56-62; Second, 63- 
71; Third, 78-170; Fourth, 
171-175; Fifth, 176-180; of ad- 
jectives,12-ll, 137-142; of com- 
pounds, 192. Case-endings of 
the 5 declensions, 54 
Defective substantives, in case, 
182-185; in number, 186-188 
defective adjectives, 203, 204 
defective comparison, 224, 225 
of adverbs, 442 ; defective 
verbs, 414-418 
deficere, with ace. , 589 
defigere, with in & abl., 689 
Degree of difference, in the abl. ,612 
delectari, with abl., 604 
demergere, with in & abl., 689 
demonstrate, with ace. & inf., 812 
Demonstrative pronouns, 252- 
254; position, 561; agreement, 
551, 552; where not used, 716 



Denominative inceptives, 391, 
395; denominative verbs, 475- 
479 

depellere, with abl., 620 

Dependent cases, 50 

Dependent clause, 742; in indi- 
rect discourse, 825; dependent 
uses of the subjunctive, 755 ff. 

Deponents, 276; conjugation of, 
324-330 ; of the first conj., 350 ; 
of the second, 364; of the third, 
396; of the fourth, 399; parti- 
ciples, 831 

Derivation of Words, 465, 467- 
511; of adjectives, 496-511; of 
verbs, 470-479 ; of substantives, 
480-495; of adverbs, 425-434 

Desiderative verbs, 473 

designate, with two ace, 578 

desinere, with inf., 809 

Determinative pronouns, 255 

deterrere, with abl., 620; with ne 
or quommus, 764 

deus, decl., 59, 67 

Diaeresis, in pronunciation, 13; 
in prosody, 892, 909 

Diastole, 895 

clicere, with two ace, 578; with ace 
& inf., 812 

dici, with two nom., 540; with nom. 
&inf., 821 

dictu, 848 

-dicus, Adjectives in, 216; quan- 
tity, 886 

dies, 180; in diem, 670; ante 
diem, 931 

differre, with a & abl., 621 

difficilis, 215; adverb., 429; with 
dat., 598; with gerund, or supine, 
848 

diffidere, with dat., 589, 628 

dignari, with abl., 625 



— 295 



dignus, with abl., 625; dignus qui, 

with subjunct., 793. c 
dillgens, with gen., 567. 2 
Dimeter, 904 
Diminutive substantives, 480, 481 ; 

adjectives, 510; verbs, 474 
Diphthongs, 5 
Dipody, 906 

Direct discourse, 823; dir. object, 
in the ace, 574-577; direct 
questions, 796-800 
dis- inseparable prep., 516; com- 
pounds of, with a <fc abl., 621 
discere, with inf., 809; with a, 

for doceri, 579 
discernere, with a & abl., 621 
discessu, abl. of time, 673 
discrepare, with a & abl., 621 
Disjunctive conjunctions, 450; 

use of, 852 
dispar, with dat, 598 
displicere, with dat., 589 
displicet, with ace. & inf., 811 
dissentire, with a and abl., 621 
dissimilis, 215; with dat., 598 
Distance how far in the ace. or 
abl., 681; of time how long be- 
fore or after, 675 
distare, with a & abl., 621 
Distich, 926; Elegiac D., 919 
distinguere, with a & abl., 621 
Distributive numerals, 237, 238 
docere, with two ace, 579 
dolere, with ace, 575; with abl., 
604; with ace & inf., 815; with 
quod, 783 
doio, fraude, abl. of manner, 614 
domi belllque, 686; domus, 173; 

used like name of town, 686 
donare, with twofold construc- 
tion, 593 
donee = quamdiu, 776, 777 



Double questions, 798 
Dubitative subjunctive, 754 
dubito & non dubito quin, 766 
dubium non est quin, 766 
ducere, with dat. of purpose, 595; 

with gen., 569 
dulcis, with dat., 589 
dum, while, with pres., 734, 776; 

until, 777; if only, 790 
dummodo, 790 

E. 

e, Quantity of, in -ei, 5th decl., 178, 

861; changed to -i, 517 
-e, Greek nouns in, 1st decl., 60 
-e, Nouns in, 3d decl., 84; abl. sing., 

3d decl., 144 
e, ex, 660; in composition, 524; 

with negative power, 531. 2 
edicere, with ut, 758 
edocere, with two ace, 579 
efficere, with two ace, 578; with 

ut, 758 
egenus, compar., 217 
egere, with abl. or gen., 622 
-eis, suffix in patronymics, 484 
ejicere, with abl., 620 
ejus, eorum, earum, as posses- 

sives, 247, 711 
ejusmodi, w. ut or qui & subjunct., 

793. a 
-ela, suffix, 489 

Elegiac Distich, 919; E. Penta- 
meter, 918 

eligere, with two ace, 578 
Elision, 887-889 
-ellus, suffix, 481, 510 
emere, w. abl., 617 ; bene, male, 619 
Emotion, verbs of, with ace & inf., 

815; with quod, 785 
Emphasis, as affected by the order 

of words, 565 



296 



-en, Nouns in, 3d decl, 93 
Enclitics, control accent, 31 ; quan- 
tity, 880 
Endings in declension, 54; in com- 
parison, 209; in conjugation, 294 
-endus, -undus, endings of ge- 
rundive, 337 
English method of pronunciation, 

16-20 
enim & nam, 854; position, 564 
Ennehemimeres, 912 
-ensis, suffix, 501, 507 
-entior, -entissimus, 216 
-entus, suffix, 502 
Epenthesis, 896 
Epicene nouns, 47 
Epistolary tenses, 740 
eques, in collective sense, 698 
Equivalents of supine, 848 
-er, Nouns in, 2d decl., 64, 65 
-er, -er, Nouns in, 3d decl., 96-98 
-er, -a, -urn, Adject, in, 74-76 
-er, -is, -e, Adjectives in, 138; 

superl., 213 
-ere for -erunt (Perf. Ind.), 334 
erg-a, 637 

ergo, 855 ; with gen., 566. 8 
erudire, w. abl., 607 
erumpere, with a & abl., 620 
-es, Greek nouns in, 1st decl., 60; 
-es, -es, nouns in, 3d decl., 108- 
110; -es,nom.plur., Greek nouns, 
157; proper names in -es, 151 
-esco, verbs in, 472 
esse, conjugated, 303; with abl., 
617; with gen. as predicate, 571; 
with gen. of value, 569; with 
gen. & abl. of quality, 556. 5., 
615; with dat. of possessor, 594; 
with dat. of purpose, 595; the 
infin. esse as subject, 808; as 
object, 809 



est, qui, with subjunct., 793. b. 
et, 849; used after multi, 850; et 

is, et is non, 715 
etenim, 854 
Ethical Dative, 602 
etiam, 849; with compar., 706 
etiamsi, w. indie. & subjunct, 770 
etsi, 771 

-etGm, suffix, 482 
Etymology, 1, 32-464 
eu, 11; vocative-ending, 69 
-eus, Greek nouns in, 2d decl., 69 
-eus,suffix, 500; -eus, suffix, 506 
evadere, with two nom., 540 
evenit, with ut, 759 
-ex, Nouns in, 3d decl., 133 
Exclamations, in ace, 585 
Existence, General expressions 

of, w. Bubjunct., 793. b 
existimare, with two ace, 578; 

pass. w. two nom., 540 
expedit, with ace. & inf., 811 
expers, with gen., 567. l 
explere, with abl., 622 
exsistere, with two nom., 540 
exsistunt qui, with subjunct., 793 
exspectatione, abl. of compari- 
son, 611 
External qualities in the abl., 616 
extra, 638 

extremus, with subst. to denote 
part thereof, 704 



faba, in a collective sense, 698 
fac, with ut or subjunct., 806 
facere, with two ace, 578; with 
gen., 569; with ut, 758; with 
pres. partie, 835; facere non pos- 
sum quin, 766 
facilis, 215; adv., 429; w. dat. 598; 
w. ad & gerund or w. supine, 848 



297 — 



factu, 848 

fallit, with ace, 583 

fama est, with ace. & inf., 811 

familiaris, with gen. or dat., 598 

faniilias, old gen., 58 

fas est, with ace. & inf., 811; with 

supine, 847 
fateri, with ace. & inf., 812 
favere, with dat., 589 
Feet, metrical, 898 
Feminine, Rule of gender, 42, 43 
fertur, with nom. & inf., 821 
-ficus, Adjectives in, compared, 

216 
fidere, with dat. or abl, 589, 628 
fieri, with two nom., 540; with gen., 

571; with dat. of purpose, 595; 

quantity, 412, 861 
fieri non potest quin, 766 
Fifth Declension, 176-178 
Figures of prosody, 887-897 
filia, films, 59, 67 
Final conjunctions, 459; use of, 

756-766 
Final syllables, Quantity, 877-879 
Finite verb, 285 
First Conjugation, Active, 316; 

Passive, 317; Deponent, 327; 

Verbs of, 346-350 
First Declension, 56-62 
fit, with ut, 759 
flagitare, with two ace, 580; with 

ut, 758 
flocci, gen. of value, 569 
for, corresponding to dat., 588 
fore ut, to express fut. inf., 819 
Formation of the Genitive, 3d 

decl., 82-136; of the Principal 

Parts, 339-399; of the Tenses, 

298-302 
the former, hie, ille, 713 
Fourth Conjugation, Active, 322; 



Passive, 323; Deponent, 330; 
Verbs of, 347-399 

Fourth Declension, 171-175 

Fractions, denoted by ordinals, 
236; of weight, 942 

fraude, abl. of manner, 614 

Frequentative verbs, 471 

fretus, w. abl., 625 

frugi, indecl., 205; compar., 222 

frui, with abl., 626 

fugit, with ace, 583 

fungi, with abl., 626 

Future I & II, 280; how formed, 
298, 300; wanting in the sub- 
junct, 302, 746; Fut, Inf., 819; 
Fut. Inf. Pass.,315,847; Fut.Inf. 
of deponents, 325; Fut. Parti- 
ciple, 301; syntax, 736-739 

futtirum esse, ut for fut. inf., 819 

G. 

gallina, in a collective sense, 698 

gaudere, with abl., 604; with quod, 
783; with ace. & inf., 815 

Gender, 35; natural or gramma- 
tical, 39, 48; of adjectives, 48; 
in 1st deel., 61, 62; in 2d decl., 
70, 71; in 3d decl., 158-170; in 
4th decl., 174, 175; in 5th decl, 
179, 180; of the predicate, 544 

General relatives, 258, 259; fol- 
lowed by the indie, 748 

General value, expressed by the 
abl., 618 

Genitive, 49; endings of, 51; for- 
mation in 3d decl. , 82 ; gen. pi. in 
-urn for -drum, 2d decl., 68; of 
3d decl. in -mm, 146, 147 ; in -on, 
156; in -liis, 77; Syntax, 566- 
573 ; with substantives, 566-, sub- 
jective, 566. l. 4; in predicate 
571; objective, 566. 2; of personal 



— 298 



pronouns, 566.3; partitive, 566. 6; 
of quality, 566. 5; answering the 
question how old? 678; of spe- 
cification, 566. 7; with adjecti- 
ves, 567; with verbs of valuing, 
569; with verbs of remember- 
ing, 568; with verbs of accus- 
ing, 570; with esse & fieri, 571; 
with impersonate, 572, 584; 
of gerund, 843 

Gerund & Gerundive, 288, 289, 
298; uses, 839-846; with est, 
840; gerund changed into ge- 
rundive, 842; gen., 843; dat., 
844; ace, 845; abl., 846; gerun- 
dive with verbs of giving, tak- 
ing, sending &c, 841 

gloriari, w. abl., 604; w. quod, 783 

Glyconic verse, 925. 4, 

gracilis, superlat., 215 

gratia, with gen., 566. 8; with ge- 
rund & gerundive, 843 

gratiam agere, with quod, 783; 
with ace. & inf., 815 

gratus, with dat., 598 

gravis, with dat., 598 

Greek nouns of 1st decl., 60 ; of 2d 
decl., 69; of 3d decl., 83, 88, 117, 
122, 150-157 

H. 

habere, with two ace, 578; pass, 
with two nom., 540; with gen., 
569; with dat. of purpose, 595; 
habeo quod, with subjunct, 793. b 

Hephthemimeres, 912 

Heroic verse, 914 

Heteroclites, 190 

Heterogeneous nouns, 191 

Jlexameter, 904; Dactylic Hexa- 
meter, 914-917 

hiatus, 888 



hie, 252; its use 712; hie, ille, the 
latter, the former, 713; hicine, 
hicce, 254 

Historical Infinitive, 809 ; Histori- 
cal Perfect, 737; Historical Pre- 
sent, 732 ; Historical tenses, 743 

hora nona, abl. of time, 673 

Horace, Metres of, 926-928 

horrere, with ace, 575 

hortari, with ut, 758 

Hortatory subjunctive, 752 

hostis, in a collective sense, 698 

how old? 678 

humi, like name of town, 686 

humilis, superl., 215 

Hypothetical sentences, 787, 788 

I. 

i & j, but one character, 2, 891 

I, gen. ending of the 2d decl., 63 ; for 
-II from nouns in -liis, -ltim, 
63 ; voc. ending, 2d decl, 67; dat. 
ending, 2d decl., 77; stems in i, 
3d decl., 79, 80; Greek nouns in l, 
3d decl., 88; voc. ending of 3d 
decl, 154; abl. ending of the 
same, 140, 142, 144; i, connect- 
ing vowel in compound subst., 
530 

-la, neut. pi. 3d decl, 140, 142, 145 

-la, suffix, 488 

-lades, suffix, 487 

Iambic Strophe, 927. 15 

Iambic Trimeter, 922-924 

-lanus, suffix, 505 

-las, suffix, 487 

-Icitis, suffix, 501 

Ictus, 900 

-iciis, suffix, 501, 506, 509 

id, adverbially, 586 

id agere, with ut & subjunct., 758 

id quod ~. quod, 581 



299 



idem. 255, 533; used adverbially. 
TIT 

Ides of the Calendar, 929 

-ides, -ides, suffixes, 487 

idoneus, with ad, 599; idoneus 
qui,with subjunet., 793. e; with ge- 
rund tt gerundive, 644 

-idiis. suffix, 497 

igitur. 855; its place, 564 

ignarus, with gen., 567 

-ile. suffix, 464 

-Ms, -His, suffixes j 498, 501; su- 
per! of adjectives in -ills, 215 

Illative conjunctions, 453, 855 

ille, 255; its use, 712, 713 

-illiniiis, superl. ending, 215 

-illus, suffix ■, 481 

-mi. ace ending, 3d decl., 143; ad- 
verbs in, 432, 433 

iinruemor, with gen., 567. i 

imminere, with dal, 569 

inimo, in answers, 800 

Imparisyllabic nouns. 3d decl., 81 

impatiens, with gen., 567. i 

impedire, w. quommus or ne, 764 

impellere, with at, 758 

inaperare, with dat., 5^9; with ut, 
758 

Imperative, 283; personal en- 
dings, 294; of dicere, ducere, 
etc., 336; of scire, 338; uses, 
804-806; supplied by cura ut. 
fac ut, 806; by the subjunctive., 
752, 805 

Imperative phrases, 806 

Imperative sentence in indirect 
discourse, 825 

Imperfect, 280, 298, 299; its use, 
735; in letters, 740; Imperf. 
Subjunet. in conditional sen- 
tences, 768. Ill 

Impersonal verbs, 419-423; their 



conjugation, 421; with ace. 583; 
witli ace. & gen., 584 

impetrare, with ut, 758 

implere, with abl.. 622 

imponere, with dat. ; 592 

impos, impotens, with gen., 567. i 

imprimere, with in & abl., 689 

imus, to denote a part, 704 

in, with the ace, 670: with verbs 
of assembling, 690; to denote 
time for how long, 677; with 
the abl., 671; to denote time 
when, 673; with verbs ot pla- 
cing, 689; to denote place, 682; 
in composition, 525; with ne- 
gative power, 531. 2; in com- 
pounds with dat., 592 

-ma, suffix, 485 

inanis, with abl., 623 

Inceptive (Inchoative) verbs, 392- 
395, 472 

ineipere, with infin., 809 

incitare, with ut, 758 

incusare, with gen., 570 

Indeclinable nouns, 181; gender 
of, 44; adjectives, 205, 226 

Indefinite adjectives, 268; Inde- 
finite pronouns, 265-267; use, 
721 

Independent cases, 50 

Independent uses of the Subjunc- 
tive, 749-754 

Ixdex of verbs, pag. 21 A\ Index 
to the metres of Horace, 928 

Indicative, 282; use of, 747, 748 

indigere, with abl. or gen., 622 

indignus, with abl., 625; indignas 
qui, with subjunet., 793. c 

Indirect discourse, 824-829 

Indirect object, 587 

Indirect questions, 801-803 

inducere, with pres. partic, 835 



— 300 



induere, construction of, 593 
indulgere, with dat, 589 
ab infante, 691 

inf Imus, to denote a part, 704 
Infinitive, 287; its use, 807-809; 
as object, 809; as subject, 808; 
its tenses, 818; historical inf., 
809; fut. inf. with fore, 819 
Inflection, 34, 35 
infra, 641 

ingratus, with dat., 598 
inimicus, with dat. or gen., 598 
initio, abl. of time, 673 
injucundus, with dat., 598 
injuria, abl. of manner, 614 
inquam, 416; its use, 823 
inscius, with gen., 567. l 
inscribere, with in & abl., 689 
Inseparable prepositions, 516 
insiinulare, with gen., 570 
instituere, with abl., 607 
intellegere, with ace. & inf., 812 
inter, 640; in compounds with 
dat., 592; inter se, for recipro- 
cal action, 711 
interdicere, constr., 621 
interesse, with dat., 592 
interest, with gen., 572; degree of 
importance, 573; with reference 
to ivhich, 573 
Interjections, 32, 463-464 
intermittere nihil quin, 766 
interrogare, with two ace., 580 
Interrogative adverbs, 796; con- 
junctions, 462, 797; pronouns, 
260-264,796; place thereof, 562; 
use of Interrogatives, 796-803 
Interrogative sentences, 796 ff., 

in indirect questions, 825 
intra, 639 

Intransitive verbs, 273; imper- 
sonal passive, 590; with dat., 



589; w. ace. of kindred mean- 
ing, 576; becoming transitive 
by composition, 577 

-inus, suffix, 504, 505, 507 

inutilis, with dat., 598, 599; with 
gerund, 844 

invidere, with dat., 589 

-lo, Yerbs in, of 3d conjug., 331 

Ionic rhythm. 927. 19 

ipse, 255; use, with reflexive, 718 

-ir, Nouns in, 2d decl., 64, 66 

irasci, with dat., 589 

Irregular adjectives, 77; irreg. 
comparison, 220-223; of ad- 
verbs, 441; irreg. conjugation, 
400; irreg. nouns, 181-192 

is, 247; use, 553, 714; is qui, with 
subjunct. 793. a 

-is, -Is, Nouns in, 3d decl., 111- 
114; -is, ace. pi. ending, 3d decl., 
148; Greek nouns in, 3d decl., 
154; -is, suffix in patronymics, 
487 

-is, -e, Adjectives in, 139, 140 

-isco, Yerbs in, 391 

Islands, Gender of names of, 42 ; 
constr. like names of towns, 683 

isque, 715 

-isslmiis, in super!, 211 

iste, 252; use of, 712 

ita ut, 759; ita est, yes, 799 

itaque, 855 

-itare, Frequentatives in, 471 

-itas, -itia, -lties, -itud5, suf- 
fixes, 488 

-ittis, suffix, 503; adverbs in, 434 

-lum, gen. pi. 3d decl., 98, 140, 146 

-liim, gen. of nouns in, 63; suffix, 
486 

-ius, gen. sing. 2d decl., 77 

-ius, gen. of nouns in, 63; proper 
nouns in, 67; suffix, 501, 508, 509 



— 301 



-lvus, suffix, 501 

-ix, Nouns in, 3d decl., 134 



j & i, 2 ; affecting the quantity of 
the syllable, 864 

jubere, with ace, 589; with ace. & 
inf., 814; with nom. & inf., 822 

jucundus, with dai, 598; with ge- 
rund or supine, 848 

judicare, with two ace, 578; pass, 
w. two nom., 540 

jugum, its quantity, 864 

Juppiter, 97 

juratus, active, 278 

jure, abl. of manner, 614 

jussu, abl. of cause, 604 

justum est, with ace. & inf., 811 

juvare, with ace., 589 

Juvenilis, abl. sing., 144. 4 

juvenis, abl. sing., 144. 3; gen. pi., 
146. 2; how compared, 224. in 

juxta, 642 



-1, Nouns in, 3d decl, 90-92; adjec- 
tives in, 141 

laborare, w. abl., 604; w. ut, 758 

laetari, with abl., 604 

laetus, with abl., 604 

Latin Authors, 945 

Latin Grammar, 1 

the latter, hie, ille, 713 

Lesser Ionics, 927. 19 

Letters, 3-7; names of, 3; gender 
of, 181 

liber, with abl., 623 

liberare, with abl., 620 

libel, with dai, 421 

libra, weight, 942 

licere, to be for safe, with abl., 617 

licet, w. dai, 421; conjunction, 768 



Like cases in substantives, 55 

liquet, with dai, 421 

locare, to let, with abl., 617; with 

gerundive, 841 
Locative case, 683 
loco, locis, 687 
Logaoedic verse, 925 
Long vowels, 10, 859 
longe, with superl., 707 
longius, without quam, 610 
longum est, 747 
longus, with ace., 679 
-Is, Nouns in, 3d decl., 127 
ludis, abl. of time, 673 

M. 

maerere, with abl., 604 
magis, maxime, in adverbial com- 
parison, 218, 708 
magni, parvi, gen. of value, 569 
magno, parvo, abl. of value, 618 
major, minor natu, 608, 678 
male emere, vendere, 619 
maledicere, with dai, 598 
malle, with ace. & inf., 814 
mandare, with ut, 758 
manere, with two nom., 540 
Masculine caesura, 911 
Masculine gender, 40, 41 
Materials, Names of, 38 
maturus, compared, 214 
maxim am partem, adverbially, 

586 
maxime, in forming superl., 218 
Means or instrument, abl. of, 605- 

607 
Measure in prosod}^, 905, 906; Ro- 
man measures, 937-943; of 
length how expressed, 680 
mederi, with dat., 589 
medius, to denote a part, 704 
memini, with gen. or ace., 568 



— 302 



menior, with gen., 567. 1 ' 
-men, suffix, 494 
mente, abl. of manner, 613 
-mentum, suffix, 494 
rnercari, with gen. & abl., 617 
-met, appended to pronouns, 251 
Metres of Horace, 926, 927 
Metrical Feet, 898 
metuere, with dat. & ace, 591; 

with ut & ne, 761 
metus est, with ut & ne, 761 
meum est, 571 
Middle syllables, Quantity, 866- 

876 
miles, in collective sense, 698 
mille, 230 

minari, with dat., 589 
minimi, gen. of value, 569 
minimo, abl. of value, 618 
minor natu, 608, 678 
minoris, gen. of value, 569 
miseret, with ace. & gen., 584 
mittere, w. dat. of purpose, 595; 

with gerundive, 841 
Mobilia substantlva, 46 
moderari, with dat. & ace, 591 
Modification in compounds, 512 
moclo, abl. of manner, 613 
modo, if only, w r . subjunct., 790 
molestus, with dat., 598 
monere, with ut, 758 
Money, Roman, 937 
- moiria, suffix, 488 
Monometer, 904 
Monosyllabic nouns, defective, 

184, 185 
Monosyllables, Quantity of, 880- 

882 
Months, Gender of, 40; in Ro- 
man calendar, 929 
Moods of the verb, 35, 281-285; 

attraction of, 826 



mora, 899 

more, abl. of manner, 613 

mori, w. two nom., 540 

mos est, with ut, 759 

movere, with ut, 758 

-ms, Nouns in, 3d decL, 124-126 

multare, with abl., 570 

multi et.., 850 

Multiplicative numerals, 239 

multo, degree of difference, 612; 

abl. of price, 618; with compar. 

& superl., 706, 707 
muta cum liquida,m^rosor7?/ 3 863 



nam, appended to interrogatives, 
263; nam, namque, 854 

Names of men and women, 193- 
196 

Names of towns, Construction of, 
683-686 

Names of verses, 904 

narrare, with ace. & inf., 812 

nasci, w. two nom. , 540 

natus, with ace, 678; natu, with 
grandis, 608 

navibus, abl. of manner, 614 

ne, that not, 756, 762; after verbs 
of hindering, 764; after verbs 
of fearing, 761; in prohibi- 
tions, 805 ; ne quis, 723, 762 ; with 
optative subjunct, 751; with 
concessive subjunct., 753, 769 

ne, interrogative particle, 797; 
ne..an, 798; ne..quidem, 564 

nee . . nee, 857 

necessarius, with gen. or dat., 598 

necesse est, with ace & inf., 811 

necne, or not, 798, 803 

necfibi, 762 

nefas, 181; with ace & inf., 811; 
with supine, 847 



— 303 



negare, with ace. & inf., 812 

Negative Conditions (nisi, si 
non),789; negative Imperative, 
with ne, 752, 805; negative of 
Optative subjunct, ne, 751; ne- 
gative of Potential subjunct., 
non, 750; negative of Conces- 
sive subjunct., ne, 753; negative 
of Dubitative subjunct, non, 
754; negative with partic, 834 

nemo, 182 ; equivalent to nullus, 
700; nemo est qui, with sub- 
junct., 793. b 

nequam, indecl., 205, 222 

neque, and not, neque quisquam, 
neque ullus, etc., 851; neque. . 
neque, 857 

neque is, 715; neque enim, &c, 
856 

nescius, w. gen., 567. i 

Neuter adjectives or pronouns 
used adverbially, 429, 586 

Neuter gender, 44; like cases, 55 

Neutral passives, 279 

neve, with subjunct., 757 

nihil, 181; its oblique cases, 700; 
used adverbially, 586; nihil ab- 
est quin, 766; nihil antiquius 
habere quam, w. ut, 758; ni- 
hil est quod, w. subjunct., 793. b; 
nihil praetermitto, intermitto 
quin, 766 

nihtli, gen. of value, 569 

nihilo, abl. of value, 618 

nimis, with gen., 566. 6 

nisi & si non, 787, 789; nisi quis, 
723, 762 

niti, with abl., 627; with ut, 758 

no, 799 

nobilitas, used for noblles, 693 

nocere, with dat., 589 

noli, with inf. in prohibitions, 806 



nolle, with ace. & inf., 814 
nomen, 194; nomenest,w.dat.,594 
nominare, with two ace., 578; pass. 

with two nom., 540 
Nominative, 49; plur. in -la, 3d 
decl, 140, 142, 145; in-es, 157; 
case of subject, 534; of i\±s pre- 
dicate, 540 
Nominative with Infin., 821, 822 
non quin, with subjunct., 785 
non quo, non quod,w. subjunct., 785 
Nones, in the Roman month, 929 
nonne, interrog. particle, 797 
nostras, patrial adjective, 250 
nostri, nostrum, 566. 3 
Noun, see Substantive 
Nouns substantive & adjective, 33 
-ns, Nouns in, 3d decl., 127, 128 
nub ere, with dat., 589 
nuclare, with abl., 622 
nudus, with abl., 623 
num, 797; num quis, 723, 762 
Number, 35, 49 ; of the predicate, 

541, 542 
Numbers & persons of verbs, 293 
Numerals, 228-242; numeral ad- 
jectives, 228-233; num. adverbs, 
241; position, 561 
nun tiare, with in& ace, 690; with 

ace. & inf., 812 
-nus, suffix, 501 
nusquam, with gen., 566. 6 



O. 



-o, 



-o, Nouns in, 3d decl., 85- 

Greek nouns in, 152 
o, with ace. in exclamations, 585 
ob, 643; in composition, 526; in 

compounds with dat., 592 
Object, direct, 574; indirect, 587; 

of transitive verbs becomes 

subject in pass., 574 



— 304 — 



Objective genitive, 566. 2 

oblivisci, with gen., 568 

oboedlre, with dat., 589 

obsecrare, with lit, 758 

obsistere, obstare, with ne, quo- 
minus, 764 

obtrectare, with dat, 589 

odiosus, with dat, 598 

Official titles to indicate time, 692 

-olus, suffix, 481, 510 

omnes, 726 

-on, for -iim, Greek ending, 2d 
decL,69; -on, gen. pl.,3d decl., 156 

onustus, with abl., 623 

opera aiicujus, to denote the 
agent, 606 

operam dare, with ut, 758 

opinio est, with ace. & inf., 811 

opinione, abl. of comparison, 611 

oportet, w. ace. & inf., 811 

oppidum, in apposition with na- 
mes of towns, 684, 685 

optare, with ut, 758 

Optative subjunctive, 751 

opus, with supine, 847 ; opus est, 
with abl., 624; with ace. & infin., 
811 

-or, Nouns in, 3d decl., 99-101; 
suffix, 489 

-or, -Us, Adjectives in, 139, 209, 
210 

orare, with two ace, 580; with ut, 
758 

oratio obliqua, 824; or. recta, 823 

orbare, with abl., 622 

orbus, with abl., 623 

Order of words, 558-565 

Ordinal numerals, 234-236 

ordine, abl. of manner, 614 

Origin, expressed by abl., 604 

Orpheus, 154 

-6s, for -iis, 6?ree& ending, 2d decl., 



69; -os, Latin nouns, 3d decl, 
115-117; Greek nouns, 3d decl., 
153; -os, gen. 3d decl., 153; nom. 
3d decl., 155 

-osus, suffix, 502 

-ox, Nouns in, 3d decl., 135 

in pace, abl. of time, 673 

paenitet, with ace. & gen., 584 

par, with dat., 598; with ace. & 
inf., 811; par est, it would be 
fair, 747 

Paradigm Charts, 54, 302 

parcere, with dat., 589 

Parisyllabic nouns, 3d decl., 80 

particeps, with gen., 567. 1 

Participial adjectives with gen., 
567. 2 

Participle, 290, 291 ; of depo- 
nents, 325; how declined, 198; 
comparison, 227; use of, 829- 
835; used appositively, 833; at- 
tributively, 832 ; with negative, 
834; in compound infin., 817 

Particles, 36 

Partitive genitive, 566. 6 

Parts of the body in the plnr., 696 

Parts of speech, 32 

parvi, parvo, gen. & abl. of value, 
569, 618 

a parvulo, 691 

Passive voice, 271, 276; pass, 
tenses how formed, 302, 309; 
pass, participles, 830; passive 
used impersonally, 423; ofin- 
transitives, 590; followed by 
dat., 597 

paterfamilias, 58 

pati, with ace. & inf., 814 

patiens, with gen., 567. 2 

Patrial adjectives, 250, 264, 507 



— 305 — 



Patronymics, 487 

pauci, defective, 204 

pedes, in collective sense, 698 

pedibus, abl. of manner, 614 

pendere, with gen., 569 

penes, 644; quantity, 879. 2 

Pentameter, 904; Elegiac, 918-921 

Penthemimeres, 912 

penult, 25 

per, 645, 674; in composition, 527 ; 
in compounds with ace, 577; to 
denote the agent, 606 

Perfect, 280; its formation, 344; 
tenses formed upon it, 300; 
Perf. Ind. special terminations, 
294; special forms, 333; Perfect 
Infin., 300; Perf.Part.,301; Perf. 
Subjunct, 300; its uses, 737; 
Perf. definite, 737; its sequence 
of tenses, 744; in letters, 740 

perficSre, with ut, 758 

perfrui, with abl., 626 

perfungi, with abl, 626 

pergere, with infin., 809 

periculum est, with ut & ne, 761 

Periphrastic conjugation, 311- 
315; uses, 741; Indie, 747 

perire, pass, to perdere, 408 

peritus, with gen., 567. l 

permittere, with ut, 758; with ge- 
rundive, 841 

Personal endings of the verb, 294 

Personal pronouns, 244-247; not 
expressed, 710; expressed in 
ace. with inf., 820 

Persons, 35, 243, 293; names of, 
193-196; with different termi- 
nations, 46 

persuadere, w. dat., 589; w. ut,758 

petere,w. two ace, 580; with ut,758 

Pherecratean verse, 925. 3 

Phonetic pronunciation, 9-14 



Phonology, 1, 2-31 
piget, with ace. & gen., 584 
Place, Relations of, 682-690 
placere, with dat., 589 
placet, with ace. <fc inf., 811 
plenus, with gen., 567. i 
plerlque, defective, 204 
Pluperfect, 280, 300; use, 738 
Plural, 49; with change of mean- 
ing, 189; wanting, 187; plural 
expressions to be noted, 697; 
of proper names, 699 
Pluralia tantum, 188 
plurimi, gen. of value, 569 
plurimo, abl. of value, 618 
pluris, gen. of value, 569, 619 
plus, 221; without quam, 618 
Poetical Fokms, 858-927 
Polysyndeton, 850 
ponere, with in & abl., 689 
porcus, in a collective sense, 698 
poscere, with two ace, 580 
Position, in prosody, 862 
Positive, 208; wanting, 224 
Possessive pronoun, 249 ; not ex- 
pressed, 710; as subjective gen., 

Possessor, dat. of, 594 

possum, poteram, / might I 

could, 747; with infin., 809 
post, 646; to denote distance ot 

time, 675; in compounds with 

dat., 592 
posteritas, used for posted, 693 
post quam (posteaquam) w. perf., 

737, 773 
postulare, w. two ace, 580; with 

ut, 758 
Potential subjunctive, 750 
potiri, with gen. & abl., 626 
potis, pote, 308 
potus & pransus, active, 278 



306 



prae, 662; in composition, very, 
531. 3; in compounds with dat., 
592 

praebere se, with ace, 578 

praecipere, with ut, 758 

praeditus, with abl., 623 

praenomen, 194 

Praenomens abbreviated, 197 

praestare se, with ace, 578 

pr aeter, 647 ; in compounds with 
ace, 577 

praeterit, with ace, 583 

praetermittere nihil quin, 766 

praetor, for in praetura, 692 

precari, with ut, 758 

Predicate, 534; its place, 558; 
its number, 541-543; its gen- 
der, 544; with different per- 
sons, 545; predicate adjective 
& substantive in ace & inf., 817; 
predicate gen., 571 ; pred. abl., 616 

Prepositions, 32 ; List of, 443-446 ; 
uses, 629-671; with the ace, 
629-654; with the abl., 655-664; 
with the ace & abl., 665-671; 
place, 563; in composition, 516; 
assimilation of, 518 

Present Indicative, 280; tenses 
formed upon it, 298; Pres. Sub- 
junct., 298; Pres. Imperat., 299; 
Pres. Infinitive, tenses formed 
upon it, 299; Pres. Partic, 298; 
Present, its uses, 731-734; to 
express a past action, 733; for 
the historical perfect, 732 ; with 
dum, 734 

Price, abl. of, 617 

pridie, with ace, 930 

prima pueritia, 673 

Primitive adverbs, 424; primi- 
tive verbs, 470; primitive and 
derivative words, 466 



primus, to denote a part, 704 

Principal clause, 742, in indirect 
discourse, 825 

Principal parts of verb, 296 ; their 
formation, 339-399 

Principal tenses, 743 

Principal term of compounds, 512 

principio, abl. of time, 673 

prior & primus instead of ad- 
verbs, 550 

priusquam, 779, 780 

privare, with abl., 622 

pro, 661; its quantity in com- 
pounds, 884 

prodesse, with dat., 589 

prodest, with ace & inf., 811 

prohibere, with quominus, 764 

Prohibitions, 805 

proinde, 855; proinde ac si, 772 

Pronominal adjectives, 269 

Pronouns, 32, 243-269; special 
uses, 710-729; personal, 244; 
reflexive, 248; demonstrative, 
252; determinative, 255; rela- 
tive, 265; interrogative, 260; 
indefinite, 256; their agreement, 
551-557 

Pronunciation of Latin, 8 

prope, 648 

Proper names, 38, 193-197; in 
plur., 699 

propior, propius, with ace, 600 

Proportional numerals, 240 

proprlus, otvn, 567. 3 

propter, 649 

Prosody, 858-897; figures of, 887- 
897 

prospicere, with ut, 758 

Protasis, 787 

providere, with dat. & ace, 591,° 
with ut, 758 

providus, compared, 217 



— 30T — 



proxlmus, proxirne, with ace, 600 
-ps, Nouus in, 3d decl., 124r-126 
-pte, appended to pronouns, 251 
pudet, with gen. & ace, 584 
puer, instead of in pueritia, 691 
in pueritia, prima pueritia, 673 
Punishment, abl. of, 570 
Purpose, subjunctive of, with ut, 
ne, 758; quo, 763; with relative, 
792 ; expressed by ad with ge- 
rund, 845 
putare, with gen., 569; with two 
ace, 578; pass., with two nom., 540 
putares, potential subjunctive, 

750 
Pythiambic strophe, 927. ig. it 

Q 

quaerere, with two ace, 580 

Quality, gen. of, 566. 5; abl. of, 615 

quam, with comparatives, 609; 
regularly omitted in relative 
sentences, 610; omitted after 
plus, amplius, longms, 610; with 
posse & superl., 707; quam quis- 
quam, ullus, 724; quam qui, 
quam ut, w. subjunct., 795, 759 

quamquam, 771 

quamvis, 768 

quandoquidem, 781 

quanti, gen. of value, 659, 619 

Quantity, 859-896; general rules, 
28; in compounds, 883; of the 
radical syllable, 865; of middle 
syllables, 866-876; of final syl- 
lables, 877-879; of monosyllab- 
les, 880-882; marks of, 10 

quantumvis, 768 

quantus potiiit, with superl., 707 

quasi, 772 

que, 849 

quemadmodum, with indie, 772 



Question, 532; direct, 796, 797; 
alternative, 798; question and 
answer, 799; indirect, 801, 802; 
indirect disjunctive, 803; in in- 
direct discourse, 825 

qui, 256; its agreement, 551; r^ 
cum ego, &c. with subjunct. 792 ; 
= ut ego, &c. with subjunct., 792 ; 
qui? 720; qui dicitur, 555 

quia, 781 

quidam, 725 

quidem, its place, 564 

quilibet, 726 

quin = qui non in clause of re- 
sult, 765; after verbs of hinder- 
ing, 764; after negative clau- 
ses, 765 

quippe qui, with subjunct., 791 

quis = quibus, 257 

quis, 720, 723 

quisquam, 724 

quisque, 727 

quisquis, with indie, 748 

quivis, 726 

quo ~ ut eo, with subjunct., 763 

quoad, w. indie & subjunct., 776-778 

quod, in explanatory clauses, 
784; quod, quia, because, 781; 
quod, as to, 785 

quodsi, 787 

quommus == ut eo minus, 764 

quoniam, since, 781 

quoque, 849; its place, 564 

quotiens, with perf. & pluperf., 740 

quotquot, with indie, 748 

-quus, adjectives in, 219 

K. 

-r, Nouns in, 3d decl., 94-103; ad- 
jectives, 141 
Radical syllables, quantity of, 865 
ratione, abl. of manner, 613 



308 — 



-re, for -ris in the pass., 335 

re-, red-, inseparable prep., 516 

Beading-charts, 8 

Beciprocal, how expressed, 640 

recordari, with gen., 568 

recusare, w. ne & quominus, 764 

reddere, with two ace, 578 

redimere, with abl., 617 

Keduplicated perfects, 349, 361, 
370; quantity of, 867 

Eeduplication in compounds, 349, 
361 

refert, with gen., 572 

refertus, with abl., 623 

Beflexive pronouns, 248, 711; in 
indirect discourse, 828 

Eeflexive verb, 275 

Eelative pronoun, 256-259; agree- 
ment, 551, 552; relative for de- 
monstr. at the beginning of 
sentence, 556; in abl. of compa- 
rison, 610; never omitted, 557; 
place, 562; general relatives w. 
indie, 748; relative clauses with 
subjunct., 791-795 

relinquere, with two ace, 578; with 
dat. of purpose, 595; with ge- 
rundive, 841 

reliquus, to denote a pari, 704; 
reliquum est, ut, 759 

reminisci, with gen., 568 

reperiuntur qui, w. subjunct, 793. b 

replere, with abl., 622 

resistere, with dat, 589 

respondere, with ace. & inf., 812 

Besponsives, 799 

restat, with ut, 759 

Be suit, subjunct. of, with conjunc- 
tions, 759, 760 

retineri non possum quin, 766 

reum facere, with gen., 570 

Bhythm, 900; Ionic, 927. 19 



Bhythmical feet, 902 
ridere, with ace, 575 
-rimus, super! ending, 213 
ritu, abl. of manner, 613 
Bivers, gender of names of, 40 
rogare, with two ace, 580; with 

ut, 758 
rogatu, abl. of cause, 604 
Boman method of pronunciation, 

9-14 
Boot, 467, 468 
-rs, Nouns in, 3d decl., 127 
rus, like name of town, 686 

S. 

-s, Nouns in, 3d decl., 103-128; ad- 
jectives in, 141 

salutaris, with dat, 598 

Sapphic stanza, 927. % 3; verse, 
925. 5. 6 

satiare, with abl., 622 

satis, with gen., 566. 6 

Scanning, 913 

scire, w. infin., 809; scito for sci, 
338 

-sco, Inceptives in, 391 

scribere, with ace & inf., 812 

se-, sed-, inseparable prep., 516; 
compounds of se with a & abl., 
621 

secernere, with a & abl., 621 

Second Conjugation; Active, 318; 
Passive, 319; Deponent, 328: 
Verbs of, 351-364 

Second Declension, 63-77 

secundum, 650 

secus ac, 849 

sed, 853 

sejungere, with a & abl., 621 

Semi-deponents, 277, 278; 2d con- 
jug., 363; 3dconjug., 373 

in senectute, 673 



309 — 



senex, instead of in senectiite, 
691; compared, 224 

Sentence, 532, 533; of result, se- 
quence of tenses, 745 

sententia mea, 608 

sentire, with ace. & inf., 812 

separare, with a & abl., 621 

Separation, abl. of, 620 

Sequence of tenses, 742-746; in 
sentences of result, 745 ; in sen- 
tences of comparison, 772 

sequitur, with ut, 759 

sescenti, indefinitely, 233 

sestertius, sestertium, 938, 939 

Short vowels, 10, 861 

si, with indie. & subjunct., 787; si 
quis, 723, 762 

si modo, 790 

si non & nisi, 787, 789 

sic ut, 759 

sicut, with indie., 772 

silent io, abl. of manner, 614 

similis, superl.215; with dat. or gen., 
598, 600 

Simple feet, 902; simple forms of 
verb, 298-302; simple verse, 903 

simulac, simulatque, 773; with 
perf. , 737, 740 

sin, 787 

sine,664; sine,w. quisquam,ullus, 
724 

sinere, with ace. & inf., 814; with 
nom. & inf., 822 

Singular, 49; used for the plural, 
698; wanting, 188 

Singularia tantum, 187 

singfili, defective, 204 

siquidem, since, 781 

sitire, with ace., 575 

sive, 852; sive. .sive, w. indie., 748 

Small islands, Names of, 683 

so-called, qui dicitur, 555 



solito, abl. of comparison, 611 
solus qui, with subjunct., 793. a 
~sor, suffix, 489 
Space, Relation of, 679-681 
spe, abl. of comparison, 611 
Special Forms in conjugation, 

333-338 
Specification, gen. of, 566. 7 
id spectare, with ut, 758 
spes est, with ace. & inf., 811 
spoliare, with abl., 622 
Spondaic Hexameter, 914 
Stanza,926; stanzas of Horace, 92 7 
stare, cost, with abl., 617 
statuere, with in & abl., 689; with 

infin., 809 
Stem, 52, 468 ; in the 5 declen- 
sions, 53; 1st decl., 56; 2d decl., 
63; 3d decl, 79; 4th decl., 171; 
5th decl., 176; in the 4 conju- 
gations, 295; in a, 340; in e, 
341; in i, 342; in u (v), 343, 
365-367; inconsonants,365-396; 
in d, t, 369-374; in 1>, p, 375, 
376; in c, g, q, li, ct, 377-384; 
in 1, m, n, r, 385-389 ; in s, x, 
(cs), 390; insc, 391-395 
Stem- words, 466 
Strophe, see Stanza 
studere, with dat, 589 
studiosus, with gen., 567. l 
suadere, w. dat., 589; w. ut, 758 
sub, 666-667; in composition, 528; 

in compounds w. dat., 592 
Subject and Predicate, 534, 535; 

place, 558; adjuncts, 558 
Subjective genitive, 566. i; as 

predicate, 571 
Subjunctive, 283; of the future 
tenses wanting, 746; uses, 749- 
803; with conjunctions, 755-790; 
with relatives, 791-795; in 



BIO — 



indirect questions, 801-803; to 
express the thought of some 
other person, 794, 827; in cau- 
sal clauses, 782 

Subordinating conjunctions, 454- 
462; uses, 755-790 

Subordination of sentences, 742 

Substantia mobilia, 46 

Substantives, 32, 37, 38; gender, 
39-48; number, 49; declen- 
sions, 51-192; indeclinable, 181; 
defective, 182-186; heteroclites, 
190; heterogeneous, 191; deri- 
ved from adjectives, 488; deri- 
ved from substantives, 480-487; 
derived from verbs, 489-495; 
used as adjectives, 206; sub- 
stantive predicate, 536; with 
dat., 601; special uses, 691-700; 
in abl. absol., 836 

subter, 669 

Suffixes, 469 

sui, sibi, se, 711; w. quisque, 727 

sumere, with two ace, 578 

summus, top of, 704 

sunt qui, with subjunct., 793. b 

super,668;incompoundsw.dat.,592 

superbus, with abl., 604 

superlative, 211; its declension, 
212 ; with the force of very, 705 ; 
strengthened, 707 ; wanting, 
224; requires more than two 
objects, 709 

Supine, 292, 344; tenses formed 
upon it, 301; its uses, 847; its 
equivalents, 848; not changed 
in ace. & inf., 817 

supplicare, with dat., 589 

supra, 651 

-sura, suffix, 494 

-sus & -tus, Nouns in, 4th decl., 
183; suffixes, 493 



suus, its use, 711 

Syllables, 21-25; long & short, 860, 

861, 899; long by position, 862; 

common, 863; middle, 866-876; 

final, 877-879; syllaba anceps,908 
Synaeresis, 890, 891 
Syncope, 893 

Synopsis of Declensions, 54 
Synopsis of Tenses, 298-302 
Syntax, 1, 532-857 
Systole, 895 

T. 

-t, Nouns in, 3d decl., 129 

taedet, with ace. & gen., 584 

talis, 269; talis qui, with subjunct., 
793. a; talis ut, with subjunct.,759 

tarn w. adject. & qui, 793. a 

tarn w. adject. & ut, 759 

tamen, 853 

tametsi, 771 

tamquam, 772 

tanti, tantidem, gen. of value,) 569, 
619 

tantum abest, ut. .ut, 760 

tantus qui, with subjunct., 793. a; 
tantus ut, with subjunct., 759 

-te, appended to pronouns, 251 

temperare, with various cases, 
591; temperare mihi non pos- 
sum quin, 766 

templum, omitted, 566. 9 

Temporal conjunctions, 455; uses, 
773-780 

in tempore, temporlbus, 673 

Tenses, 35, 280; formation of, 298- 
302; principal and historical, 
743; uses, 730-741; sequence 
of tenses, 742-746; tenses of 
the infin., 818, 819; tenses in 
letters, 741 

tenus, 663 



311 — 



-ter, Nouns in, 3d decl, 96, 97 

terra marlque, 688 

Tetrameter, 904 

Tetrastich, 926 

that & those, not expressed in La- 
tin, 716 

Thesis, 900 

Third Conjugation, Active, 320; 
Passive, 321; Deponent, 329; 
in -id (appendix), 331,332; Verbs 
of, 365-396 

Third Declension, 78-170 

Time, Relation of, 672-678 ; for 
how long, 677; how long, 674; 
how long before, 675; how long 
since, 674; when, 672, 673; with- 
in which, 676 

timere, with ut, ne, 761 

-ti5, suffix, 493 

Tmesis, 897 

-tor, suffix, 490, 491 

totus, 202 ; nouns with, in abl. with- 
out prep., 687 

Towns, Names of, Gender, 42 ; con- 
struction of, 683 

trans, 652; in composition, 529; 
in compounds with ace, 577 

Transitive verbs, 271; transitive 
& intransitive, 575 

Trees, Gender of names of, 42 

Trimeter, 904; Iambic, 922-924 

trini, for terni, 238 

Tristich, 926 

Trithemimeres, 912 

-trix, suffix, 492 

Trochaic strophe, 927. 18 

-trum, suffix, 495 

-tura, suffix, 493 

turpis, with dat, 598 

-tus, suffix, 493 



U. 

u & v, but one character, 2, 891 

u, Stems, 3d decl, 79; 3d conjug.,343 

-u, Nouns in, 4th decl, 171 

ubi, with gen., 566. 6; when, 773; 
ubi, ubi primum, with perf, 737 

-udus, dat. & abl. pi., 4th decl, 172 

ullus, 202; its use, 724 

ultima, 25 

ultimus, to denote a part, 704 

ultor, ultrix, adject, 206 

ultra, 654 

-ulum, suffix, 494 

-ulus, suffix, 480, 499, 510 

-urn, suffix, 489 

-urn, for -arum, -orum, 1st & 
2d decl., 68; -urn, gen; pi. of ad- 
ject., 3d decl, 147 

-undi, -uudtis, for -endi, -en- 
dus, 337 

Unit of measure, 899 

unus, 202; in the plur., 229; in- 
stead of singfili, 238; unus om- 
nium, with super!, 707; unus qui, 
• with subjunct., 793. a 

unusquisque, 267; its use, 726 

-uo, Verbs in, 1st conjug., 365 

-ur, Nouns in, 2d decl, 66; 3d decl, 
102, 103 

urbs, in apposition with names 
of towns, 684, 685 

-urio, Verbs in, 473 

-us, Nouns in, 2d decl., 63; 3d decl, 
118-122; 4th decl., 171 

-us, -a, -um, Adjectives in, 72 

ut, comparat, 772; final & con- 
secutive, 756-761; concessive, 
769; temporal, 773; as soon 
as, 737 

ut primum, 773; with perf., 737 

ut si, w. subjunct., 772 

uti, with abl, 626 



— 312 — 



Ulilis, with dat. or ad & ace, 598; 

with gerund & gerundive, 844; uti- 

llus fuit, 747 
utlnam, with subjunct., 751 
utpote qui, with subjunct., 792. n 
utrum, 797; utrum . . an, 798 
-iitiis, suffix, 503 
-ux, Nouns in, 3d decl., 136 



vacare, with abl., 622 
vacuus, with abl., 623 
Yalue, in the gen., 569, 619; in the 

abl., 618 
vapulare, neutral pass., 279 
ve, 852 

vel, 852; with superl., 707 
velle, with inf. or ace. & inf., 809, 

814 
velut si, with subjunct., 772 
vendere, w.abl., 617 ; bene, male, 619 
veneo, pass, to vendere, 408 
venire, with dat. of purpose, 595 
Yerba sentiendiet declarandi,812 
Verbal nouns & adjectives, 286- 

292 
Verbal inceptives, 392-394 
Verbal predicate, 536 
Verbs, 32, 270-423; voices, 

tenses, 280; moods, 281; 



271; 
finite 

verb, 285; persons, 293; conju- 
gations, 295; formation of the 
tenses, 298; verb-stem, 295; for- 
mation of the principal parts, 
339; of the 1st conjug., 346-349; 
of the 2d conjug., 351-364; of the 
3d conjug., 365-396; of the 4th 
conjug., 397-399; in -16, 3d con- 
jug. , 331, 368; compounded 
with prepositions, 516 ; derived 
from verbs, 471-474; derived 
from subst. & adj., 475-479; 



place, 558; Syntax, 730-848 
Verbs of reminding, remem- 
bering, forgetting with gen., 
568; of accusing, convicting, 
condemning, acquitting, with 
gen., 570; of valuing, with gen., 
569; of naming, making, tak- 
ing, choosing, with two accus., 
578; of asking, demanding, 
requesting, inquiring, with 
two ace, 580; of benefitting, 
pleasing, obeying, command- 
ing &c, with dat. , 589 ; of giving 
kputti ng, with dat., 593; of buy- 
ing & selling, with abl., 617; of 
removing, abstaining, with 
abl., 620; of plenty & want, ti- 
ling and depriving, with abl., 
622; of placing, with in & abl., 
689 ; of assembling, with in & 
ace, 690; of willing, wishing, 
warning, beseeching, urging, 
demanding, resolving, endea- 
voring, forcing, permitting, 
with ut&ne, 758; of wishing, 
desiring,wiih ace. & inf., 814; of 
fearing, with ut, ne, 761 ; of hin- 
dering, with quominus, 764; of 
emotion, joy, grief, with quod, 
783; with ace. & inf., 815; verbs 
signifying to be able, must, dare, 
begin, continue, cease, be accu- 
stomed, learn, wish, desire, 
resolve, with infin., 809; verbs 
of perceiving, with pres. part., 
813, 835; of perceiving and de- 
claring, with ace. & infin., 812; 
withnom. &inf., 821 
vereri, with ut & ne,761 
vero, verum, 853, 564; place, 564 
Verses, 898; names of, 904; com- 
pound, 903; simple, 903 






— 313 



Versification, 898 ff. 

versus, 653 

vertere, with dat. of purpose, 595 

verum, vero, 564, 853 

verum est, with ace. & inf., 811 

vesci, with abl., 626 

vestis, in a collective sense, 698 

vestras, patrial adject,, 250 

vestrum & vestri, 066. 3 

vetare, with ace. , 589 ; with ace. & 

infill., 814; with nom. & inf., 822 
vetus, superl., 240 
vi, vi et arniis, abl. of manner, 

614 
via, without prep., 688 
via et ratione, abl. of manner, 614 
vicinitas = vicini, 693 
vicinus, with dat. k gen., 598 
victor, victrix, adjectives, 206 
videre, with ut, 758; with ace. k 

infin., 812; with pres. part., 813, 

835 
videres, potential subjunct, 750 
videri, with two nom., 540; with nom. 

& infin., 822 
vis, 114; per vim, 645 
visu, 848 

vix, with quisquam, ullus, 724 
vocare, with two ace., 578; vocari, 

with two nom., 540 



Vocative, 49; of nouns in -iris, 
2ddecl., 67; in 3d decl., 154 

Voices, 35, 271-279 

voluntate, abl. of manner, 614 

-volus, Adjectives in, 216 

Vowel- changes in compound 
verbs, 517 

Vowels, 4 

Vowel-stems, in decl., 79, 80; in 
conjug., 339, 344 

vox, with gen., 566. 7 

W. 

w, not in Latin, 2 

Way by which, abl., 688 

Week/Days of the, 936 
I Weights, Eoman, 942 
l Winds, Gender of names of, 40 
! without, with partic. 834 
| Women, Names of, 196 

Word-formation, 1, 465-531 



-x, Nouns in, 3d decl., 130,131, 141 



-y, Nouns in, of Greek origin, 88 
Year, Date of, 935 

yes, 799 

-ys, Nouns in, 154 



STEIGER'S German Series. 



AHN'S German Primer. Edited by W. 

Gratjert. Boards $0.45. 
AHN'S German Reading Charts. 25 

Plates with Hand-book for Teachers. By 
Dr. P. Henn. $1.00. 

The same. The 25 Plates mounted on 13 
boards. $4.50 net. Varnished $6.00 net. 

AHX'S German Script darts. 4 Plates 
mounted on 4 boards, varnished $1.2onet. 

AHV'S First German Book. By Dr. P 
Henn. (Exercisss in Beading, Writing, 
Translation, and Conversation. Printed 
in bold tvpe and containing a very large 
amount of German Script. Designed for 
the lowest two grades.) Boards $0.25. 

AHN'S Second German Book. By Dr. 
P. Henn. (Exercises in Reading, Writing, 
Translation, and Conversation. Contain- 
ing much German Script. With Dialogues, 
Paradigms, Vocabularies [with the pro- 
nunciation of all German words], Conver- 
sational Exercises, Uncommon Styles of 
German Type, and Specimens of German 
Business Handwriting.) Boards $0.45, Half 
Roan $0.60. 
These two books together form : 

AHN'S Rudiments of the German Lan- 

guage. Bv. Dr. P. Henn. First Course, 
oards $0.65, Half Roan $0.H0. 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net. 

AHX'S Tliird German Booh. By Dr. 
P. Henn. Boards $0.45, Half Roan $0.60. 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net. 

AHN'S Fourth German Book. By Dr. 
P. Henn. Boards $0.60, Half Roan $0.80. 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net. 

AHN'S Rudiments of the Gertnan Lan- 
guage, By Dr. P. Henn. Second Course. 
(This contains Ahn-Henn"s Tliird and 
Fourth GermanBooks together.) Boards 
$1.00, Half Roan $1.25. 

AHN'S Complete Method of the German 
Language. By Dr. P. Henn. (Ahn- 
Henn's First, Second, Third, and 
Fourth German Books together.) 
Strongly bound in Half Roan $1.75. 

AHN'S Synopsis of German Grammar. 
By Dr. P. Henn. Boards $0.60. Half 
Roan $0.80. 

AHN'S First German Reader. With 
Notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn. 
Boards $0.60, Half Roan $0.80. 

The same. With Foot-notes and Vocabula- 
ry. Boards $0.60, Half Roan $0.80. 

*Key to same. Boards $0.30 net. 

AHN'S Second German Reader. With 
Notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn. 
Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1,20. 

The same. With Foot-notes and Vocabu- 
lary. Boards $1.00, Ralf Roan $1.20. 

- Key to same. Boards $0 50 net, 



AHN'S German Dialogues. Dramatic 
Selections. Number One. Boards $0.25, 
Cloth $0.35. 

AHN'S Rudiments of the German 
Language. (Old Edition of 1870.) Boards 
$0.35. 

AHN'S Method of Learning the Ger- 
man Language. Revised by Gtjstavus 
Fischer. First Course.Boards $0.50.— Sec- 
ond Course, Boards $0.50. —Both Courses 
bound together, Half Roan $1.00. 

Key to same. Boards $0.30 net. 

A HN'S New Practical and Easy Method 
of Learning the German Language. 
With Pronunciation by J. C. Oehlschl.e- 
ger. Edition of 1873. First Course. (Prac- 
tical Part.; Boards $0.60.— Second Course. 
(Theoretical Part.) Boards $0.40. 

AHN'S First German Reader. With 
Notes by W. Gratjert. Boards $0.50. — 
Second German Reader. With Notes 
and Vocabulary by W. Gratjert. Boards 
$0. 70.— The two Readers bound together, 
Half Roan $1.20. 

Key to AHN- GRATJERT' S First Ger- 
man Reader. Boards $0.30 net. — to 
Second German Reader, Boards $0.35 
net. 

AHN'S German Handwriting. With 
Notes by W. Gratjert. Boards $0.40. 

AHN'S Manual of German Conversa- 
tion. Revised by W. Gratjert. Cloth $1.00. 

AHN- CEHLS CHLMGER'S Pronoun- 
cing Method of theGerman Language. 
Designed for Instruction in Schools, and 
for Private Study. (Edition of 1880.) First 
Course : Exercises, Reader, Pronouncing Vo- 
cabularies, Conversations, Collections of 
Words, etc. Boards $0.80, Half Roan $1.00. 

— Second Course : Synopsis of German 
Grammar. Boards $0.40, Half Roan $0.60. 
—Both Courses bound together, Boards 
$1.15, Half Roan $1.40. 

Key to same. Boards $0.40 net. 
GRATJERT' S Manual of the German 
Language. First Part, Boards $0.40. 

— Second Part, Boards $0.40. — Both to- 
gether, Boards $C70, Half Roan $0.90. 

RFFFELT'S First Book for School and 
House. With Vocabulary. Boards $0.30. 

REFFELT'S Second Book for School 
and House. With Vocabulary. Bds. $0.50. 



Collegiate Course. 



for 



SCHLEGEL'S German Grammar 

Beginners. Half Roan $1.25. 
SCHLEGEL'S First Classical German 
Reader. With Notes and Vocabulary. 
Half Roan $1.00. — Second Classical 
German Reader. With Notes and Vo- 
cabulary. Half Roan $1.50. 
[* These Keys will be supplied to teachers only upon their direct application 
to the publishers ] — . — 

E. Steiger & Co., 25 Park Place, New York* 



German in the Public Schools. 

The Ahn-Henn German Course with its alternating 1 exercises 

for translation meets the expectations of the friends of German in- 
struction, while at the same time it answers the objections of all opponents. 
The Ahn-Henn books combine all the qualities needed to 
make the study of German easy and popular, and for this reason 
the series has been adopted for use in the Public Schools of very many of 
our leading cities. No other method enables School-Boar ds to retain the 
study of German without an accompanying increase of expense and no 
Other method can present so many acceptable arguments in favor of 
the continued study of the language in the Public Schools, 

I prefer Ahn's method, because it introduces the learner to language before it 
discourages him with the complicated difficulties of technical grammar. This 
method has reason and nature on its side, and is growing in favor among progress- 
ive educators. In 's books, this method seems to be reversed, and the young 

learner is precipitated at once into the intricacies of grammar. The exercises in 
the Ahn books seem to me to be far more practical and satisfactory than those 
given by . 

The exercises in Ahn's books in letter -writing, business forms, advertisements, 
German script, etc., are very valuable. These matters are almost entirely omitted 

in 's books. For these and other reasons I decidedly prefer the Ahn series. 

(J. M. B. Sill, Supt. of Schools, Detroit, Mich.) 

We have been using the Ahn-Hsnn German series for some three years. Our 
children are doing excellent work in the language by the use of this series. 

(W. W. Jamieson, Supt. of Schools, Keokuk, Iowa.) 

It gives me great pleasure to certify to the uniform excellence of Ahn-Henn's 
French and German text-books after a use of them since their first publication. 
I recommend them unhesitatingly as the best books for class use. 

(J. C. Jones, Supt. of Schools, East Saginaw, Mich.) 

We, last year, began the introduction of your German series — the Ahn-Henn 
method — and we are so pleased with it that we shall, as fast as we can work out 
the old books, substitute this. Thus far the series has given eminent satisfaction. 

(Chas. C. Snyder, Supt. of Schools, Freeport, HI.) 

We use your Ahn-Henn series of German Books. I consider it the best course 
for our Public Schools. (Thos. W. Hubbard, Supt. of Schools, Perrysbnrg, 0.) 

I desire to tell you of my own free will that I have used the Ahn-Henn German 
Course over two years and that I consider it without a rival as a text-book for 
common schools. (Wm. McK. Blake, Supt. of Schools, New Castle, Ind.) 

We are using very successfully Ahn-Henn's German Method, which we prefer 
to any other work we have seen. 

(W. W. Sharpe, Prin. Orwell Normal Institute, Orwell, 0.) 

We have concluded to use Ahn's German Series in the Mansfield Normal 
College. The books are prepared on a rational basis, and merit a general intro- 
duction. (J. Fratse Richard, President Mansfield Normal College. Mansfield, 0.) 

Many similar testimonials have been sent to the Publishers. More 
significant, however, is the fact that after several years' trial the Ahn-Henn 
German Text - books are being used in constantly increasing' 
quantities in the Public Schools of New York, Hoboken, Buffalo, 
Cleveland, Sandusky, Detroit, San Francisco, Bochester, Hartford, Dubuque, 
Louisville, Galena, Davenport, Kansas City, La Crosse, Elmira, Pittsburg, 
Elizabeth, Newark, Wheeling, Worcester, Indianapolis, as also in thos© of 
hundreds of smaller cities, other 1t>Q0"kS being discarded entirely. 

m 



^ ' B 4 



-{z ^ 



<\ x 








*5 -U h° °- 




W 



^ 



.*\^ 



i°°- 







^ 






,# 



,%* *Wa.\ ^. .A" 



\°°X> 



^ 

V 









•^. ,^ x 



>.^- 














^ 












* \ 




y* 




























s 




" « 








"oo^ 










^ 


V* 


H 


-r> 










Q 






% » , s o ■> 



UBRARV OF 



CONGRESS 




003 039 945 6 




i II I 

m 




Ml 

I 
1 



